FOREWORD

 

     This monograph on the 1980 Census of Guam is a result of many professional contributions.  This activity has helped prepare for the 1990 Census of Guam.  This monograph attempts to directly interpret 1980 data and to consider the information for the planning process.  The monograph is presented by chapters to contain relevant, useful tables.

 

     The Interagency Committee on Population and others have prepared the monograph.  Supplementary material has been added to aid research projects, grant applications, and other applications for both government and private sectors.

 

     In summary, the report identifies what type of census information is available to aid in planning for what our population composition will be like by 1990 and into the future.  The presentation of the individual chapters should be helpful to the users of such data.

 

     The following individuals were associated with the various chapters:

 

Michael J. Levin      Bureau of the Census     Introduction, Age and Sex

                                               Distribution, Fertility

Susan Ham             Bureau of Planning       Geographic Distribution,

                                               Housing Characteristics,

                                               Labor Force

Cynthia L. Naval      Department of Commerce   Household and Family

                                               Characteristics, Fertility,

                                               Housing Characteristics

Joseph P. Borja       Department of Public

                      Health and Social

                      Services                 Marital Status, Mortality

Joseph E. Quinata     Department of Commerce   Migration

Joseph T. Flores      Department of Commerce   Ethnicity, Estimates and

                                               Projections

Manuel F.L. Guerrero  Department of Education  Education

Alan T.K. Wang        Department of Labor      Labor Force

Yung Brian Suh        Department of Commerce   Industry, Occupation

                                               and Class of Worker

Peter R. Barcinas     Department of Commerce   Income

 

     The Office of Territorial and International Affairs, Department of Interior, provided funding for Joseph Flores, Department of Commerce, and Susan Ham, Bureau of Planning, to spend two months in Washington at the Census Bureau in 1986 to begin the interpretation and analysis of the 1980 census data; OTIA also paid for Michael Levin's transportation and per diem on Guam in 1987.  Population Division, Bureau of the Census, provided Michael Levin's salary, both in Washington and in Guam.  The various agencies and departments in the Government of Guam provided individuals as needed to finish the chapters.  The Pacific Star Hotel provided work space for Michael Levin at reduced cost when it was badly needed.

 

     We wish to extend our sincere appreciation to all who participated in this project.

 

Peter R. Barcinas

Michael J. Levin, Ph.D.

Cynthia L. Naval


   CHAPTER 1

INTRODUCTION AND GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION

 

     Guam, an unincorporated territory of the United States, is the largest, most populated, and Southern‑most island in the Marianas archipelago.  The island is 30 miles long and 8 miles wide, with a total land area of 209 square miles.  The island was formed through an uplift of undersea volcanic activity and is surrounded by coral reefs near the shore.  Guam is composed of two distinct geological areas of about equal size: the Northern part of the island is a high coraline limestone plateau rising up to 850 feet above sea level and contains the water lens which is the main source of fresh water on Guam; the Southern region is mountainous.  Apra Harbor, one of the largest protected harbors in the Pacific, is located on the central, western side of the island.

 

     Guam became a possession of the United States after the Spanish‑American War in 1898, and for the next 40 years remained almost unaffected by the changes occurring in the outside world.  Health measures instituted by the U.S. Naval government started a rapid population growth, and between 1898 and 1940 the island's population more than doubled, from 10,000 to more than 22,000.  Because of the occupation of Guam by Japanese armed forces during World War II, after the war more attention was paid to the territory.  In 1950, Guam became an unincorporated territory of the United States by the Organic Act.  Chamorro residents became United States citizens and the Government of Guam was set up with a Legislative Branch elected by Guamanians and an Executive Branch appointed by the President of the United States and directly responsible to the Department of Interior.  In 1970, Guam elected its own governor for the first time.   Guam is divided into 19 election districts.

 

SPANISH PERIOD

 

     Although Guam had been inhabited for more than 3,500 years, it was not officially "discovered" until Magellan came in 1521.  Spanish missionaries and administrators came and went over the next three hundred years.  Contact during the first two centuries was sporadic, although documented (see Underwood 1973 for recorded contacts).  No complete census was taken during this period.

 

     Following a long period of native unrest, Don Jose Quiroga arrived in 1680 on Guam and his men "attacked and destroyed native villages and founded 6 'church‑villages' of Pago, Inapsan, Inarajan, Merizo, Umatac, and Agat, and forced the natives to move into one of these centers" (Underwood, 1973, cites Fritz 1904; Corte 1897).  Also, Quiroga pursued the natives who fled to Rota after burning the church at Inarajan.  Some 150 fugitives were returned to Guam. (Corte 1870, Ibanez 1886).


 

     After 1694, when Quiroga became Governor, the inhabitants of all the Mariana Islands were moved to Guam or Saipan, except for a few natives who hid out on Rota to escape resettlement.  Natives of Tinian Island were finally defeated on Agrigan and moved to Saipan in 1695.  A final resettlement took place when Chamorros residing on Saipan were removed to Guam in 1698, leaving only Guam and Rota occupied at the beginning of the 18th century (Underwood, 1973:17, cites Safford, 1901, 1903; Corte, 1870, Fritz 1904).

 

     "On Guam, a native population in the throes of resettlement, having suffered a series of damaging typhoons in 1670 (Ibanez 1886), in 1671 (Corte 1870; Thompson 1946, 1947; Reed 1952) and in 1693 (Thompson 1945; Reed 1952), and engaging in a series of rebellions, would expectably be peculiarly susceptible to disease, whether of introduced or native origins.  That population decline began well before the date of the first Spanish census in 1710 seems evident, but the decrease had certainly not proceeded to the level of from 100 to 400 indicated by Dampier, after his visit in 1686, and recorded by Haswell (1917), Safford (1901), and Reed (1952)" (Underwood, 1973:18).

 

     The data in Tables 1.1 and 1.2 show the change in composition of the population on Guam and Rota combined from 1710, the first Spanish census, through 1830.  Rota could not be disaggregated from Guam in these tabulations; only a few hundred persons were living on Rota during this period.  Immigrants, particularly Filipinos, continued to come to the Mariana Islands throughout the period, but since the censuses seem to classify persons in different ways, the population flows cannot be traced very well.  The number of pure Chamorros decreased during the 1700s, and then started a very gradual increase during the early 1800s.  While the Native population declined steadily, reaching its lowest point in 1786, the "mestizo" population (the progeny of matings between natives and Spanish, Filipino, and other foreigners) grew during the period.

 

Table 1.1     Ethnic Distribution: 1710 to 1830

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                     Spanish/    Fili‑  Offcls/

     Date    Total  Natives    Mixed  Mestizo    pinos   Troops   Others

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

     1830   6,490    2,652    1,007        5    2,612       70      143

     1829   6,480    2,697    1,006        5    2,557       79      136

     1828   6,448    2,792      970        2    2,466       78      140

     1825   5,901    2,683    3,218        0        0        0        0

     1816   5,389    2,559        0    1,109    1,484      147       90

     1802   4,149    2,151        0      676    1,156      139       27

     1801   4,244    2,142        0      657    1,274      140       31

     1800   4,060    2,108        0      542    1,234      139       37

     1799   4,001    2,074        0      591    1,164      142       30

     1795   3,500    1,894        0      537      898      147       24

     1793   3,584    1,766        0      961      710      147        0

     1710   3,614    3,143        0      471        0        0        0

_______________________________________________________________________

Notes:  Mestizos excluded from Spanish category 1828 to 1830; for 1828

        to 1830 census reports, "other" includes English, French,

        Mulattos, Malayans, and Pacific Islanders.

Source: Karolle 1978:46‑47 (Karolle cites Underwood 1976: 206, Carano

        1964: 199, 323‑324, Statistical Abstract: Guam 1975: 2.

 

     The percent native also fluctuated quite a bit during the period, again, attributable to the classification systems used in the various censuses (Table 1.2).  The proportion of Filipinos in the population increased between 1710 and 1801, then remained at about 30 percent for several years.  These Filipinos were mainly workers brought from the Philippines to serve the Spanish.

 

Table 1.2    Percent Ethnic Distribution: 1710 to 1830

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                     Spanish/    Fili‑  Offcls/

     Date    Total  Natives    Mixed  Mestizo    pinos   Troops   Others

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

     1830    100.0     40.9     15.5       .1     40.2      1.1      2.2

     1829    100.0     41.6     15.5       .1     39.5      1.2      2.1

     1828    100.0     43.3     15.0       .0     38.2      1.2      2.2

     1825    100.0     45.5     54.5      0.0      0.0      0.0      0.0

     1816    100.0     47.5      0.0     20.6     27.5      2.7      1.7

     1802    100.0     51.8      0.0     16.3     27.9      3.4       .7

     1801    100.0     50.5      0.0     15.5     30.0      3.3       .7

     1800    100.0     51.9      0.0     13.3     30.4      3.4       .9

     1799    100.0     51.8      0.0     14.8     29.1      3.5       .8

     1797    100.0     37.2      0.0     20.4      0.0      4.8     37.6

     1795    100.0     54.1      0.0     15.3     25.7      4.2       .7

     1793    100.0     49.3      0.0     26.8     19.8      4.1      0.0

     1710    100.0     87.0      0.0     13.0      0.0      0.0      0.0

________________________________________________________________________

Notes:  See Notes to Table 1.1

Source: Karolle 1978:46‑47 (Karolle cites Underwood 1976: 206, Carano

        1964: 199, 323‑324, Statistical Abstract: Guam 1975: 2.

 

     Between 1800 and about 1856, the population nearly tripled, reaching more than 8,000 before a devastating smallpox epidemic in 1856 reduced the number by about half (Table 1.3).  For the rest of the century the population gradually recovered, although a large part of this latter increase was due to migration of Carolinians, brought as a part of a Spanish policy of repopulating the Marianas.  Also, a number of people migrated from the Philippines.

 

     The rate of natural growth must have been very high, because epidemics continued, and yet the population increased.  Safford (1901) has noted that an epidemic killed 194 persons on Guam in January, 1849.  An epidemic of whooping cough reportedly resulted in the deaths of at least 200 children in 1855 (Fritz 1904).  And two epidemics swept through the survivors of the smallpox epidemic in 1856 ‑ a measles epidemic in which at least 50 died in 1861, while another epidemic of whooping cough caused the deaths of 100 children in Agana, alone, in 1898 (Fritz 1904 from Underwood, 1973:23).

 

     "Prior to the time of the decimating smallpox epidemic in 1856, immigration to the Mariana Islands had been minimal, especially in contrast to the rate of population movement into the area which took place after that date.  A small Carolinian colony was established on Guam in 1816... This nucleus of Carolinian settlement was augmented somewhat following the great earthquake and tidal wave which apparently hit many Carolinian islands, as well as Guam, in 1849, leading survivors of the calamity to flee their ravaged atoll homes and seek refuge elsewhere in Micronesia...the Mariana Islands were not used extensively as a penal colony prior to the 1870s" (Underwood 1973:23).

 

Table 1.3   Population by Village and Region: 1831 to 1897

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Village                      1897  1891  1886  1872  1871  1849  1832  1831

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

     Guam...................8,698 8,369 8,144 6,248 6,276 7,940 6,310 6,049

North.......................6,324 6,153 5,949 4,972 5,251 6,452 5,065 4,831

  Agana.....................5,198  (NA) 4,959  (NA)  (NA) 5,620 4,362 4,137

  Other North...............1,126  (NA)   990  (NA)  (NA)   832   703   694

    Anigua..................  (NA) (NA)   169  (NA)  (NA)   217   246   234

    Asan....................  (NA) (NA)   252  (NA)  (NA)   190   155   158

    Tepungan................  (NA) (NA)   234  (NA)  (NA)    73    57    56

    Sinajana................  (NA) (NA)   142  (NA)  (NA)   250   177   172

    Maria Cristina..........  (NA) (NA)   193  (NA)  (NA)   (NA)  (NA) (NA)

    Mongmong................  (NA) (NA)  (NA)  (NA)  (NA)   102    68    74

South.......................2,374 2,243 2,195 1,276 1,025 1,488 1,245 1,218

  Agat‑Sumay................1,325 1,151 1,141   641   553   287   218   222

  Umatac‑Merizo.............  788   679   664   379   316   582   539   501

    Umatac.................. (NA)  (NA)   225  (NA)   127   224   220   206

    Merizo.................. (NA)  (NA)   439  (NA)   189   358   319   295

  Inarajan..................  261   413   390   256   156   346   244   246

  Pago...................... (NA)  (NA)  (NA)  (NA)  (NA)   273   244   249

__________ ________________________________________________________________

Source: Underwood 1973:27; 1831 and 1832 from Safford (1901); 1849 from Cox

        (1917); 1871 from Corte (1875); 1872 from Ibanez (1886); 1886 from

        Noticias (1886); 1891 from Resumen (1891), 1897 Census.

 

     The number and the variety of the immigrants increased after 1856. As many as 63 Chinese laborers arrived from Manila aboard the Spanish vessel Denia in 1858  (Safford 1901); and an additional 39 Chinese may have arrived during the 1860s (Fritz 1904).  About 35 Japanese agricultural laborers arrived in the Mariana Islands in 1867.

 

     Between 1865 and 1869, over 1,000 Carolinians came to the Mariana Islands, in part to develop the copra industry in the area.  An earlier complement of some 600 Carolinians were brought to Guam on labor contracts about 1861 (Beers, 1954), and by 1868, when an additional 95 Carolinians were brought to Guam, a total of 430 Carolinians were listed as resident in the community around what is now Tamuning (Ibanez 1886).

 

     Table 1.3 and 1.4 show village distributions during the 1800s.  Since the various sources did not collect data in comparable manners, Underwood (1973) made broad categories which are repeated here.

 

     The population of Guam increased until the 1856 epidemic, and then decreased suddenly.  There were also shifts between the North and the South, with increased percentages living in the North until 1871, and then a drifting away from the North to the Southern villages.  Immigration could explain some of these differences, of course, particularly the movements of the large numbers of Carolinians.  The Agana area continued to have the majority of the population throughout the period.

 

Table 1.4.  Percent Population by Village and Region: 1831 to 1897

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Village                      1897  1891  1886  1872  1871  1849  1832  1831

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

     Guam.................. 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

North......................  72.7  73.3  73.0  79.6  83.7  81.3  80.3  79.9

  Agana....................  59.8    NA  60.9    NA    NA  70.8  69.1  68.4

  Other North..............  12.9    NA  12.2    NA    NA  10.5  11.1  11.5

    Anigua.................    NA    NA   2.1    NA    NA   2.7   3.9   3.9

    Asan...................    NA    NA   3.1    NA    NA   2.4   2.5   2.6

    Tepungan...............    NA    NA   2.9    NA    NA    .9    .9    .9

    Sinajana...............    NA    NA   1.7    NA    NA   3.1   2.8   2.8

    Maria Cristina.........    NA    NA   2.4    NA    NA    NA    NA    NA

    Mongmong...............   1.2   1.1   1.3    NA    NA   1.3   1.1   1.2

South......................  27.3  26.7  27.0  20.4  16.3  18.7  19.7  20.1

  Agat‑Sumay...............  15.2  13.7  14.0  10.3   8.8   3.6   3.5   3.7

  Umatac‑Merizo............   9.1   8.1   8.2   6.1   5.0   7.3   8.5   8.3

    Umatac.................    NA    NA   2.8    NA   2.0   2.8   3.5   3.4

    Merizo.................    NA    NA   5.4    NA   3.0   4.5   5.1   4.9

  Inarajan.................   3.0   4.9   4.8   4.1   3.9   4.4   3.9   4.1

  Pago.....................    NA    NA    NA    NA    NA   3.4   3.9   4.1

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: Underwood 1973: 27; 1831 and 1832 from Safford (1901); 1849 from

        Cox (1917); 1871 from Corte (1875); 1872 from Ibanez (1886);

        1886 from Noticias (1886); 1891 from Resumen (1891), 1897 Census

 

     The first full census which was tabulated by age and sex as well as some other characteristics was taken in 1897 (Table 1.5 and Figure 1.1).  The results of the census show a slight surplus of females, and a generally youthful population; the median age for Chamorros on Guam was 21.0 years, with 19.9 for males and 21.9 for females.  In her work, Underwood (1987) compared the census results with other data she collected, and adjusted the 1897 census counts to make them more accurate.  Her adjusted census distributions are also shown in Table 1.5.

 

Table 1.5.  Population by Age and Sex: 1897

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                    Spanish Census         Adjusted by Use of Vital Records

         ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Age Group      Total      Males    Females      Total      Males    Females

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

  Total..      8,698      4,137      4,561      9,353      4,409      4,944

    Perc.      100.0      100.0      100.0      100.0      100.0      100.0

  0 to  4       14.8       15.6       14.0       15.2       15.9       14.5

  5 to  9       12.8       14.2       11.5       12.8       14.1       11.6

 10 to 14       10.3       10.6       10.0       10.3       10.6       10.1

 15 to 19       10.0        9.8       10.1        9.8        9.6       10.1

 20 to 24       10.8       10.3       11.2       10.8       10.5       11.0

 25 to 29        9.6        9.2       10.0        9.6        9.3        9.9

 30 to 34        7.6        7.4        7.8        7.5        7.3        7.6

 35 to 39        4.9        5.2        4.6        5.0        4.9        5.0

 40 to 44        3.4        3.2        3.5        3.4        3.2        3.5

 45 to 49        3.6        3.0        4.0        3.7        3.1        4.1

 50 to 54        3.6        2.9        4.3        3.6        3.1        4.1

 55 to 59        3.0        2.5        3.4        3.0        2.7        3.3

 60 to 64        2.8        2.8        2.7        2.7        2.6        2.7

 65 to 69        1.6        1.7        1.4        1.6        1.8        1.4

 70 to 74         .8         .9         .8         .9        1.0         .8

 75 +             .4         .5         .4         .4         .4         .4

Unknown           .1         .1         .1        ...        ...        ...

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: Underwood, 1987: 14‑15

 

 

 

 

Figure 1.1 Age and Sex Distribution: 1897

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 


     The census results for 1897 by village show that the South was more youthful than the North (Table 1.6).  The median ages of the Southern villages were anywhere from 1 to 2 years lower than those for the Northern villages: 18.6 for Merizo, 19.1 for Agat, and 19.9 for Inarajan, compared to 21.7 for Agana and 21.9 for Agana‑Adjacent.

 

Table 1.6. Population of Villages by Age: 1897

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Age Group      Total      Agana  Agana‑Adj       Agat     Merizo   Inarajan

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

   Total.      8,698      5,198      1,126      1,325        788        261

    Perc.      100.0      100.0      100.0      100.0      100.0      100.0

  0 to  4       14.8       13.7       13.5       17.4       18.3       18.4

  5 to  9       12.8       12.7       11.9       14.5       11.2       13.8

 10 to 14       10.3       10.0       10.9       10.3       11.8        8.8

 15 to 19       10.0        9.9        9.6        9.4       11.9        9.2

 20 to 24       10.8       10.8       10.9        9.8       12.1       11.1

 25 to 29        9.6        9.0       10.1       11.4        9.5       10.3

 30 to 34        7.6        7.8        7.5        7.8        6.5        6.5

 35 to 39        4.9        5.0        5.3        4.5        4.6        4.2

 40 to 44        3.4        3.8        3.1        2.5        2.8        3.1

 45 to 49        3.6        4.0        4.3        2.4        1.3        3.8

 50 to 54        3.6        3.9        5.0        2.8        2.4        1.5

 55 to 59        3.0        3.2        2.0        2.7        2.7        5.0

 60 to 64        2.8        2.9        2.8        2.0        3.8        1.1

 65 to 69        1.6        1.6        2.2        1.3         .8         .8

 70 to 74         .8        1.1         .4         .8         .3         .4

 75 +             .4         .5         .4         .4         .1         .8

Unknown           .1         .1         .1        0.0         .1        1.1

Median          21.0       21.7       21.9       19.1       18.6       19.9

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: Underwood, 1973: 28

 

     There were 91 males for every 100 females on Guam in 1897 (Table 1.7).  Except for the youngest ages, and the 35 to 39 years olds, there tended to be more females than males at each of the age groups.  The other important exception occurred for persons 65 years and over in which the males predominated, especially in the village of Merizo; it is unclear whether this is a case of age‑misreporting or real.

 

Table 1.7. Males per 100 Females by Age: 1897

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Age Group      Total      Agana  Agana‑Adj       Agat     Merizo   Inarajan

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

   Total        90.7       91.6       85.8       90.9       89.9       96.2

  0 to  4      100.8      108.8      108.2       90.9       80.0       84.6

  5 to  9      111.6      111.9      112.7      111.0      109.5      111.8

 10 to 14       95.9      108.0       61.8       78.9      111.4      109.1

 15 to 19       87.9       91.4       96.4       89.4       56.7      118.2

 20 to 24       83.2       75.3       86.4       97.0      115.9       81.2

 25 to 29       84.0       78.0       90.0      101.3       70.5      125.0

 30 to 34       86.5       86.2       73.5       63.5      168.4      183.3

 35 to 39      100.9      103.1      114.3       96.7       80.0       83.3

 40 to 44       84.3       97.0       59.1       57.1      100.0       33.3

 45 to 49       68.9       63.3       65.5      113.3      100.0       66.7

 50 to 54       60.1       64.8       51.4       42.3       90.0       33.3

 55 to 59       67.7       63.7       64.3      100.0       61.5       62.5

 60 to 64       94.4      105.5       93.8       92.9       50.0      200.0

 65 to 69      104.5      107.3       66.7      112.5      500.0      100.0

 70 to 74      108.6       96.4      100.0      266.7      100.0        0.0

 75 +          116.7       80.0      300.0      400.0        ...      100.0

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: Underwood, 1973: 28

 

AMERICAN PERIOD

 

     At the end of the Spanish‑American War, Guam became a territory of the United States.  Censuses were taken by the Naval governor in 1901 and 1910.  Guam was not included in the decennial census until 1920.

 

     In working with her reconstructed data set, Underwood produced an estimated census for 1918, just prior to the flu epidemic which killed many people on Guam (Table 1.8 and Figure 1.2).  By 1918, according to her figures, there were still more females than males, but the population had grown considerably, partly because of increased medical attention provided by the U.S. Naval Administration.  The population remained youthful, with the median age for the total being 18.5 years: 17.4 years for males and 19.4 years for females.

 

Table 1.8. Estimated Population by Age and Sex: 1918

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                              Numbers                    Percent

                     ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Age Group                Total    Males  Females    Total    Males  Females

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

     Total...........  15,000    7,134    7,866     100.0    100.0    100.0

Under 5 years........   2,216    1,112    1,104      14.8     15.6     14.0

5 to 9 years.........   1,915    1,010      905      12.8     14.2     11.5

10 to 14 years.......   1,547      757      790      10.3     10.6     10.0

15 to 19 years.......   1,494      699      795      10.0      9.8     10.1

20 to 24 years.......   1,618      735      883      10.8     10.3     11.2

25 to 29 years.......   1,444      659      785       9.6      9.2     10.0

30 to 34 years.......   1,141      529      612       7.6      7.4      7.8

35 to 39 years.......     735      369      366       4.9      5.2      4.7

40 to 44 years.......     506      231      275       3.4      3.2      3.5

45 to 49 years.......     533      218      315       3.6      3.1      4.0

50 to 54 years.......     546      205      341       3.6      2.9      4.3

55 to 59 years.......     448      181      267       3.0      2.5      3.4

60 to 64 years.......     416      202      214       2.8      2.8      2.7

65 to 69 years.......     233      119      114       1.6      1.7      1.4

70 to 74 years.......     127       66       61        .8       .9       .8

75 years and over....      67       36       31        .4       .5       .4

Unknown..............      14        6        8        .1       .1       .1

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: Underwood 1983: 3

 

 

 

 

Figure 1.2 Age and Sex Distribution: 1918

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 


     The population increased from under 10,000 when the U.S. Naval Administration began, to almost 15,000 in 1920.  Guam has been included in each of the succeeding decennial censuses after 1920, although with a different questionnaire from that used Stateside, and with different processing.

 

     The percentage of natives (meaning Chamorro) decreased from almost 100 percent to 91 percent in 1930, partly because of the varying numbers of naval personnel on island.  There were very few other immigrants (unless these were included in the "native" totals).  As we will see in later chapters, the proportions changed drastically after World War II when Guam suddenly became strategically important.

 

Table 1.9.  Population by Ethnicity: 1901 to 1940

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Ethnicity             1940  1935   1930   1925   1920   1915   1910    1901

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

     Total......... 23,067 20,899 19,139 16,648 14,724 13,689 11,953  9,676

       Percent.....  100.0  100.0  100.0  100.0  100.0  100.0  100.0  100.0

Natives............   93.2   93.1   91.1   91.6   93.0   94.7   97.2   99.5

Non‑natives........    6.8    6.9    8.9    8.4    7.0    5.3    2.8    0.5

  Naval personnel..    3.4    3.3    5.0    5.2    3.2   (NA)    1.0    0.0

  Others...........    3.4    3.6    3.9    3.3    3.7   (NA)    1.8    0.5

___________________________________________________________________________

Source:  Thompson 1941:32; Thompson cites Annual Reports of the Governor

         of Guam.

 

THE DECENNIAL CENSUSES ‑ 1920 TO 1970

 

     Beginning in 1920, Guam was included in the population part of the Decennial Census and in 1960 for the Housing census.  In the later chapters we will include comparable data from those censuses whenever appropriate in an effort to show population and housing trends over time.

 

THE 1980 DECENNIAL CENSUS OF POPULATION AND HOUSING

 

     The 1980 decennial census was conducted in conjunction with the 1980 census of the United States.  The questionnaire was developed at the Census Bureau but was reviewed by participants from the Pacific Islands areas in May, 1979, at a Pacific‑areas conference in Honolulu.

 

     The questionnaire was similar to that used in the States, and was modified to account for different conditions on Guam.  Unlike in the States, all housing data was collected for all housing units, and all persons responded to all questions.  Also, the census was collected through direct interview.  Enumerators visited and listed every housing unit, asking the questions as worded in the questionnaire (or translating into the native language, if necessary), and recording the answers.  A single questionnaire was used, which contained all the questions asked of every person and household.

 

     Special questionnaires were used for the enumeration of persons in group quarters such as the hospital, the prison, dormitories at the University of Guam, etc.  These forms contained the same population questions that appeared on the regular questionnaire but did not include any housing questions.

 

     Responses were determined by the questionnaire and the instructions given to the enumerator; these instructions had been adapted from instructions used Stateside, but were modified to account for the differences on Guam from those found in the States.  The definitions and explanations for each subject are included in the discussions of these subjects in the later chapters of this monograph, and are drawn largely from various technical materials and procedures used in the data collection.

 

     Facsimiles of the questionnaire pages containing the population and housing questions used to produce this report are presented in Appendix A.

 

GENERAL ENUMERATION PROCEDURES

 

     Usual Place of Residence.  In accordance with census practice, each person enumerated in the 1980 census was counted as an inhabitant of his or her "usual place of residence", which was generally construed to mean the place where the person lived and slept most of the time.  This place was not necessarily the same as the person's legal residence or voting residence.  In the vast majority of cases, however, the use of these different bases of classification would produce substantially the same statistics, although there might be appreciable differences for a few areas.

 

     The implementation of this practice resulted in the establishment of residence rules for certain categories of persons whose usual place of residence was not immediately apparent.  Therefore, persons were not always counted as residents of the place where they happened to be staying on Census Day.  Persons without a usual place of residence, or persons with no one at their usual place of residence to report them to a census taker, however, were counted where they happened to be staying.

 

     U.S. Armed Forces.  Members of the United States Armed Forces living on a military installation were counted, as in previous censuses, as residents of the area in which the installation was located; members of the U.S. Armed Forces not living on a military installation were counted as residents of the areas in which they were living.  Persons in families with U.S. Armed Forces personnel were counted where they were living on Census Day (i.e., the military installation or "off base", as the case might be).

 

     Each U.S. Navy ship was attributed to the geographic area that the Department of the Navy designated as its homeport.

 

     Crews of Merchant Vessels were enumerated at the port where they were berthed (if they were berthed), excluding those not flying a U.S. flag.

 

     Persons away at school, if college students, were counted as residents of the area in which they were living while attending college.  However, children in boarding schools below the college level were counted at their parental home.

 

     Persons at institutions were counted as residents of the area where the institution was located.  Patients in short‑term wards of general hospitals were counted at their usual place of residence; if they had no usual place of residence or there was no one at their usual place of residence to report them, they were counted at the hospital.

 

     Persons away from their residence on Census Day at hotels, motels, etc., on the night of March 31, 1980, having their usual home on Guam and who indicated that no one was at home to report them in the census would be enumerated as residents of the hotel, motel, etc.  Information on persons away from their usual place of residence who indicated that someone was at home to report them was obtained from other members of their families, resident managers, neighbors, etc.  If an entire household was away during the whole period of the enumeration, information on that household was obtained from neighbors.

 

     Residents Abroad.  Residents who were abroad for an extended period (in the U.S. Armed Forces, working at civilian jobs, studying at universities outside Guam, etc.) were not included in the population of Guam.  On the other hand, residents who were temporarily abroad on vacations, business trips, and the like, were counted at their usual residence on Guam.

 

     Persons from Other Areas having their usual residence (legally or illegally) on Guam on Census Day, including those working here and those attending school (but not living at a chancellery or consulate), were included in the enumeration, as were members of their families with them, regardless of citizenship.  However, persons from other areas, temporarily visiting or traveling on Guam, were not enumerated in the 1980 census.

 

DATA COLLECTION PROCEDURES

 

     The 1980 Census of Guam was conducted through direct interview.  Beginning on Census Day, April 1, 1980, enumerators visited and listed every household asking the questions as worded on the questionnaire, and recording the answers.  A single questionnaire was used, which contained all the questions asked of every person and household.

 

     Special questionnaires were used for the enumeration of persons in group quarters such as colleges and universities, hospitals, and prisons.  These forms contained the same population questions that appeared on the regular questionnaire but did not include any housing questions.

 

PROCESSING PROCEDURES

 

     The 1980 census questionnaires were processed in a manner similar to that for the 1970 census.  They were designed to be processed electronically by the Film Optical Sensing Device for Input into Computer (FOSDIC).  For most items on the questionnaire, the information obtained by the enumerator was recorded by marking the answers in the predesignated positions that would be "read" by FOSDIC from a microfilm copy of the questionnaire and transferred onto computer tape with no intervening manual processing.  The computer tape excluded information on individual names and addresses.

 

     The tape containing the information from the questionnaires was processed on the Census Bureau's computers through a number of editing and tabulating steps.  Among the products of this operation were computer tapes from which the tables in the reports were prepared on phototypesetting equipment at the Government Printing Office.


 

SOURCES OF ERROR

 

     Since the 1980 population and housing data for Guam were tabulated from entries for all persons and housing units on all questionnaires, these data were not subject to sampling error.  In any large‑scale statistical operation such as a decennial census, however, human and mechanical errors occur.  These errors are commonly referred to as nonsampling errors.  Such errors include failure to enumerate every housing unit or person in the population, not obtaining all required information from respondents, obtaining incorrect or inconsistent information, and recording information incorrectly.  Errors can also occur during the field review of the enumerator's work, the clerical handling of the census questionnaires, or the electronic processing of the questionnaires.  Quality control and review measures were used throughout the data collection and processing phases of the 1980 census to minimize undercoverage of the population and housing units and to keep errors at a minimum.

 

EDITING OF UNACCEPTABLE DATA

 

     The objective of the processing operation was to produce a set of statistics that described the population and housing as accurately and clearly as possible.

 

     In the field, questionnaires were reviewed for omissions and certain inconsistencies by a census clerk or an enumerator and, if necessary, a followup was made to obtain missing information.  In addition, a similar review of questionnaires was done in the central processing office.  As a rule, however, editing was performed by hand only when it could not be done effectively by machine.

 

     There are two means by which incomplete or inconsistent data on the questionnaires were corrected during the editing process: allocation and substitution.  Allocations or assignments of acceptable codes in place of unacceptable entries, were needed most often when there was no entry for a given item or when the information reported for a person on that item was inconsistent with other information for the person.  As in previous censuses, the general procedure for changing unacceptable entries was to assign an entry for a person that was consistent with entries for other persons with similar characteristics.  The assignment of acceptable codes in place of blanks or unacceptable entries enhanced the usefulness of the data.  The allocation technique for unknown age illustrates the process:

 

1.  The computer stored ages of persons by selected characteristics, including sex, relationship, marital status, and characteristics of other household members.

 

2.  Each stored age was retained in the computer only until a succeeding person having the same set of characteristics and having age reported was processed through the computer during the electronic edit operation.  Then the reported age entry of the succeeding person was stored in place of the one previously stored.

 

3.  When the age of the person was not reported, or the entry was unacceptable, the age assigned to this person was that which was stored for the last person who otherwise had the same set of characteristics.

 

     The 1980 census data on the economic questions such as industry, occupation, class of worker, work experience, and income were processed using an allocation system which assigned values to missing entries in these questions, as necessary, from a single respondent with similar socioeconomic characteristics.

 

     Three population and two housing reports were published after the 1980 census.  These were:

 

     PC80‑1‑A54     Number of Inhabitants

     PC80‑1‑B54     General Population Characteristics

     PC80‑1‑C/D54   Detailed Social and Economic Characteristics

     HC80‑1‑A54     General Housing Characteristics

     HC80‑1‑B54     Detailed Housing Characteristics

 

     In addition to the printed reports, results of the 1980 census also were provided on computer tape in the form of summary tape files (STFs).  These data products were designed to provide statistics with greater subject and geographic detail than was feasible or desirable to provide in printed reports.  The STF data were made available at nominal cost.  Because of likelihood of incompatible computer systems, the STF data were also provided on microfiche.  Recently, the data have also been provided on floppy diskettes which can be read on IBM‑PC compatible equipment.

 

     STF 1 provides population and housing data summarized for Guam as a whole, for election districts, for census designated places (villages), and for enumeration districts.  The data include those shown in PC80‑1‑A54, PC80‑1‑B54, and HC80‑1‑A54.  STF 3 contains data on various population and housing subjects such as education, employment, and income.  The areas covered are the same as STF 1.

 

 

GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION

 

     The geographic distribution of Guam's inhabitants has been transformed since pre‑contact times, when the Chamorro population lived in small hamlets located both along the coast and in the interior.  Early historical accounts relate that along the coast, these hamlets consisted of approximately 50 to 150 huts, while the interior hamlets were smaller, of from 6 to 20 huts (Carano and Sanchez, 1964).  By 1681, the Spanish‑Chamorro wars had resulted in the destruction of the smaller villages and the forced relocation of the native people into a few large villages, where the Spanish could control the population.

 

     The Spanish established the government in Agana because of its long history as the political and cultural center of Guam.  In order to facilitate the affairs of government outside Agana, Spanish authorities divided Guam into municipalities.  Each municipality consisted of several villages or pueblos and was under the charge of a native magistrate called a "gobernadorcillo" ("little governor").  This system of municipal government continued under the American authorities after 1898.  The gobernadorcillo was renamed as commissioner, and a deputy commissioner position was instituted to assist the commissioner.

 

     Municipalities thus became the primary divisions of Guam for census reporting.  By the 1920 Census, Guam had 8 separate municipalities, as shown in Figure 1.3.  These municipalities were Agana, Asan, Piti, Sumay, Yona, Agat, Inarajan and Merizo.  U.S. naval station personnel were not counted as residents of Guam, but were included in the continental United States.  The 1920 census report shows population data for each municipality and for rural sections outside of Agana City.

 

     The reporting of 1930 census data was similar to that of 1920 except that, in 1930, persons on naval reservations, including U.S. ships stationed on Guam, were counted as residents of Guam.  These results were not included in the population of any municipality, but were compiled separately.  A greater portion of this naval population should, according to the 1930 census report, have been assigned to the city of Agana, but the exact location of these reservations could not be determined from the information given by the enumerators on the census schedules.

 

     Substantial reorganization of the municipalities occurred in 1931 in preparation for Guam's first elected Congress and first elected commissioner system.  Executive Order 53 set forth the divisions of the old municipality of Agana into the municipalities of Agana, Barrigada, Dededo, and Yigo, and further subdivided the municipality of Barrigada into Barrigada and Sinajana districts, and Dededo into Dededo and Machanao districts. In addition, Merizo was subdivided into Merizo and Umatac districts, and Inarajan was subdivided into Inarajan and Talofofo districts.  Reorganization thus created 7 new municipalities and districts for a total of 15 (See Figure 1.4).

 

     The Second Guam Congress was the first elected Congress in the Territory, with the population counts of the 1930 census used for apportionment.

 

     The 1940 census presented total counts for all 15 municipalities and districts, as well as for over 100 towns, barrios and districts within the municipalities.  Military personnel were included within the municipality, district, or town where the military facility was located, and U.S. naval ships were listed separately as a portion of Sumay.  During World War II, most of the towns and cities (including Agana city) were totally destroyed or severely damaged.  In the reconstruction process, many of the communities were relocated and the division of municipalities into barrios was abandoned.  There was also some reorganization of the municipalities of Agana and Sinajana in 1947, as part of Agana was annexed to Sinajana (Figure 1.5).

 

     The 1950 census reported data for the 15 municipalities existing in 1940 and for 20 villages or cities existing as minor subdivisions within the municipalities.  For the first time, census reports made no mention of the presence of military quarters, even though Guam's population had more than doubled between 1940 and 1950, almost exclusively as the result of post‑war military activities.

 

     One of the provisions of the Organic Act of 1950 caused the organization, authority, and responsibilities of the commissioner system to continue to follow the pattern outlined in Guam Congress Bill No. 16, passed in 1948.  However, between 1950 and 1960, Guam's municipalities again underwent extensive reorganization.  A local law was enacted to establish the election district boundaries for the purpose of electing the district commissioners, creating 6 new districts and eliminating 2.


 

Figure 1.3     Guam, 1920 and 1930


Figure 1.4    Guam 1940


Figure 1.5   Guam, 1950


Figure 1.6   Guam, 1960


Figure 1.7   Guam, 1970


Figure 1.8   Guam, 1980


 

     The 1960 census results were for 19 election districts (Figure 1.6).  These districts included the 6 newly created municipalities of Tamuning, Mongmong‑Toto‑Maite, Mangilao, Chalan Pago‑Ordot, Agana Heights, and Santa Rita.  Because Sumay and Machanao were claimed by the military and ceased to require elected representation by commissioner, they were incorporated into the boundaries of other districts.  Sumay was annexed into Santa Rita, and Machanao into Dededo and Yigo.  1970 and 1980 election district boundaries remained the same as the boundaries used in 1960, so census data for those three periods are comparable (Figures 1.7 and 1.8).

 

     Beginning in 1960, the Census Bureau began using a new term, that of "Place", and later "Census Designated Place" to define generally closely settled centers of population without corporate limits.  A Place with a population of 2,500 or more is considered urban, and the remaining areas are rural.  Places in 1960, 1970, and 1980 are comparable; in 1980, new Places were added in addition to the ones used previously.  Although the definition of Place remained the same, the interpretation and application of that definition allowed the addition of military housing areas in 1980 that were not allowed in 1970.  Therefore, the expansion of urban areas between 1970 and 1980 was partially the result of including military housing in 1980.

 

POPULATION DISTRIBUTION BY BROAD GEOGRAPHIC AREA

 

     Although election district boundaries have been altered considerably between 1920 to 1980, the broad areas of Northern, Central, and Southern Guam have remained intact (See Figures 1.3 through 1.8).  For the purpose of data analysis, comparability by geographic area over time can be maintained between 1940 and 1980 within these three broad areas.  The major disadvantage to this system is the inclusion in the South of the district of Santa Rita, which contains a single large government quarters area that distorts some of the data.  Beginning with 1960, the North consisted of Dededo, Tamuning and Yigo.  Central Guam consisted of Agana, Agana Heights, Asan, Barrigada, Chalan Pago/Ordot, Mangilao, Mongmong‑Toto‑Maite, Piti and Sinajana.  The South was composed of Agat, Inarajan, Merizo, Santa Rita, Talofofo, Umatac and Yona.

 

     Prior to World War II, 63 percent of the population was concentrated in Central Guam, primarily in the capital city of Agana; 29 percent lived in the South; and only 8 percent resided in the North.  While population increases occurred in each of the three regions between 1940 and 1980, the vast majority of the growth took place in the Northern portion of the island (Table 1.10)

 

Table 1.10   Distribution by Region on Guam: 1940 to 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                       Numbers                           Percent

         ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Region     1980    1970   1960   1950   1940   1980  1970  1960  1950  1940

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

  Total.. 105,979 84,996 67,044 59,498 22,290 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

North....  47,583 32,540 18,752 16,147  1,795  44.9  38.3  28.0  27.1   8.1

Central..  34,526 31,266 25,479 26,495 13,946  32.6  36.8  38.0  44.5  62.6

South....  23,870 21,190 22,813 16,856  6,549  22.5  24.9  34.0  28.3  29.4

___________________________________________________________________________

Note: See text for inclusion of election districts in regions.

Source:  U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

 

     The proportion of persons living in the North increased steadily from 8 percent in 1940 to 45 percent in 1980, with the Northern population growing by 45,788 persons over the 40 year period.  Central Guam showed substantial and steady population growth during the same period, increasing by 20,580 persons; however, the proportion of the population living there declined from 63 percent to 33 percent.  In contrast, Guam's Southern area did not show steady growth during the same period.  The population of the South grew by 16,264 persons between 1940 and 1960, declined by 1,623 persons during the 1960s, and recovered 2,680 persons during the 1970s.  By 1980, the proportion of persons residing in the South dropped to 23 percent.

 

     One of the causes for these changes in population distribution was the occupation of the island by the Japanese armed forces during World War II and the continued presence of the United States military after Guam's recapture.  World War II had a profound impact on the relocation of the civilian population out of established communities and into areas that were either more convenient to the occupying forces or that were safer for the inhabitants.  War activities caused certain villages to cease to be inhabited by civilians, including most of Machanao in the North and Sumay in the South.  The village of Agana in Central Guam became nearly deserted.

 

     Another cause for the changes in population distribution was Guam's increased strategic value to the United States during and following World War II.  In 1944, Guam became the only location in the Western Pacific large enough to hold major U.S. military bases and to be completely under American control when the Philippines gained independence from the United States.  As a result, the Navy and Air Force built large military installations on Guam, seizing over one‑third of the island's land and water in the process.

 

     Military personnel and their dependents were concentrated into densely settled areas on and near bases, which were primarily in the Northern and Central portions of the island, without regard to the location of established local communities.  Because base areas and government quarters areas targeted by the military government for the development of infrastructure, and also because civil service jobs on bases were available to the civilian community, the Northern and Central portions of the island attracted migration by the resident population and new residents.

 

     The location of military facilities was determined largely by Guam's geography.  The flat limestone plateau of the North became the location of Andersen Air Force Base; Guam's natural deep water port became the center of regional Naval activities; and an airport site in Central Guam already under construction by the Japanese became the Naval Air Station and the civilian air terminal.  Southern Guam, with its steep central spine of mountains, was unsuitable for most military activities other than a Naval magazine and watershed.  These remain vast, but underdeveloped, holdings.

 

GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION BY ELECTION DISTRICT

 

     There were considerable variations in population growth between the individual election districts of Guam within the regions.  Although the total population of the island increased by almost 25 percent between 1970 and 1980, 3 districts more than doubled in population, while several others lost population.  Table 1.11 shows growth of each election district from 1960 to 1980.  As mentioned earlier, major changes in election district boundaries between 1930 and 1940 and between 1950 and 1960 make district analysis for those decades impossible.

 

Table 1.11  Population by Region and Election District: 1960 to 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                            Number              Percent     Percent Change

Region              ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Election District      1980   1970   1960   1980  1970  1960  70‑80  60‑80

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

     Total..........105,979 84,996 67,044  100.0 100.0 100.0   24.7   58.1

 

North............... 47,583 32,540 18,752   44.9  38.3  28.0   46.2  153.7

  Dededo............ 23,644 10,780  5,126   22.3  12.7   7.6  119.3  361.3

  Tamuning.......... 13,580 10,218  5,944   12.8  12.0   8.9   32.9  128.5

  Yigo.............. 10,359 11,542  7,682    9.8  13.6  11.5  ‑10.2   34.8

 

Central............. 34,526 31,266 25,479   32.6  36.8  38.0   10.4   35.5

  Agana.............    896  2,119  1,642     .8   2.5   2.4  ‑57.7  ‑45.4

  Agana Heights.....  3,284  3,156  3,210    3.1   3.7   4.8    4.1    2.3

  Asan..............  2,034  2,629  3,053    1.9   3.1   4.6  ‑22.6  ‑33.4

  Barrigada.........  7,756  6,356  5,430    7.3   7.5   8.1   22.0   42.8

  Chalan Pago/Ordot.  3,120  2,931  1,835    2.9   3.4   2.7    6.4   70.0

  Mangilao..........  6,840  3,228  1,965    6.5   3.8   2.9  111.9  248.1

  Mong‑Toto‑Maite...  5,245  6,057  3,015    4.9   7.1   4.5  ‑13.4   74.0

  Piti..............  2,866  1,284  1,467    2.7   1.5   2.2  123.2   95.4

  Sinajana..........  2,485  3,506  3,862    2.3   4.1   5.8  ‑29.1  ‑35.7

 

South............... 23,870 21,190 22,813   22.5  24.9  34.0   12.6    4.6

  Agat..............  3,999  4,308  3,107    3.8   5.1   4.6   ‑7.2   28.7

  Inarajan..........  2,059  1,897  1,730    1.9   2.2   2.6    8.5   19.0

  Merizo............  1,663  1,529  1,398    1.6   1.8   2.1    8.8   19.0

  Santa Rita.......   9,183  8,109 12,126    8.7   9.5  18.1   13.2  ‑24.3

  Talofofo..........  2,006  1,935  1,352    1.9   2.3   2.0    3.7   48.4

  Umatac............    732    813    744     .7   1.0   1.1  ‑10.0   ‑1.6

  Yona..............  4,228  2,599  2,356    4.0   3.1   3.5   62.7   79.5

__________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

 

     The villages with the greatest increases in population between 1970 and 1980 were Dededo, Piti, and Mangilao, and those showing decreases were Yigo, Agana, Asan, Mongmong‑Toto‑Maite, Sinajana, Agat, and Umatac.  There were many factors influencing these variations in population growth, although war and post‑war activities were especially significant.

 

     The village of Agana has traditionally been Guam's most important community, possessing a rich history dating back to the pre‑contact era (Sanchez, 1979:9).  Its chiefs were the most respected in the Marianas in pre‑contact Guam.  The Spanish recognized this and established the seat of government at Agana.  The U.S. Navy continued to use Agana as its administrative center when it began its administration of the island.

 

     At the beginning of American administration of Guam, Agana's boundaries actually encompassed all of the Northern and most of the Central portions of Guam.  By 1930, Agana contained 11,042 persons.  The population was so concentrated in one area that urban Agana contained 8,690 persons in 1930, nearly half the island's population.  Agana city's population continued to grow until 1940, when it had a population of 10,004 (Table 1.12)

 

Table 1.12  Population of Agana City: 1920 to 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                               Percent

                     Number   of Total

Year        Number   Change   Population

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

1980.....      896    ‑1223        .8

1970.....     2119      477       2.5

1960.....     1642      842       2.5

1950.....      800    ‑9204       1.3

1940.....    10004     1314      44.9

1930.....     8690     1258      47.0

1920.....     7432      ...      56.0

________________________________________________________

Note:  The boundaries of Agana City have remained

       constant between 1920 and 1980.

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

 

     The Japanese occupied Guam from December 10, 1941 until July 1944.  Agana was used as their seat of government and their military headquarters; however, forced relocation of the population left the city virtually deserted, with no more than 200 families.  The recapture of the island in 1944 was preceded by American bombardment from shipboard artillery for 13 consecutive days prior to Guam's recapture, totally destroying the city.

 

     After Guam's recapture, U.S. military and civilian authorities decided to reestablish the government in Agana.  Because of the massive destruction of the city during Guam's recapture, the military government literally bulldozed the remains of the city into the sea, creating a new peninsula of land, and obliterating all remaining streets and property boundary markers.

 

     A new system of streets was laid out in Agana, using a different method of surveying from the Spanish system previously used.  Later, in the 1950's, the Government of Guam superimposed still another survey methodology on top of the other two.  This resulted in a "fractional lot" problem in Agana that is still being resolved in the 1980's.  The depopulation of the city during the war and unresolved property disputes after the war caused the number of persons living in Agana to decline from 10,004 persons in 1940 to just 800 persons in 1950.  A portion of its pre‑war population was regained by 1970, but the population declined from 2,119 to 896 persons between 1970 and 1980.

 

     The most dramatic growth occurred in the Northern district of Dededo, growth which began shortly after the liberation in 1944. From a total population of 5,126 in 1960, Dededo's population increased by more than 360 percent during the next 20 years, reaching 23,644 persons in 1980.  This striking increase was fueled by in‑migration of Filipinos, Micronesians, Statesiders and other non‑indigenous people.  Private residential and apartment construction, as well as business construction, flourished in the area, making it the largest and fastest growing district in the Territory.

 

     The Central, coastal village of Piti experienced the largest percent population increase (123 percent) of any district between 1970 and 1980.  However, growth in the civilian, non‑federal lands was 230 persons, or 18 percent between 1970 and 1980.  Piti contains part of Apra Harbor, which has been under U.S. Navy control since Guam became a U.S. possession.  It was the homeporting of a Navy ship in Apra Harbor between 1970 and 1980, housing 1,352 military personnel, that caused the population of the Piti to double between 1970 and 1980.

 

     The Northern district of Yigo showed population growth during the 1960's, but declined by 10 percent between 1970 and 1980.  After most of Machanao's land area became occupied by Andersen Air Force Base immediately after World War II, Machanao was annexed to Yigo.  The fluctuations in Yigo's population between 1960 and 1980 have been partially the result of changes in the number of persons living on the base and in government quarters near the base.  The beginning and ending of the Vietnam Conflict, a war in which Guam's Air Force personnel played a major role, contributed to the growth of the population in Yigo during the 1960's, and the decreased population during the 1970's.  The civilian‑held portion of Yigo actually grew in population by 90 percent (2,506 persons) between 1970 and 1980, while the population on federal lands decreased by 42 percent.

 

     The Central district of Asan was another area losing population between 1960 and 1980, declining by 33 percent during the period.  In the late 1970s, continuing into the 1980s, Asan upgraded and modernized its infrastructure and public utilities under a federally‑supported community redevelopment program.  Delays to the urban renewal project caused by archaeological findings and funding problems left the project incomplete prior to the 1980 census.  In addition to this, part of Asan was designated as a U.S. War in the Pacific National Park.  The limited land area left for redevelopment has contributed to the decline in population.

 

     The district of Mongmong‑Toto‑Maite in Central Guam is comprised of three distinct communities.  It was established as a single district in 1946.  The number of persons living there shrank by 13 percent between 1970 and 1980 solely because of a decline of over 1,600 persons living on federal lands in the community of Mongmong, representing the closure of a Naval Air Station barracks.  The civilian, residential portion of the district grew by slightly more than 800 persons, or almost 20 percent.

 

     The population of the Central district of Sinajana decreased by 36 percent between 1960 and 1980.  The municipality was first organized in 1930.  Following World War II, the population of Sinajana grew tremendously with the construction of some 400 new homes.  Population growth continued until the housing in the area became saturated, reaching 3,862 persons by 1960.  Sinajana was the first district to be completely upgraded and modernized under a Federal renewal program in the mid 1970s.  The urban renewal project resulted in the relocation of some residents to other areas of the island and the elimination of substandard housing lots.  The decline in population between 1960 and 1980 is therefore not likely to continue into the future.

 

     Among the Southern districts, Santa Rita contained the greatest number of persons in 1970 and in 1980.  More than 63 percent of its population resided in Navy quarters in 1980, however.  Most growth in the South between 1970 and 1980 occurred in Yona, where the majority of commercial and residential housing developments were constructed during the decade.  The districts of Agat and Umatac decreased in population.  Agat contained no military populations and no obvious development constraints; however, it may be that the district experienced out‑migration by the local resident population, while lacking major housing subdivision development to attract new residents.  The situation in Umatac has been compounded by the lack of infrastructure development to support new housing subdivisions.

 

POPULATION ON FEDERALLY OWNED LANDS

 

     The federal government owned and controlled one‑third of Guam's land area in 1980, which has not changed since the end of World War II.  Military housing on those areas developed independently of the local economy.  Defense requirements, the construction of government quarters in new areas, opening or closing of military barracks, and the decision to homeport U.S. Navy ships on Guam are factors that have determined the number and location of active duty military personnel and their dependents, rather than economic conditions and other factors influencing the number and distribution of the civilian population.  Census data are available for the population on federal lands for 1970 and 1980, as shown in Table 1.13  The 1960 census gives data on persons living in housing units on federal lands; however, those living in group quarters are not reported for federal lands.

 

Table 1.13  Population Distribution by Non‑Federal/Federal Land Status

            and by Urban Designation: 1970 and 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                  1980                    1970

                      ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑  ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                               Persons Percent         Persons Percent

                                 in      in              in      in

Region                 Total  Federal Federal  Total  Federal Federal

Election District     Persons  Lands   Lands  Persons  Lands   Lands

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

     Total............  105979   19550    18.4   84996   20316    23.9

          Urban.......   41875   14063    33.6   21671       0       0

       Percent........    39.5    71.9     ...    25.5       0     ...

 

     North............   47583    8699    44.5   32540   10688    52.6

          Urban.......   23208    8430    43.1    8230       0       0

Dededo................   23644    3554    18.2   10780    1697     8.4

Tamuning..............   13580      69      .4   10218     235     1.2

Yigo..................   10359    5076      26   11542    8756    43.1

 

     Central..........   34526    5065    25.9   31266    4085    20.1

          Urban.......   10126       0       0   10829       0       0

Agana.................     896       0       0    2119       0       0

Agana Heights.........    3284     314     1.6    3156     419     2.1

Asan..................    2034     417     2.1    2629     535     2.6

Barrigada.............    7756    1716     8.8    6356    1105     5.4

Chalan Pago‑Ordot.....    3120       0       0    2931       0       0

Mangilao..............    6840     856     4.4    3228       0       0

Mongmong‑Toto‑Maite...    5245     410     2.1    6057    2026      10

Piti..................    2866    1352     6.9    1284       0       0

Sinajana..............    2485       0       0    3506       0       0

 

     South............   23870    5786    29.6   21190    5543    27.3

          Urban.......    8541    5633    28.8    2612       0       0

Agat..................    3999       0       0    4308      38      .2

Inarajan..............    2059       0       0    1897       0       0

Merizo................    1663       0       0    1529       0       0

Santa Rita............    9183    5786    29.6    8109    5505    27.1

Talofofo..............    2006       0       0    1935       0       0

Umatac................     732       0       0     813       0       0

Yona..................    4228       0       0    2599       0       0

______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑B54 Table 4; PC(1)B54 Table 4

 

     Table 1.13 shows that in 1970, 24 percent of the total population of Guam (20,316 persons) lived on federal land areas.  Nearly 53 percent of these lived in the North, mostly on Andersen Air Force Base; 20 percent in the Central region, mostly at the Naval Air Station and Naval Regional Medical Center; and 27 percent lived in the South, in Apra Harbor housing.  By 1980, the smaller number of persons on federal lands and growth in the civilian population caused the percent of persons living on federal lands to decrease to 18 percent.  A larger share resided in Central Guam because of a naval vessel berthed in Piti.

 

     Future military population living in federal land areas will be determined by the Defense Department.  The 1990 census will probably see some shift in the geographic distribution of the population to Central Guam caused by the homeporting of additional ships in Apra Harbor since 1980.  The local names of federal land areas are shown in Table 1.14.

 

Table 1.14  Population on Federal Lands: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Region                                                  Percent  Percent

Election District, Federal Land Area            Persons Of Total Federal

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

        Total persons...........................  105979     100     ...

             Persons on federal land areas......   19550    18.4     100

 

     North......................................    8699     8.2    44.5

Dededo, Naval Communication Station.............    3538     3.3    18.1

Dededo, Andersen Air Force Base Northwest Field.      16       0      .1

Tamuning, Harmon Annex..........................      69      .1      .4

Yigo, Andersen Air Force Base...................    4892     4.6      25

Yigo, Marbo Annex...............................     184      .2      .9

 

     Central....................................    5065     4.8    25.9

Agana Heights, Naval Hospital...................     314      .3     1.6

Asan, U.S. Naval Hospital.......................     417      .4     2.1

Barrigada, Naval Air Station....................    1650     1.6     8.4

Barrigada, Naval Communication Station..........      66      .1      .3

Mangilao, Marbo Annex...........................     856      .8     4.4

Mongmong‑Toto‑Maite, Naval Air Station..........     410      .4     2.1

Piti, Vessel....................................    1352     1.3     6.9

 

     South......................................    5786     5.5    29.6

Santa Rita, Apra Harbor Naval Reservation.......    5633     5.3    28.8

Santa Rita, U.S. Naval Magazine.................     153      .1      .8

________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 1A, Table 1; Bureau

        of Planning, Government of Guam.

 

POPULATION DENSITY

 

     Guam's islandwide population density increased over 368 percent between 1940 and 1980, from 107 persons per square mile in 1940 to 507 persons per square mile in 1980, as shown in Table 1.15.   Increases in density were not uniform throughout the island.  The Northern portion of the island was the most populated region by 1980, but it was still not the most densely settled.  Its density increased from 25 persons per square mile in 1940 to 670 in 1980.  The Central region was the area with the highest population density on the island, increasing from 324 to 803 persons per square mile by 1980.  At one time, the Southern portion of the island was more densely settled than the North, but by 1980, it had the lowest population density, only 251 persons per square mile.  Density in the South increased rapidly between 1940 and 1960, but remained fairly constant between 1960 and 1980, reflecting the slower rate of growth in the South during the period of rapid growth in the North.

 

Table 1.15 Population Distribution and Density by Region: 1940 to 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                            Year                    Pcnt

                             ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑   Change

Region                          1980   1970   1960   1950   1940 1940‑80

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

  Total population....        105979  84996  67044  59498  22290   373.8

Area in square miles..           209    209    209    209    209

Population density....           507    407    321    285    107

 

   North  Population..         47583  32540  18752  16147   1795   2580

Area in square miles..            71     71     71     71     71

Population density....           670    458    264    227     25

 

   Central Population.         34526  31266  25479  26495  13946   147.8

Area in square miles..            43     43     43     43     43

Population density....           803    727    593    616    324

 

   South Population...         23870  21190  22813  16856   6549   263.8

Area in square miles..            95     95     95     95     95

Population density....           251    223    240    177     69

________________________________________________________________________

Note: 1980 population in Central Guam includes 1352 persons living on

      board military vessels.

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑A54 1980 Table 4; PC(1)‑B54

        1970 Table 5; P‑B54 1950 Table 34, Bureau of Planning, Government

        of Guam.

 

URBAN‑RURAL DISTRIBUTION

 

     In order to qualify as urban, an area must first meet the criteria of Census Designated Place (CDP).  As discussed earlier, a CDP is a generally closely settled center of population without corporate limits.  If the CDP has a population of at least 2,500 persons, it is urban.  Rural areas are all areas that are not urban.

 

     Although Places have been named by the Census Bureau since 1960, a comparison of urban‑rural distribution is not possible.  Census definitions of CDP's have not been applied consistently on Guam for each census period.  In 1960 and 1970, 16 CDP's were named.  In 1980, an additional 16 CDP's were listed (Table 1.16).  Many of those CDP's additionally named in 1980 were existing communities in 1970, and some were existing even in 1960.  The inclusion of government quarters especially impacts on urban areas, as government quarters comprised over 34 percent of all urban areas in 1980.

 

Table 1.16  Population of Census Designated Places: 1960 to 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 Census Designated Place              1980     1970     1960

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

     Total.................          69106    35079    28567

 

North.......................         24248    10616     7627

  Andersen Air Force Base...          4892      ...      ...

  Dededo Village............          2524     2386     2247

  Finegayan Station.........          3538      ...      ...

  Marbo Annex...............          1040      ...      ...

  Tamuning Village..........          8862     8230     5380

  Yigo Village..............          3392      ...      ...

 

Central.....................         27870    16257    13000

  Agana Village.............           896     2119     1642

  Agana Heights Village.....          2970     3156     3210

  Agana Station.............          2060      ...      ...

  Asan Village..............           726      755      543

  Barrigada Village.........          3127     1549     1729

  Barrigada Hts Subdivision.          1127      ...      ...

  Chalan Pago Village.......          1921      ...      ...

  Latte Heights Subdivision.          1056      ...      ...

  Maina Village.............           891      ...      ...

  Maite Village.............           419      ...      ...

  Mangilao Village..........          4029      ...      ...

  Mongmong Village..........          2058     5052     2285

  Nimitz Hill Annex.........           417      ...      ...

  Ordot Village.............          1199      ...      ...

  Piti Village..............           737      ...      ...

  Sinajana Village..........          1879     2621     2861

  Toto Village..............          2358     1005      730

 

South.......................         16988     8206     7940

  Agat Village..............          2908     2612     2596

  Apra Harbor...............          5633      ...      ...

  Inarajan Village..........           918      614      761

  Merizo Village............          1500      731      508

  Santa Rita Village........          1264     1976     1630

  Santa Rosa Subdivision....           860      ...      ...

  Talofofo Village..........          1470      844      947

  Umatac Village............           487      423      393

  Yona Village..............          1948     1006     1105

_____________________________________________________________________

Note: Symbol "..." indicates an area was not designated a CDP.

Source:  U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑A54 1980 Table 9.

 

     Urban areas on Guam contained 40 percent of the population in 1980 or 41,875 persons (Table 1.17).  The North was the most densely urban, with half of its population residing in urban areas.  The population of the village of Tamuning was 65 percent urban.  The federal land areas of Andersen Air Force Base in Yigo and Finegayan Station in Dededo contributed to the urban density.  Nearly 36 percent of the population of Southern Guam resided in urban areas, exclusively in Agat (73 percent urban) and Santa Rita (61 percent urban).  In contrast, only 29 percent of the population of Central Guam lived in urban areas, 90 percent in Agana Heights, 40 percent of Barrigada, and 59 percent of Mangilao.  The larger percent urban in the South as opposed to Central Guam is the result of military housing in Santa Rita.

 

Table 1.17. Urban and Rural Residence by Election District: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                             Number                  Percent

Region              ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑Percent

Election District      Total    Urban    Rural  Total Urban Rural Urban

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

     Total.......... 105,979   41,875   64,104  100.0 100.0 100.0   39.5

 

North...............  47,583   23,208   24,375   44.9  55.4  38.0   48.8

  Dededo............  23,644    6,062   17,582   22.3  14.5  27.4   25.6

  Tamuning..........  13,580    8,862    4,718   12.8  21.2   7.4   65.3

  Yigo..............  10,359    8,284    2,075    9.8  19.8   3.2   80.0

 

Central.............  34,526   10,126   24,400   32.6  24.2  38.1   29.3

  Agana.............     896        0      896     .8   0.0   1.4    0.0

  Agana Heights.....   3,284    2,970      314    3.1   7.1    .5   90.4

  Asan..............   2,034        0    2,034    1.9   0.0   3.2    0.0

  Barrigada.........   7,756    3,127    4,629    7.3   7.5   7.2   40.3

  Chalan Pago/Ordot.   3,120        0    3,120    2.9   0.0   4.9    0.0

  Mangilao..........   6,840    4,029    2,811    6.5   9.6   4.4   58.9

  Mong‑Toto‑Maite...   5,245        0    5,245    4.9   0.0   8.2    0.0

  Piti..............   2,866        0    2,866    2.7   0.0   4.5    0.0

  Sinajana..........   2,485        0    2,485    2.3   0.0   3.9    0.0

 

South...............  23,870    8,541   15,329   22.5  20.4  23.9   35.8

  Agat..............   3,999    2,908    1,091    3.8   6.9   1.7   72.7

  Inarajan..........   2,059        0    2,059    1.9   0.0   3.2    0.0

  Merizo............   1,663        0    1,663    1.6   0.0   2.6    0.0

  Santa Rita.......    9,183    5,633    3,550    8.7  13.5   5.5   61.3

  Talofofo..........   2,006        0    2,006    1.9   0.0   3.1    0.0

  Umatac............     732        0      732     .7   0.0   1.1    0.0

  Yona..............   4,228        0    4,228    4.0   0.0   6.6    0.0

________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑A54 1980, Table 4.

 

 

SUMMARY

 

     For the purpose of population analysis, Guam can be divided into Northern, Southern, and Central areas for census periods between 1940 and 1980.  The smaller geographic units of election districts are comparable between 1960 and 1980, having undergone extensive reorganization on several occasions prior to 1960.

 

     Prior to World War II, nearly half of Guam's population lived in the one square mile village of Agana, in Central Guam.  Military occupation during and after the war dispersed the indigenous population into other areas of the island.  Fractional lot problems in Agana contributed to the difficulty of repopulating the village after the war.  In other parts of the island, families gave up their inherited lands to the U.S. government, which seized over one‑third of Guam's land for defense purposes.

 

     The decades 1940 through 1980 thus became a period of rapid growth in the North.  New inhabitants included both indigenous residents and new off‑island migrants from the United States and Asia.  The population of the North increased a remarkable 45,788 persons, from 1,795 in 1940 to 47,583 in 1980.  Growth in the other regions did not match the population increase of the North. The Central region, the most populated area in 1940, added 20,580 persons, while the South grew by 17,321 persons.

 

     In the Southern region, the villages of Merizo, Umatac, and Inarajan have retained their rural character, with interior mountainous areas not suited for housing development.  Some new development has occurred during the 1980's in the more gently sloping areas of Yona and Talofofo, as improved roads shorten travel time to the commercial further North, and generally improved infrastructure opens the area for development.

 

     Of the individual election districts showing decreases and large increase in population between 1960 and 1970, the number of military personnel living on federal lands was often the source of the change.  The population living on federal lands should be taken into account in analyzing the growth trends of election districts.  Growth caused by the homeporting of military vessels and declines caused by the closure of military barracks are significant in that they do not affect future birth rates, education needs, or housing markets, nor do fluctuations in the number of military personnel necessarily mean that a trend has been established.

 

     In 1980, 40 percent of the population lived in urban places.  Of that 40 percent, one‑third lived on military reservations.  It is probable that more and more places in the civilian portions of Northern and Central Guam will meet the 2,500 and over resident criterion for urban places in the future as the regions become more populated.  The military will probably not contribute greatly to the development of additional urban areas until new government quarters are built.

 


É[1]„!B„!ÉË

˂
J

EÀÎÎÐB_ÐÀ

EEÀÀEGÀË

      ËÀG?ÀÃ#‑ÃCHAPTER 2œƒ

Ã#à AGE AND SEX CHARACTERISTICSœƒ

Ë    
ËÀ?

     The age and sex composition of a population provides information

necessary to plan for community development and for determining changing

social and economic characteristics.  Age is the crucial factor for

determining various potential populations for schooling, manpower, and

voting.  Sex is important in understanding social perspective and trends in

a community and a population's potential economic activity.

 

     The data on sex were derived from answers to question 3.  At the time

of field review, most cases in which sex was not reported were resolved by

determining the appropriate entry from the person's given name and household

relationship.  When sex remained blank, it was allocated according to the

relationship to the householder and the age and marital status of the

person.

 

     The data on age were derived from answers to question 5.  Only the

information in items 5b and 5c (on month and year of birth) was read into

the computer.  Answers to questions 5a (on age at last birthday) were used

during field review to fill any blanks in question 5c.  The age

classification was based on the age of the person in completed years as of

April 1, 1980.  The data on age represent the difference between date of

birth and April 1, 1980.

 

     In Chapter 1 we discussed historical statistics for Guam, including age and sex distributions, starting with information from the 1700s.  In this, and subsequent chapters, we will be discussing recent statistics for Guam, with a view for the potential use of the data for planning purposes.

 

     The population of Guam has been aging in recent years, partly because

of reduced fertility (which will be described in Chapter 5), partly as a

result of even more drastic decreases in mortality (as described in Chapter

6), and partly because of the unusual migration situation, with large

numbers of relatively "middle-aged" migrants (discussed in detail in Chapter 7).

 

AGE AND SEX CHARACTERISTICSœ

 

     The median age of Guam's population in 1980 was 22.2 years, compared to 30.0 in the United States (Table 2.1 and Figure 2.1).  The median age is

that age which is the exact mid-point of all ages, that is, half the people

were older and half the people were younger.  The median had decreased

slightly from 18.1 in 1920 to 17.9 in 1940, partly due to the influenza

epidemic's remains in 1919 having affected fertility, and the whooping cough epidemic in the 1930s.  The median increased by 5 years in 1950 because of relatively large numbers of military stationed on Guam.  When many of these persons in the Armed Forces were gone in 1960, the median decreased again, and only increased for the 1980 census, probably as a result of decreased fertility and migration.

Ñÿÿ U                                      [1]

ÿÑÇ"Ç

     In most populations, the median for females is higher than for males,

but the military on Guam affects those figures as well.  In the early

decades of the century, before the Armed Forces were on Guam in any

significant numbers, females generally were older than males (with the

exception of 1930).  In 1950, the median for males was 3 years older than

for females because of the Armed Forces and contract workers sent to support

the military.  Males were more than 6 years older than females in 1960, and

3 years older in 1970.  Partly because of the reduction in the military and

a change in their age and sex structure, and because of the increase in the

local populations, by 1980 the median age for males and females was the

same.

À     UUÀ

Table 2.1. Median Age: 1920 to 1980

---------------------------------------------------------

Census

Year            Total           Males         Females

---------------------------------------------------------

 

1980            22.2            22.2            22.2

1970            20.4            21.6            18.2

1960            20.8            22.9            16.5

1950            22.8            23.3            20.3

1940            17.9            17.3            18.5

1930            18.8            19.1            18.6

1920            18.1            17.3            18.9

_________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

ÀU  

 

Ë

ËÀ      UGÀÃ'ÃFigure 2.1  Median Age: 1920 to 1980œƒ

Ë


ËÀG      UÀÜÜ
     The median age of the population by region varied over time (Table

2.2).  In 1930, the Central region had the lowest median age (16.4 years),

followed by the North (17.7 years); by 1950, the Central region had the

highest median age (23.3 years), with the North second highest (23.2 years).

These fluctuations between regions could be a result of regional migration

and the presence of the military in certain regions.

 

À      UUÀTable 2.2   Median Age by Region: 1930 to 1980

------------------------------------------------

                             Year

Region        1980  1970  1960  1950  1940  1930

------------------------------------------------

 

     Guam...  22.2  20.4  20.8  22.8  17.9  18.8

North.......  22.9  22.1  21.6  23.2  18.3  17.7

Central.....  22.5  20.0  18.9  23.3  17.7  16.4

South.......  20.5  18.7  23.4  21.9  18.3  18.1

________________________________________________

Source: Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

ÀU  

     The effect of the Armed Forces on the sex distribution is more clearly

seen in Table 2.3 (and Figure 2.2).  As noted previously, in most

populations there are more females than males.  In fact, on Guam in 1920,

there were 295 more females than males, but that was the last census to show

a surplus of females.  The sex distributions in 1930 and 1940 were not

abnormal, but by 1950, a change had occurred.  In 1950 there were 21,472

more males than females, and the number of males per 100 females doubled,

from 103 in 1940 to 213 in 1950.  In 1950, there were more than 2 males for

every female on the island.  With decreased military activity, the number of

males per 100 females decreased, until it reached 109 in 1980, more than any

State except Alaska, which had a surplus of males for other reasons.

 

À     U
UÀTable 2.3.
Males per 100 Females: 1920 to 1980

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

Census                                         Surplus of     Males per

Year                Males         Females           Males   100 Females

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

 

1980              55,321          50,658           4,663          109.2

1970              47,362          37,634           9,728          125.8

1960              39,211          27,833          11,378          140.9

1950              40,485          19,013          21,472          212.9

1940              11,294          10,983             311          102.8

1930               9,630           8,879             751          108.5

1920               6,490           6,785            -295           95.7

_______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

À
U      UÀÜÜ
Ë

ËÀ      UGÀÃ'ÃFigure 2.2  Males per 100 Females: 1920 to 1980œƒ

Ë


ËÀG

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

     The distribution by age has changed somewhat since 1940, the first

decennial census to display 5 years age groups for ages up to 75 years

(Table 2.4).  Between 1940 and 1950, the percentages of persons under 5

decreased, probably partly because of residual reduced fertility following

the war, but primarily because of increased migration of Armed Service

personnel and contract workers.  The change in the 5 to 14 year olds was

even greater, decreasing by 7 percentage points for the 5 to 9 years olds

and 6 percentage points for the 10 to 14 year olds.  Much of this decrease

must be attributed to many women not having children during the war years.

 

     This group which would normally have created an unusual effect in the

age distribution over time, much as the baby boomers has created a bulge

which is gradually working its way through the age distribution in the

United States, cannot  be seen for later censuses because of the great

influx of military personnel and contract workers, starting in the 1940s.

Hence, although this decrease is seen for 5 to 14 year olds in 1950, by 1960

when this group was 15 to 24, the number of Armed Forces personnel in this

same age group was so great, that the Natives have to be disaggregated to

see the affects on that segment of the population.  (We have disaggregated

the population by ethnicity in Chapter 8).

 

À     U

UÀTable 2.4.  Population by Age and Sex: 1940 to 1980

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

                        Numbers                          Percent

         ------------------------------------ -----------------------------

Age Group    1980   1970   1960   1950   1940  1980  1970  1960  1950  1940

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

 

   Total.105,979 84,996 67,044 59,498 22,290  100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

 0 to  4. 13,002 11,635 10,824  7,568  3,746   12.3  13.7  16.1  12.7  16.8

 5 to  9. 12,632 11,762  9,164  4,453  3,261   11.9  13.8  13.7   7.5  14.6

10 to 14. 11,338 10,304  7,254  4,084  2,827   10.7  12.1  10.8   6.9  12.7

15 to 19. 10,993  8,049  4,994  7,162  2,228   10.4   9.5   7.4  12.0  10.0

20 to 24. 11,108 10,270  6,744 11,378  1,870   10.5  12.1  10.1  19.1   8.4

25 to 29. 10,324  6,406  5,572  7,275  1,719    9.7   7.5   8.3  12.2   7.7

30 to 34.  9,289  6,171  6,617  5,452  1,455    8.8   7.3   9.9   9.2   6.5

35 to 39.  6,246  5,474  5,151  4,044  1,203    5.9   6.4   7.7   6.8   5.4

40 to 44.  5,049  4,792  3,403  2,761    946    4.8   5.6   5.1   4.6   4.2

45 to 49.  4,189  3,530  2,631  2,014    812    4.0   4.2   3.9   3.4   3.6

50 to 54.  3,983  2,305  1,736  1,216    599    3.8   2.7   2.6   2.0   2.7

55 to 59.  2,914  1,748  1,171    810    501    2.7   2.1   1.7   1.4   2.2

60 to 64.  1,927  1,070    695    483    435    1.8   1.3   1.0    .8   2.0

65 to 69.  1,418    689    478    346    291    1.3    .8    .7    .6   1.3

70 to 74.    809    351    271    204    210     .8    .4    .4    .3    .9

75 + ....    758    440    339    248    174     .7    .5    .5    .4    .8

___________________________________________________________________________

Note: 1940 includes 13 persons of unknown age.

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

À

U    

     The military influence is clearly seen in the 1950 census results,

since almost 1 in every 5 persons on Guam was between 20 and 24 in that

year, up from only 1 in 12 in 1940.  The proportion decreased to about 1 in

10 in 1960 and subsequent years.  About 1 in every 8 persons on Guam in 1950

was between 15 and 19, and about the same proportion were between 25 and 29.

Altogether about 43 percent of the population in 1950 was between 15 and 29.

 

     About 16 percent of the 1960 population were under 5, and another 14

percent were 5 to 9, showing the effects of the baby boom on Guam.  By 1970,

fertility had begun to decrease, with only 14 percent of the population less

than 5 years old, and by 1980 the decrease continued, to 12 percent of the

population.

 

     The proportion of the population which was elderly remained low

throughout the period, partly because of the influence of the presence of

the military (which decreased the percentage of youth as well as elderly),

and partly because the birth rate was high, and continued to be fairly high

even in 1980 (although very low compared to the developing world).  Just

over 3 percent of the population in 1940 was 65 years and over.  The

proportion of elderly decreased to between 1 and 2 percent from 1950 to

1970, and increased to 3 percent again in 1980.  As will be shown in Chapter

8 on ethnicity, most of the elderly were Chamorro, so that as the rest of

the population ages, the percentage of elderly will increase, as will the

need to provide housing and other services for these persons.

Traditionally, Chamorro culture has made provisions for its elderly, with

specific roles within the extended family context.  As the society has

"Westernized" many of these roles have changed, resulting in the likelihood

of new mechanisms being needed to care for the elderly, particularly as

non-Chamorros become part of this group.

 

DEPENDENCY RATIOœ

 

     The dependency ratio is derived by dividing the sum of persons under 15

(the pre-labor force youth) and the elderly (those over 64), by the persons

generally included in the potential labor force (those 15 to 64), and

multiplying by 100.  A dependency ratio of 100 would mean that there is

exactly one dependent for each potential worker; a higher number would mean

that there are more dependents than workers, and a lower number means that

there are more workers than dependents.

 

     In 1940, before the military "invasion", the population was closest to

a dependency ratio of 100, with a figure of 89 (89 dependents for every 100

potential workers) (Table 2.5).  The dependency ratio in 1950 was only 40,

less than half of the ratio for 1940, showing both greatly reduced fertility

in the war years and the huge influx of military personnel in the late

1940s.  This value is unlikely to occur in any "natural" environment, and is

due to the large numbers of young and middle-aged adults on island in

connection with the Armed Forces.  This kind of figure makes analysis of the

dependency ratios fairly useless since some segments of the population were

still living at subsistence levels, and other segments were living off an

artificially constructed economy, including PXs and other imported goods and

materials.

 

     The dependency ratios in 1960, 1970, and 1980, continued to show the

influence of the military. After a jump in 1960 because of proportionally

fewer military on island however, the ratio continued to decrease to 60 in

1980.  The decrease in the 20 years before the 1980 census was due both to

increased immigration of aliens in the middle years (as well as

Statesiders), and decreased fertility (which was far greater than the slight

increase in the elderly population.)

 

À     U
UÀTable 2.5.
Dependency Ratios: 1940 to 1980

---------------------------------------------------------------------

Age Group           1980       1970       1960       1950       1940

---------------------------------------------------------------------

 

   Total.....    105,979     84,996     67,044     59,498     22,277¼1

 0 to 14.....     36,972     33,701     27,242     16,105      9,834

15 to 64.....     66,022     49,815     38,714     42,595     11,768

65 +.........      2,985      1,480      1,088        798        675

Dependency                                                        

  Ratio......       60.5       70.6       73.2       39.7       89.3

____________________________________________________________________

1) Excludes 13 persons of unknown age.

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

À
U    

     The male population has shown the fluctuations in the age distribution

more dramatically than the female population, because most of the early

military personnel were males (Table 2.6).  Again, the age distribution for

1940 was fairly "normal" because most of the residents were Chamorros and

were living without military activity.  In 1950, all of this had changed.

 

     In 1950, almost 1 in every 4 males was between 20 and 24, another 14

percent were between 15 and 19, and another 13 percent were between 25 and

29.  Hence, more than half the males were in this 15 year age range.  Most

of these males were military personnel.  The proportion of males in this age

range has remained large throughout the rest of the period because of

continued military activity on island.

 

À     U

UÀTable 2.6. Males by Age and Sex: 1940 to 1980

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

                        Numbers                          Percent

         ------------------------------------ -----------------------------

Age Group    1980   1970   1960   1950   1940  1980  1970  1960  1950  1940

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

 

   Males. 55,321 47,362 39,211 40,485 11,300  100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

 0 to  4.  6,620  5,962  5,614  3,885  1,945   12.0  12.6  14.3   9.6  17.2

 5 to  9.  6,458  6,054  4,593  2,286  1,734   11.7  12.8  11.7   5.6  15.4

10 to 14.  5,835  5,362  3,685  2,129  1,463   10.5  11.3   9.4   5.3  13.0

15 to 19.  5,849  4,148  3,053  5,583  1,092   10.6   8.8   7.8  13.8   9.7

20 to 24.  6,019  6,642  4,527  9,613    885   10.9  14.0  11.5  23.7   7.8

25 to 29.  5,194  3,569  3,386  5,231    897    9.4   7.5   8.6  12.9   7.9

30 to 34.  4,854  3,538  4,526  3,812    748    8.8   7.5  11.5   9.4   6.6

35 to 39.  3,386  3,267  3,440  2,850    621    6.1   6.9   8.8   7.0   5.5

40 to 44.  2,650  3,038  2,172  1,859    504    4.8   6.4   5.5   4.6   4.5

45 to 49.  2,171  2,192  1,684  1,380    402    3.9   4.6   4.3   3.4   3.6

50 to 54.  2,238  1,334  1,036    793    300    4.0   2.8   2.6   2.0   2.7

55 to 59.  1,634  1,015    642    482    231    3.0   2.1   1.6   1.2   2.0

60 to 64.  1,008    577    367    243    199    1.8   1.2    .9    .6   1.8

65 to 69.    729    324    223    157    119    1.3    .7    .6    .4   1.1

70 to 74.    392    160    117     84     83     .7    .3    .3    .2    .7

75 + ....    284    180    146     98     71     .5    .4    .4    .2    .6

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

À

U    

     The female population on Guam has not seen the tremendous fluctuations

the male age distribution experienced (Table 2.7).  Some of this anomaly in

the 15 to 29 years old females in the 1950 census can be attributed to wives

who accompanied their husbands for military duty on island.

 

     The increase in percentage of females in the 0 to 4 age group between

1940 and 1950 (from 16 to 19 percent) probably reflects real growth in this

age group, and, if the military were excluded from the male distribution,

males also would probably exhibit the same pattern.  The late 1940s saw the

beginning of the baby boom on Guam as elsewhere, so that the high rates of 0

to 4 years olds in 1950 and 1960 reflect this higher fertility; almost 1 in

every 5 females in those two censuses were less than 5 years old.  After the

1960 census, the percentage of these females decreased, partly as a result

of the baby bust, and partly because of increased migration of aliens and

persons from the States (including increased numbers of female military

personnel).

 

     The proportion of female elderly has remained low, but, once again,

this may change as the general population ages.

 

À     U

UÀTable 2.7. Females by Age and Sex: 1940 to 1980

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

                        Numbers                          Percent

         ------------------------------------ -----------------------------

Age Group    1980   1970   1960   1950   1940  1980  1970  1960  1950  1940

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

 

   Fmles. 50,658 37,634 27,833 19,013 10,990  100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

 0 to  4.  6,382  5,673  5,210  3,683  1,801   12.6  15.1  18.7  19.4  16.4

 5 to  9.  6,174  5,708  4,571  2,167  1,527   12.2  15.2  16.4  11.4  13.9

10 to 14.  5,503  4,942  3,569  1,955  1,364   10.9  13.1  12.8  10.3  12.4

15 to 19.  5,144  3,901  1,941  1,579  1,136   10.2  10.4   7.0   8.3  10.3

20 to 24.  5,089  3,628  2,217  1,765    985   10.0   9.6   8.0   9.3   9.0

25 to 29.  5,130  2,837  2,186  2,044    822   10.1   7.5   7.9  10.8   7.5

30 to 34.  4,435  2,633  2,091  1,640    707    8.8   7.0   7.5   8.6   6.4

35 to 39.  2,860  2,207  1,711  1,194    582    5.6   5.9   6.1   6.3   5.3

40 to 44.  2,399  1,754  1,231    902    442    4.7   4.7   4.4   4.7   4.0

45 to 49.  2,018  1,338    947    634    410    4.0   3.6   3.4   3.3   3.7

50 to 54.  1,745    971    700    423    299    3.4   2.6   2.5   2.2   2.7

55 to 59.  1,280    733    529    328    270    2.5   1.9   1.9   1.7   2.5

60 to 64.    919    493    328    240    236    1.8   1.3   1.2   1.3   2.1

65 to 69.    689    365    255    189    172    1.4   1.0    .9   1.0   1.6

70 to 74.    417    191    154    120    127     .8    .5    .6    .6   1.2

75 + ....    474    260    193    150    103     .9    .7    .7    .8    .9

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

À

U     UÀË

ËÀ      UGÀÃ'ÃFigure 2.3  Age and Sex Distribution: 1940œƒ

ÜÜ

 

 

Ã'ÃFigure 2.4  Age and Sex Distribution: 1950œƒ

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Ã'ÃFigure 2.5  Age and Sex Distribution: 1960œƒ

ÜÜ

 

 

Ã'ÃFigure 2.6  Age and Sex Distribution: 1970œƒ

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Ã'ÃFigure 2.7  Age and Sex Distribution: 1980œƒ

ÜÜ
Ë


ËÀG UÀSEX RATIOœ

 

     As noted earlier, the number of males per 100 females increased from

103 to 213 between 1940 and 1950 because of the influx of military

personnel, and then decreased first to 141 in 1960, then to 126 in 1970, and

109 in 1980 (Table 2.8 and Figure 2.8).  As would be expected, the

proportions for young ages were closer to even numbers of males and females

(although we do not expect a figure of 100, because, world-wide, there are

about 106 males born for every 100 females).

 

     The coming of the military to Guam also affected the proportion of

males and females in the military ages.  In 1950, for example, there were

354 males for every 100 females aged 15 to 19, 545 males per 100 females

aged 20 to 24, 256 for those 25 to 29, with diminishing proportions after

that.  As time has gone by, these proportions have decreased, but in some

ages have remained high, especially compared with similar populations in the

States and elsewhere.  By 1960, only 20 to 24 and 30 to 39 year olds had

more than 2 males for each female, and none of the age groups in 1960 had

this disparity (although there were 183 males 20 to 24 years old for every

100 females in that age group).

 

     There were more females than males 65 years and over (except for those

65 to 69 in 1980) for each of the censuses, showing increased male mortality

in the older age groups.

 

À     U

UÀTable 2.8. Males per 100 Females by Age: 1940 to 1980

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

                 Surplus of Males                  Males Per 100 Females

         ------------------------------------ -----------------------------

Age Group    1980   1970   1960   1950   1940  1980  1970  1960  1950  1940

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

 

   Total.    4663   9728  11378  21472    310 109.2 125.8 140.9 212.9 102.8

 0 to  4.     238    289    404    202    144 103.7 105.1 107.8 105.5 108.0

 5 to  9.     284    346     22    119    207 104.6 106.1 100.5 105.5 113.6

10 to 14.     332    420    116    174     99 106.0 108.5 103.3 108.9 107.3

15 to 19.     705    247   1112   4004    -44 113.7 106.3 157.3 353.6  96.1

20 to 24.     930   3014   2310   7848   -100 118.3 183.1 204.2 544.6  89.8

25 to 29.      64    732   1200   3187     75 101.2 125.8 154.9 255.9 109.1

30 to 34.     419    905   2435   2172     41 109.4 134.4 216.5 232.4 105.8

35 to 39.     526   1060   1729   1656     39 118.4 148.0 201.1 238.7 106.7

40 to 44.     251   1284    941    957     62 110.5 173.2 176.4 206.1 114.0

45 to 49.     153    854    737    746     -8 107.6 163.8 177.8 217.7  98.0

50 to 54.     493    363    336    370      1 128.3 137.4 148.0 187.5 100.3

55 to 59.     354    282    113    154    -39 127.7 138.5 121.4 147.0  85.6

60 to 64.      89     84     39      3    -37 109.7 117.0 111.9 101.2  84.3

65 to 69.      40    -41    -32    -32    -53 105.8  88.8  87.5  83.1  69.2

70 to 74.     -25    -31    -37    -36    -44  94.0  83.8  76.0  70.0  65.4

75 + ....    -190    -80    -47    -52    -32  59.9  69.2  75.6  65.3  68.9

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

À

U      UÀÜÜ

Ë

ËÀ      UGÀÃ'ÃFigure 2.8  Male/Female Ratio by Age: 1980œƒ

Ë


ËÀG

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

AGE DISTRIBUTIONœ

 

     Table 2.9 shows the distribution by age for the election districts on

Guam.  The overall median age for Guam was 22.2 years, with the North and

Central regions having higher median ages, and the South being younger.

 

     Umatac had the lowest median age at 17.4 years, followed by Inarajan

(17.9 years), and Talofofo (18.2).  Other villages with low median ages were

Merizo (18.5), Yona (18.6), and Chalan Pago-Ordot (19.0); only the last

village was not in the Southern region.  The percentage of persons less than

18 years old also reflects the relative youth in these villages.  Overall,

41 percent of Guam's population was less than 18 years old.  Central and

Northern regions had slightly smaller percentages of persons in this age

group (40 percent for each), compared to the 45 percent for South.  Both

Umatac and Inarajan had more than half their populations under 18 years old,

the result of high fertility, and probably less migration of young adults to

these southern villages.

 

     About 3 percent of the population was 65 years or older.  More than 6

percent of those living in Agana were 65 years or older, as were more than 5

percent of those in Agana Heights.  Sinajana, Agat, and Inarajan each had

slightly less than 5 percent of their populations being elderly.

 

     These data seem to show that the South remains somewhat more

traditional than the Central and Northern regions, with higher fertility,

and less military and other in-migration.  The villages in the extreme South

seem even more traditional in age structure than the others.

 

À     U
UÀTable 2.9.  
Age by Region and Election District: 1980

--------------------------------------------------------------------------

                                   Number             Percent

                            ------------------- -------------------

                    Popula-  Under  18 to  65 +  Under  18 to  65 + Median

Election District      tion 18 yrs 64 yrs years 18 yrs 64 yrs years    Age

--------------------------------------------------------------------------

 

     Total.......... 105979  43604  59390  2985   41.1   56.1   2.8   22.2

 

  North.............  47583  19241  27156  1198   40.4   57.1   2.5   22.9

Dededo..............  23644  10640  12437   567   45.0   52.6   2.4   20.9

Tamuning............  13580   4549   8555   475   33.5   63.0   3.5   26.4

Yigo................  10359   4040   6164   155   39.0   59.5   1.5   22.2

 

  Central...........  34526  13633  19765  1128   39.5   57.2   3.3   22.5

Agana...............    896    275    566    55   30.7   63.2   6.1   27.4

Agana Heights.......   3284   1261   1855   167   38.4   56.5   5.1   23.7

Asan................   2034    775   1170    92   38.1   57.5   4.5   23.3

Barrigada...........   7756   3017   4506   233   38.9   58.1   3.0   22.2

Chalan Pago-Ordot...   3120   1498   1507   115   48.0   48.3   3.7   19.0

Mangilao............   6840   2859   3837   144   41.8   56.1   2.1   22.3

Mongmong-Toto-Maite.   5245   2229   2874   142   42.5   54.8   2.7   21.6

Piti................   2866    616   2190    60   21.5   76.4   2.1   23.6

Sinajana............   2485   1103   1260   122   44.4   50.7   4.9   20.6

 

  South.............  23870  10728  12481   659   44.9   52.3   2.8   20.5

Agat................   3999   1848   1964   188   46.2   49.1   4.7   20.2

Inarajan............   2059   1038    924    97   50.4   44.9   4.7   17.9

Merizo..............   1663    812    790    62   48.8   47.5   3.7   18.5

Santa Rita..........   9183   3600   5446   138   39.2   59.3   1.5   22.3

Talofofo............   2006    991    953    62   49.4   47.5   3.1   18.2

Umatac..............    732    378    342    12   51.6   46.7   1.6   17.4

Yona................   4228   2063   2063   101   48.8   48.8   2.4   18.6

__________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80-1-B54, Table 14.

À
U    

MILITARY AND CIVILIAN POPULATIONSœ

 

     The special tabulations developed to disaggregate military households

from civilian households provide data on age and sex of the civilian

population, as well as those households having one or more military

personnel.  Persons on active-duty military status are called "military

persons", households with one or more military persons residing there are

"military households".

 

     Altogether, there were 83,226 persons (78 percent) living in households

or group quarters which contained only civilians.  Of these, 42,056 (51

percent) were males, compared to 58 percent of males in military households

or in group quarters (Table 2.10).

 

     The median ages for the two populations did not differ significantly,

but the distributions were significantly different.  Although the median for

the whole population was 22.3 years, the median for civilians was slightly

less (21.8 years) and the median for the military was slightly more (22.9

years).  The median for males in the military was about a year older than

for females, while the median for female civilians was about a half year

older than for males.

 

     Once the military are disaggregated from the rest of the population,

the civilian age and sex distribution looks much more "normal".  Military

personnel seem to have higher fertility than civilians, since 14 percent

were children less than 5 years old in military households, compared to 12

percent in civilian households.  On the other hand, because they are in the

military, more than 1 in 5 of all military persons were 20 to 24 compared to

only 8 percent of the civilians.  The percentage of military in the 25 to 29

year age group was double that of the civilians.  More than 12 percent of

the military population was 30 to 34 years old compared to only 8 percent of

the civilian population.

 

     On the other hand, slightly larger proportions of persons in the 35 to

44 year old age group were civilian than were military, partially because of

large numbers of immigrants in this age group (see Chapters 7 and 8).  And,

larger proportions of persons older than 44 were civilian than were

military.  More than 9 percent of the civilian population was 45 to 54 years

old, compared to less than 2 percent of the military population.  And only

about 1 percent of the military population was 55 years old and over,

compared to more than 9 percent of the civilian population.

 

À      UUÀTable 2.10.  Age and Sex by Military Household Status: 1980

-------------------------------------------------------------------

                   Total             Civilians         Military

             ------------------------------------------------------

Age Group    Total Males Fmles Total Males Fmles Total Males Fmles

-------------------------------------------------------------------

 

    Total....105979 55321 50658 83226 42056 41170 22753 13265  9488

     Percent. 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

  0 to  4....  12.3  12.0  12.6  11.7  11.9  11.6  14.2  12.1  17.1

  5 to  9....  11.9  11.7  12.2  12.4  12.7  12.2  10.1   8.5  12.3

 10 to 14....  10.7  10.5  10.9  12.0  12.3  11.8   5.8   5.0   7.0

 15 to 19....  10.4  10.6  10.2  11.1  11.1  11.1   7.7   8.8   6.1

 20 to 24....  10.5  10.9  10.0   7.5   6.6   8.5  21.3  24.4  16.9

 25 to 29....   9.7   9.4  10.1   8.0   7.2   8.7  16.3  16.3  16.3

 30 to 34....   8.8   8.8   8.8   7.8   7.6   7.9  12.4  12.4  12.4

 35 to 44....  10.7  10.9  10.4  11.0  11.1  10.9   9.4  10.3   8.3

 45 to 54....   7.7   8.0   7.4   9.4  10.0   8.7   1.7   1.5   2.0

 55 to 59....   2.7   3.0   2.5   3.4   3.8   3.0    .4    .3    .5

 60 to 64....   1.8   1.8   1.8   2.3   2.3   2.2    .2    .2    .3

 65 and over.   2.8   2.5   3.1   3.4   3.2   3.7    .5    .3    .8

   Median....  22.3  22.4  22.1  21.8  21.5  22.0  22.9  23.2  22.2

___________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80-1-C/D54, Table 19;

        Unpublished tabulations.

ÀU  

     The percentage distribution by age group also shows differences (Table

2.11).  Altogether females were 48 percent of the population on Guam in

1980; while females constituted almost half of the civilian population, they

were only about 4 in every 10 of the military population (and, of course,

many of these were dependents).  Among the civilians, in the young ages

females were just slightly less than half of all persons and were more than

half of those 20 to 35 years old.  For ages 35 to 64, however, there were

more males than females in the civilian population, probably because of the

selective nature of international migration, with larger numbers of male

immigrants than females.  For the elderly, females were a larger percentage

of the civilian population than were males.

 

     The military population showed a very different pattern.  More than 2

of every 3 military persons between 15 and 24 were male, and while the

proportions decreased to below 6 in 10 for persons 25 to 34, more than 6 in

10 of those 35 to 44 were males.  More than half of the persons 55 years and

over in military households, however, were female.

 

     There is some evidence from these data that there is a discrepancy

between the military and civilian data for persons 20 to 29 which show

surpluses of civilian females.  Military males who were on ships and left

their families behind would have been recorded as civilian since no one in

the household would have been identified as military; hence, this surplus of

civilian females in the age group was probably at least partially explained

by the fact that many of these women were married to military personnel who

were on ships and left their families behind.  (Their children are less

easily disaggregated from all children.)

 

À      UUÀTable 2.11.  Percent Age and Sex by Military Household Status: 1980

-------------------------------------------------------------------

                   Total             Civilians         Military

             ------------------------------------------------------

Age Group    Total Males Fmles Total Males Fmles Total Males Fmles

-------------------------------------------------------------------

 

    Total.... 100.0  52.2  47.8 100.0  50.5  49.5 100.0  58.3  41.7

  0 to  4.... 100.0  50.9  49.1 100.0  51.3  48.7 100.0  49.7  50.3

  5 to  9.... 100.0  51.1  48.9 100.0  51.6  48.4 100.0  49.1  50.9

 10 to 14.... 100.0  51.5  48.5 100.0  51.7  48.3 100.0  50.0  50.0

 15 to 19.... 100.0  53.2  46.8 100.0  50.6  49.4 100.0  66.8  33.2

 20 to 24.... 100.0  54.2  45.8 100.0  44.4  55.6 100.0  66.9  33.1

 25 to 29.... 100.0  50.3  49.7 100.0  45.9  54.1 100.0  58.2  41.8

 30 to 34.... 100.0  52.3  47.7 100.0  49.6  50.4 100.0  58.3  41.7

 35 to 44.... 100.0  53.4  46.6 100.0  51.1  48.9 100.0  63.4  36.6

 45 to 54.... 100.0  54.0  46.0 100.0  54.1  45.9 100.0  50.9  49.1

 55 to 59.... 100.0  56.1  43.9 100.0  56.4  43.6 100.0  47.3  52.7

 60 to 64.... 100.0  52.3  47.7 100.0  52.5  47.5 100.0  44.4  55.6

 65 and over. 100.0  47.1  52.9 100.0  47.5  52.5 100.0  37.4  62.6

___________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80-1-C/D54, Table 19;

        Unpublished tabulations.

ÀU  

     Table 2.12 further disaggregates the military data into persons who

were actually in the military in 1980 and those who were civilians but

living in military households.  There were 10,125 persons (10 percent of

Guam's total population) on active-duty status in the military in 1980:

9,224 males and 901 females.  The median age of these persons was 26.5

years, more than 4 years more than for the rest of the population in

military households (because so many of the other people in military

households were children), and about 4 years more than for the general

population of Guam.

 

     Military persons constituted more than half of all persons 20 to 24

years old (67 percent of the males and 33 percent of the females in that age

group), and were 49 percent of the persons 25 to 29 years old.  Of course,

for planning and other policy purposes, military households and families,

and not only the military persons must be considered, so the analysis in

this report for military-civilian differences focuses on the whole

household, and not merely the military person himself or herself.

 

À      UUÀTable 2.12. Median Age by Sex and Military Status: 1980

-------------------------------------------------------------------

                                                 Military

                                     ------------------------------

             Total       Civilians   Households        Persons

             ------------------------------------------------------

Age Group    Males Fmles Males Fmles Males Fmles Males Fmles Total

-------------------------------------------------------------------

 

    Total.... 55321 50658 42056 41170 13265  9488  9224   901 10125

  0 to  4....  6620  6382  5017  4758  1603  1624     0     0     0

  5 to  9....  6458  6174  5333  5007  1125  1167     0     0     0

 10 to 14....  5835  5503  5176  4843   659   660     0     0     0

 15 to 19....  5849  5144  4685  4565  1164   579   843   119   962

 20 to 24....  6019  5089  2782  3485  3237  1604  3149   460  3609

 25 to 29....  5194  5130  3038  3583  2156  1547  2094   214  2308

 30 to 34....  4854  4435  3204  3256  1650  1179  1622    64  1686

 35 to 44....  6036  5259  4673  4472  1363   787  1336    26  1362

 45 to 54....  4409  3763  4212  3573   197   190   152    15   167

 55 to 59....  1634  1280  1590  1231    44    49    17     3    20

 60 to 64....  1008   919   984   889    24    30     7     0     7

 65 and over.  1405  1580  1362  1508    43    72     4     0     4

   Median....  22.4  22.1  21.5  22.0  23.2  22.2  26.5  22.2  26.1

____________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80-1-C/D54, Tables 19 and 36

ÀU  

     There were more than 10 active-duty military males for every military

female in 1980 (Table 2.13).  None of the age groups showed anything like

equal proportions.  Although there were fewer than 10 males per female for

persons less than 29 and more than 55, there were 25 males for every female

30 to 34, and 51 for those 35 to 44 years old.

 

     Table 2.13 also shows that for all military households, there were more

females than males under 15 and over 55, but that males predominated in the

middle years, with more than 2 males per female 15 to 24 years old.  The

problem with the ratio of males to females 20 to 29 in the civilian

population is also seen here, since there is a great surplus of females

here, once again indicating that some of these females should more properly

have been placed in the military category.

 

À      UUÀTable 2.13. Males per 100 Females by Age and Military Status: 1980

-------------------------------------------------------------------

                                        Military    Military

Age Group          Total   Civilians  Households    Persons

-------------------------------------------------------------------

 

    Total....       109.2       102.2       139.8      1023.8

  0 to  4....       103.7       105.4        98.7         ...

  5 to  9....       104.6       106.5        96.4         ...

 10 to 14....       106.0       106.9        99.8         ...

 15 to 19....       113.7       102.6       201.0       708.4

 20 to 24....       118.3        79.8       201.8       684.6

 25 to 29....       101.2        84.8       139.4       978.5

 30 to 34....       109.4        98.4       139.9      2534.4

 35 to 44....       114.8       104.5       173.2      5138.5

 45 to 54....       117.2       117.9       103.7      1013.3

 55 to 59....       127.7       129.2        89.8       566.7

 60 to 64....       109.7       110.7        80.0         ...

 65 and over.        88.9        90.3        59.7         ...

______________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80-1-C/D54, Table 19 and

        Table 36.

ÀU  

SUMMARYœ

 

     While the median age in 1980 was less than that of the U.S., Guam's

population is aging.  Median age was higher for civilian females than for

civilian males; the opposite was true for the military, and the overall

median age for the military was higher than that of civilians.  The

proportion of the total population less than 5 years old was 12 percent; the

proportion over 65 years was 3 percent.  The dependency ratio in 1980 was

60.5.

 

     From 1930 onward, the sex ratio of the population was greater than 103;

it was 109 in 1980.  The sex ratio was higher for both military persons and

military households.

 

     The military dominated in the age groups less than 5 years and 20 to 34

years; civilians did so in all other age groups.  Due to definitions of

military households used in special retabulations of the 1980 census, some

military dependent spouses were put into the civilian category, causing

surpluses of female civilians in certain age groups.

 

     We have briefly presented data on the age and sex distribution of the

population on Guam for 1940 through 1980.  It is clear that because of the

military presence and the large amount of immigration, Guam will not show a

"normal" population distribution for the foreseeable future.


  CHAPTER 3

  HOUSEHOLD CHARACTERISTICS

 

class=Section3>

 

 

     Characteristics of the households of Guam reflect many of the sociological and economic changes that have taken place over the years.  For many years, extended family households, consisting of parents, children, grandparents, grandchildren, siblings, and other relatives were considered to be the norm.  By 1980, extended families were the exception, as fertility and family size declined, and more people were employed in the cash than the subsistence economy.  The decline of household size and changes in its composition can be seen in the Census data from 1940 to 1980.

 

     The first question asked in the 1980 Census that was used in determining household status and relationships was Question 1: "What is the name of each person who was living here on Tuesday, April 1, 1980, or who was staying or visiting here and had no other home"?.  The second was Item B: Type of unit or quarters, which was to be filled in by the enumerator or a Census office clerk.  Question 2: "How is ___ related to ___(the person named in column one)?" was used to obtain the household relationships and helped to delineate family units.  Possible responses fell into categories of being related to the person in column one (the householder), such as a spouse, child, sibling, parent, or other relative, and not being related to that person, such as boarder, roommate, paid employee, or other nonrelative.  Several other questions in the household section of the questionnaire probed to determine if anyone was not listed, and whether they should be added to the list of household members.

 

     The 1920 and 1930 Censuses did not have household or family questions.  In the 1940 Census, the classification of household members was less detailed than in subsequent years.  The term "private family" was used to designate everything from a person living alone to an extended family with others living in the home, such as employees and boarders, as long as they made up a single household.  The only collection of persons residing together not considered a "private family" was a group of persons living in a hotel, a lodginghouse with five or more lodgers, a school dormitory, prison or jail, hospital or other institution where they were likely to remain for considerable periods of time, the personnel of a military post or a naval station, or the members of a camp or barracks of laborers.  These persons were designated as "quasi-family groups".  When tabulated, however, distinctions were made between heads of "private families", wives and children, other relatives, other members of private families, and members of "quasi-family groups".

 

     The definitions used for households in the 1950 Census were similar to those used in the 1940 Census, with a change in terminology from "private families" to household.  A household (in 1950) included all persons who occupied a house, an apartment, or other group of rooms, or a room that constituted a dwelling unit.  In general, a group of rooms occupied a separate living quarters was a dwelling unit if it had separate cooking equipment or if it constituted the only living quarters in the structure.  A household included both related family members and unrelated persons, such as lodgers and employees, as it did in 1940.  A person living alone in a dwelling unit, or a group of unrelated persons sharing a dwelling unit as partners, was counted as a household.  The number of "private families" in 1940 may be regarded as comparable to the number of households in 1950.  Quasi-households were not counted as households in 1950.

 

     In 1960, a household was defined as all persons who occupied a housing unit.  A


house, apartment or other group of rooms, or a single room was a housing unit when it was occupied or intended for occupancy as a separate living quarters; that is, when the occupants did not live and eat with any other persons in the structure and when there was either direct access from outside or through a common hall, or a kitchen or cooking equipment for the exclusive use of the occupant.  Groups of 5 or more persons living together, who were unrelated to the person in charge, were designated as living in group quarters.

 

     The 1960 definition of a household differed slightly from that of 1950: the change arose as a result of the shift from a dwelling unit to a housing unit as the basis of enumeration.  The number of households in 1960, however, is considered comparable to the number of households in 1950.

 

     In the 1970 Census, substantial changes were made to the definition of a family, with families, households and group quarters being differentiated.  According to the new definitions, a family consisted of a household head and one or more other persons living in the same household who were related to the head by blood, marriage, or adoption.  All living arrangements other than households were classified as either "institutional" or "other" group quarters.  Separate living quarters were group quarters if there were 5 or more persons unrelated to the head, or, if there was no designated head, 6 or more unrelated persons in the unit.  Places that fell into this category were rooming and boarding houses, communes, worker's dormitories and convents.  Military barracks and ships were regarded as group quarters regardless of the number or relationship of people in the unit.

 

     In 1970, single persons living alone were considered single person households rather than families.  Groups consisting of less than 5 unrelated persons living together (that were not in barracks, institutions, hotels, or dormitories) were "unrelated person" households rather than "quasi-families".  "Subfamilies", married couples with or without children, or 1 parent with 1 or more single children under 18 years old, that were living in a household and related to, but not including, the head of household or his wife, was a new definition that began with the 1970 Census.

 

     The 1980 Census continued with the subfamily designation  and the differentiations between family- and non-family households.  However, no designation of head of household was made in the 1980 questionnaire.  The definition of group quarters was changed from 5 or more persons unrelated to the head of household (now called householder), to 9 or more persons unrelated to householder.  If there were no head of household, 10 or more unrelated persons in a unit made it group quarters, instead of the previous requirement of 6 or more unrelated persons.  This change in definition made some units that were group quarters in 1970 into households in 1980.  The definition did not change for certain types of living arrangements, such as military barracks or ships.

 

HOUSEHOLD CHARACTERISTICS

 

     Households with 2 or more persons made up 91 percent of all households on Guam in 1980 (Table 3.1).  Single person households made up the remaining 9 percent.

 

     Of those households with 2 or more persons, 82 percent were married couple families, 15 percent were other family households, and 4 percent were non-family households.  Other family households were more often headed by females with no husband present (73 percent) than by males with no wife present (27 percent.)  The opposite was true of non-family households: 73 percent of these were headed by male householders and 27 percent by female householders.  More males lived in single person households (64 percent) than did females (36 percent.)

 

 

class=Section5>

 

Table 3.1  Households by Persons in Household and Household Type: 1980

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

                                       Number                  Percent

                           ------------------------ -----------------------

                            Total North Cntrl South Total North Cntrl South

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

 

         Total Households.. 24834 11595  8070  5169 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

 

1 person...................  2246  1061   896   269   9.0   9.2  11.1   5.2

  Male householder.........  1415   698   545   172   5.7   6.0   6.8   3.3

  Female householder.......   811   363   351    97   3.3   3.1   4.3   1.9

 

2 or more persons.......... 22608 10534  7174  4900  91.0  90.8  88.9  94.8

  Married couple family.... 18473  8696  5597  4180  74.4  75.0  69.4  80.9

  Other family.............  3307  1413  1251   643  13.3  12.2  15.5  12.4

    Male householder, no

     wife present..........   892   435   320   137   3.6   3.8   4.0   2.7

    Female householder, no

     husband present.......  2415   978   931   506   9.7   8.4  11.5   9.8

  Nonfamily household......   828   425   326    77   3.3   3.7   4.0   1.5

    Male householder.......   602   314   236    52   2.4   2.7   2.9   1.0

    Female householder.....   226   111    90    25    .9   1.0   1.1    .5

 

___________________________________________________________________________

SOURCE:  U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 1A, 1980, Table 16.

 

class=Section6>

 

     There were slight differences in type of household by region: the Central region had a greater proportion of single person households than the other 2 regions, with the majority of single householders being male.  The South had the smallest proportion of single female-headed households.  The South claimed the highest percentage of households with 2 or more persons, followed by the North.  The South also had the highest proportion of married-couple family households.  The Central region had the highest percentage of female-headed family households.

 

     Tables 3.2 through 3.4 show household and family composition from 1940 through 1980 as percentages of persons in each category.  In 1940, 98 percent of the population of Guam lived in households.  This proportion dropped to 62 percent in 1950, then steadily rose to 95 percent in 1980.  The decrease in the proportion living in households from 1940 to 1950 can be attributed to an influx of military personnel and alien laborers after the end of World War II, most of whom lived in barracks-style housing.  Their proportion of the population rose from 2 percent in 1940 to 38 percent in 1950.  From 1950 to 1980, the increase in the proportion of persons living in households, from 62 percent to 95 percent, was paralleled by a decrease in the proportion living in non-institutional group quarters, which fell from 38 percent to 5 percent.

 

 

class=Section7>

Table 3.2  Percent Household Type: 1940 to 1980

---------------------------------------------------------

Persons in Households        1980  1970  1960  1950  1940

---------------------------------------------------------

         Total persons.....105979 84996 67044 59498 22290

               Percent..... 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

In households..............  95.3  88.5  82.2  61.9  97.7

  In families..............  91.2  85.5  80.1    NA    NA

  In nonfamily households..   4.1   2.9   2.1    NA    NA

In group quarters..........   4.7  11.5  17.8  38.1   2.3

_________________________________________________________

SOURCE:  U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 1A,

         Table 17; Decennial Census Reports.

 

class=Section8>

 

     Most (97 percent) households were family households, and were composed of a head, spouse of the head, and other relatives of the head, primarily the own children of the head (Table 3.3).  The proportion of the population in families increased slightly in each of the last 3 censuses, as did the proportion who were heads and spouses of heads of families.  Single females as heads of families increased by 44 percent between 1970 and 1980.  The proportion of children of family heads increased by 9 percent between 1960 and 1970, then decreased by 13 percent between 1970 and 1980.  It would seem from the increase in families, heads of families, and spouses of family heads, and the decrease in own children of heads of families, that many of these family households in 1980 were married couples with no children who began new family homes between 1970 and 1980.

 

 

class=Section9>

Table 3.3  Percent Family Composition: 1960 to 1980

--------------------------------------------------------

Persons in Families                    1980  1970   1960

--------------------------------------------------------

         Total persons.............  105979 84996  67044

 

In households......................  101000 75333  55140

     Percent.......................   100.0 100.0  100.0

  In families......................    95.7  96.5   97.4

   Head of family..................    21.6  19.0   18.5

     Female, no husband present1...     2.4   1.8    NA

     Male, no wife present.........      .9    NA    NA

   Spouse..........................    18.3  16.0   16.1

   Other relatives.................    55.0  61.6   62.8

     Own child of head under 18 yrs.   39.1  48.6   48.1

     Other relative of head.........   15.9  12.9   14.7

   Not related to head2...........       .8   NA     NA

  Not in families...................    4.3   3.5    2.5

____________________________________________________________

1For 1960, it is not specified whether husband is present.

2For 1960 and 1970, it is not indicated whether unrelated

individuals are in family or nonfamily households.

SOURCE:  U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 1A Table 17;

         Decennial Census Reports.

 

class=Section10>

 

     The population that resided in either nonfamily households or in group quarters steadily decreased between 1960 and 1980 (Table 3.4).  Of that population, the majority were in group quarters, though this proportion also decreased.  The proportion of those in group quarters who were inmates of institutions remained constant at 1 percent for the period; the greatest changes were for those in "Other" group quarters: military or construction barracks.  In nonfamily households, both the percentage who were head of households and those not related to the head increased.  The greatest amount of this increase was contributed by male householders, whose proportion increased by 232 percent between 1970 and 1980.  Some of these male householders were men who separated or divorced between 1970 and 1980 and began new households; some were military personnel who chose not to live in group quarters on base, and rented a house off base.

 

 

class=Section11>

Table 3.4  Percent Nonfamily and Group Quarters:

           1960 to 1980

------------------------------------------------------

Persons                         1980     1970     1960

------------------------------------------------------

      Total persons........     9359    12270    13342

         Percent...........    100.0    100.0    100.0

 

In nonfamily households....     46.8     20.4     10.6

  Head of household........     32.6     10.2      4.5

    Male householder.......     21.6      6.5       NA

    Female householder.....     11.1      3.7       NA

  Not related to head......     14.2     10.2      6.0

 

In group quarters..........     53.2     79.6     89.4

  Inmate of institution....      1.5      1.1      1.0

  Other....................     51.7     78.5     88.4

________________________________________________________

For 1960 and 1970, it is not indicated whether unrelated

 individuals are in family or nonfamily households.

SOURCE:  U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 1A Table 17;

         Decennial Census Reports.

 

class=Section12>

 

HOUSEHOLD SIZE

 

     The average size of households on Guam steadily decreased from 1940 to 1980.  In 1940, the average size of a household was 5.57 persons, decreasing to 4.99 persons in 1950.  By 1980, household size had further decreased to an average of 4.07 persons.  The civilian community of Guam in 1980 had a larger average household size than did the military, 4.25 persons and 3.41 persons, respectively.  The average number of persons per household in the United States in 1980 was 2.75 persons, only two-thirds the size of Guam's average household.

 

     Household size also changed within regions over the years, with Southern villages almost always having larger households than any other region.  Table 3.5 shows the average household size by region from 1940 to 1980. In 1940, the region with the largest average number of persons per household was the South, with 6.66 persons; the region with the smallest average was the North, with 4.47.  In 1950, the region with the most persons per household was the Central region, which had 5.34 persons per home on the average; the North had the smallest average household size, with 4.06.

 

 

class=Section13>

Table 3.5   Average Number of Persons per Household by Region: 1940 to 1980

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

                                         Persons per Household

                         --------------------------------------------------

Region                          1980     1970     1960     1950     1940

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

         Total.............     4.07     4.83     5.09     4.99     5.57

 

North......................     3.96     4.59     4.63     4.06     4.47

Central....................     3.98     4.91     5.24     5.34     5.74

South......................     4.43     5.11     5.45     5.22     6.66

________________________________________________________________________

Note:    For 1940 and 1950, "regions" are municipalities.

SOURCE:  U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Census Reports.

 

class=Section14>

 

     By 1960, tabulations of average household size were computed by election district (used interchangeably with "village" in this monograph) as well as by geographical region (Table 3.6).  In that year the village with the highest number of persons per household was Talofofo, with an average of 7.01 persons.  The lowest average household size was in Santa Rita, with 4.25 persons.  Both of these villages were in the Southern region, the region with the largest average household size, which had an average of 5.45 persons per home.  The region with the smallest household size was the North, with 4.63 persons.

 

     In 1970, Umatac claimed the largest average household size, with 6.25 persons, and Agana had the smallest, with 3.99.  The region with the largest average household size was again the South, with 5.11 persons per household.  The region with smallest average was the North, with 4.59.  This distribution was true again in 1980: Umatac had the largest households, with 5.63 persons per household, Agana the smallest with 3.01.  The South was the region with the largest households, having an average of 4.43 persons, and the North had the smallest, with 3.96.

 

 

class=Section15>

Table 3.6 Average Number of Persons per Household by

          Election District: 1960 to 1980

------------------------------------------------------

                                 Persons per Household

                                ----------------------

Election District               1980     1970     1960

------------------------------------------------------

         Total.............     4.07     4.83     5.09

 

North......................     3.96     4.59     4.63

  Dededo...................     4.57     4.81     4.89

  Tamuning.................     3.25     4.44     4.70

  Yigo.....................     3.87     4.48     4.35

 

Central....................     3.98     4.91     5.24

  Agana....................     3.01     3.99     4.51

  Agana Heights............     3.81     4.62     4.88

  Asan.....................     3.80     4.72     4.81

  Barrigada................     4.10     5.06     5.32

  Chalan Pago-Ordot........     4.71     5.64     6.09

  Mangilao.................     3.87     4.64     5.04

  Mongmong-Toto-Maite......     3.97     4.75     5.00

  Piti.....................     3.61     5.28     5.41

  Sinajana.................     4.34     5.52     6.10

 

South......................     4.43     5.11     5.45

  Agat.....................     4.66     5.39     5.85

  Inarajan.................     5.21     6.12     6.68

  Merizo...................     4.70     5.71     6.26

  Santa Rita...............     3.90     4.18     4.25

  Talofofo.................     4.97     5.85     7.01

  Umatac...................     5.63     6.25     6.83

  Yona.....................     4.62     5.95     5.70

____________________________________________________________

SOURCE:  U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Census Reports.

 

class=Section16>

 

     Not only has the size of households changed over the years, the number and distribution have as well.  Tables 3.7 and 3.8 show the number and proportion of households per region and village for 1940 through 1980.  In 1940, the Central region had the highest number and, accordingly, the greatest proportion of households.  The region with the smallest number of households was the North. In 1950 this had changed only slightly: Central again had the largest number of households, and the Northern region the smallest.

 

 

class=Section17>

Table 3.7   Households per Region: 1940 to 1980

---------------------------------------------------------------------

                     Number            |           Percent

          -----------------------------|-----------------------------

Region     1980  1970  1960  1950  1940| 1980  1970  1960  1950  1940

---------------------------------------|-----------------------------

  Total.. 24834 15569 10807  7373  3913|100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

                                       |

North.... 11595  6052  3309  1792   402| 46.7  38.9  30.6  24.3  10.3

Central..  8070  5751  4539  3453  2398| 32.5  36.9  46.8  46.8  61.3

South....  5169  3766  2959  2128  1113| 20.8  24.2  27.8  28.9  28.4

_____________________________________________________________________

Note:   For 1940, households are private families.

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Census Reports.

 

class=Section18>

 

     In 1960, the Central region had the largest number of households, and the South had the smallest.  The village with the largest number of households overall was Santa Rita, with 1241 or 11.5 percent of the total number of households; the smallest was Umatac, with only 109, or less than 1 percent of the total households (Table 3.8).

 

     In 1970, the North had become the largest region, which contained 6052 households or 38.9 percent of the total number of homes.  This was an 83 percent increase in the number of homes in that region (Tables 3.8 and 3.9).  By comparison, the number of households had only increased by 27 percent in both the Central and Southern regions.  One village even had a decrease in the number of households reported between the 1960 and 1970 Censuses: Piti reported 3 homes less in 1970 than it had in 1960.

 

     By 1980 the Northern region had increased its number of households by another 92 percent over 1970 levels, while the Central region had increased by 40 percent and the South had grown by 37 percent.  However, these increases were not uniform: Agana, Asan, and Sinajana had each lost households in the Central region, and Umatac, in the South, had not changed at all from 1970.

 

 

class=Section19>

Table 3.8 Households per Village and Region: 1960 to 1980

---------------------------------------------------------------

                      Number            Percent

                 ------------------- ----------------

Village            1980  1970  1960  1980  1970  1960

---------------------------------------------------------------

Total.............24834 15569 10830 100.0 100.0 100.0

 

North.............11595  6052  3309  46.7  38.9  30.6

  Dededo.......... 5104  2067   948  20.6  13.3   8.8

  Tamuning........ 4067  2039  1159  16.4  13.1  10.7

  Yigo............ 2424  1946  1202   9.8  12.5  11.1

 

Central........... 8070  5751  4562  32.5  36.9  42.1

  Agana...........  294   453   318   1.2   2.9   2.9

  Agana Heights...  827   625   615   3.3   4.0   5.7

  Asan............  526   552   539   2.1   3.5   5.0

  Barrigada....... 1747  1230  1020   7.0   7.9   9.4

  Chalan Pago-

    Ordot.........  660   512   285   2.7   3.3   2.2

  Mangilao........ 1709   667   304   6.9   4.3   2.8

  Mongmong-

  Toto-Maite...... 1312   843   586   5.4   5.4   5.4

  Piti............  422   236   262   1.7   1.5   2.4

  Sinajana........  573   633   633   2.3   4.1   5.9

 

South............. 5169  3766  2959  20.8  24.2  27.3

  Agat............  853   780   529   5.0   4.9   4.9

  Inarajan........  392   307   259   1.6   2.0   2.4

  Merizo..........  351   266   222   1.4   1.7   2.0

  Santa Rita...... 2131  1529  1241   8.6   9.8  11.4

  Talofofo........  398   322   193   1.6   2.1   1.8

  Umatac..........  130   130   109    .5    .8   1.0

  Yona............  914   432   406   3.7   2.8   3.7

_______________________________________________________________

SOURCE:  U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Census Reports.

 

class=Section20>

 

     The shift in household and population location is even more visible when comparing the differences over a 20-year span than over 10 year increments (Table 3.9).  From 1960 to 1980, the Central and Southern regions had increased their numbers of households by 77 and 75 percent, respectively, while the Northern region grew by 250 percent.  Some of this growth can be attributed to the opening of military housing areas in Dededo in the 1970's, but the majority is due to new civilian low cost housing tracts, which began  being built in that village and Yigo in the 1970's, and the proliferation of apartment units in Tamuning.

 

 

class=Section21>

Table 3.9  Percent Change in Households per Region: 1940 to 1980

------------------------------------------------------------------------

                         Percent Change from Previous Census

                  ------------------------------------------------------

                      1970-    1960-    1960-    1950-    1940-

Region               1980     1970     1980     1960     1950

------------------------------------------------------------------------

Total.............    59.5     43.8    129.3    46.9     88.4

 

North.............    91.6     82.9    250.4    84.6    345.8

Central...........    40.3     26.1     76.9    31.4     44.0

South.............    37.2     27.3     74.7    39.0     91.2

________________________________________________________________________

SOURCE:  U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Census Reports.

 

class=Section22>

 

FAMILY CHARACTERISTICS

 

     One measure of "family health" is the change in the proportion of the population under 18 years of age living with two parents, which is affected by the amount of divorce; another measure is the increase in the proportion of female heads of households who have no husband present, which is affected by both divorce and out-of-wedlock births.  On Guam, many unmarried women with children choose to apply for welfare assistance, including subsidized housing, and set up their own households, rather than remain with their parents or other relatives.

 

     Children under the age of 18 were present in 68 percent of all households in 1980 (Table 3.10).  These children in households represented over 99 percent of all children under 18 (Table 3.11).  In 1970, 81 percent of children lived in a married-couple family.  By 1980, this figure was down to 79 percent.

 

 

class=Section23>

Table 3.10  Households with One or More Persons Under 18 Years

            By Household Type: 1980

------------------------------------------------------------------------

                                       Number   Percent  Percent

------------------------------------------------------------------------

         Total households...........    24834    100.0     (X)

 

Total households with children......    16974     68.3    100.0

  Married couple family.............    14316     57.6     84.3

  Other family......................     2587     10.4     15.2

    Male hholder, no wife present...      574      2.3      3.4

    Female hhldr, no husband present     2013      8.1     11.9

  Nonfamily household...............       71       .3       .4

________________________________________________________________________

SOURCE:  U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 1A, Tables 3 and 19.

 

class=Section24>

 

     Nearly 12 percent of children under 18 years were living in other family households in 1980 (Table 3.12), with the majority, 83 percent, living in their mother's household rather than their father's.  Another 9 percent lived with other relatives or nonrelatives: one parent may have resided with them, but not as householder.

 

class=Section25>

Table 3.11  Persons Under 18 by Household Type and Relationship:

            1970 and 1980

------------------------------------------------------------------------

                                            Number            Percent

                                       -----------------  --------------

                                         1980     1970     1980     1970

------------------------------------------------------------------------

         Persons under 18 years         43604    38574    100.0    100.0

 

In household........................    43549       NA     99.9       NA

  Householder or spouse.............       48       NA       .1       NA

  Own child of householder..........    39490    36642     90.6     95.0

    In married couple family........    34330    31117     78.7     80.7

    In other family.................     5160     5525     11.8     14.3

________________________________________________________________________

SOURCE:  U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 1A 1980 Table 17;

         PC80-1-B54 1980 Table 15; PC(1)-B54 1970 Tables 5 and 11.

 

class=Section26>

 

 

 

class=Section27>

Table 3.12  Persons Under 18 By Household Type and Relationship: 1980

------------------------------------------------------------------------

                                         1980  Percent

------------------------------------------------------------------------

         Persons under 18 years.....    43604    100.0

 

In households.......................    43549     99.9

  Householder or spouse.............       48       .1

  Own child of householder..........    39490     90.6

    In married couple family........    34330     78.7

    In other family.................     5160     11.8

      Female householder............     4294      9.8

      Male householder..............      866      2.0

  Other relatives...................     3771      8.6

  Nonrelative.......................      240       .6

 

In group quarters...................       55       .1

  Inmate of institution.............       16      0.0

  Other.............................       39       .1

________________________________________________________________________

SOURCE:  U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 1A 1980 Table 17;

         PC80-1-B54 1980 Table 15; PC(1)-B54 1970 Tables 5 and 11.

 

class=Section28>

 

     In 1970, there were 12,021 husband/wife families (out of 14,315 total families), and 1,354 female-headed families (Table 3.13).  Husband/wife families represented 84 percent of total families; female-headed families were 10 percent of the total.  The proportion of married-couple families stayed nearly constant in 1980, at about 85 percent of all families.  The proportion of female-headed families, however, had risen to 11 percent; the proportion of male householders with no wife present decreased from 7 percent in 1970 to 4 percent in 1980.

 

 

class=Section29>

Table 3.13  Own Children Under 18 Years By Family Type: 1970 and 1980

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

                                      Number        Percent       Percent

                                   ------------  ------------  ------------

Persons                             1980   1970   1980   1970   1980   1970

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

      Families...................  21780  14315  100.0  100.0    (X)    (X)

 With own children under 18 yrs..  15913  10895   73.1   76.1    (X)    (X)

Married couple families..........  18473  12021   84.8   84.0  100.0  100.0

  With own children under 18 yrs.  13770   9413   63.2   65.8   74.5   78.3

Female hhldr, no husband present.   2415   1354   11.1    9.5  100.0  100.0

  With own children under 18 yrs.   1727    919    7.9    6.4   71.5   67.9

Male hhlder, no wife present.....    892    940    4.1    6.6  100.0  100.0

  With own children under 18 yrs.    416    563    1.9    3.9   46.6   59.9

___________________________________________________________________________

SOURCE:  U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80-1-B54 1980 Table 15; PC(1)B54 1970

         Table 11

 

class=Section30>

 

     Of married-couple families in 1970, 9,413, or 78 percent, had children under 18 years living with them, compared to 68 percent of the female-headed families.  These percentages changed to 75 percent and 72 percent, respectively, in 1980.

 

     Persons 65 years and over made up almost 3 percent of the population in 1980 (Table 3.14).  Over 88 percent of Guam's elderly lived in family households, with 52 percent being the householder or their spouse.

 

 

class=Section31>

Table 3.14  Persons 65 and Over By Household Type and Relationship: 1980

------------------------------------------------------------------------

                                 Numbers       Percent

------------------------------------------------------------------------

         Persons 65 and over.....   2985         100.0

 

In family households.............   2638          88.4

  Householder....................   1106          37.1

  Spouse.........................    444          14.9

  Other relative.................   1069          35.8

  Nonrelative....................     19            .6

 

In nonfamily households..........    290           9.7

  Male householder...............    121           4.1

  Female householder.............    153           5.1

  Nonrelative....................     16            .5

 

In Group quarters................     57           1.9

  Inmate of institution..........      2            .1

  Other..........................     55           1.8

________________________________________________________________________

SOURCE:  U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 1A 1980, Table 15

         and Table 20.

 

class=Section32>

 

     In 1980, 36 percent of the elderly lived with relatives and just less than 1 percent stayed with nonrelatives in family households.  Of the remaining elderly, 10 percent were residing in nonfamily households, and 2 percent were institutionalized.  There are no statistics about the elderly for Census years prior to 1980, so it is not known whether these figures reflect large increases in the proportions of the population over 65 who are living outside the family household, or who have been institutionalized.  Local experts in the area of gerontology expect the proportions of elderly who have been institutionalized to increase by 1990, after the opening of the island's first senior care home (St. Dominic's) in 1987 (Guam Health Planning and Development Agency 1985: 227-37; 1987).  St. Dominic's has a capacity of 60 beds, 36 of which were immediately filled with elderly needing constant care when the Intermediate Care Facility of the Guam Memorial Hospital was closed in 1987; an additional 4 beds have been filled in 1988.

 

SUMMARY

 

     Guam is an island with households in transition.  The average household size has decreased from over 5 persons per household to just over 4 persons over the last 40 years, and the distribution of those households has moved from the Central region to the North.  The southernmost area has consistently had the largest average size of households, but the proportion of households located there has been steadily decreasing since 1960.

 

     Household and family composition has also changed over the years.  Comparisons made with data from the last 2 censuses show that the proportion of female headed families is increasing, while the proportion of married couple families is decreasing.  The percentage of married couple families with children under the age of 18 years has decreased slightly, and a parallel increase of female headed families with children under 18 has occurred.  This change seems to show a shift from the island tradition of an extended family to one that, whether by divorce or premarital childbearing, is headed by a single female.  The great majority of Guam's elderly were living in family households in 1980, either in their own household or with relatives.

 

     Should patterns in household size, composition and distribution be consistent, the island may expect in the future to have smaller households, with more single female heads of households, and a continued shift to  residences located in the Northern region.  The next Census will allow us to see if these patterns continued from 1980 to 1990.

 

 


 CHAPTER 4

    MARITAL STATUS

 

     Marriage is an important indicator of socio‑cultural patterns in a society, particularly because the age pattern of marriage affects fertility.  Usually, there is a relationship between age at first marriage and the number of children a woman will have, partly because earlier marriage gives more time for births and younger women tend to be more fertile than older women.

 

     The data on marital status were derived from answers to question 6.  The marital status classification referred to the status at the time of enumeration.  Persons classified as "now married" included those who had been married only once and had never been widowed or divorced and those currently married persons who remarried after having been widowed or divorced.  Consensually married persons were those living in a marital union without a civil or religious matrimonial contract and were included with those classified as now married; they were reported separately as "consensually married".  Persons reported as "separated" were those living apart because of marital discord, with or without a legal separation.  Persons whose only marriage had been annulled, and all persons under 15 years old were classified as "never married."  All persons classified as "never married" are shown as "single" here.

 

     When marital status was not reported, it was allocated according to the relationship to householder and sex and age of the person.

 

CHARACTERISTICS OF MARITAL STATUS

 

     Between 1930 and 1980 the percentage of males who were never married decreased, but most of the decrease came between 1940 and 1960, and the data are obscured, once again, by the presence of the military and their dependents on island (Table 4.1).  Between 1960 and 1980 there was almost no change in the proportion of males 15 years and over who had never married, about 1 in 3 males.  The data for 1950 are clearly affected by the huge presence of the military in that year, many of whom had never married.


 

     The percentage of married males showed the same fluctuations as the never married, but in the opposite direction.  Between 1960 and 1980 about 6 in every 10 males were married.  The percentage divorced remained small, but has been increasing with each census.  On the other hand, the percentage of widowers, which was about 5 percent in 1930 and 1940, decreased to about 1 percent in 1960, and has remained there.

 

Table 4.1.  Marital Status for Males: 1930 to 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Marital Status              1980    1970     1960     1950     1940    1930

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

  Males, 15 yrs & over..  36,408  30,978   25,319   32,572    6,158   5,673

    Percent.............   100.0   100.0    100.0    100.0    100.0   100.0

Never married...........    33.3    34.1     34.4     55.1     42.4    46.9

Now married.............    62.2    61.7     61.9     39.7     51.6    47.8

  Consensually married..     1.6      .8      ...      ...      ...     ...

Separated...............      .9      .6       .6     (NA)     (NA)    (NA)

Divorced................     2.3     2.2      1.5     (NA)       .4      .4

Widowed.................     1.4     1.3      1.4     (NA)      5.6     4.8

___________________________________________________________________________

Note:    1970 and 1950 data for persons 14 years and over; for 1930 to

         1950 "separated" included in "now married"; for 1950, 1698

         widowed/divorced males included in total.

Source:  U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Census Reports

 

     The percentage of never married females has not seen the dramatic changes the males experienced because few of the females were in the military (Table 4.2).  For all censuses through the years, the percentage of never married females has been less than comparable males, partly because of the large number of single males in the military.  There has been a general downward trend in the percentage of never married females, with glitches in 1940 and again in 1970.

 

     The "now married" segment shows the inverse trend, as with the males.  The percentage of divorced females remained at 1 percent or less until 1980 when it jumped to more than 3 percent; the percentage of widows also decreased from more than 10 percent in 1930 and 1940 to about 5 percent in 1970 and 1980.

 

Table 4.2.  Marital Status for Females: 1930 to 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Marital Status              1980    1970     1960     1950     1940    1930

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

  Females, 15 yrs & over  32,599  22,241   14,483   11,561    6,298   5,065

    Percent.............   100.0   100.0    100.0    100.0    100.0   100.0

Never married...........    26.2    29.6     23.1     31.5     39.0    35.7

Now married.............    63.4    63.4     67.7     59.0     50.3    53.0

  Consensually married..     1.6      .7      ...      ...      ...     ...

Separated...............     1.3      .9      1.1     (NA)     (NA)    (NA)

Divorced................     3.5     1.1      1.1     (NA)       .3      .4

Widowed.................     5.5     4.9      6.8     (NA)     10.3    10.8

___________________________________________________________________________

Note:    1970 and 1950 data for persons 14 years and over; for 1930 to

         1950 "separated" included in "now married"; for 1950, 1091

         widowed/divorced females included in total.

Source:  U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports.

 

     Tables 4.3 and 4.4 show more the recent trends by sex.  For males, the percent change for separated and consensually married persons has been much greater than the change for all males.  Some of the change may be due to different interpretations for these categories, and the definitions for separated and consensually married may be ambiguous to some respondents.

 

Table 4.3.  Marital Status for Males: 1970 and 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                             Percent

                                 Number       Change          Percent

                        ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑   1970 to‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Marital Status               1980     1970      1980      1980      1970

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

  Males, 15 yrs & over..  36,408   30,978       17.5     100.0     100.0

Never married...........  12,122   10,559       14.8      33.3      34.1

Now married.............  22,637   19,120       18.4      62.2      61.7

  Consensually married..     581      252      130.6       1.6        .8

Separated...............     320      190       68.4        .9        .6

Divorced................     825      697       18.4       2.3       2.2

Widowed.................     504      412       22.3       1.4       1.3

________________________________________________________________________

Note:   1970 data are for persons 14 years and over.

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑B54 1980, Table 15, PC(1)‑B54,

        Table 6

 

    The percentage changes for females were larger than for males between 1970 and 1980.  Although the number of females 15 years and over increased by about one‑third between 1970 and 1980, the percent divorced jumped by 78 percent, and consensually married females increased by more than 70 percent.  Also, separated females increased by about 50 percent.

 

Table 4.4. Marital Status for Females: 1970 and 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                             Percent

                                 Number       Change          Percent

                        ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑   1970 to‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Marital Status               1980     1970      1980      1980      1970

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

  Females, 15 yrs & over  32,599   22,241       46.6     100.0     100.0

Never married...........   8,553    6,593       29.7      26.2      29.6

Now married.............  20,670   14,093       46.7      63.4      63.4

  Consensually married..     529      151      250.3       1.6        .7

Separated...............     414      208       99.0       1.3        .9

Divorced................   1,155      252      358.3       3.5       1.1

Widowed.................   1,807    1,095       65.0       5.5       4.9

________________________________________________________________________

Note:   1970 data are for persons 14 years and over.

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑B54 1980, Table 15,

        PC(1)‑B54, Table 6

 

     There was very little difference in the distribution of civilian and military persons (defined on the basis of a military person in the household) in 1980.  The percentage of never married military males was insignificantly higher than for civilians.  A higher percentage of civilians than military males were consensually married, and a larger percentage were widowed.  Although 73 percent of the adult male population was civilian, 93 percent of the consensually married males were civilian, as were 94 percent of the widowers.

 

Table 4.5. Marital Status of Males by Civilian/Military Dependent Status:

           1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                Numbers                   Percent

                        ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ Percent

                                   Civi‑    Mili‑    Civi‑    Mili‑   Civi‑

Marital Status             Total    lian     tary     lian     tary    lian

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

  Males, 15 yrs & over.. 36,408  26,530    9,878     100.0    100.0    72.9

Never married........... 12,122   8,746    3,376      33.0     34.2    72.1

Now married............. 22,637  16,483    6,154      62.1     62.3    72.8

  Consensually married..    581     538       43       2.0       .4    92.6

Separated...............    320     221       99        .8      1.0    69.1

Divorced................    825     605      220       2.3      2.2    73.3

Widowed.................    504     475       29       1.8       .3    94.2

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 19.

 

     The marital distribution by civilian and military status for females differed somewhat from the males (Table 4.6).  Military females were more likely to be married than civilian females, probably because females in military households are more likely to be the wives of military men than males are to be the husbands of military females.  For all other categories, civilian females were present in larger percentages than for the whole population (with more than 90 percent).

 

Table 4.6. Marital Status of Females by Civilian/Military Dependent Status:

           1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                Numbers                   Percent

                        ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ Percent

                                   Civi‑    Mili‑    Civi‑    Mili‑   Civi‑

Marital Status             Total    lian     tary     lian     tary    lian

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

  Females, 15 yrs & over 32,599  26,562    6,037     100.0    100.0    81.5

Never married...........  8,553   7,806      747      29.4     12.4    91.3

Now married............. 20,670  15,581    5,089      58.7     84.3    75.4

  Consensually married..    529     488       41       1.8       .7    92.2

Separated...............    414     396       18       1.5       .3    95.7

Divorced................  1,155   1,068       87       4.0      1.4    92.5

Widowed.................  1,807   1,711       96       6.4      1.6    94.7

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 19.

 

     Data on marital status by age were not tabulated in 1970.  When compared to the 1960 data, the 1980 data show that males tended to get married at slightly younger ages than in the earlier census (Table 4.7).  The Singulate Mean Age at Marriage (SMAM) (Hajnal 1954) is derived by an indirect technique to obtain the average age at first marriage for a population or group.  The average age at first marriage for males on Guam in 1980 was 24.5 years (about the same as the 24.9 years reported for the 1960 census).

 

     The number of single males between 30 and 49 years old decreased between 1960 and 1980, while the number of younger and older males increased.  Much of this decrease can probably be attributed to military males leaving the island, and not being replaced.

 

Table 4.7.  Percent Never Married by Age for Males: 1960 and 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                             Percent      Percent of all

                                 Number       Change    Persons this Age

                        ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑   1960 to‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Age Group                    1980     1960      1980      1980      1960

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

  Males, 15 yrs & over..  12,122    8,715       39.1      33.3      34.4

15 to 19 years..........   5,667    2,920       94.1      96.9      95.6

20 to 24 years..........   3,774    3,036       24.3      62.7      67.1

25 to 29 years..........   1,319      989       33.4      25.4      29.2

30 to 34 years..........     554      876      ‑36.8      11.4      19.4

35 to 39 years..........     251      381      ‑34.1       7.4      11.1

40 to 44 years..........     156      172       ‑9.3       5.9       7.9

45 to 49 years..........     110      113       ‑2.6       5.1       6.7

50 to 54 years..........     106       93       14.0       4.7       9.0

55 to 59 years..........      80       50       60.0       4.9       7.8

60 years and over.......     105       85       23.5       4.4      10.0

SMAM....................      ...      ...       ...      24.5      24.9

________________________________________________________________________

Source: 1980 Unpublished data and 1960 Census, Table 13.

 

     The Singulate Mean Age at Marriage for females in 1960 was 20.5 years, which increased to 22.1 years in 1980 (Table 4.8).  Unlike the males, the percentage of never married females increased for all ages.  As the singulate mean age of first marriage indicates, it is likely that females are delaying first marriage to finish schooling or to enter the labor force because the proportions never married have changed considerably.  While only 32 percent of the 20 to 24 year old females in 1960 had never married, this percentage had increased to 40 percent in 1980.

 

Table 4.8.  Percent Never Married by Age for Females: 1960 to 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                             Percent    Percent of all

                                 Number       Change    Persons this Age

                        ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑   1960 to‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Age Group                    1980     1960      1980      1980      1960

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

  Females, 15 yrs & over   8,553    3,351      155.2      26.2      23.1

15 to 19 years..........   4,635    1,690      174.3      90.1      87.1

20 to 24 years..........   2,039      713      186.0      40.1      32.2

25 to 29 years..........     780      266      193.2      15.2      12.2

30 to 34 years..........     344      175       96.6       7.8       8.4

35 to 39 years..........     169      123       37.4       5.9       7.2

40 to 44 years..........     159      112       42.0       6.6       9.1

45 to 49 years..........      94       80       17.5       4.7       8.4

50 to 54 years..........      98       69       42.0       5.6       9.9

55 to 59 years..........      66       41       61.0       5.2       7.8

60 years and over.......     169       82      106.1       6.8       8.8

SMAM....................      ...      ...       ...      22.1      20.5

________________________________________________________________________

Source: 1980 Unpublished data and 1960 Census Report, Table 13.

 

 

     Using vital statistics data to compute mean age at first marriage for the years 1981 through 1985 yields slightly higher results (Table 4.9).  The mean age at first marriage for females was 24.1 years in 1981, decreased to 23.9 years in 1982, then increased and decreased again in 1983 and 1984.  In 1986, it was 24.3 years.  The mean age at first marriage for males was 26.3 years in 1981, decreased to 25.7 years in 1982, rose to 26.7 years in 1983, then steadily decreased to 25.9 years in 1985.

 

Table 4.9.  Mean Age at First Marriage by Sex: Guam, 1981 to 1985

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

           1981‑                    

Sex         1985      1981     1982     1983     1984     1985

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Male        26.4      26.3     25.7     26.7     26.4     25.9

Female      24.4      24.1     23.9     24.6     24.3     24.3

______________________________________________________________________

Source:  Annual Statistical Reports, Office of Vital Statistics, DPHSS.

 

CONSENSUAL MARRIAGE

 

     Use of "consensually" married on the questionnaire is somewhat problematic because there is no generally agreed upon definition of what constitutes a consensual union.  As noted previously, for 1980, the Census Bureau defined a consensual marriage as a couple who were "living in a marital union without a civil or religious matrimonial contract".  It is likely, however, that respondents and enumerators did not always use this definition to decide on marital status of individuals in the census.

 

     In traditional Micronesian societies, marriage was not necessarily formalized by a religious ceremony, and persons sometimes moved into and out of unions over the years.  Although many marriages among Chamorros were formalized after Hispanization by the Catholic Church, not all marriages were then or are now formalized.  Nonetheless, it is not clear that the Census is the best instrument for collecting data on this subject.

 

     Altogether 581 of the 22,637  (3 percent) of the married males in 1980 were in consensual unions (Table 4.10).  Although more than 11 percent of the married males 15 to 19 years old and 5 percent of those 20 to 24 were married consensually, the percentages dropped off after that.  Males in consensual unions, then, tended to be younger than those who were in regular unions, that is, the younger the male, the more likely he was to be consensually married.

 

     These data indicate that there may be problems in interpreting "consensual" marriage.  Since these unions do not seem to persist into middle age, consensual union might be better classified as "trial" marriage.  If "consensual" marriage is fully categorized by the Census Bureau definition, then it is very different from non‑consensual unions, at least in terms of age.  If the government of Guam is to use the data on consensual marriage for planning and policy use, a re‑definition may be necessary, or at least a more thorough evaluation by a survey may be required.

 

Table 4.10. Consensually Married Males by Age: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                 Number      Percent          Percent

                        ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑   Consen‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                              All  Consen‑    sually       All   Consen‑

Age Group                 Married   sually   Married   Married sually

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

  Males, 15 yrs & over..  22,637      581        2.6     100.0     100.0

15 to 19 years..........     176       20       11.4        .8       3.4

20 to 24 years..........   2,142      113        5.3       9.5      19.4

25 to 29 years..........   3,653      118        3.2      16.1      20.3

30 to 34 years..........   4,087       93        2.3      18.1      16.0

35 to 44 years..........   5,302      122        2.3      23.4      21.0

45 to 54 years..........   3,921       65        1.7      17.3      11.2

55 to 59 years..........   1,453       24        1.7       6.4       4.1

60 to 64 years..........     856       19        2.2       3.8       3.3

65 years and over.......   1,047        7         .7       4.6       1.2

________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 19.

 

     The data for females in consensual unions were similar to the data for males (Table 4.11).  Again, about 3 percent of the marriages were consensual, and the trend by age was similar to that found among the men.

 

Table 4.11. Consensually Married Females by Age: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                 Number      Percent          Percent

                        ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑   Consen‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                              All  Consen‑    sually       All   Consen‑

Age Group                 Married   sually   Married   Married    sually

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

  Females, 15 + years...  20,670      529        2.6     100.0     100.0

15 to 19 years..........     490       56       11.4       2.4      10.6

20 to 24 years..........   2,866      168        5.9      13.9      31.8

25 to 29 years..........   4,034      100        2.5      19.5      18.9

30 to 34 years..........   3,740       77        2.1      18.1      14.6

35 to 44 years..........   4,405       70        1.6      21.3      13.2

45 to 54 years..........   3,003       35        1.2      14.5       6.6

55 to 59 years..........     935       12        1.3       4.5       2.3

60 to 64 years..........     608        5         .8       2.9        .9

65 years and over.......     589        6        1.0       2.8       1.1

________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 19.

 

 

 

 

     More than half of the consensual unions for males were of males born on Guam, compared to only 3 in 10 of all marriages, although these were only 4 percent of all the marriages for males born on Guam (Table 4.12).  Micronesians were more likely to be in consensual unions than Asians or persons born in other places, with Palauans and Other Micronesians having more than 5 percent of their marriages being consensual.  On the other hand, males born in the United States and Philippines had very low rates of consensual unions; in fact, although marriages to males born in the U.S. were 30 percent of all marriages, they were only 16 percent of the consensual unions.

 

Table 4.12. Consensually Married Males by Birthplace: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                 Number      Percent          Percent

                        ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑   Consen‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                              All  Consen‑    sually       All   Consen‑

Birthplace                Married   sually   Married   Married    sually

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

  Males, 15 yrs & over..  22,637      581        2.6     100.0     100.0

Guam....................   6,738      306        4.5      29.8      52.7

Northern Mariana Is.....     409       19        4.6       1.8       3.3

Palau...................     206       11        5.3        .9       1.9

Other Micronesia........      99        5        5.1        .4        .9

Asia....................   7,237      134        1.9      32.0      23.1

  Japan and Okinawa.....     296        4        1.4       1.3        .7

  Philippines...........   6,104       66        1.1      27.0      11.4

United States...........   6,725       91        1.4      29.7      15.7

Elsewhere and N.S.......   1,223       15        1.2       5.4       2.6

________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 24.

 

     Finally, 61 percent of all of the female consensual marriages were of females born on Guam, compared to 37 percent of all marriages for females born on Guam (Table 4.13).  Once again, Palau (8 percent) and Other Micronesia (6 percent) had the highest percentage of consensual unions, while United States and Asia had the lowest percentages.  Although Asians made up 32 percent of all marriages, they were only 12 percent of the consensual unions.

 

Table 4.13. Consensually Married Females by Birthplace: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                 Number      Percent          Percent

                        ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑   Consen‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                              All  Consen‑    sually       All   Consen‑

Birthplace                Married   sually   Married   Married    sually

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

  Females, 15 + yrs.....  20,670      529        2.6     100.0     100.0

Guam....................   7,658      325        4.2      37.0      61.4

Northern Mariana Is.....     463       25        5.4       2.2       4.7

Palau...................     275       23        8.4       1.3       4.3

Other Micronesia........     107        7        6.5        .5       1.3

Asia....................   6,725       62         .9      32.5      11.7

  Japan and Okinawa.....     707        6         .8       3.4       1.1

  Philippines...........   4,882       22         .5      23.6       4.2

United States...........   4,759       69        1.4      23.0      13.0

Elsewhere and N.S.......     683       18        2.6       3.3       3.4

________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 24.

 

MARITAL STATUS BY REGION

 

     For 1980, the Northern and Southern regions had basically similar percentages of single persons, 27.3 and 29.4 percent, respectively (Table 4.14).  Piti, with 40.8 percent, and Umatac, with 38.0 percent, had the highest percentages of single persons in relation to their respective election district populations.  These election districts had relatively small populations: Piti had a total population of 2,368 and Umatac had the island's lowest population with 405.

 

     Similar population composition is seen in the "now married" category with the Northern region showing 66.6 percent and the Southern area with 65.1 percent of their respective total populations currently married.  The election district of Santa Rita in the South had the highest percentage of married persons with 73.4 percent of its total.  Sinajana, a moderately populated village in the Central region, had the lowest with 52.7 percent.

 

Table 4.14. Marital Status of Persons 15+ Years by Election District

            Guam: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                              Percent

                                ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                                  Now

Election District          Total  Total Single  Marrd  Widwd   Divrcd

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

    Guam.................  69007  100.0   30.0   63.8    3.3      2.9

 

   North.................  31166  100.0   27.3   66.6    3.0      3.1

Dededo...................  14591  100.0   27.8   66.6    3.2      2.4

Tamuning.................   9768  100.0   26.8   65.2    3.3      4.6

Yigo.....................   6807  100.0   27.0   68.8    1.9      2.2

 

    Central..............  23167  100.0   33.8   59.2    3.7      3.2

Agana....................    673  100.0   33.9   57.2    4.0      4.9

Agana Heights............   2244  100.0   34.8   56.0    5.1      4.1

Asan.....................   1389  100.0   28.9   63.6    4.4      3.1

Barrigada................   5176  100.0   34.2   60.1    3.4      2.3

Chalan Pago‑Ordot........   1878  100.0   32.6   60.8    4.4      2.2

Mangilao.................   4412  100.0   30.1   63.7    2.7      3.4

Mongmong‑Toto‑Maite......   3450  100.0   33.9   58.1    3.6      4.4

Piti.....................   2368  100.0   40.8   54.8    1.9      2.6

Sinajana.................   1577  100.0   36.8   52.7    7.1      3.4

 

    South................  14674  100.0   29.4   65.1    3.6      2.0

Agat.....................   2477  100.0   33.2   59.3    5.0      2.5

Inarajan.................   1206  100.0   36.3   57.5    5.1      1.1

Merizo...................    998  100.0   33.4   58.4    5.7      2.5

Santa Rita...............   5934  100.0   23.5   73.4    1.8      1.4

Talofofo.................   1183  100.0   34.4   59.6    3.8      2.2

Umatac...................    405  100.0   38.0   53.1    7.4      1.5

Yona.....................   2461  100.0   31.2   62.1    4.0      2.6

_____________________________________________________________________

Source:  U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A 1980 Table 26.

 

     All three regions had about the same percentages for those widowed: North had 3.0 percent, Central 3.7 percent and South 3.6 percent.  The village of Umatac had the highest percentage with 7.4 percent of its total being widowed.

 

     Divorces were low in 1980 with an overall of 3 percent for all districts.  The village of Agana with the second lowest population of 673 showed the highest rate of divorced persons at 5 percent, followed by Tamuning, the second highest in population at 9,768, with 5 percent divorced.

 

     So far, in this chapter, we have given a brief overview of marriage patterns from recent decennial censuses.  These data will now be analyzed with reference to vital statistics.

 


VITAL STATISTICS

 

     Data obtained from vital statistics are shown for the six year period 1980 through 1985 for the following section of this chapter.  In the later portion, a five year period, 1978 through 1982, is discussed.

 

     Chamorro grooms comprised between 19 percent and 25 percent of the cohort totals for the years 1980 to 1985 (Table 4.15).  Their numbers rose slightly between 1980 and 1982 (a total of 32), and then increased dramatically in 1983 by 48.  However, the following year there was a sharp decrease from 390 to 313.  In 1985, their numbers increased again considerably, from 313 to 359, a gain of 46 grooms.

 

Table 4.15.  Marriage by Race of Groom: 1980 to 1985

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Race                   1985     1984     1983     1982     1981     1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

     Total........     1498     1382     1653     1393     1480     1636

Chamorro..........      359      313      390      342      308      310

Caucasian.........      401      293      287      274      264      284

Filipino..........      221      229      152      147      204      216

Micronesian.......       36       36       28       30       30       26

Negro.............       79       70       66       55       56       40

Japanese..........      279      320      598      429      492      670

Chinese...........       10       11        8        4        8       10

Other Asian.......       20       17       13       15       15        4

All Others........       93       93      111       97      103       76

________________________________________________________________________

SOURCE: Annual Statistical Reports,Office of Vital Statistics, DPH&SS.

 

Table 4.16.  Percent Marriage by Race of Groom: 1980 to 1985

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Race                   1985     1984     1983     1982     1981     1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

     Total........    100.0    100.0    100.0    100.0    100.0    100.0

Chamorro..........     24.0     22.6     23.6     24.6     20.8     18.9

Caucasian.........     26.8     21.2     17.4     19.7     17.8     17.4

Filipino..........     14.8     16.6      9.2     10.6     13.8     13.2

Micronesian.......      2.4      2.6      1.7      2.2      2.0      1.6

Negro.............      5.3      5.1      4.0      3.9      3.8      2.4

Japanese..........     18.6     23.2     36.2     30.8     33.2     41.0

Chinese...........       .7       .8       .5       .3       .5       .6

Other Asian.......      1.3      1.2       .8      1.1      1.0       .2

All Others........      6.2      6.7      6.7      7.0      7.0      4.6

________________________________________________________________________

SOURCE: Annual Statistical Reports,Office of Vital Statistics, DPH&SS.

 

     The percentage of Chamorro brides, as compared to Chamorro grooms, showed even greater stability over the six‑year period (Table 4.17).  There was a gain of 4 percentage points, from 26 in 1980 to 30 in 1981.  There was a slight increase of 2 percentage points the following year. In 1983, the percentage dipped slightly to 28, only to rise again in 1984 to 29 and then to 30 in 1985.  Chamorro brides appeared to follow a trend similar to that of Chamorro grooms.  With the exception of 1981, where the number of grooms was less than that of 1980, brides showed a steady increase to a peak in 1982 and 1983.  Both showed their highest count in 1983: 462 Chamorro brides and 390 Chamorro grooms.

 

Table 4.17.  Marriage by Race of Bride: 1980 to 1985

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Race                   1985     1984     1983     1982     1981     1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

     Total........     1498     1382     1653     1393     1480     1636

Chamorro..........      442      406      462      444      436      418

Caucasian.........      206      161      180      193      184      181

Filipino..........      332      284      208      153      195      198

Micronesian.......       63       46       62       46       41       47

Negro.............       34       34       26       29       19       14

Japanese..........      300      349      605      442      496      683

Chinese...........        9        7        8        2       10        7

Other Asian.......       12        8        5        9        9        0

All Others........      100       87       97       75       90       88

________________________________________________________________________

SOURCE: Annual Statistical Reports, Office of Vital Statistics, DPH&SS.

 

 

Table 4.18.  Percent Marriage by Race of Bride: 1980 to 1985

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Race                   1985     1984     1983     1982     1981     1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

     Total........    100.0    100.0    100.0    100.0    100.0    100.0

Chamorro..........     29.5     29.4     27.9     31.9     29.5     25.6

Caucasian.........     13.8     11.6     10.9     13.9     12.4     11.1

Filipino..........     22.2     20.5     12.6     11.0     13.2     12.1

Micronesian.......      4.2      3.3      3.8      3.3      2.8      2.9

Negro.............      2.3      2.5      1.6      2.1      1.3       .9

Japanese..........     20.0     25.3     36.6     31.7     33.5     41.7

Chinese...........       .6       .5       .5       .1       .7       .4

Other Asian.......       .8       .6       .3       .6       .6      0.0

All Others........      6.5      6.1      5.7      5.4      6.1      5.1

________________________________________________________________________

SOURCE: Annual Statistical Reports, Office of Vital Statistics, DPH&SS.

 

 

     Caucasian grooms outnumbered any other race in 1985 with a total of 401.  However, prior years showed considerably lower totals; the next greatest total was 293 in 1984, and the lowest was 264 in 1981 for this racial group.  Caucasian brides also showed their highest total in 1985 with 206, although they were the fourth highest ethnic group reported.

 

     The Office of Vital Statistics does not report military marriages specifically, although some tables in the Annual Statistical Report indicate marriages that took place in a military area.  One explanation for the large increase in Caucasian marriages might be that Guam became a homeport for a few Naval vessels and, conceivably, marriages occurred to military personnel while they were homeported here.  The effect of the military ‑ including reservists ‑ on marriage cannot be ascertained without more specific data.  Perhaps the inclusion of specified tables on military marriages in the Annual Statistical Report will help.

 

     There was a greater number of Filipino brides than Filipino grooms in 1985.  In 1980, the situation was reversed, with Filipino grooms slightly exceeding the number of Filipino brides: 216 grooms in 1980 as compared to 198 brides, whereas in 1985 there were 332 Filipino brides compared to 221 grooms.  A plausible explanation for the relatively low number of marriages in these groups is that there is probably a high degree of selective female migration to Hawaii and the U.S. mainland, where migrants acquire jobs as nurses, domestic laborers, farm helpers, etc.

 

     The other racial groups had fewer brides and grooms, except for Japanese, who showed consistently higher figures than most ethnic groups in the six‑year period.  The Japanese, however, have very little impact on the population of Guam, since they come here to marry, honeymoon, and then return to Japan.

 

     For both sexes, all of the large racial groups (Chamorro, Filipino, and Caucasian) showed tremendous increases in the number of divorces in 1985 as compared to 1984 (Tables 4.19 through 4.22), or any previous year.

 

Table 4.19.  Divorces by Race of Husband: 1980 to 1985

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Race                   1985     1984     1983     1982     1981     1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

     Total........      899      622      617      508      382      521

Chamorro..........      202      133      125      103      100      103

Micronesian.......       20       14       15       11        7       14

Caucasian.........      305      170      184      191      132      180

Filipino..........      203      125      121      112       98      165

Negro.............       53       29       17       16        8       18

Japanese..........       10        6        4        3        3        2

Chinese...........        4        2        8        2        1        6

Other Asian.......       32       26       42       42       18       25

All Others........       48       49       32       13       11        6

Not Reported......       22       68       69       15        4        2

________________________________________________________________________

SOURCE: Annual Statistical Reports, Office of Vital Statistics, DPH&SS.

 

     Caucasian husbands had the highest divorce totals ‑ both in numbers and percents ‑ consistently throughout the five year period.  However, Caucasian wives ranked second to Chamorro wives for the same period.

 

Table 4.20. Divorces by Race of Wife: 1980 to 1985

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Race                   1985     1984     1983     1982     1981     1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

     Total........      899      622      617      508      382      521

Chamorro..........      232      180      178      138      122      132

Micronesian.......       22       16       17       15       10       16

Caucasian.........      227      140      122      147       94      133

Filipino..........      212      108      108       96       87      152

Negro.............       36       18       13       14        4        7

Japanese..........       20       10       14        3        5        5

Chinese...........        4        3        4        1        1        7

Other Asian.......       41       33       56       66       47       60

All Others........       81       50       38       10        8        7

Not Reported......       24       64       67       18        4        2

________________________________________________________________________

SOURCE: Annual Statistical Reports, Office of Vital Statistics, DPH&SS.

 

     Filipino husbands and wives tended to parallel each other over the five year period.  Both sexes showed a drop in divorces between 1980 and 1981, and then a gradual increase afterward.

 

Table 4.21. Percent Divorces by Race of Husband: 1980 to 1985

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Race                   1985     1984     1983     1982     1981     1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

     Total........    100.0    100.0    100.0    100.0    100.0    100.0

Chamorro..........     22.5     21.4     20.3     20.3     26.2     19.8

Micronesian.......      2.2      2.3      2.4      2.2      1.8      2.7

Caucasian.........     33.9     27.3     29.8     37.6     34.6     34.5

Filipino..........     22.6     20.1     19.6     22.0     25.7     31.7

Negro.............      5.9      4.7      2.8      3.1      2.1      3.5

Japanese..........      1.1      1.0       .6       .6       .8       .4

Chinese...........       .4       .3      1.3       .4       .3      1.2

Other Asian.......      3.6      4.2      6.8      8.3      4.7      4.8

All Others........      5.3      7.9      5.2      2.6      2.9      1.2

Not Reported......      2.4     10.9     11.2      3.0      1.0       .4

________________________________________________________________________

SOURCE: Annual Statistical Reports, Office of Vital Statistics, DPH&SS.

 

     Again, due to the transitory nature of the Japanese ‑ that is, they merely marry on Guam and then go elsewhere ‑ their divorce rate remained quite low, as was the case with the other Asians, particularly Chinese.

 

Table 4.22. Percent Divorces by Race of Wife: 1980 to 1985

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Race                   1985     1984     1983     1982     1981     1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

     Total........    100.0    100.0    100.0    100.0    100.0    100.0

Chamorro..........     25.8     28.9     28.8     27.2     31.9     25.3

Micronesian.......      2.4      2.6      2.8      3.0      2.6      3.1

Caucasian.........     25.3     22.5     19.8     28.9     24.6     25.5

Filipino..........     23.6     17.4     17.5     18.9     22.8     29.2

Negro.............      4.0      2.9      2.1      2.8      1.0      1.3

Japanese..........      2.2      1.6      2.3       .6      1.3      1.0

Chinese...........       .4       .5       .6       .2       .3      1.3

Other Asian.......      4.6      5.3      9.1     13.0     12.3     11.5

All Others........      9.0      8.0      6.2      2.0      2.1      1.3

Not Reported......      2.7     10.3     10.9      3.5      1.0       .4

________________________________________________________________________

SOURCE: Annual Statistical Reports, Office of Vital Statistics, DPH&SS.

 

     In this segment of the discussion on marriage, data obtained from the Office of Vital Statistics will cover the five year period between 1978 and 1982.

 

     From 1978 to 1980 (Table 4.23), more Caucasian grooms chose brides of other races.  In the following two years, 1981 and 1982, the "Other" racial grooms exceeded Caucasians by a discernably small percentage: 16.0 percent in 1981 and 7.2 percent in 1982.

 

Table 4.23. Marriages by Race of Bride and Race of Groom : 1978 to 1982

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                      Groom's Race

              ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                          Bride Same                    Bride Not Same

              ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Year     Total Total  Cham   Fil  Cauc Other Total  Cham   Fil  Cauc Other

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

1982...   1393   999   277    84   146   492   394    65    63   128   138

1981...   1480  1054   249   115   137   553   426    59    89   127   151

1980...   1634  1221   248   118   136   719   413    62    98   148   105

1979...   1766  1319   258   148   147   766   447    67   112   142   126

1978...   1767  1423   284   150   153   836   344    47    74   140    83

 

Percent

1982...        100.0  27.7   8.4  14.6  49.2 100.0  16.5  16.0  32.5  35.0

1981...        100.0  23.6  10.9  13.0  52.5 100.0  13.8  20.9  29.8  35.4

1980...        100.0  20.3   9.7  11.1  58.9 100.0  15.0  23.7  35.8  25.4

1979...        100.0  19.6  11.2  11.1  58.1 100.0  15.0  25.1  31.8  28.2

1978...        100.0  20.0  10.5  10.8  58.7 100.0  13.7  21.5  40.7  24.1

__________________________________________________________________________

Source:  Annual Statistical Reports, Office of Vital Statistics,

         Department of Public Health and Social Services, Guam.

 

     The number of Caucasian grooms taking brides of another race was greater than the number of same‑race marriages in 1980 (Table 4.24).  This did not occur in any other racial group for the five year period.

 

Table 4.24. Marriages of Caucasian Grooms by Race of Bride,

            Guam: 1978 to 1982

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

          Caucasian Grooms            Race of Bride

          ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Year    Number Percent Chamorro Filipino Caucasian  Other

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

1982.....  274  100.0     16.8     11.3     53.3     18.6

1981.....  264  100.0     13.6     15.9     51.9     18.6

1980.....  284  100.0     18.0     13.0     47.9     21.1

1979.....  289  100.0     16.6     12.1     50.9     20.4

1978.....  293  100.0     17.7     11.9     52.2     18.1

_______________________________________________________________

Source: Annual Statistical Reports, Office of Vital Statistics,

        Department of Public Health and Social Services, Guam.

 

     There was a slight decrease in the number of same‑race marriages for Chamorros which occurred between 1978 and 1981, but the number rose again in 1982 to 277 (Table 4.25).

 

Table 4.25. Marriages of Chamorro Grooms by Race of Bride,

            Guam: 1978 to 1982

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

           Chamorro Grooms              Race of Bride

         ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Year     Number Percent Chamorro Filipino Caucasian Other

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

1982.....  342  100.0     81.0      6.4      4.4      8.2

1981.....  308  100.0     80.8      8.8      3.9      6.5

1980.....  310  100.0     80.0      7.4      5.8      6.8

1979.....  325  100.0     79.4      5.5      6.5      8.6

1978.....  331  100.0     85.8      4.5      2.4      7.3

_______________________________________________________________

Source:  Annual Statistical Reports, Office of Vital Statistics,

         Department of Public Health and Social Services, Guam.

 

     There was a marked (39 percent) decrease of Filipino grooms from 204 in 1981 to 147 in 1982.  This group experienced a slight increase from 1978 to 1979, but then the figure dropped significantly in 1980: from 260 in 1979 to 216 in 1980, a decrease of 20.4 percent.

 

Table 4.26. Marriages of Filipino Grooms by Race of Bride,

            Guam: 1978 to 1982

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

          Filipino Grooms          Race of Bride

          ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Year    Number Percent Chamorro Filipino Caucasian  Other

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

1982.....  147  100.0     29.9     57.1      3.4      9.5

1981.....  204  100.0     34.3     56.4      4.9      4.4

1980.....  216  100.0     32.4     54.6      6.0      6.9

1979.....  260  100.0     32.7     56.9      5.0      5.4

1978.....  224  100.0     21.0     67.0      5.8      6.2

_______________________________________________________________

Source:  Annual Statistical Reports, Office of Vital Statistics,

         Department of Public Health and Social Services, Guam.

 

     Grooms of "Other" races showed a marked downward trend between 1978 and 1982, from 919 grooms to 630 (Table 4.27).

 

Table 4.27. Marriages of Other Race Grooms by Race of Bride,

            Guam: 1978 to 1982

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

          Other Grooms            Race of Bride

          ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Year    Number Percent Chamorro Filipino Caucasian Other

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

1982..... 630  100.0     12.2      2.5      4.3     81.0

1981..... 704  100.0     11.5      1.6      3.6     83.4

1980..... 824  100.0      5.9      2.4      1.7     89.9

1979..... 892  100.0      5.9      3.0      2.1     88.9

1978..... 919  100.0      4.9      1.1      1.5     92.5

_______________________________________________________________

Source:  Annual Statistical Reports, Office of Vital Statistics,

         Department of Public Health and Social Services, Guam.

 

SUMMARY

 

     From looking at both census and vital statistics data, it is apparent that both marriage and divorce are on the rise.  It has been estimated in the U.S. that the divorce rate is approaching 50 percent, that one out of every two marriages will end in divorce.  On Guam, at least from 1978 to 1985, the rate of divorce was not that high, though it was rising.  Between the 1970 and 1980 censuses, the number of divorced males rose 16 percent, while divorced females increased by 78 percent.  There was also an increase in the number of separated males (41 percent) and females (50 percent).

 

     Between 1960 and 1980, age at first marriage increased by 8 percent for females, showing that females were delaying their first marriage, probably to finish schooling or enter the labor force.

 

     By region, Central had the highest percentages of single, widowed, and divorced persons; North had the most married.  By village, Piti had the most single persons, Santa Rita the greatest married, Umatac the most widowed, and Agana the most divorced.

 

     From 1980 to 1984, Japanese men comprised the greatest percentage of grooms, but this was true of Japanese brides for only 1980 and 1981.  Chamorros were the second most likely group to get married between 1980 and 1985, followed closely by Caucasians.

 

     Between 1980 and 1985, Caucasian males were the group most likely to get divorced; Chinese males the least likely.  For females, Chamorros had the highest rate of divorce (except for 1980 when it was the Filipinos), for all years, Chinese women were least likely.

 

     Same‑race marriages from 1978 to 1982 seemed to be more common for those belonging to "Other" races than for the 3 largest groups (Chamorro, Filipino, Caucasian).  However, when "Others" are removed from consideration, Chamorros were more likely to marry others of their own race.  Caucasians generally had the highest rates of mixed race marriages, but this could often backfire: they also had the highest rates of mixed race divorces.  Same race divorces, however, outnumbered mixed race divorces in all years.

 

     Since marriage and divorce are events that can happen more than once to a person, and are not as limited by age as fertility is, they are not as easy to work with as other demographic events are.  The snapshots provided by census and vital register data can only scratch the surface of what is a fascinating area of human behavior.

 

 


 

     CHAPTER 5

 FERTILITY

 

     Fertility is of vital interest in the field of demography, in light of the role it plays in giving shape to age‑sex structure and in producing the alteration in the size of a population.  The age distribution of a population is more sensitive to changes in fertility behavior than to changes in mortality.  The proportion of a population that is young or old depends mainly on the birth rate and not on the death rate, because as people live longer, the population structure, as a whole, becomes older rather than younger.  A population has an increasing proportion of older people when the birth rates have fallen and not because the death rates have fallen.  Any decline in mortality makes the age distribution younger as more children survive.  The decline of mortality has very little effect at middle ages.  On the other hand, any decline in fertility necessarily makes the population older since it reduces the proportion of children.

 

     Measures of fertility quantify the birth performance of a population over a period of time.  These measures can be used to compare the fertility levels of a number of populations during a particular time interval to exhibit a time trend in fertility in a population.

 

     Fertility measures include crude birth rate, gross fertility rate, general fertility rate, and rate of reproduction.

 

     Analysis of fertility trends in the Pacific is not abundant, and Guam is no exception.  Although Guam has had regular censuses, and a great deal of information has been collected, there has been no systematic look at the fertility trends until recently (Levin and Retherford 1986).

 

     The data for children ever born in 1980 were derived from the answers to question 21a (How many babies has ___ ever had, not including stillbirths?),  which was asked of women 15 years old and over, regardless of marital status.  Still‑births, stepchildren, and adopted children were excluded.  Ever‑married women were instructed to include all children born to them before and during their most recent marriage, children no longer living, and children away from home, as well as children who were still at home.  Never‑married women were instructed to include all children born to them.  Data on children ever born reported by never‑married women should be viewed with caution because of the very high rates of nonresponse to the question and the anticipated underreporting of live births to these women.


 

     In the 1980 census, a terminal category of "15 or more" was used for recording the number of children ever born.  For purposes of computing the total number of children ever born, the terminal category was given a mean value of 15.

 

     The data on the number of children still living were derived from answers to question 21b (How many of these children are still living?), which was asked of all women 15 years old and over who reported having had at least one child ever born in question 21a.  For the purposes of computing the total number of children still living, the terminal category "15 and over" was given a mean value of 15.  In addition, all women 15 years old and over who reported having had a child were also asked in question 21c if any children were born since April 1, 1979.  Although the data were collected for women past age 50, subsequent editing procedures only accepted a "Yes" response for women 15 to 50 years old.  Neither of these two questions had been asked in prior decennial censuses.

 

FERTILITY CHARACTERISTICS

 

     In 1980, there were 2,517 children ever born per 1,000 women 15 years and over in Guam, and 2,391 children still living per 1,000 women (Table 5.1).  Another way of stating this is that the average woman had had 2.5 children ever born, and 2.4 still alive.  Until the 55 to 59 year age group, there was a direct correlation between age and number of children ever born, that is, the older the age group of women, the higher the fertility.  Of course, many of the young women had not finished their fertility  and, in the case of the 15 to 19 year old women, many had not even started to have children.

 

Table 5.1.  Children Ever Born, Still Alive, and Children Born in the

            Last Year: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                              Numbers                    Per 1000 Women

                     ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                      Children Children   Births Children Children   Births

                          Ever    Still Previous     Ever    Still Previous

Age Group     Females     Born    Alive     Year     Born    Alive     Year

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

   Total..... 32,599   82,040   77,935       ...   2,517    2,391       ...

15 to 19 yrs.  5,144      613      600      247      119      117       48

20 to 24 yrs.  5,089    4,144    4,079      885      814      802      174

25 to 29 yrs.  5,130    8,394    8,224      897    1,636    1,603      175

30 to 34 yrs.  4,435   10,865   10,645      505    2,450    2,400      114

35 to 44 yrs.  5,259   18,875   18,325      275    3,589    3,485       52

45 to 54 yrs.  3,763   18,437   17,657       ...   4,900    4,692       ...

55 to 59 yrs.  1,280    6,644    6,251       ...   5,191    4,884       ...

60 to 64 yrs.    919    4,925    4,524       ...   5,359    4,923       ...

65 + yrs.....  1,580    9,143    7,630       ...   5,787    4,829       ...

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54, 1980 Table 19.

 

     For those women who had probably completed their fertility, there is evidence of a fertility decline.  Women in the 35 to 44 year old age group had 3,589 children per 1,000 women, compared to 4,900 for women 45 to 54 and 5,191 for women 55 to 59.  Women who were 55 to 59 years old had had an average of about 5.2 children ever born, while those 45 to 54 had 4.9, and the 35 to 44 aged women had 3.6.  While a slight decline of 0.3 children per woman is evident between the 55 to 59 year old women and the 45 to 54 year old women, a larger decline of 1.3 children per woman between the 45 to 54 year olds and the 35 to 44 year olds can be seen.  Older women, those aged 60 to 64 and 65 and over, had still larger numbers of children ever born: an average of 5.4 and 5.8 per woman, respectively.

 

     Tables 5.2 and 5.3 show the differences between the civilian and military female populations in numbers of children ever born, numbers still alive, and births in the previous year.   Civilian women had more children ever born per 1,000 women in all age groups except the 15 to 19 and 60 to 64 year olds, and also had more children still alive per 1,000 women.  For births in the previous year, however, military women had higher rates in the 2 youngest age groups than did civilian women.

 

Table 5.2.  Children Ever Born, Still Alive, and Children Born in the

            Last Year: 1980 Civilians

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                              Numbers                    Per 1000 Women

                     ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

CIVILIAN              Children Children   Births Children Children   Births

                          Ever    Still Previous     Ever    Still Previous

Age Group     Females     Born    Alive     Year     Born    Alive     Year

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

   Total..... 26,562   72,734   68,947       ...   2,738    2,596       ...

15 to 19 yrs.  4,565      502      491      200      110      108       44

20 to 24 yrs.  3,485    2,951    2,913      595      847      836      171

25 to 29 yrs.  3,583    6,160    6,055      657    1,719    1,690      183

30 to 34 yrs.  3,256    8,626    8,451      394    2,649    2,596      121

35 to 44 yrs.  4,472   16,866   16,386      245    3,771    3,664       55

45 to 54 yrs.  3,573   17,691   16,954       ...   4,951    4,745       ...

55 to 59 yrs.  1,231    6,408    6,027       ...   5,206    4,896       ...

60 to 64 yrs.    889    4,735    4,345       ...   5,326    4,888       ...

65 + yrs.....  1,508    8,795    7,325       ...   5,832    4,857       ...

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: Unpublished tabulations, U.S. Bureau of the Census.

 

Table 5.3.  Children Ever Born, Still Alive, and Children Born in the

            Last Year: 1980 Military

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                              Numbers                    Per 1000 Women

                     ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

MILITARY              Children Children   Births Children Children   Births

                          Ever    Still Previous     Ever    Still Previous

Age Group     Females     Born    Alive     Year     Born    Alive     Year

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

   Total.....  6,037    9,306    8,988       ...   1,541    1,489       ...

15 to 19 yrs.    579      111      109       47      192      188       81

20 to 24 yrs.  1,604    1,193    1,166      290      744      727      181

25 to 29 yrs.  1,547    2,234    2,169      240    1,444    1,402      155

30 to 34 yrs.  1,179    2,239    2,194      111    1,899    1,861       94

35 to 44 yrs.    787    2,009    1,939       30    2,553    2,464       38

45 to 54 yrs.    190      746      703       ...   3,926    3,700       ...

55 to 59 yrs.     49      236      224       ...   4,816    4,571       ...

60 to 64 yrs.     30      190      179       ...   6,333    5,967       ...

65 + yrs.....     72      348      305       ...   4,833    4,236       ...

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54, Table 19 and Unpublished Data

 

     The fertility of women born on Guam was higher than for women born elsewhere (Table 5.4).  Although all women had 1,712 children ever born per 1,000 women in 1980, those born on Guam had 2,037 children per 1,000 women compared to 1,476 for women born outside Guam.  The data for children still alive and children born in the year preceding the census followed the same trend.

 

Table 5.4. Children Ever Born, Still Alive and Births in the Last Year by

           Birthplace of Mother: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                      Numbers         Per 1000 Women

                               ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                         Born    Not          Born   Not

                                           on   Born            on  Born

Fertility                        Total   Guam   Guam  Total   Guam  Guam

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

     Females, 15 to 44.........  25057  10523  14534    ...    ...   ...

Children ever born.............  42891  21435  21456   1712   2037  1476

Children still alive...........  41873  20842  21031   1671   1981  1447

Birth in year preceding census.   2809   1224   1585    112    116   109

________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54, Table 24.

 

     Women who were not in the labor force in 1980 had higher fertility than women who were in the labor force (Table 5.5).  Of course, some of the women who were not in the labor force may not have been in the labor force because they were caring for young children.  For females 16 years and over, there were 1,791 children ever born per 1,000 women.  Women in the labor force had 1,671 children ever born per 1,000 women, compared to 1,930 per 1,000 women not in the labor force, and 1,628 per 1,000 women who were unemployed. Of those women employed in the civilian labor force, those who had worked 35 or more weeks in 1979 had rates of children ever born and still alive per 1,000 women that were 25 percent higher than those who had only worked 1 to 34 weeks, and a rate of children born in the last year that was 34 percent higher than those working fewer weeks. Women in the Armed Forces had the lowest number of children ever born: 468 per 1,000 women.

 

Table 5.5. Children Ever Born, Still Alive and Births in the Last Year by

           Labor Force Participation: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                       Numbers         Per 1000 Women

                                ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                 Chldrn Chldrn   Born Chldrn Chldrn  Born

                             Fe‑   Ever  Still   Last   Ever  Still  Last

Labor Force Participation  males   Born  Alive   Year   Born  Alive  Year

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

     Females 16‑44 years.  23938  42874  41856   2800   1791   1749   117

In Labor Force...........  12828  21433  20999   1147   1671   1637    89

  Armed Forces...........    883    413    401     67    468    454    76

  Civilian Labor Force...  11945  21020  20598   1080   1760   1724    90

    Employed.............  11130  19693  19317    963   1769   1736    87

      Worked 35+ weeks...   8471  15550  15249    737   1836   1800    87

      Worked 1‑34 weeks..   2276   3350   3288    149   1472   1445    65

    Unemployed...........    815   1327   1281    117   1628   1572   144

Not in Labor Force.......  11110  21441  20857   1653   1930   1877   149

__________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54, Table 36

 

     Table 5.6 shows ratios of children ever born to children still alive per female by age.  The oldest age group of 65 and over produced the highest numbers of children ever born per woman; those age groups who can be assumed to have completed their fertility had an average of over 5 children per woman. They had the lowest percentages of children still alive, but this should not be considered unusual.  Some of the deaths to these children would have happened at early ages, causing mothers to have additional children to  replace those who had died, but the majority would have occurred to them as adults, and not occasioned replacement childbearing.  The highest ratio of children still alive per female was in the 20 to 24 age group, at 98.4 percent.  Since the total number of children ever born per woman has apparently been decreasing for those women who have completed their fertility, from 5.8 per woman for those 65 and older to 4.6 for those 45 to 49, it may be assumed that women in the younger age groups will follow the same trend and will have fewer children ever born at the end of their childbearing years.

 

Table 5.6   Children Ever Born and Surviving By Age: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                             Children  Children   Percent

                         Children  Children Ever Born     Still    Child.

                             Ever     Still       Per Alive Per     Still

Age Group       Females      Born     Alive    Female    Female     Alive

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

15 to 19 yrs.    5,144       613       600         .1        .1      97.9

20 to 24 yrs.    5,089     4,144     4,079         .8        .8      98.4

25 to 29 yrs.    5,130     8,394     8,224        1.6       1.6      98.0

30 to 34 yrs.    4,435    10,865    10,645        2.4       2.4      98.0

35 to 39 yrs.    2,860     9,192     8,959        3.2       3.1      97.5

40 to 44 yrs.    2,399     9,687     9,370        4.0       3.9      96.7

45 to 49 yrs.    2,018     9,259     8,901        4.6       4.4      96.1

50 to 54 yrs.    1,745     9,178     8,756        5.3       5.0      95.4

55 to 59 yrs.    1,280     6,644     6,251        5.2       4.9      94.1

60 to 64 yrs.      919     4,925     4,524        5.4       4.9      91.9

65 yrs & over    1,580     9,143     7,630        5.8       4.8      83.5

__________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑B54, Table 15, PC80‑1‑C/D54,

        Table 19, and STF3, Table 31

 

OWN CHILDREN FERTILITY ESTIMATION

 

     Because census data for Guam are collected by household, and the own children method of fertility has been readily available in the Pacific, this method has been used to investigate changing fertility trends on Guam.  Other demographic techniques are included where appropriate.

 

     The own children method has been described in earlier publications and needs only to be recapitulated briefly here.   (For more detailed accounts, see, for example, Cho 1973, Retherford and Cho 1978, and Cho, Retherford, and Choe 1987; the current version of the own children computer programs uses formulas given in these sources.)  The method is a census‑ or survey‑based reverse survival technique for estimating age‑specific birth rates for years previous to a census or household survey.  Matching of children and mothers was based on a special question on mother's line number or person number on the household schedule, if the mother was present.

 

     The matched (i.e. own) children, classified by child's age and mother's age, are reverse‑survived to estimate numbers of births by age of mother in previous years.  Reverse survival is also used to estimate numbers of women in previous years.  Since there are no post‑enumeration surveys in the American Pacific and no independent estimates of the population exist, no adjustments are made for underenumeration.  After adjustments are made for unmatched (non‑own) children, age‑specific birth rates are calculated by dividing the number of births by the number of women.  Estimates are computed for each previous year or group of years back to 15 years before the census.  Estimates are not computed further back than 15 years because births must then be based on children at ages 15 or older at enumeration, a large proportion of whom do not reside in the same household as their mother and hence cannot be matched.  All calculations are done initially by single years of age and time (years before the census).  Estimates for groups of ages or groups of calendar years are obtained by appropriately aggregating numerators and denominators of single‑year rates and then dividing the aggregated numerator by the aggregated denominator.  For reasons of economy, the method is usually applied to survey samples rather than complete counts, but because the population of Guam is so small, the complete counts were used.

 

     Non‑own (unmatched) children are allocated to mothers by multiplying each age‑specific category of own (matched) children, specified by mother's age, by the corresponding age‑specific ratio of all children to own children.  Thus, the number of own children at a given age is adjusted upward by the same factor regardless of mother's age, thereby introducing some error in the fertility estimates since the proportionate distribution of non‑own children by age of mother generally differs somewhat from the proportionate distribution of own children by age of mother.  It is, of course, impossible to specify non‑own adjustment factors by mother's age since the mother of an unmatched child is by definition not in the household.  Since older women are usually in more stable household situations than younger women, the nature of the error from not specifying non‑own adjustment factors by mother's age is usually to reallocate erroneously a certain proportion of non‑own children of a given age from younger mothers to older mothers.  This error, if present here, should have little effect on the total fertility rate, but it produces an age pattern of fertility that is too low at the younger ages and too high at the older ages.  The error is minor if the adjustment factors for non‑own children are low, but sometimes these factors can be quite high.  For Guam, in 1980, the factors are indeed low, as can be seen in Table 5.7.

 

Table 5.7.  Percentage Of All Children Who Are Non‑own, By Age:1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                               Age of Child

Census   ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Year       0  1   2   3   4   5   6   7   8   9  10  11  12  13  14

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

1980.....  3  4   4   4   4   5   5   6   5   5   6   7   7   8   8

___________________________________________________________________

Source: Levin and Retherford, 1986.

 

     Reverse‑survival requires life tables.  For the 1980 census, the life table was obtained through the use of census questions on number of children ever born and number of children still alive.  By means of a method developed by Brass (1975), this child survivorship information was used to obtain estimates of child mortality that were in turn matched to the appropriate level of the Coale‑Demeny Model West life table family (Coale and Demeny 1966).  (The procedure for obtaining the usual Brass estimates and matching them to Coale‑Demeny model life tables is built into the own‑children computing package and was used here; see Midkiff and Choe 1978.)  The level obtained in this way specified life tables that were then used to derive reverse‑survival ratios.  For Guam, Coale‑Demeny West Table 23.1 was obtained, which indicated a life expectancy at birth for females of 75.3, the highest in the Pacific Islands (Levin and Retherford 1986:10).  Constant mortality was assumed for the entire 15 year period.  Although sometimes mortality estimates are too low (and life expectancy too high) because of a tendency for respondents to selectively omit mention of dead children when responding to the child survivorship questions, here the reverse‑survival factors are already close to one and are quite insensitive to errors of even several years of life expectancy.  Also, it is quite unlikely that women have neglected to mention children who have died.

 

     Own‑children estimates of age‑specific marital birth rates were obtained in the following way: First, age‑specific proportions currently married in five‑year age groups were obtained from the 1960, 1970, and 1980 censuses of Guam and linearly interpolated between censuses to get age‑specific proportions currently married in five‑year age groups in each intercensal year.  In this way an array of age‑specific proportions currently married, with age in five‑year age groups along one dimension, and time in calendar years (or midpoints of time periods) along the other dimension was obtained.  The original own‑children analysis provided a corresponding array of age‑specific birth rates for all women.  From these two matrices a third array of age‑specific marital birth rates was arrived at by dividing, term by term, the array of age‑specific birth rates by the array of age‑specific proportions currently married.  This calculation assumes that all births occur within marriage.

 

     Marital total fertility rates (but not total fertility rates for all women) pertain only to ages 20 to 49.  The MTFR including ages 15 to 19 is not a good measure because it weights the birth rates at age 15 to 19, which is based on relatively few married women on Guam because of moderately late marriage, to the same extent that it weights birth rates at older ages.

 

     Age‑specific proportions never married were obtained in the same way as age‑specific proportions currently married.  First, age‑specific proportions never married in five‑year age groups were taken from the 1960, 1970 and 1980 censuses of Guam, and then linearly interpolated between censuses to get age‑specific proportions never married in five‑year age groups at midpoints of intercensal time periods or subperiods.  Each set of age‑specific proportions never married so derived provided the basis for calculating a value of the singulate mean age at marriage (SMAM), which is used as a summary measure of nuptiality.

 

     The Coale‑Trussell m index of marital fertility control was computed (Coale and Trussell 1974, 1975, 1978; a computer program developed by James Trussell at Princeton University's Office of Population Research was used for this purpose).  This index measures the deviation from the typical age pattern of natural fertility, defined as fertility in the absence of deliberate family limitation, that results from deliberate family limitation.  The m index depends on the shape of the age‑specific marital fertility schedule, not on the level of marital fertility.  In the natural fertility situation, the shape of the schedule is convex throughout the reproductive ages, whereas in the family limitation situation it is concave at the older reproductive ages.  For purposes of constructing the m index, the standard age schedule of natural fertility is obtained as the arithmetic average of 10 of the age‑specific natural marital fertility schedules designated by Henry (1961).  If the observed age‑specific fertility schedule has the same shape as that of the standard age‑specific natural fertility schedule, m = 0.  If the observed schedule deviates from the standard schedule by an amount that is the average deviation on 43 reasonably reliable marital fertility schedules in the early 1960s, representing a range of differences in the extent of fertility control, then m = 1.  Values of m higher than 1 are also possible.

 

     It should be noted that the own‑children fertility estimates are biased by migration, a considerable problem for fertility estimates for Guam.  If, before moving, out‑migrants have about the same age‑specific birth rates as nonmigrants, and if out‑migrants take their children with them, then the own‑children estimates of age‑specific fertility for earlier years, based on nonmigrants present at the time of the census, should be about the same as if the migrants had actually been present.  If women who migrate leave their children behind in the temporary care of relatives, however, the own‑children fertility estimates will be biased upward, even if out‑migrants and nonmigrants have identical age‑specific fertility.  In this case, the children of migrants are treated as non‑own and allocated to reverse‑survived nonmigrant women.  It is not clear how much of this type of child‑leaving was occurring in Guam in 1980.

 

     Results.  The total fertility rate for Guam decreased from 4.2 to 3.0 during the 15 year period before the 1980 census (Table 5.8 and Figure 5.1).  These rates were the lowest in the Pacific for areas which applied the own‑children method (Levin and Retherford 1986).  The marital fertility rates showed a similar decrease, from 5.0 to 3.7 during the period, indicating low marital fertility rates, and that most of the fertility was taking place within marriage.  Part of the decline can be attributed to a slight increase in the singulate mean age at marriage (SMAM) from 21.1 years to 21.9 years during the period, but a large part of the decline was due to acceptance of family planning, especially prior to 1980.  The m index increased from .30 from 1966 to 1970, to .63 between 1971 and 1975, to .92 between 1976 and 1980 (Figure 5.2).  Almost all of the decline during the final period is attributable to conscious child limitation (i.e. the closer to 1 that m is, the greater the amount of deliberate child limitation.).  By 1979, family planning services were provided not only by the government and voluntary organizations, but also by the military.

 

     Figure 5.3 shows the age‑specific fertility rates for the 1966 to 1970 period and the 1976 to 1980 period.  The figure shows that although there has not been noticeable fertility decline for the youngest women, there was noticeable decrease with age for women in the 25 to 29 year age groups and older.

 

Table 5.8. Total Fertility Rates and Age‑Specific Rates, and Marital

           Total Fertility and Age‑Specific Rates, Derived by

           the Own‑Children Method: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                     Total Fertility Rates       Marital Fertility Rates

                 ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                  1976‑     1971‑     1966‑     1976‑     1971‑     1966‑

Age Group          1980      1975      1970      1980      1975      1970

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

  TFR.......       4.24      3.55      3.02      5.02      4.24      3.71

15 to 19 yrs.        57        69        66       494       638       661

20 to 24 yrs.       190       181       171       301       299       296

25 to 29 yrs.       222       188       164       266       231       206

30 to 34 yrs.       177       137       110       203       159       130

35 to 39 yrs.       128        86        64       146        99        75

40 to 44 yrs.        61        39        24        74        47        29

45 to 49 yrs.        11        10         6        14        13         7

_________________________________________________________________________

Source: Levin and Retherford, 1986, Appendix Tables 1 and 2.

 

 

 

Figure 5.1  Total and Marital Total Fertility Rates:1966 to 1980

 


 

     The decrease is consistent with increased participation in the labor force, and a general decline in fertility for the Territory as a whole.  Data for age‑specific marital fertility rates are consistent with this finding.

 

     Vital statistics for Guam from 1980 allow for comparisons with the own‑children estimates (Table 5.9).  The total fertility rate derived from vital registration, using the 1980 census for denominators, was 3.24, compared to 3.16 for the own‑children estimated fertility.  The age‑specific rates also were very close, although the own‑children estimates were very slightly lower.  The difference may be attributed to the mortality estimates which could have been influenced by non‑reporting of some deaths to children. Ratios greater than 1 can be seen in 2 age groups, 35 to 39 and 45 to 49.  In the 35 to 39 year old group, this ratio was most probably caused by age slippage: incorrect reporting of age of women in the two age groups bracketing this one caused children to be "packed" into the 35 to 39 year old group, while the very high ratio at ages 45 to 49 years was caused by the overallocation of non‑own children to women at these ages.

 

 

 

 

 

Figure 5.2  m‑Index of Marital Fertility Control: 1966 to 1980


Figure 5.3  Age‑Specific Fertility Rates: 1969‑73 and 1974‑78

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Table 5.9  Ratios of Fertility Estimates Derived by the Own‑Children (OC)

           Method to Fertility Estimates based on Alternative Source(AS)

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                        OC/AS ratios

                   ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Year                                          ASFRs

of                        ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Esti‑    TFR    TFR           15‑    20‑    25‑    30‑    35‑    40‑    45‑

 mate   (OC)   (AS)    TFR     19     24     29     34     39     44     49

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

 1980   3.16   3.24    .98    .91    .96    .98    .92   1.11    .96   4.00

___________________________________________________________________________

Note: Births are from Guam, Department of Public Health and Social Services

      (1980); numbers of women from the census.

Source: Levin and Retherford, 1986, Table 5

 

     We have presented some preliminary data on fertility estimates using the own‑children method of fertility estimation.  After the 1990 census it will be possible to look at the overlap between the two censuses to attempt to measure the ability of the census to obtain indirectly estimated measures of fertility.

 

VITAL STATISTICS

 

     In addition to measures derived from census data, fertility indicators are also computed from vital statistics records.  On Guam, unlike many developing countries, vital registration coverage is complete.  The measures described in the following section are from the years 1980 through 1985, and are based on populations estimated from the 1980 census base population.  While births and deaths are recorded yearly, Guam has no accurate record of migration; the denominators used may be lower than the actual populations.

 

     Table 5.10 shows the number and percent of births by age of mother from 1980 to 1985.  As can be expected, females aged 20 to 24 had the highest number and proportion of births in every year, followed by those 25 to 29 years old.  The total number of births grew between 1980 and 1981, dropped in 1982, then repeated the increase‑decrease cycle between 1983 and 1985.  The numbers and percentages of increase/decrease are not large enough to be significant, even for a small population such as Guam's.

 

Table 5.10.  Live Births by Age of Mother: 1980 to 1985

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Age                  1985   1984   1983   1982   1981   1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

  Total...........   3197   3067   3184   2992   3008   3003

    Percent.......  100.0  100.0  100.0  100.0  100.0  100.0

15 to 19..........   13.6   15.2   13.4   13.8   14.3   12.8

20 to 24..........   34.4   33.2   34.0   34.7   33.4   32.9

25 to 29..........   27.5   27.0   27.7   27.0   28.6   29.8

30 to 34..........   16.3   16.8   17.0   17.5   17.1   17.2

35 to 39..........    6.8    6.8    6.7    5.7    5.2    5.1

40 to 44..........    1.3     .8    1.1    1.2    1.3    2.0

45 to 49..........     .0     .1     .1     .1     .1     .2

Unknown...........     .1     .3    0.0     .1     .0    0.0

_______________________________________________________________

Source:  Annual Statistical Reports, Office of Vital Statistics,

         Department of Public Health and Social Services, Guam

 

     Births by race of child are shown in Table 5.11.  The number of births by race each year does not vary greatly, though the proportion of mixed Chamorro births seems to be growing a little each year.  Because of the unreliability of ethnicity statistics from the 1980 Census, it was not advisable to attempt to compute birth rates by race of child.

 

Table 5.11. Live Births by Race of Child: 1980 to 1985

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Race                   1985     1984     1983     1982     1981     1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

   Total..........     3197     3067     3184     2992     3008     3003

    Percent.......    100.0    100.0    100.0    100.0    100.0    100.0

Chamorro..........     50.1     49.9     49.6     48.6     47.3     44.3

  Chamorro Only...     21.6     23.3     22.3     21.6     21.8     22.9

  Chamorro‑Other..     10.5      9.9     10.6      9.8     10.2     10.8

  Chamorro‑Unknown     18.0     16.6     16.6     17.1     15.3     13.4

Filipino..........     14.6     14.0     13.3     15.6     15.4     16.3

Caucasian.........     13.4     14.3     15.5     14.8     16.3     15.4

Micronesian.......      1.8      2.2      1.9      2.2      1.6      2.4

Asian.............      1.0      0.9      1.2      1.1      1.4      1.5

Negro.............      2.4      1.7      2.2      2.0      1.7      1.6

All Other.........     16.7     16.9     16.3     15.6     16.2     15.7

Not Reported......      0.0      0.2      0.0      0.0      0.1      0.0

________________________________________________________________________

Source:  Annual Statistical Reports, Office of Vital Statistics,

         Department of Public Health and Social Services, Guam.

 

     Table 5.12 summarizes fertility indicators for the births from 1980 to 1985.  The first fertility indicator is the Crude Birth Rate (CBR); defined as the total number of births per year per 1,000 midyear population in an area.  The CBR for Guam ranged from 26.3 births per 1,000 population in 1984 to 28.3 in 1980.

 

Table 5.12. Fertility Rates Derived From Vital Statistics Data

            Guam: 1980 to 1985

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Rate                       1985    1984     1983     1982    1981    1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Crude Birth Rate           26.8    26.3     27.9     26.8    27.6    28.3

General Fertility Rate    113.3   111.4    118.4    113.8   116.9   119.2

Total Fertility Rate        3.2     3.0      3.2      3.1     3.1     3.2

Marital Total Fert. Rate    3.8     3.6      3.9      3.2     3.7     3.8

Gen. Marital Fert. Rate   178.8   176.5    188.4    181.9   187.7   193.1

Gen.Legitimate Fert. Rate 124.5   126.8    140.2    137.7   146.3   153.2

Illegitimacy Ratio        260.6   281.7    255.6    206.6   177.2   165.8

Illegitimacy Rate          96.1   100.9     96.3     74.0    64.6    61.1

Gross Reproduction Rate  1550.7  1529.9   1472.3   1497.4  1518.6  1525.4

Net Reproduction Rate    1486.3  1479.7   1580.4   1434.7  1490.5  1509.0

Mean Age of Mother         26.5    26.4     26.7     26.6    25.6    26.5

Mean Length of Generation  26.4    26.4     26.8     26.2    26.6    27.2

_________________________________________________________________________

Source:  Annual Statistical Report, Office of Vital Statistics,

         Department of Public Health and Social Services, Guam.

 

     The major drawback of the CBR is that it does not take into account the age structure of the population for which it is computed, nor does it confine itself to the population "at risk" of giving birth.  One measure that does take age and gender into account is the General Fertility Rate (GFR), which is computed using only the female population 15 to 44 (or 49) as its denominator, while leaving total number of births as the numerator.  These values ranged from 111.4 in 1984 to 119.2 in 1980. The GFR ranges from the low 60s to the high 200s in developing countries (Palmore and Gardner, 1983:69); Guam falls into the middle range.

 

     The GFR limits the population more than the CBR does, but can still be affected by the age structure of the female population.  The Total Fertility Rate (TFR), a summary measure that uses age‑specific birth rates, attempts to eliminate age‑structure differences.  The TFR estimates the total number of live births 1,000 women would have if they lived through their reproductive years and were subject to a given set of age‑specific birth rates.  The TFRs shown in Table 5.11 is the average number of live births Guam women would have if they followed Guam's age‑specific birth rate schedule, 3.2 in 1983 and 3.1 in 1984.  TFRs in the Pacific region computed from census data range from 8.7 for Western Samoa in 1966 to 2.8 for Tuvalu in 1979 (Levin and Retherford, 1986:18).

 

     As most births take place within marriages, rates are available to measure fertility while limiting the population at risk to married women.  These are the General Marital Fertility Rate (GMFR), the Marital Total Fertility Rate (MTFR) and the General Legitimate Fertility Rate (GLFR).  If compared to the General Fertility Rate and Total Fertility Rate, the "married" rates are higher, but not excessively so, indicating that, on Guam, most of the births do occur within marriages.  There are some, however, that do not, as shown by the Illegitimacy Ratio and Illegitimacy Rate.  The ratio expresses the proportion of illegitimate births per 1,000 live births; this ranged from a low of 166 in 1980 to a high of 282 in 1984.  Other countries have had rates as low as 12 for Greece in 1961 and as high as 640 for El Salvador in 1961 (Shryock and Siegel, 1976:283).  The illegitimacy rate represents illegitimacy in relation to the population at risk of having illegitimate births, and is the number of illegitimate births per year per 1,000 unmarried women.  Rates ranged from 61 in 1980 to 101 in 1984.

 

     Reproduction rates tell us whether a population will grow, just replace itself, or decline.  The Gross Reproduction Rate (GRR) is the number of female live births 1,000 women are expected to have over their reproductive lifetime, if none of them were subjected to dying.  GRRs of 1,000 would mean exact replacement of these women; values higher or lower would mean growth or decline, respectively.  The Net Reproduction Rate is similar, but it takes the mortality risk of women in their reproductive years into account.  Both rates for females on Guam for all the years covered are at or above 1400, showing that the population is expected to continue growing.  The mean length of a generation, computed from data collected for the NRR, tells how many years after birth a woman replaces herself with a female birth.  On Guam, this ranged from 26.2 years to 27.2 years.

 

     The mean age of mother is computed to distinguish populations who have their children relatively early in life from those who have them relatively later.  It can also show whether women are delaying childbearing.  On Guam, it would appear that women are delaying childbearing slightly, but these rates may be affected by the small number of women involved.  In 1980, the mean age was 26.5 years; after dipping to 25.6 in 1981, it rose to 26.7 in 1983, then dipped and rose again.

 

SUMMARY

 

     Fertility on Guam is declining.  The number of children ever born for women who have completed their childbearing decreased from 5.8 to 3.6 children per woman in 1980.  Except for those age 15 to 19 and 60 to 64 years, civilian women had more children ever born and still alive than did military women.  The fertility for women born on Guam was higher than for women born elsewhere; women not in the labor force had higher fertility than those who were in the labor force.

 

     Census methods of measuring fertility showed that fertility on Guam declined between 1965 and 1980, both overall and for married women.  Most fertility took place within marriage.  There was a slight increase in mean age at marriage, contributing to the decline in fertility.  Another contributing factor was the use of family planning.  Many women probably delayed childbearing due to labor force participation.

 

     Vital statistics indicators for the past 6 years showed that the fertility decline was continuing, though reproduction rates were still high enough to keep the population growing.  While some illegitimacy occurred, most births continued to take place within marriage.  The proportion of mixed Chamorro births increased every year; the proportions of births of children of all other races fluctuated from year to year.

 

     We have seen in this chapter two methods of measuring fertility, using census and vital registration data.  Both have confirmed that Guam's population will continue to grow through reproductive measures, regardless of other factors, such as migration.

 


   CHAPTER 6

   MORTALITY

 

     Mortality describes the risk of dying.  Measures of mortality quantify the risks of dying for a population exposed over a period of time.  Mortality on Guam has been, for the most part, decreasing since the inception of the U.S. Naval Administration.  After Spain ceded Guam to the United States, considerable changes to the islands infrastructure took place.  The enhanced quality of life dramatically affected the demographic picture of Guam's population.

 

     More than any other single factor, a healthier environment probably had the most effect on the downward trend of mortality.  Despite the recent phenomenal growth in the population from immigration, the quality of life is still conducive to longevity and natural increase.  Post‑war Guam saw dramatic changes in social and economic structures.  Chamorros experienced dramatic transitions that were also occurring on the U.S. mainland.

 

     The 1980 census data did not include questions designed to obtain information on mortality of Guam's population.

 

MORTALITY CHARACTERISTICS

 

     The system of vital registration, with respect to the recording of deaths, was started by the Spanish government prior to the turn of the century, and was adequate enough to be continued by the then newly‑established U.S. Naval Government.  With the conversion from the Spanish language to English on the forms, this system continued until mid‑1955, after which a standard U.S. registration form was instituted that allowed pre‑coded automated tabulation.  At any rate, mortality trends for the early part of this century are largely derived from the reporting of deaths by village commissioners to the ministry of civilian affairs, which was responsible for vital registration.

 

     The mortality trend at the beginning of the century can best be described as extreme at certain points, when compared to later periods.  Significant events such as the catastrophic typhoon in 1905, and a series of epidemics in 1918 (influenza), 1924 (bacillary dysentery), 1932 and 1934 (measles), and 1938 (whooping cough) contributed to high mortality (Haddock 1973:38).  These epidemics resulted in just over 1,000 deaths over a 30 year period.

 

     Despite these events, Guam's Crude Death Rate (CDR) showed a gradual decline beginning in 1910 when sanitary conditions, such as the introduction of piped water to the city of Agana, were improved by the Naval government.  In fact, the epidemics had the net effect on the CDR (as it pertained to Guam's aggregate population) of a decline from about 25 to approximately 20 deaths per 1000 persons (Jongstra 1985:82).


 

     Registration of all vital events stopped during World War II, but resumed immediately afterward.  Thus, information on vital events that occurred during the war was obtained from survivors, as they best could recall.  However, there existed a serious under‑registration of deaths for those two and a half years, including deaths that occurred during the liberation of Guam.  There were about 1,100 deaths during the two months of liberation (July and August 1944).  Subsequent death records show an accumulated total of 1,342 deaths for 1944.  The

total deaths for the two months, therefore, accounted for 82 percent of the total deaths (Jongstra 1985:83‑84).  The number of civilian casualties as opposed to Japanese and U.S. military deaths is undetermined.

 

     The immigrant population has affected the mortality rates during the century because the age and sex distribution of immigrants differs significantly from the native population (see Chapter 7 on Migration).  That is, because immigrants tend to be young adult males, the denominators tend to increase while the numerators do not since mortality is rather low for the age groups of migrants; also, there is probably some selection in the migration process ‑ immigrants may be healthier than the sending population in general.

 

     The Crude Death Rate decreased considerably in the 1950s to about 5 per 1000, where it remains.  The mortality decline that had set in before World War II did not show any further dramatic decrease after the 1950s.

 

     Infant mortality at the outset of this century was relatively high.  The Infant Mortality Rate (IMR) was also affected by the diseases that claimed lives at all other ages until 1950, when modern medical facilities were built.  A steady decline in the IMR is consistent with an overall reduction of mortality during this period, from about 200 deaths per 1000 live births in 1902 to about 30 per 1000 in 1950.  Near the end of 1950, Guam's  administration became civilian, resulting in some under‑registration for 1951, and showing a sharp dip in rates (Figure 6.1).  Except for this one aberration, Infant Mortality Rates continued to decrease gradually, although more slowly than before, until they reached the current value of about 10 infant deaths per 1000 live births.

 

     The age and sex distribution of mortality clearly shows fundamental changes in the pattern of mortality that occurred between 1920 and 1980 (Jongstra 1985: 85).  The values for 1920 in Tables 6.1 and 6.2 particularly suffer from an upward bias, due to the inclusion of deaths resulting from the influenza epidemic that swept Guam in November and December 1918.  Jongstra further notes that the bias is not as strong as might be expected, since it was partly compensated for by the low mortality that characterizes the vital statistics of 1919 and 1920.  Relatively low mortality can still be noted from the age specific mortality rates in 1930 for the higher age groups.  Around 1940, a similar, although less dramatic, situation existed as the result of an epidemic of whooping cough in 1938.  For 1970, some deviations from the general mortality decline appeared which can be attributed to deaths among persons returning from Vietnam (Jongstra 1985: 85).

 

Table 6.1  Age‑Specific Mortality Rates For Males: Guam: 1920 to 1980

           (Rates per 1000)

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Males                                 Year

Age Group     1920     1930     1940     1950     1960     1970     1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

Under 1..    138.9    191.8    109.8     60.9     31.0     31.1     13.6

1 to 4...     59.5     47.8     12.5      4.5      1.4      1.6       .7

5 to 9...     13.1      5.1      2.1      1.2       .6       .4       .4

10 to 14.      4.4      1.5      1.1       .5       .6       .9       .3

15 to 19.     11.8      3.5      1.8       .8      1.8      3.9      1.3

20 to 24.     12.0      5.0      6.0      1.2      2.3      2.7      2.2

25 to 29.               4.1      4.5      1.5      1.3      2.3      2.1

30 to 34.     12.9      5.2      7.1      1.9      2.1      2.5      2.3

35 to 39.                       11.3      3.5      1.4      2.9      1.8

40 to 44.     30.4     10.5     17.9      4.3      4.0      5.7      3.9

45 to 49.                       18.2      9.7      7.3      5.9      7.4

50 to 54.     52.1     17.2     26.7     10.9     12.2     11.5     10.9

55 to 59.                       18.8     11.8     19.7     20.7     14.1

60 to 64.    112.4     28.6     33.5     28.8     29.1     38.1     26.8

65 to 69.    351.4              56.0     38.2     43.4     40.1     35.7

70 to 74.              59.3     72.3     55.6     48.4     89.6     42.5

Over 75..             147.1    173.7     98.6    142.2     83.3     86.5

________________________________________________________________________

Note: For 1920 and 1930, some data collected for 10‑year age groups only.

Source:  Eduard Jongstra, Unpublished Master's Thesis, State

         University of Groningen, The Netherlands, 1985; Office of Vital

         Statistics, Department of Public Health and Social Services,

         Guam

 

 

FIGURE 6.1  INFANT DEATHS PER 1000 BIRTHS

GUAM: 1920 TO 1980

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 


     The age group 1 to 4 years old experienced the biggest decrease in mortality rates.  Between 1920 and 1980, mortality rates of children 1 to 4 decreased by 99 percent.  All other groups, but particularly those less than 20 for males and less than 45 for females, also showed dramatic decreases in mortality.  For females, this improvement in life expectancy was demonstrated in the childbearing ages.  Table 6.2 shows that until 1960, female mortality between ages 15 and 40 was higher than for males in that age range.  Between 1950 and 1986, this situation appears to have reversed.  Better health care around the time of child delivery undoubtedly contributed to this change.

 

Table 6.2  Age‑Specific Mortality Rates For Females, Guam: 1920 to 1980

           (Rates per 1000)

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Females                               Year

Age Group     1920     1930     1940     1950     1960     1970     1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

Under 1..    149.3   171.0    104.8     48.9     26.6     17.3     15.1

1 to 4...     55.8    47.5     14.1      3.3      1.2      1.4       .5

5 to 9...     12.0     5.5      1.5       .8       .7       .4       .3

10 to 14.      4.0     2.5      1.2      1.4       .6       .5       .1

15 to 19.     11.5     4.9      2.9      2.7       .3       .7       .7

20 to 24.     13.3    10.2      6.8      3.0       .8       .9       .7

25 to 29.             12.0      5.7      1.6      1.2       .7      1.0

30 to 34.     21.6     6.7      9.9      3.9       .5       .6       .5

35 to 39.                      10.3      4.8      2.0      1.4      1.6

40 to 44.     20.8    10.3      9.8      5.9      3.8      2.1      1.5

45 to 49.                       8.1     10.0      5.3      6.0      1.8

50 to 54.     44.3    18.3      8.9     11.0      9.0      5.5      5.7

55 to 59.                      16.0     12.2      7.6     13.2      8.8

60 to 64.    102.5    22.4     24.0     22.2     17.3     17.6     13.4

65 to 69.    267.7             25.2     28.2     23.5     26.5     26.1

70 to 74.             49.3     65.6     44.4     58.4     52.4     38.4

Over 75..             68.6    152.1     77.8     86.4     94.9     80.9

________________________________________________________________________

Note: Some data for 1920 and 1930 collected for 10‑year age groups only.

Source:  Eduard Jongstra, Unpublished Master's Thesis, State

         University of Groningen, The Netherlands, 1985; Office of Vital

         Statistics, Department of Public Health and Social Services,

         Guam.

 

 

VITAL STATISTICS DATA

 

     For the period 1978 to 1982 (Table 6.3), more deaths were reported in the age group 45 to 64 than in any other age group.  About 30 percent of all deaths in every year occurred in this age group.  This age group also showed just over twice the number of deaths that occurred in the next youngest age group of 25 to 44 years.

 

Table 6.3  Distribution of Deaths by Age: 1978 to 1982

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Age at Death           1978     1979     1980     1981     1982

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

   Total deaths...      424      377      422      406      443

Less than 1 year..       46       33       49       32       34

1 to 4 years......       11        9        5        3       10

5 to 14 years.....       10        4       11        4        6

15 to 24 years....       39       31       25       26       14

25 to 44 years....       65       50       58       51       45

45 to 64 years....      125      120      126      125      141

65 to 74 years....       60       63       82       91       93

75 to 84 years....       51       52       42       46       75

Over 85 years.....       17       15       24       28       25

_______________________________________________________________

Source:  Annual Statistical Report, Office of Vital Statistics,

         Department of Public Health and Social Services, Guam.

 

     Between 1978 and 1981, the death rates for infants (those less than 1 year of age) experienced peaks and troughs before stabilizing in 1982.  However, the percent distribution for the five years was fairly level, with the highest percentage reported at 11.6 in 1980, and the lowest at 7.7 percent in 1982 (Table 6.4).

 

Table 6.4   Percent Deaths by Age: 1978 to 1982

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Age at Death           1978     1979     1980     1981     1982

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

   Total deaths...    100.0    100.0    100.0    100.0    100.0

Less than 1 year..     10.8      8.8     11.6      7.8      7.7

1 to 4 years......      2.6      2.4      1.2       .7      2.3

5 to 14 years.....      2.4      1.1      2.6      1.0      1.4

15 to 24 years....      9.2      8.2      5.9      6.4      3.2

25 to 44 years....     15.3     13.3     13.7     12.6     10.2

45 to 64 years....     29.5     31.8     29.9     30.8     31.8

65 to 74 years....     14.2     16.7     19.4     22.4     21.0

75 to 84 years....     12.0     13.8     10.0     11.3     16.9

Over 85 years.....      4.0      4.0      5.7      6.9      5.6

_______________________________________________________________

Source:  Annual Statistical Report, Office of Vital Statistics,

         Department of Public Health and Social Services, Guam.

 

     Moreover, the distribution of infant deaths between sexes (Table 6.5) shows an alternating pattern over the five years, beginning with 1978, where males showed a total of 27 deaths, and females 19.  For the following year, 1979, the reverse is evident, with males showing a total of 11 deaths and females 22.  The situation again reversed itself in 1980, with males having 30 deaths and females with 19.  This switching back and forth continued for the next 2 years, with neither males nor females having a dominant trend in numbers of infant deaths.

 

Table 6.5    Deaths by Age and Sex: 1978 to 1982

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

               1978       1979        1980        1981        1982

Age at    ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Death       Male  Fmle  Male  Fmle  Male  Fmle  Male  Fmle  Male  Fmle

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

 Total...    274   150   233   144   263   159   242   164   251   192

Under 1 yr    27    19    11    22    30    19    13    19    19    15

1 to 4....     3     8     7     2     2     3     1     2     6     4

5 to 14...     7     3     2     2     9     2     2     2     2     4

15 to 24..    33     6    19    12    20     5    22     4    11     3

25 to 44..    46    19    34    16    44    14    34    17    33    12

45 to 64..    86    39    89    31    86    40    86    39    91    50

65 to 74..    31    29    36    27    46    36    53    38    50    43

75 to 84..    32    19    27    25    18    24    23    23    33    42

Over 85...     9     8     8     7     8    16     8    20     6    19

 

Total       64.6  35.4  61.8  38.2  62.3  37.7  59.6  40.4  56.7  43.3

Under 1 yr   6.4   4.5   2.9   5.8   7.1   4.5   3.2   4.7   4.3   3.4

1 to 4....    .7   1.9   1.9    .5    .5    .7    .3    .5   1.4    .9

5 to 14...   1.7    .7    .5    .5   2.1    .5    .5    .5    .5    .9

15 to 24..   7.9   1.4   5.0   3.2   4.7   1.2   5.4   1.0   2.5    .7

25 to 44..  10.8   4.5   9.0   4.2  10.4   3.3   8.4   4.2   7.4   2.7

45 to 64..  20.1   9.2  23.6   8.2  20.4   9.5  21.2   9.6  20.5  11.3

65 to 74..   7.3   6.8   9.5   7.2  10.9   8.5  13.1   9.4  11.3   9.7

75 to 84..  12.0   4.5   7.2   6.6   4.3   5.7   5.7   5.7   7.4   9.5

Over 85...   2.1   1.9   2.1   1.9   1.9   3.8   2.0   4.9   1.4   4.3

______________________________________________________________________

Source:  Annual Statistical Report, Office of Vital Statistics,

         Department of Public Health and Social Services, Guam.

 

 

     Racial distribution of deaths for the five‑year period of 1978 to 1982 (Table 6.6) indicates that in 1978 Chamorro deaths were almost 6 times greater than the next highest racial group, Caucasians.  For 1979, Chamorros accounted for 64 percent of all deaths ‑ just over 5 times more than the deaths of the next highest race, Filipinos.  In 1980, Chamorros were 61 percent of all deaths, with Filipinos second at 15 percent of deaths.  Chamorro deaths were over 4 times higher than Filipino deaths that year.

 

Table 6.6   Deaths by Race: 1978 to 1982

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                    Number                     Percent

          ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Race       1978 1979 1980 1981 1982  1978  1979  1980  1981  1982

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

  Total...  424  377  422  406  443 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Chamorro..  278  242  256  249  306  65.6  64.2  60.7  61.3  69.1

Filipino..   39   46   62   57   54   9.2  12.2  14.7  14.0  12.2

Caucasian.   50   44   45   47   40  11.8  11.7  10.7  11.6   9.0

Micronesn.   32   26   36   23   25   7.5   6.9   8.5   5.7   5.6

Asian.....   14   12   16   22    9   3.3   3.2   3.8   5.4   2.0

All Others   10    6    7    8    9   2.4   1.6   1.7   2.0   2.0

Not Reptd.    1    1    0    0    0    .2    .3   0.0   0.0   0.0

_________________________________________________________________

Source:  Annual Statistical Report, Office of Vital Statistics,

         Department of Public Health and Social Services, Guam.

 

     In the previous three years, 1978 to 1980, it appeared that Chamorro deaths were on the decline, but in 1981, figures rose appreciably, to 61 percent of deaths, then dramatically in 1982, to 69 percent of deaths.

 

     Percentages show that the racial groups, other than Chamorros, were relatively stable in their respective proportions of deaths for the five‑year period.

 

     In relation to the age structure, 4 percent of the total Chamorro population were of persons 65 years and older in 1980 (Table 6.7).  By contrast, this same age group contributed 47 percent of all Chamorro deaths that year.  The next two younger age categories (55 to 64 years and 45 to 54 years) had the next highest percentages of deaths at 18 and 10 percent, respectively. (Table 6.8).  As with the first age groups, the latter two age groups were also small in their percentage of population distribution; 4 percent for the group 55 to 64 years, and 7 percent for those 45 to 54 years.

 

Table 6.7  Age by Race: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                              Cham‑  Fili‑           All    Not

Age Group              Total   orro   pino  White Others   Rptd

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

  All ages........    105979  47845  22447  19751   8786   7150

    Percent.......     100.0  100.0  100.0  100.0  100.0  100.0

Less than 5 yrs...      12.3   13.2   11.0   12.9   10.3   10.8

5 to 14 yrs.......      22.6   28.4   19.4   16.2   18.4   16.6

15 to 19 yrs......      10.4   13.2    7.8    7.9    8.0    9.4

20 to 24 yrs......      10.5    8.3    6.4   18.4    8.5   18.7

25 to 34 yrs......      18.5   13.6   18.7   26.0   23.8   23.5

35 to 44 yrs......      10.7    8.3   12.8   11.2   16.4   11.6

45 to 54 yrs......       7.7    7.1   12.1    4.2    9.8    5.1

55 to 64 yrs......       4.5    4.3    8.1    2.2    3.7    2.7

65 yrs. and older.       2.8    3.6    3.8     .9    1.2    1.6

_______________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census  PC80‑1‑C/D54, Table 21

 

     By comparison, Filipinos aged 65 years and older constituted about the same proportion of their ethnic group as did Chamorros, 4 percent.  Likewise, the same observation as with Chamorros can be made in regard to deaths, since Filipinos in the age group 65 and older had the highest percentage of total deaths.  The next lower age groups, 55 to 64 years, also had the next highest percentage of total deaths with 19.  However, Filipinos in the age groups 5 years and under, with a slightly lower percentage of 18, were the third highest in total deaths.

 

     The inverse correlation between the relatively small proportion of persons in the oldest age group and the higher proportion of deaths attributed to that age group is understandable because older people are more prone to disease, particularly chronic disease, than younger people.  Two prominent factors that bear upon this demographic phenomenon are poor environmental and sanitation conditions that existed before 1950, and the lack of proper nutrition, especially during the Japanese occupation of Guam.  At least with those 65 years and older in 1980 ‑ that is, those born in 1915 or earlier ‑ these factors would presumably contribute to their deaths; however, only an analysis of cause of death variables will give greater credence to this assumption.

 

     In 1980, children less than 5 years old were only 9 percent of all Chamorro deaths, while Filipinos had twice that percentage (18 percent) (Table 6.8).   Deaths to Whites less than 5 years old were only a little lower (16 percent), and "All Others" showed 22 percent.  As these data do not separate infant (less than 1 year) deaths from other deaths to those less than 5 years, it is not known what proportion infant deaths contribute to all deaths in this age group.

 

     In other age groups, specifically those 25 to 34 years and 55 to 64 years, Whites showed a high percentage in comparison to the other racial groups.  Nearly 18 percent of deaths to Whites in 1980 were to those 25 to 34 years old, which was nearly treble the figure for Filipinos or Chamorros.  Moreover, in the age group 55 to 64 years, Whites had the highest percentage, at 20 percent.  These high proportions, however, may be a result of the small numbers of Whites, rather than a true picture of Whites' mortality.

 

Table 6.8  Deaths by Race and Age: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                              Cham‑  Fili‑           All

Age Group              Total   orro   pino  White Others

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

  All ages........       422    256     62     45     59

    Percent.......     100.0  100.0  100.0  100.0  100.0

Less than 5 yrs...      12.8    9.0   17.7   15.6   22.0

5 to 14 yrs.......       2.6    1.6    3.2    2.2    6.8

15 to 19 yrs......       2.4    2.0    3.2    2.2    3.4

20 to 24 yrs......       3.6    3.1    1.6    6.7    5.1

25 to 34 yrs......       7.8    5.5    4.8   17.8   13.6

35 to 44 yrs......       5.9    4.3    8.1    8.9    8.5

45 to 54 yrs......      11.4   10.2   11.3   11.1   16.9

55 to 64 yrs......      18.5   18.0   19.4   20.0   18.6

65 yrs. and older.      35.1   46.5   30.6   15.6    5.1

_______________________________________________________________

Source:  Annual Statistical Report, Office of Vital

         Statistics, Department of Public Health and Social

         Services, Guam.

 

     It is not known whether the data in Table 6.8 discussed in the preceding paragraphs are anomalies for the year 1980, or if they represent a trend in deaths by age and race. In any event, these tabulations indicate areas which might interest health researchers as well as demographers.

 

 

LEADING CAUSES OF DEATH

 

     In the period 1981 to 1985 (Table 6.9) the two leading causes of death on Guam were heart disease and cancer, which placed first and second, respectively.  These diseases accounted for 880 deaths (572 heart disease related deaths and 308 cancer related deaths) in the five‑year period.  Cerebrovascular diseases ranked third in 1981, 1982, and 1985, and fourth in 1983 and 1984.  In total, cerebrovascular diseases accounted for 139 deaths in the period, making it the third leading cause of death on Guam.

 

     Other leading causes for the same period were motor vehicle accidents with 107 deaths, which placed it fourth overall, "other accidents" (drowning, electrocutions, etc.) at 104 deaths, and diabetes at 95 deaths.

 

Table 6.9  Leading Causes of Death: 1981 to 1985

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Cause of Death      Totl Rnk 1981 Rnk 1982 Rnk 1983 Rnk 1984 Rnk 1985  Rnk

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

  All Causes....    2202 ... 406  ...  443 ...  462  ... 450 ...  441  ...

Diseases of Heart.   572   1  96    1  116   1  137    1 113   1  110    1

Neoplasms (Cancer).  308   2  58    2   64   2   60    2  60   2   66    2

Cerebrovsclr Dis. .  139   3  31    3   25   3   22    4  30   4   31    3

Othr Disease of Cntrl

  Nervous System...   83   7  12    7   24   4   15    9  15   8   17    8

Diabetes Mellitus.... 95   6  11    9   17   5   15    8  30   3   22    4

All Other Accidents..104   5  26    4   16   6   18    5  23   6   21    6

Chronic Liver Disease

   and Cirrhosis....  40  10  14    6   15   7  ...  ...  11   9  ...  ...

Motor Vehicle Acc.   107   4  21    5   11   8   29    3  25   5   21    5

Pneumonia.........    46   8 ...  ...   10   9   17    6  ... ...  19    7

Suicide............   20 ... ...  ...    9  10  ...  ...  ... ...  11   10

Homicide...........   46   8  12    8   .. ...   16    7  18   7  ...  ...

Perinatal Cond.....   30  ...  9   10  ... ...   12   10   9  10  ...  ...

Congenital Anomalies  12  .. ...  ...  ... ...  ...  ... ... ...   12    9

All Other Causes...  600 ... 116  ...  136 ...  121  ... 116 ...  111  ...

_____________________________________________________________________________

Note:  Rank order is for top ten causes only.

       "..." Not included in top ten causes.

Source: Annual Statistical Reports, Office of Vital Statistics, Department

        of Public Health and Social Services, Government of Guam.

 

     At the present time, the Office of Vital Statistics does not report statistics on cause of death by race, sex, or age.  These variables can be obtained, and in fact, it is anticipated that the compilation, analysis, and tabulation of such variables will be accomplished in the latter part of 1988; these statistics will be maintained thereafter.

 

LIFE TABLE ANALYSIS

 

     Abridged life tables for Guam that were done for the period 1969 to 1971 and 1979 to 1981 (Flores), show that life expectancy at birth for both sexes combined increased by 5.8 years, from 66.5 in the first life table period to 72.3 years in the second (See Appendix D).  This increase in life expectancy is attributable to the establishment of social and public health programs aimed at specific age groups such as mothers and infants.  From their inception in the late 1960s and early 1970s, such programs proved to be beneficial to Guam's overall population in terms of public education and public assistance ‑ target groups were then able to improve their quality of living by altering their diets and availing themselves of the improved medical and public health facilities and services.

 

     In comparing both sexes, it is interesting to note that although females at birth had a better life expectancy (72.5 years for 1969‑71 and 75.6 years for 1979‑81 compared to 64.4 and 69.5 years for males for the same periods), in the ten years between the two life tables female life expectancy improved by 3.1 years, compared to 5.2 years for males.

 

     Life expectancy of women in the childbearing years (15 to 45 years of age) improved by an average of 2.5 years.  In some age categories the tables showed more improvement in life expectancy overall for males than for females; 3.1 years at age 25 for males as compared to 2.4 years for females; 3.1 years at age 35 for males to 2.5 years for females; 2.9 years at age 55 for males as compared to 1.9 years for females are some examples.

 

     However, in other age categories the tables show that females aged 75 showed an increase of 4.0 years in ten years as compared to males with only 1.1 years increase.  At age 85, males showed a decrease in life expectancy of 1.8 years, whereas females increased by 1.0 years.

 

     Life tables were constructed for the "Chamorro‑Guamanian" and "Non‑Chamorro‑Guamanian" components of the population of Guam by Taylor (1985) (Appendix D), and reveal higher mortality in the "Chamorro‑Guamanian" population than in the total population for 1979‑81.  The life expectancy at birth of the "Chamorro‑Guamanian" population in this table was 69.5 years; for the "Non‑Chamorro‑Guamanian" it was 74.9 years.  The differences in life expectancy between these two populations of 5.4 years was all attributable to differences in adult mortality (age greater than 15 years). "Ethnic differences in age‑specific death rates were most marked between age 25‑35 years, although higher mortality in "Chamorro‑Guamanian" compared to others persisted through middle age." (Taylor, 1985:37)

 

     In general, male life expectancy on Guam is increasing more quickly than female, although the reasons are only speculative.  Finally, Guam, in comparison to other Pacific Island populations, has the highest life expectancy at birth: 73 years, with American Samoa second at 70 years (as reported for 1978‑82) (South Pacific Commission, 1987).  It appears that where health systems are heavily financed from external sources, such as in Guam and American Samoa, life expectancy figures rise into the high 60s and low 70s, and IMRs of less than 20 occur.

 

SUMMARY

 

     In summary it might be said that improved living conditions were significant factors in bringing mortality levels on Guam to one of the lowest in the Pacific region.  However, it can also be said that, at least where Chamorros are concerned, many deaths are probably due to the change in lifestyle, with chronic disease and cancer taking a preponderance of lives in the later age groups, 45 years and over.  It is in this age group that many tend to become sedentary and are more prone to stress and chronic alcoholism.

 

     The decline in mortality on Guam actually began during the first three decades of this century.  This is, to a large extent, despite the characteristics of the Chamorro population, which, by most measures, indicate a slightly higher level of mortality than other racial groups on Guam.  But the increasing differences between life expectancies at birth for Chamorro males and females appear to indicate that the decline in mortality has come to an end, at least as far as the Chamorro male population is concerned.

 

     Female life expectancy seems to have remained fairly constant at about 75 years.  The persistence of the sex differential in life expectancy, past and present, is a consequence of the differences in adult life expectancy.

 

     A final word on death by cause is given as a recommendation for vital registration data:

 

     "Although the 'Top Ten' causes of death for all ages and both sexes combined gives some information on the main health problems in the Guam population it makes more sense to separate cause of death data by major age group (and also by sex for adults) because there are significant differences between the various subgroups..."

 

     "Although such a summary tabulation provides more information than the 'Top Ten' causes of death with all ages and both sexes lumped together, the deaths are not 'weighted' by the age at which they occur.  Particularly from an economic perspective, premature death in working age adults (age 15 to 64) needs to be 'age weighted'.  This can be achieved by calculating the years of life lost by cause." (Taylor, 1985:50)


  CHAPTER 7

  MIGRATION

 

     In Chapters 5 and 6 we discussed two basic components of population growth, fertility and mortality.  The other basic factor of population growth is migration.  The measurement of migration is more complex than the measurement of fertility and mortality.  The reasons for this are obvious.  Mortality is purely a biological phenomenon ‑ favorable socio‑economic climate and medical/health care can postpone it but cannot stop it.  Fertility, which can now be controlled, reflects the levels of material wellbeing of a population, and is also a biological phenomenon, affected by individual and societal needs, level of scientific knowledge and economic status.  The problems of measurement of fertility and mortality arise basically because of lack of reliable data of vital events.

 

     Migration, on the other hand, is a socio‑economic phenomenon which is a result of a complex mechanism involving social, psychological, economic, political, institutional and other determinants.  Migration affects the size, structure, and growth of populations; it has produced remarkable alterations in the structure and distribution of the population of Guam.

 

     Migration also affects the size of the labor force, the distribution of labor force by skill, education, industry and occupation, employment status, savings, investment and productivity, and as a factor that has social and psychological bearings on the communities at both the origin and destination of the migrants.

 

     Migration involves change from a usual place of residence.  Migration can be internal (within the national or territorial boundaries) or international (across international borders).  A migrant who travels from an area of origin to a destination is an immigrant or inmigrant with respect to the area of destination, and an emigrant or outmigrant with respect to place of origin (in each case, the former term used for international migration, the latter used for internal migration).

 

PLACE OF BIRTH

 

     Data on Place of Birth were derived from answers to question 10.

 

     Respondents were instructed to report place of birth in terms of mother's usual place of residence at the time of the birth rather than in terms of place of location of the hospital if the birth occurred in a hospital.  In this report, the population is classified in the following groups: persons born on a selected island in the Pacific, persons born in the United States, and persons born elsewhere.  Persons born elsewhere were asked to report country of birth according to international boundaries recognized by the United States government on April 1, 1980 since boundaries of foreign countries have changed in the last century.  Some of these persons may have reported their country of birth in terms of boundaries that existed at the time of their birth or immigration, or in accordance with their own national preference.  Selected countries of birth are shown here.


 

     Place of birth was not allocated for Guam.  Persons not reporting place of birth are shown separately in the tables under "Place of birth not reported".

 

CITIZENSHIP AND YEAR OF IMMIGRATION

 

     Data on citizenship and year of immigration were derived from answers to questions 11 and 12.  Persons who were born in Puerto Rico, American Samoa, or the Virgin Islands of the United States, or born abroad or at sea and who had at least one parent who was a U.S. citizen were to report themselves as a U.S. Citizen.

 

     Citizenship.  Information on citizenship was used to classify the population of Guam born outside Guam or the United States into four major categories: naturalized citizens of the United States, permanent U.S. aliens (visa), temporary U.S. aliens (work permit), and other U.S. citizens.  A similar question on citizenship was asked in 1970.

 

     If citizenship was not reported, a response was assigned by computer using the responses of other persons based on year of immigration and country of birth.

 

     Year of immigration.  Persons born outside Guam were to indicate in question 12 the period which includes the year they came to stay permanently on Guam.  A question on year of immigration was asked in 1970.  If year of immigration was not reported, a response was assigned using responses of other persons based on age and place of birth.

 

PLACE OF BIRTH OF PARENTS

 

     The data on place of birth of parents were derived from the answers to questions 13 and 14.  These questions were asked for the first time in the 1980 census.  Information on place of birth of parents was used to classify the population of Guam according to the place where the person's parents were born.

 

     Persons with one or both parents born elsewhere were asked to report the country of birth according to international boundaries as recognized by the United States government on April 1, 1980.  Place of birth of parents was not allocated for nonresponse.  Selected areas of birth are shown here.

 

RESIDENCE IN 1975

 

     The data on residence in 1975 were derived from answers to questions 15a, 15b, and 15c.  Persons living on Guam or one of the areas listed in question 15b in 1975 were asked to report the village or major island or atoll, or U. S. state.  Persons living elsewhere were asked to report the foreign country in which they were living.  Residence in 1975 is used in conjunction with current residence to determine the extent of residential mobility of the population.  When no information on residence in 1975 was collected for a person, information for other members was used, if available.  All cases of no response, or incomplete response not assigned based on information from other family members, were shown separately as "Residence in 1975 not reported."

 

     The number of persons who were living in a different house in 1975 was somewhat less than the total number of moves during the 5 year period.  Some persons in the same house at the two dates had moved during the 5 year period but by the time of enumeration had returned to their 1975 residence.  Other persons who were living in a different house had made one or more intermediate moves.  For similar reasons, the number of persons living in a different Election District may be underestimated.

 

     Similarly, questions on mobility were asked in the 1970 census; however, in the 1970 census the questions did not ask for residence in the specific village on Guam as did question 15c in the 1980 census.  Data by village were not tabulated.

 

PLACE OF BIRTH CHARACTERISTICS

 

     Almost half of the 105,979 persons living on Guam in 1980 were born on Guam.  After the Guam‑born, the next largest part of the population were born on the U.S. (about 1 in 5), followed by persons born in Asia (also 1 in 5).  Most (about 3 in every 4) of the Asia‑born were born in the Philippines; in fact, about 1 in every 6 persons living on Guam in 1980 were born in the Philippines.  While about 2 percent of Guam's 1980 population was born in the Northern Mariana Islands, less than 1 percent was born in Palau, and even smaller numbers had been born in the other areas of the Trust Territory.

 

     The largest number of persons of each sex were born on Guam, but greater proportions of females were born here (52 percent) than males (46 percent).  The United States was the second most popular male birthplace (24 percent), while Asia was third (21 percent); this order was reversed for females.  In fact, while about 1 in every 4 males were born in the United Staes, less than 1 in 5 of the females were born there.

 

Table 7.1.  Birthplace by Sex: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                       Numbers              Percent

                                ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Birthplace                        Total  Males Females Total Males Females

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

     Total...................... 105979  55321   50658 100.0 100.0   100.0

Guam............................  52113  25594   26519  49.2  46.3    52.3

Northern Mariana Islands........   2124    999    1125   2.0   1.8     2.2

Asia............................  22648  11491   11157  21.4  20.8    22.0

  Philippines...................  16998   8985    8013  16.0  16.2    15.8

United States...................  22950  13451    9499  21.7  24.3    18.8

Palau...........................    921    391     530    .9    .7     1.0

Marshall Islands................     39     19      20    .0    .0      .0

Federated States of Micronesia..    436    237     199    .4    .4      .4

  Kosrae........................     65     48      17    .1    .1      .0

  Pohnpei.......................    111     51      60    .1    .1      .1

  Truk..........................    121     68      53    .1    .1      .1

  Yap...........................    139     70      69    .1    .1      .1

Elsewhere.......................   1477    693     784   1.4   1.3     1.5

Place of Birth Not Reported.....   3271   2446     825   3.1   4.4     1.6

__________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 24

 

    When persons born in Guam are excluded, a clearer picture of the immigrants emerges (Table 7.2). As noted above, more than half of the population of Guam was born outside Guam.  Most were born in the U.S. (43 percent) or Asia (42 percent).  Males followed the pattern of the total population, but the distribution of birthplaces for females differed: Asia was the most common non‑Guam birthplace (46 percent), with the U.S. second (39 percent).  Over 2 percent of females were born in Palau, but only 1 percent of males had been; a higher percentage of females had been born in the CNMI (5 percent) than had males (3 percent).

 

Table 7.2.  Birthplace by Sex for the Non‑Guam Born: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                       Numbers              Percent

                                ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Birthplace                        Total  Males Females Total Males Females

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

     Total...................... 105979  55321   50658 100.0 100.0   100.0

Guam............................  52113  25594   26519   ...   ...     ...

Northern Mariana Islands........   2124    999    1125   3.9   3.4     4.7

Asia............................  22648  11491   11157  42.0  38.7    46.2

  Philippines...................  16998   8985    8013  31.6  30.2    33.2

United States...................  22950  13451    9499  42.6  45.2    39.4

Palau...........................    921    391     530   1.7   1.3     2.2

Marshall Islands................     39     19      20    .1    .1      .1

Federated States of Micronesia..    436    237     199    .8    .8      .8

Elsewhere.......................   1477    693     784   2.7   2.3     3.2

Place of Birth Not Reported.....   3271   2446     825   6.1   8.2     3.4

__________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 24

 

     Birthplace by military status and sex is shown in Table 7.3 and Figure 7.1.  Nearly 60 percent of the civilian population was born on Guam, followed by Asia (24 percent).  Just over 10 percent of the military population had been born on Guam.   Almost 65 percent of the military population was born in the U.S. compared to 10 percent of the civilian population.  Although almost 1 in 4 of the civilians were born in Asia, this was true for only 1 in 8 of the military.  Similarly, percentage of Philippines born civilians (18 percent) was twice 9 percent for the military.  Also, although CNMI born made up 2.5 percent of the civilians, they were only .3 percent of the military, perhaps not surprising since they were not yet American citizens and thus had difficulty enlisting in the military.

 

     The were differences for birthplace by sex in 1980.  Although 58 percent of the civilian males were born on Guam, more than 61 percent of the females were in this category.  On the other hand, 19 percent of the civilian males were Philippines born compared to 17 percent of the civilian females; the civilian United States percentages were 11 and 9, respectively.  For the military, 8 percent of the males and 13 percent of the females were born on Guam, compared to 67 percent of the males and 62 percent of the females being United States born.  Also, while 18 percent of the military females were born in Asia, this was true for only 9 percent of the males.

 

     Many military personnel did not report a place of birth.  The percentage was higher for males (13 percent) than for females (3 percent).  These high proportions affect the proportions of the population distributed to each birthplace.

 

Table 7.3.  Birthplace by Military Status and Sex: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                        Total             Civilian          Military

                  ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Birthplace         Total Males Fmles Total Males Fmles Total Males Fmles

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

     Total........105979 55321 50658 83226 42056 41170 22753 13265  9488

       Percent.... 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Guam..............  49.2  46.3  52.3  59.8  58.2  61.4  10.3   8.5  12.9

Northern Marianas.   2.0   1.8   2.2   2.5   2.3   2.6    .3    .2    .5

Asia..............  21.4  20.8  22.0  23.8  24.6  23.0  12.4   8.6  17.7

  Philippines.....  16.0  16.2  15.8  18.0  19.2  16.7   8.9   6.8  11.8

United States.....  21.7  24.3  18.8   9.8  10.9   8.7  64.9  66.8  62.2

Palau.............    .9    .7   1.0   1.0    .9   1.2    .3    .2    .4

Marshall Islands..    .0    .0    .0    .0    .0    .0    .0    .0    .0

FSMicronesia......    .4    .4    .4    .5    .5    .5    .1    .1    .1

Elsewhere.........   1.4   1.3   1.5    .9    .8   1.0   3.2   2.7   3.8

Not Reported......   3.1   4.4   1.6   1.6   1.7   1.4   8.6  13.0   2.5

________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 24

 

 

     When only the migrant population is considered, as noted earlier, the most frequent place of birth reported shifts from Guam to the U.S. (43 percent) and Asia (42 percent) (Table 7.4).  Civilian migrants of both sexes came from Asia (60 percent of females and 59 percent of males), the U.S. (23 percent of females and 26 percent of males), and the Northern Marianas Islands (7 percent of females and 6 percent of males).  Higher percentages of the military were born in the U.S. (73 percent for males and 71 percent for females) than any other place of birth reported, with Asia second (9 percent of the males and 20 percent of the females).

 

     The military again had a large proportion of 'not reported' birthplaces, but the increase in the proportions for the migrant military population was only slightly over 1 percent from that of the total military population.  However, the proportion of 'not reported' in the overall migrant population was nearly double that of the total population.

 

Table 7.4. Birthplace by Military Status and Sex for the Non‑Guam Born:

           1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                        Total             Civilian          Military

                  ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Birthplace         Total Males Fmles Total Males Fmles Total Males Fmles

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

     Total........ 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Northern Marianas.   3.9   3.4   4.7   6.1   5.5   6.8    .3    .2    .5

Asia..............  42.0  38.7  46.2  59.3  58.9  59.7  13.8   9.4  20.3

  Philippines.....  31.6  30.2  33.2  44.8  46.0  43.4   9.9   7.4  13.5

United States.....  42.6  45.2  39.4  24.5  26.1  22.7  72.3  72.9  71.4

Palau.............   1.7   1.3   2.2   2.6   2.1   3.1    .3    .2    .4

Marshall Islands..    .1    .1    .1    .1    .1    .1    .0    .0    .0

FSMicronesia......    .8    .8    .8   1.2   1.3   1.2    .1    .1    .1

Elsewhere.........   2.7   2.3   3.2   2.3   1.9   2.6   3.5   2.9   4.4

Not Reported......   6.1   8.2   3.4   3.9   4.1   3.7   9.6  14.2   2.9

________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 24

 

     Age.  Most of the Guam‑born were young: over 60 percent were below the age of 19, while this was true of 45 percent of the total population, but only 22 percent of those born in the Philippines (Table 7.5).  Nearly 56 percent of those born in the U.S. were between 20 and 44 years of age; those 20 to 24 years were the largest single age group of U.S. born.  As was seen in Table 7.3, 65 percent of the military on Guam in 1980 were U.S. born; the most common ages for entry into military service are 18 to 24.

 

     The largest percentages of Philippine‑born immigrants were between 35 to 44 years (17 percent) and 45 to 54 (16 percent), followed by 30 to 34 (12 percent) and 25 to 29 (11 percent).  These persons almost certainly migrated for work.  The Philippines born had greater proportions of elderly than those born in any other place.  These elderly may have migrated in the late 1960's, after immigration laws were changed, with these people being in their mid‑40's, or they may be older relatives of other migrants who had them brought over to live here.

 

Table 7.5. Birthplace by Age: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                       Phili‑  United                   All

Age Group           Total   Guam CNMI  ppines  States   Palau    FSM Others

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

    All persons... 105979  52113 2124   16998   22950     921    475  10398

      Percent.....  100.0  100.0100.0   100.0   100.0   100.0  100.0  100.0

Less than 5 years.   12.3   18.4  8.5     2.2     9.9     3.3    4.0    5.4

5 to 9 years......   11.9   15.9 10.0     4.5    10.2     2.9    5.1    9.4

10 to 14 years....   10.7   13.9 12.2     6.8     7.4     6.4    6.7    8.4

15 to 19 years....   10.4   12.1 13.2     8.1     8.5    10.1   10.7    9.2

20 to 24 years....   10.5    7.2 10.8     7.2    17.9    14.3   25.1   14.8

25 to 29 years....    9.7    6.6 10.6    11.2    14.2    15.7   16.0   12.4

30 to 34 years....    8.8    5.4  9.5    12.2    11.9    10.7    9.7   12.5

35 to 44 years....   10.7    7.2 11.1    16.5    11.6    16.6   11.8   15.7

45 to 54 years....    7.7    6.2  8.5    15.7     4.8    13.5    4.6    8.0

55 to 59 years....    2.7    2.2  1.6     6.7     1.6     2.6    1.5    1.9

60 to 64 years....    1.8    1.7  1.8     3.8     1.0     1.8    2.5    1.0

65 years and over.    2.8    3.3  2.2     5.0      .9     2.0    2.3    1.3

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 20

 

    While the Guam‑born made up just over 49 percent of the total population in 1980, they were 74 percent of those less than 5 years of age, and 66 percent of those 5 to 9 years.  In fact, they were the majority of all ages up to 19 years, and from age 25 to 54, stressing the youthfulness of the Guam‑born population.  In the age group 20 to 24 years, the prime military years, the U.S. born were in the majority; for those 55 to 59 years, those born in the Philippines accounted for about the same proportion as the Guam‑born.

 

     The elderly (60 years and over) were heavily Guam‑born, followed by the Philippines born.  Those born in the CNMI, Palau, and the Federated States of Micronesia (FSM) were concentrated in the college and working ages (15 to 54 years); those born in "All Others" places of birth had 20 percent of their population less than 15 years of age.

 

Table 7.6. Percent Birthplace by Age: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                       Phili‑  United                   All

Age Group           Total   Guam CNMI  ppines  States   Palau    FSM Others

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

    All persons...  100.0   49.2  2.0    16.0    21.7      .9     .4    9.8

Less than 5 years.  100.0   73.6  1.4     2.9    17.5      .2     .1    4.3

5 to 9 years......  100.0   65.6  1.7     6.0    18.5      .2     .2    7.7

10 to 14 years....  100.0   64.1  2.3    10.2    15.0      .5     .3    7.7

15 to 19 years....  100.0   57.1  2.5    12.5    17.8      .8     .5    8.7

20 to 24 years....  100.0   33.7  2.1    11.1    37.1     1.2    1.1   13.8

25 to 29 years....  100.0   33.2  2.2    18.5    31.5     1.4     .7   12.5

30 to 34 years....  100.0   30.5  2.2    22.3    29.5     1.1     .5   14.0

35 to 44 years....  100.0   33.3  2.1    24.8    23.5     1.4     .5   14.4

45 to 54 years....  100.0   39.7  2.2    32.7    13.4     1.5     .3   10.2

55 to 59 years....  100.0   39.0  1.2    39.3    12.7      .8     .2    6.7

60 to 64 years....  100.0   44.9  2.0    33.8    12.3      .9     .6    5.4

65 years and over.  100.0   57.2  1.6    28.7     7.0      .6     .4    4.6

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 20

 

YEAR OF IMMIGRATION

 

     Just over 54 percent of all immigrants came to Guam after 1977, with more coming in 1979 or 1980 than in any other period, and the 1977‑78 period being second.  The decade 1960 to 1969 was the third most frequent period of immigration.  Those born in the CNMI came most often in 1979 or 1980 (29 percent), followed by 1960 to 1969; the Philippines born were more likely to have immigrated in the earlier period than the latter.  Nearly 74 percent of the U.S. born had come to Guam between 1977 and 1980; as many U.S. born were military, and subject to short‑term stays, this is not an unusual finding.  Those from Palau and the FSM had patterns of immigration similar to those from the Philippines: the period when the majority migrated was the decade 1960‑69, followed by 1979 or 1980.

 

Table 7.7.  Year of Immigration by Birthplace: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                    Asia

                               ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                         Phili‑  United                 All

Age Group           Total  CNMI   Total  ppines  States  Palau   FSM Others

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

  Born elsewhere..  50595  2124   22648   16998   22950    921   436   1516

     Percent......  100.0 100.0   100.0   100.0   100.0  100.0 100.0  100.0

1979 or 1980......   30.3  29.3    18.1    16.8    42.6   14.9  28.9   36.2

1977 or 1978......   24.1  14.3    18.2    16.4    31.0   12.4  21.8   29.4

1975 or 1976......    9.2   6.9    12.1     9.6     6.7    7.5  13.1    7.3

1973 or 1974......    7.5   5.1    11.0     9.8     4.3    7.5   7.6    6.9

1971 or 1972......    6.6   4.8     9.8     9.3     3.9    6.2   5.5    4.4

1970..............    3.2   2.5     4.5     5.1     2.0    4.6   2.5    3.1

1960 to 1969......   12.5  20.8    17.7    22.0     6.4   27.9   7.6    8.6

1950 to 1959......    3.8   7.7     4.8     6.0     2.1   13.4   4.1    2.6

Before 1950.......    2.8   8.6     3.9     5.0     1.0    5.8   8.9    1.6

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 27

 

 

     As can be seen in Table 7.8, in any the broad year spans, the majority of immigrants were born in the Philippines, except for the years 1975 to 1980, when over 57 percent of immigrants were from the U.S.  This large proportion undoubtedly is related to movements of military personnel who move on to and off of the island at fairly frequent intervals ‑ while the relative number of military on island may fluctuate somewhat over time, the absolute numbers of military and their dependents is much larger and influences period of "migration" to Guam.

 

     The proportion of the population who migrated from the Northern Marianas was greatest in the period before 1950 (13 percent of the population which migrated during that period) which was probably partly due to family unification, particularly after World War II.  Migration from CNMI decreased considerably as a proportion of the total immigrant population by period, but began to increase slightly in the last period before the 1980 census.  Migration from the other areas of Micronesia was limited, but the implementation of the compacts may have an impact on the amount of migration from these areas.

 

Table 7.8.  Period of Immigration by Birthplace: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                   Asia

                              ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                        Phili‑  United                 All

Age Group           Total CNMI   Total  ppines  States  Palau   FSM Others

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

  Born elsewhere..  100.0  4.2    44.8    33.6    45.4    1.8    .9    3.0

1975 to 1980......  100.0  3.3    34.1    22.6    57.3    1.0    .9    3.4

1970 to 1974......  100.0  3.0    65.1    46.8    26.7    1.9    .8    2.5

1960 to 1969......  100.0  7.0    63.2    59.1    23.2    4.1    .5    2.0

1950 to 1959......  100.0  8.6    56.6    53.9    25.3    6.4    .9    2.1

Before 1950.......  100.0 13.0    62.4    60.5    16.3    3.8   2.8    1.7

__________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 27

 

     Table 7.9 shows the total immigrant population (non‑Guam born) and the Guam born by age group and year of immigration for the non‑Guam born.  The Guam born were just over half of the total population and dominated the age groups less than 19 years and 65 years and over, which comprise most of the non‑working ages.  Migrants made up anywhere from 68 percent (those 30 to 34 years) to 54 percent (60 to 64 years) of the working age population.

 

     The period 1975 to 1980 was the most active period of immigration for all age groups of migrants; the second most active period was 1970 to 1974.  Those who were 25 years and over in 1980 migrated to Guam during their working ages, with very few coming at the time they were less than 10 years old.  Those who were 25 to 29 in 1980 came most often in 1975 to 1980, when they were 20 to 25 years old (78 percent), followed by 1970 to 1974, when they were 15 to 19 years old (14 percent).  Those 65 and older in 1980 had the most evenly distributed periods of immigration: 33 percent had come between 1975 to 1980 (when they were age 60 and older), 21 percent before 1950 (when they were age 35 and over), and 20 percent came between 1970 to 1974 (when they were 55 years and over).

 

Table 7.9. Year of Immigration by Age: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                Year of Immigration for non‑Guam born

                                ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                            Guam         1975‑  1970‑   1960‑  1950‑ Before

Age Group            Total  Born  Total   1980   1974    1969   1959   1950

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

    All persons...102,708   50.7  100.0   63.6   17.4    12.5    3.8    2.8

Less than 5 years. 12,797   74.7  100.0   97.8    1.9     0.0    0.0    0.0

5 to 9 years...... 12,453   66.6  100.0   84.2   15.4     0.0    0.0    0.0

10 to 14 years.... 11,168   65.1  100.0   63.0   25.5    11.5    0.0    0.0

15 to 19 years.... 10,605   59.2  100.0   59.1   21.1    19.7    0.0    0.0

20 to 24 years.... 10,194   36.7  100.0   81.2   10.0     7.2    1.5    0.0

25 to 29 years....  9,910   34.5  100.0   77.8   13.8     6.5    2.0    0.0

30 to 34 years....  8,941   31.6  100.0   66.2   19.9    11.7    1.7    0.6

35 to 44 years.... 10,919   34.5  100.0   49.6   23.0    22.5    3.3    1.7

45 to 54 years....  8,025   40.5  100.0   30.1   21.0    24.1   14.8    9.9

55 to 59 years....  2,866   39.7  100.0   25.7   19.7    18.5   16.6   19.4

60 to 64 years....  1,899   45.6  100.0   30.7   18.2    16.4   16.9   17.8

65 years and over.  2,931   58.2  100.0   32.5   20.1    12.9   13.6   20.8

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 22

Note: Excludes Persons not Reporting Place of Birth

 

     Nearly 73 percent of the non‑Guam born 16 years and older were in the labor force, compared to only 55 percent of the Guam born (Table 7.10).  Most of the Guam born labor force was civilian (98 percent) and employed (95 percent), while 71 percent of the migrant labor force were civilian and 96 percent were employed.

 

     Fully 73 percent of those migrating to Guam between 1975 and 1980 were in the labor force; over 47 percent were in the Armed Forces.  Labor force participation rates for migrants from all periods were 72 percent or higher, with the highest rates among those who had migrated to Guam between 1950 to 1959.

 

Table 7.10.  Year of Immigration by Labor Force Participation: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                Year of Immigration for non‑Guam born

                                ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                            Guam         1975‑  1970‑   1960‑  1950‑ Before

Labor Force         Total   Born  Total   1980   1974    1969   1959   1950

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

   Persons........  66773  25577  38508  22619   6885    5692   1907   1405

Labor Force.......  44484  14019  28076  16501   4984    4081   1494   1016

    Percent.......   66.6   54.8   72.9   73.0   72.4    71.7   78.3   72.3

  Armed Forces....  10125    264   8165   7765    220     118     43     19

    Percent.......   22.8    1.9   29.1   47.1    4.4     2.9    2.9    1.9

  Civilian L.F....  34359  13755  19911   8736   4764    3963   1451    997

    Employed......  32692  13001  19027   8181   4606    3840   1422    978

    Unemployed....   1667    754    884    555    158     123     29     19

      Percent.....    4.9    5.5    4.4    6.4    3.3     3.1    2.0    1.9

Not in Labor Force  22289  11558  10432   6118   1901    1611    413    389

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 39

Note: Excludes Persons Not Reporting Place of Birth

 

PLACE OF BIRTH OF PARENTS

 

     Unlike the 1980 census in the United States, the 1980 census on Guam collected information about father's and mother's birthplace.  These data help assess generational migration; that is, parental birthplace information allows analysis of movement over one generation ‑ how many people had a father or mother born elsewhere and who were themselves born on Guam, compared to those who were themselves migrants, or native or native parents.

 

     Once again, in 1980, 49 percent of Guam's population was born on Guam (Table 7.11).  Although 52,113 persons had been born on Guam (Table 7.1), only 40,799 persons in 1980 had fathers who had been born on Guam, and, of these, 38,686 (95 percent) were born on Guam themselves.  The other 5 percent were persons whose fathers were born on Guam but they were born elsewhere.

 

     More than 4 in 10 persons whose fathers were born in the CNMI were born on Guam.  About 94 percent of the rest of that population (1615 persons) were born in the CNMI, while the rest (102 persons) were born elsewhere.  Of the largest groups, persons whose fathers had been born in the United States but who were themselves born on Guam constituted the smallest proportion ‑ only 13 percent.  Of the 21,270 persons who were not born on Guam and with fathers who were born int he United States, 19,604 (92 percent) were born in the United States as well.

 

     About 1 in every 4 persons with Asia‑born fathers were born on Guam; of those not born on Guam themselves, 95 percent were born in Asia.  Although a higher proportion of Pilippines born fathers had respondents born on Guam (30 percent), and the same proportion (94 percent) of the non‑Guam born were born in the Philippines.

 

     The Marshall Islands figures are discounted since they are so small.  Many Palauans have been on island long enough to see the second generational effect.  More than 38 percent of persons with fathers born on Palau were born on Guam (although it is likely that most of these perosns are young children); of those with fathers born on Guam but who were not born on Guam themselves, 91 percent were born on Palau.  The results for the Federated States of Micronesia showed a smaller proportion born on Guam, and less correspondance with parental birthplace.

 

Table 7.11. Father's Birthplace by Own Birthplace: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                                     Not Born on Guam

                                              ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                                         Same as  Not Same

                                                        Father's  Father's

                                                          Birth‑    Birth‑

Father's Birthplace               Total   Guam   Total     Place     place

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

     Total...................... 105979   49.2   100.0      (NA)      (NA)

Guam............................  40799   94.8   100.0       0.0     100.0

Northern Mariana Islands........   2949   41.8   100.0      94.1       5.9

Asia............................  30246   26.6   100.0      94.7       5.3

  Japan and Okinawa.............   1669   15.8   100.0      83.6      16.4

  Philippines...................  24781   30.2   100.0      93.3       6.7

United States...................  24333   12.6   100.0      92.2       7.8

Palau...........................   1411   38.1   100.0      90.7       9.3

Marshall Islands................     63   28.6   100.0      53.3      46.7

Federated States of Micronesia..    518   27.4   100.0      76.9      23.1

  Kosrae........................     86   22.1   100.0      85.1      14.9

  Pohnpei.......................     95   13.7   100.0      74.4      25.6

  Truk..........................    131   10.7   100.0      89.7      10.3

  Yap...........................    206   46.6   100.0      60.0      40.0

Elsewhere.......................   2121   14.6   100.0      (NA)      (NA)

Place of Birth Not Reported.....   3539    2.0   100.0      (NA)      (NA)

__________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 25

 

     Also, while 49 percent of Guam's population was born on Guam, while 40,799 persons in 1980 had fathers who had been born on Guam, 44,708 had mothers born on Guam.  About the same proportion as for fathers ‑ 95 percent ‑ had mothers bron on Guam and were born on Guam themselves.  The other 5 percent were persons whose mothers were born on Guam but they were born elsewhere.

 

     As with the fathers, more than 4 in 10 persons whose mothers were born in the CNMI were born on Guam.  About 92 percent of the rest of that population were born in the CNMI, while the rest were born elsewhere.  The percentage of persons whose mothers had been born in the United States but who were themselves born on Guam constituted the smallest proportion for mothers than fathers ‑ only 8 percent.  Of the persons who were not born on Guam and with mothers who were born in the United States, only 84 percent were born in the United States as well (compared to 92 percent of the fathers).

 

     Only about 18 percent of those persons with Asia‑born mothers were born on Guam, probably showing the relatively earlier immigration of Asian males who subsequently married and had children (who, themselves, showed up in the 1980 census); of those not born on Guam themselves, 94 percent were born in Asia.  Although a higher proportion of Philippines born mothers had respondents born on Guam (20 percent) compared to 30 percent for the males, and 95 percent of the non‑Guam born were born in the Philippines.

 

Table 7.12. Mother's Birthplace by Own Birthplace: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                                 Not Born in the Guam

                                              ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                                      Same as   Not Same

                                                      Mother's  Mother's

                                                      Birth‑    Birth‑

Mother's Birthplace             Total  Guam   Total   Place     place

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

     Total...................... 105979   49.2   100.0      (NA)      (NA)

Guam............................  44708   95.4   100.0       0.0     100.0

Northern Mariana Islands........   3190   40.7   100.0      92.5       7.5

Asia............................  28630   18.5   100.0      93.5       6.5

  Japan and Okinawa.............   2217   14.1   100.0      81.3      18.7

  Philippines...................  22000   20.5   100.0      94.9       5.1

United States...................  21223    8.0   100.0      84.4      15.6

Palau...........................   1655   41.4   100.0      89.8      10.2

Marshall Islands................     63   25.4   100.0      55.3      44.7

Federated States of Micronesia..    574   28.2   100.0      78.4      21.6

  Kosrae........................     84   20.2   100.0      88.1      11.9

  Pohnpei.......................    134   20.1   100.0      80.4      19.6

  Truk..........................    140   16.4   100.0      89.7      10.3

  Yap...........................    216   44.0   100.0      60.3      39.7

Elsewhere.......................   2449   10.5   100.0      (NA)      (NA)

Place of Birth Not Reported.....   3487    1.4   100.0      (NA)      (NA)

 

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Source: PC80‑1‑C/D54, Table 25

 

     These data on parental birthplace show that there is a strong likelihood that persons with parents born on Guam are also born on Guam themselves.  Persons with parents born in most of the other areas were also likely to have been born in those areas themselves.  On the other hand, there is some evidence that migrant groups who have been immigrating for some time are settling on Guam, and having children, and that we are seeing the development of an increasing second‑generation migrant population, particularly among the CNMI born and Palauans; the data are less clear for Asians because of the continuing strong migration.  And migration from the other Micronesian areas is only beginning.

 

     There were differences by sex of parent, with some evidence that there has been selective migration for males, particularly in the earlier periods; these data have been seen in other tables in this chapter as well.

 

 

RESIDENCE IN 1975

 

     The question on residence in 1975 (5 years before the census) shows the extent of recent mobility of the population (Table 7.13).  (While the distribution of persons who were living in a different house in 1975 than 1980 shows mobility, the total number of moves during the 5‑year period cannot be obtained because some persons had moved after 1975, but, by the time of enumeration, had returned to their 1975 residence).

 

     Almost 4 out of every 10 persons 5 years and over and living on Guam in 1980 had lived in the same house in 1980.  About 1 in every 4 lived on Guam, but in a different house, and about 3 in every 10 lived elsewhere. About 2 in 5 persons had lived int he United States in 1975and Guam in 1980, and somewhat less than 1 in 10 had been in Asia (and 1 in 20 in the Philippines) in 1975.

 

     Only 4 percent of the 42,550 persons 5 years and over who had been born on Guam had lived outside of Guam in 1975; most (3 percent) had lived in the U.S.  In direct contrast to this were those who had been born in the U.S., over 75 percent of whom had lived outside of Guam in 1975, mostly in the U.S. (68 percent) or Asia (4 percent).  Slightly over 68 percent of those born in Palau had lived on Guam in 1975, as had 65 percent of the Philippines born and 57 percent of the CNMI born.

 

     It is important to note that 4 percent of the respondents 5 years and over gave no residence in 1975.  Although these responses, like those of the migration variables ‑ own birthplace and parental birthplace ‑ were allocated for the U.S. questionnaires, they were not allocated for the Guam census since there were so few persons who did not report (3,747 for this item).  All of the figures discussed here are affected by the persons not reporting since (1) the category is treated as if it were a separate birthplace, and (2) there is an assumption that these unallocated values had the same distribution as the known values.

 

Table 7.13.  Birthplace by Residence in 1975: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                                   Asia

                            Total              ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑             All

                       ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑      United       Phil‑  Pa‑        Ot‑

Residence in 1975      Numbr Percnt  Guam Sttes Total ppnes  lau CNMI  hers

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

  Persons 5 yrs & over. 92977   ... 42550 20677 22019 16626  891 1944  4896

      Percent..........   ... 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0100.0100.0 100.0

Same house............. 35997  38.7  59.7  11.0  30.9  35.2 31.8 28.6  13.5

Different house in Guam 25050  26.9  34.6  13.0  29.0  29.6 36.4 28.3   7.4

  Same Election dist... 13109  14.1  18.8   6.6  14.6  14.7 12.8 12.1   3.9

  Different Elect dist. 11941  12.8  15.8   6.5  14.4  14.9 23.6 16.2   3.4

Outside Guam........... 28183  30.3   3.9  75.2  39.4  34.6 28.4 42.5  24.6

  Asia.................  7742   8.3    .2   3.8  30.7  27.0   .1   .3   1.6

    Japan and Okinawa..  1006   1.1    .1   1.5   2.9    .5   .1   .2    .4

    Korea..............   848    .9    .0    .2   3.6    .0  0.0   .1    .1

    Philippines........  4706   5.1    .1   1.0  20.1  26.3  0.0   .1    .5

  United States........ 17742  19.1   3.2  67.7   7.5   6.5  3.5  2.7  12.9

  Northern Marianas....   959   1.0    .2    .2    .2    .3  3.6 39.1    .2

  Trust Territory......   482    .5    .1    .2    .1    .0 21.1   .3   4.2

    Palau..............   255    .3    .0    .1    .0    .0 20.0   .2    .8

    Marshall Is........    21    .0    .0    .0    .0    .0  0.0  0.0    .2

    FSM................   206    .2    .0    .1    .0    .0  1.1   .1   3.2

  Elsewhere............  1258   1.4    .2   3.3    .9    .8   .1   .2   5.7

Residence Not Reported.  3747   4.0   1.7    .8    .7    .7  3.5   .6  54.6

 

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Source: PC80‑1‑C/D54, Table 26

 

     When the military population is removed (Table 7.14), the distribution of birthplace by residence in 1975 is affected.  In this case, almost 48 percent (almost half) of the population 5 years and over rather than 39 percent lived in the same house in 1975 and 1980; similarly, 33 percent lived in a different house on Guam (compared to 27 percent for the whole population).  On the other hand, only 17 percent of the civilian persons 5 years and over lived outside Guam in 1975, compared to 30 percent for the whole population.  The biggest change by area outside Guam was for the United States, which decreased from 19 percent for all persons to only 6 percent when only the civilian population was considered.

 

     The proportion of U.S. born civilians 5 years and over who lived on Guam in 1975 was 56 percent, over twice the percentage of all U.S. born who resided here in 1975.  The U.S. born civilians who lived in the U.S. in 1975 was almost half of all U.S. born civilians who did so.  The data for 'All Others' is similar to the U.S. born data, which is not surprising, as 53 percent of 'All Other' born were military.  These data emphasize the mobility of the military population.

 

Table 7.14.  Birthplace by Residence in 1975: 1980 Civilians

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                                Asia

                                            ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑              All

                                      United        Phili‑        Pa‑   Ot‑

Residence in 1975        Total   Guam States  Total ppines  CNMI  lau  hers

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

 Persons 5 yrs. & over.  73451  41252   7733  19423  14734  1885   836  2322

     Percent...........  100.0  100.0  100.0  100.0  100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Same house.............   47.8   60.5   27.0   34.4   38.9  29.4  33.1  25.6

Different house/Guam...   32.6   34.6   29.5   32.0   32.5  28.4  37.2  14.6

  Same Election dist...   16.9   18.8   13.5   16.1   16.2  12.3  13.4   7.5

  Different Elect. dis.   15.7   15.8   16.0   15.9   16.3  16.2  23.8   7.1

Outside Guam...........   17.2    3.3   42.7   33.0   27.9  41.6  26.6  24.4

  Asia.................    8.3     .2    3.3   29.5   25.5    .2    .1   2.4

    Japan..............     .9     .1    1.3    2.6     .1    .1    .1    .5

    Korea..............    1.1     .0     .2    3.9     .0   0.0   0.0    .1

    Philippines........    5.3     .1     .9   19.4   25.3    .1   0.0    .8

  United States........    6.4    2.7   36.6    2.5    1.5   1.9   2.6   7.6

  CNMI.................    1.3     .2     .3     .2     .3  39.2   3.6    .5

  TTPI.................     .6     .1     .5     .1     .1    .3  20.1   8.0

    Palau..............     .3     .0     .2     .0     .0    .2  19.0    .4

  Other Pacific Is.....     .1    0.0     .2     .0     .0    .1   0.0    .9

  Elsewhere............     .6     .2    1.9     .6     .5    .1    .1   5.0

Residence Not Reported.    2.3    1.6     .8     .6     .6    .5   3.1  35.5

____________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 26

 

RESIDENCE IN THE UNITED STATES BETWEEN 1970 AND 1980

 

     One series of questions which appeared on the 1980 Census questionnaire for Guam but which did not appear on the questionnaire for the United States concerned residence in the United States (including Hawaii) in the 10 years preceding the 1980 census.  This question had four parts:

 

a. During the last 10 years did...live in the United States (including       Hawaii) at any time for 6 or more consecutive months?

b. When did...come or return to this territory the last time?

c. How long did...live in the United States the last time?

d. For the last 6 months that...lived in the United States was...‑

   1. Working at a job or business (Full time or part time)?

   2. In the U.S. armed forces?

   3. Attending school or college?

 

     These questions were intended to elicit information about the "circulatory" migration patterns of Guam's population.  Many Pacific Islanders move back and forth between their home islands and larger nation‑states, primarily New Zealand and the United States (see, for example, Levin, Hayes, and Filiga, 1988, and *** additional reference for New Zealand ***).  Planning and policy considerations require differing counts of the expected populations in Guam, so the amount of migration and the characteristics of the migrants are very important to the Territorial and Federal governments.

 

     For the 1980 census of Guam, over 28,000 persons were recorded as having lived away from Guam between 1970 and 1980, returning most often in 1979 or 1980 (40 percent) or 1977 or 1978 (32 percent) (Table 7.15).  There were no differences between year of return by sex.  Those born on Guam returned most often between 1972 to 1974 or 1977 or 1978 (24 percent), while those born elsewhere returned during 1979 or 1980 (45 percent) or 1977 or 1978 (35 percent).

 

Table 7.15. Year of Return for Persons Living Away Between 1970 and

            1980: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Year of               Total       Born in Guam      Born Elsewhere

Arrival or      ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Return          Total Males Fmles Total Males Fmles Total Males Fmles

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

    Total....... 28138 15489 12649  5795  2997  2798 22343 12492  9851

     Percent.... 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

1979 or 1980....  40.1  41.0  39.0  22.6  21.3  24.1  44.6  45.7  43.2

1977 or 1978....  32.4  31.0  34.0  23.6  21.2  26.2  34.6  33.3  36.2

1975 or 1976....  10.3  10.0  10.7  17.1  17.6  16.6   8.6   8.2   9.0

1972 to 1974....  10.6  10.2  11.1  23.9  25.5  22.2   7.2   6.6   7.9

1970 or 1971....   4.5   4.7   4.1  10.8  12.5   9.1   2.8   2.9   2.7

Yr not reported.   2.1   3.0   1.1   1.9   2.0   1.8   2.2   3.2    .9

______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A 1980, Table 152

 

     Table 7.16 presents data on persons 5 years and over who lived in the U.S. for 6 or more consecutive months. The largest age group who lived in the U.S. were those 25 to 34 years old with 9,003 persons (32 percent). Of that total, 53 percent lived there 6 or more years, 26 percent lived there 6 months to 2 years, and 21 percent lived there 3 to 5 years. The second largest group were persons 15 to 24 years old with 7,712 persons (27 percent).  Most of those living away did so for 6 or more years, with the exception of those less than 15 years old: their distribution was almost evenly split among the three time periods.

 

Table 7.16.  Persons 5 Years and Over Who Lived in the United States

             for 6 or more Consecutive Months Between 1970 and 1980

             by Sex and Length of Last Stay in the U.S. by Age: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                               Under    15 to    25 to    35 to       45

                                  15       24       34       44    Years

Length of Stay                 Years    Years    Years    Years  Old and

in the U.S.           Total      Old      Old      Old      Old     Over

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

     Total........    28167     5534     7712     9003     3638     2280

      Percent.....    100.0    100.0    100.0    100.0    100.0    100.0

6 months to 2 yrs.     26.6     31.9     23.2     25.5     21.9     38.3

3 to 5 years......     20.1     33.8     10.4     21.4     22.5     14.5

6 or more years...     53.3     34.3     66.3     53.2     55.7     47.2

________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A 1980, Table 158

 

     Of the 28,167 persons who lived in the U.S. for 6 or more consecutive months between 1970 and 1980, 15,517 (55 percent) were males (Table 7.17).  Most were in the school and working ages of 15 to 34 years (60 percent).  Except for the youngest group, most (55 percent) had lived away for 6 or more years.

 

Table 7.17.  Males 5 Years and Over Who Lived in the United States

             for 6 or more Consecutive Months Between 1970 and 1980

             by Sex and Length of Last Stay in the U.S. by Age: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                               Under    15 to    25 to    35 to       45

                                  15       24       34       44    Years

Length of Stay                 Years    Years    Years    Years  Old and

in the U.S.           Total      Old      Old      Old      Old     Over

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

    Males.........    15517     2793     4410     4973     2107     1234

     Percent......    100.0    100.0    100.0    100.0    100.0    100.0

6 months to 2 yrs.     25.3     32.2     20.5     25.6     21.9     33.9

3 to 5 years......     20.0     33.5      9.4     22.3     23.0     15.3

6 or more years...     54.7     34.3     70.2     52.1     55.0     50.8

________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A 1980, Table 158

 

     The characteristics of females who lived away for 6 or more months were similar to those of the males who did the same (Table 7.18).  Fully 58 percent were between 15 to 34 years; 52 percent had lived away 6 or more years.

 

Table 7.18.  Females 5 Years and Over Who Lived in the United States

             for 6 or more Consecutive Months Between 1970 and 1980

             by Sex and Length of Last Stay in the U.S. by Age: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                               Under    15 to    25 to    35 to       45

                                  15       24       34       44    Years

Length of Stay                 Years    Years    Years    Years  Old and

in the U.S.           Total      Old      Old      Old      Old     Over

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

   Females........    12650     2741     3302     4030     1531     1046

    Percent.......    100.0    100.0    100.0    100.0    100.0    100.0

6 months to 2 yrs.     28.1     31.6     26.9     25.4     21.8     43.3

3 to 5 years......     20.3     34.2     11.8     20.2     21.7     13.6

6 or more years...     51.6     34.2     61.3     54.4     56.5     43.2

________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A 1980, Table 158

 

     Table 7.19 shows the activity of persons who lived in the U.S. for those 5 years old and over, and persons 16 years old and over. Of the 24,835 persons 5 years and over who reported their activity, 11,804 (48 percent) were females and 13,031 were males. Of those reporting an activity, 36 percent attended school or college (37 percent of males and 34 percent of females).  Of the total persons 16 years old and over who reported their activity **** SOME PEOPLE ARE BOTH SEXES ***** (19, 599 or 88 percent), 10,454 (53 percent) were males and 12,108 were females. Slightly over 40 percent of males that reported an activity were working at a job or business and 68 percent were in the Armed Forces.  For the females who reported an activity, 39 percent were in school and nearly 10 percent were in the Armed Forces.

 

Table 7.19. Activity for Last 6 Months of Residence for Persons Who

            Lived in the U.S. between 1970 and 1980: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Activity                                Total         Males       Females

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

     Persons 5 years and over..         28167         15517         12650

Attending school or college....          8889          4839          4050

Not attending..................         15946          8192          7754

Not reported...................          3332          2486           846

  Percent of reported..........          35.8          37.1          34.3

 

     Persons 16 years and over.         22199         12512          9687

Working at a job or business...          7822          4220          3602

Not working....................         11777          6234          5543

Not reported...................          2600          2058           542

  Percent of reported..........          39.9          40.4          39.4

In the armed forces............          8728          7868           860

Not in armed forces............         11740          3669          8071

Not reported...................          1731           975           756

  Percent of reported..........          42.6          68.2           9.6

_________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A 1980,

        Tables 154 and 156

 

SUMMARY

 

     Slightly over 49 percent of the total population of the island in 1980 had been born on Guam; the remainder were migrants.  When the military are discounted, however, nearly 60 percent of Guam's population were born on the island.  The majority of the migrants came from the United States (45 percent) or Asia (also 45 percent).  The most common period of immigration was 1979 to 1980 (30 percent), followed by 1977 to 1978 (24 percent), except for immigrants from the Philippines, who came most often between 1960 to 1969.

 

     Immigrants were most likely to be between 20 and 64 years of age (67 percent), in the labor force (73 percent), and to have been born in the same place that their father had been born (80 percent) rather than their mother's birthplace (77 percent).

 

     Persons who had lived away from Guam between 1970 and 1980 returned most often in the period between 1979 to 1980 (40 percent) or 1977 to 1978 (32 percent).  For those who were 5 years or over, most had lived away from Guam for 6 or more years (53 percent).  Many who had lived away from Guam were in the Armed Forces (43 percent), or school (36 percent).

 

     When considering the age of immigrants, (20 to 64), their labor force participation (73 percent), and their birthplace (United States or Asia), the majority were military personnel or laborers who were on Guam to work, then return home.  They had a short‑term, but vital, impact on the island, in the form of income earned, taxes paid, and money spent here, as well as participation in services and programs available on island. One issue that repeatedly arises, however, is whether or not migrants fill jobs that local personnel could fill.  Only 55 percent of those who are 16 years and over and born on Guam were in the labor force.  This aspect of migration will be explored in more depth in Chapter 10: Labor Force.

 

     With the approval of the Commonwealth Act by Guam voters, including the provision to control local immigration, the migration picture is expected to change considerably.  It is not foreseen, however, that this change will occur before the 1990 census.  Any impact that a change in immigration policy will cause will have to wait until the census in 2000.

 


  CHAPTER 8

  ETHNICITY

 

      "...Being a Guamanian can't be a blood thing, although I guess it would help to have some Chamorro blood in you.  The only problem is that the Spanish wiped out most of the male Chamorros, so it is difficult to find any pure Chamorro blood...Maybe if we can't use blood, or birth as a standard for just what does constitute a Guamanian...maybe to be a Guamanian he has to like chicken and red rice. Or has to vote in a local election. Or maybe to be a real Guamanian a guy has to know the language. That's not bad, except that some people know it better than others, and language is a hard thing to measure...

 

      Land ownership would have been a nice criterion to use some years ago, but unfortunately many Guamanians never have owned land, and other Guamanians have sold their land ‑ of their own free will ‑ to Japanese, Chinese, Koreans, or statesiders...

 

      I have my own personal recommendation.  I say that if a guy is sitting around with a bunch of unhappy sailors, discussing the island, if that guy stands up and says only nice things about Guam as a place to live, as his home, then he should be allowed to pass.  If he talks about the fiestas, the balmy trade winds blowing off the sea, the coconut palms floating gently in the green hills between Agat and Umatac ‑ and pronounces Umatac correctly, then I would say that here we have a Guamanian." (Joe Murphy, Pipedreams, The Sunday News, March 24, 1974).

 

 

     In Chapter 1 we traced the history of Chamorros, Filipinos, and others on Guam from Spanish times and into the 20th century.  In this chapter we will be looking at the current social and economic situation of the various ethnic groups on Guam, but will be spending most of the time looking at the major groups ‑ Chamorros, Filipinos, and others (including Whites).

 

     The data on ethnicity were derived from the answers to question 4. The 1980 census marked the first time that a general question on ethnicity was asked in a decennial census.  The question was based on self‑identification and was open‑ended (respondents were required to provide the answer).

 

     Ethnicity refers to a person's nationality group, lineage, or the country in which the person or the person's parents or ancestors were born before their arrival on Guam.  Thus, persons reported their ethnic group regardless of the number of generations removed from their country of origin.  Furthermore, responses to the ethnicity question reflected the ethnic group(s) with which persons identified and not necessarily the degree of attachment or association the persons had with the particular group(s).

 

     Ethnicity is different from other population characteristics that are sometimes regarded as indicators of ethnicity, namely country of birth and language spoken at home.

 


     A large number of persons reported their ethnicity by specifying a single ethnic group, but some reported two, three, or more ethnic groups.  All responses were coded manually by a procedure that allowed for identification of all single ethnic groups reported.  In addition, selected two‑ and three‑part combinations of ethnicity were identified by unique codes (these categories were selected since they were reported frequently in Census Bureau surveys taken prior to the 1980 census).  All other multiple responses were coded according to the first ethnic category reported.

 

     In published tabulations, multiple groups are designated in open‑ended categories such as "Chamorro and other groups," rather than in specific multiple ethnic groups such as "Chamorro‑Carolinian."  A person who reported "Chamorro‑Carolinian" ethnicity, for example, is included in the "Chamorro and other groups" and in the category "Carolinian and other groups."  A few responses consisting of two terms (e.g. French Canadian) were considered as a single group and were coded and tabulated as a single ethnicity.  In addition, persons reporting combinations of ethnic groups such as "German‑Bavarian" were tabulated as a single group (i.e., German).  Responses such as "Polish‑American" or "Italian‑American" were coded and tabulated as a single entry (i.e., "Polish" or "Italian").  A sole entry of "American" was tabulated in the category "Ethnicity not specified."  Entries of religious groups were not coded separately and were tabulated in the category "Ethnic group not specified."

 

ETHNICITY CHARACTERISTICS

 

     In 1980 Chamorros continued to be the largest ethnic group on Guam, although their proportion of the total population was the smallest of any of the decennial censuses in this century (Table 8.1 and Figure 8.1).  From 92 percent in the 1920 census, the proportion of Chamorros remained high until the outbreak of World War II (89 percent in 1930 and 90 percent in 1940); subsequently, the percentage of the population that was Chamorro decreased drastically as large numbers of military persons immigrated in the 1940s, and many Filipinos immigrated in the 1960s and 1970s, particularly after the change in the immigration laws in 1965.

 

Table 8.1.  Ethnicity: 1920 to 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Ethnicity and                                                           

Birthplace           1980      1960      1950      1940      1930      1920

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

     Total.....   105,979    67,044    59,498    22,290    18,509    13,275

Chamorros......    47,825    34,762    27,124    20,177    16,402    12,216

Filipinos......    22,447     8,580     7,258       569       365       396

Whites.........    26,901    20,724    22,920       785     1,205       280

Others.........     8,806     2,978     2,196       759       537       383

 

     Total.....     100.0     100.0     100.0     100.0     100.0     100.0

Chamorros......      45.1      51.8      45.6      90.5      88.6      92.0

Filipinos......      21.2      12.8      12.2       2.6       2.0       3.0

Whites.........      25.4      30.9      38.5       3.5       6.5       2.1

Others.........       8.3       4.4       3.7       3.4       2.9       2.9

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports.

 

    In 1950, Chamorros constituted only 46 percent of the population (half the percentage of only 10 years earlier ‑ although numbers increased by about 7,000).  On the other hand, Whites increased from 4 percent of the population in 1940 to 39 percent in 1950 and Filipinos increased from 3 percent to 12 percent during the period.  The percentage of persons of other ethnicities remained low throughout the period.

 

     By 1960, more than half the population was again Chamorro, but this gain was as much due to departing military personnel before the 1960 census as to gains in the Chamorro population itself.  Although the Chamorro population increased by 6 percentage points, this was more than offset by the 8 percentage point decreases for Whites.

 

     No ethnic data were tabulated in 1970, breaking the string of census data on ethnicity.  Unfortunately, the 1980 Census data are also rather ambiguous.  As noted in the definitions section, respondents could give any number of ethnicities, with the first two being coded.  Therefore, some persons responded with a single ancestry response and others with more than one response.  Since many people gave two or more responses, the sum of the responses was greater than the number of persons, which complicated the analysis of the data.  Also, although the Census Bureau provided coded for Chamorro, Guamanian, Filipino, and other Asian and Pacific Islander groups, there was no acceptable code for "White" which has made analysis very difficult, and all of the analysis here should be treated as little more than tentative.

 

     In the analysis here, we have used a convention for Whites: all persons who reported as European (or one of the European groups) either alone or in combination with other groups were included, as were persons who gave other single ancestry responses not coded in one of the Asian or Pacific Islander groups, and persons who did not respond.  This convention assumes that Asian and Pacific Islander persons would respond to the question and would respond with an appropriate Asian or Pacific Islander response.  Hence, their responses should not appear in either the "other single" response category

since they would have been coded into the proper Asian or Pacific Islander category, and they would not appear in the categories "Not Reported" and "Not Specified" since normally they would have responded.  This definition of "White", therefore, includes all "Blacks" and any "Hispanics" who did not choose one of the European categories for ethnic response.  It is also important to note that persons of Chamorro and "White" ancestry (941 altogether) are included in both groups.  By this definition, "White" became the second largest group in 1980 at 25 percent.

 

     In 1980, Filipinos remained the third ranking group with 22,447 persons identified by single ethnicity (21 percent of the total population).  Filipinos increased by 8 percentage points during the 20 year period since the last time ethnic data were collected in a decennial census on Guam.  This increase was mostly at the expense of Whites (who decreased by 5 percent during the period and Chamorros (who decreased by 6 percent).  On the other hand, the percentage of "Other races" almost doubled during the period, growing from 4 percent to more than 8 percent; most of these persons were other Asian immigrants and Micronesians from the other islands in the areas (including some Carolinians from the Northern Mariana Islands.)

 

 

 

 

 

Figure 8.1  Ethnicity: 1920 to 1980

  (Percent)


 

     Table 8.2 shows the percentage change for the largest ethnic groups between adjacent censuses.  Only Chamorros have shown fairly consistent increases in population during the period (although the last period was 20 years compared to 10 years for the other periods.)  Chamorros increased by between 23 and 28 percent between adjacent censuses during the century.

 

     Whites increased by more than 300 percent between 1920 and 1930, but the absolute numbers were rather small. Between 1930 and 1940 the percentage of Whites decreased by about one‑third, and then leaped by more than 2000 percent during the next decade because of the military occupation and building of armed forces establishments on the island in the latter part of the 1940s.  As the military build‑up wound down in the late 1960s, Whites left the island, so that the 1960 census showed about a 10 percent decrease from 1950.  During the 20 years preceding the 1980 census, the population began to increase again.

 

     Filipinos also showed huge increases and decreases.  Although the number of Filipinos decreased somewhat between 1920 and 1930, there was more than a 50 percent increase during the next decade.  Between 1940 and 1950 the Filipino population increased by more than 1000 percent, partly as a result of Filipinos in the military, and partly, probably due to persons leaving the Philippines about the time of Philippine independence in 1944.

 

     Filipinos continued to increase modestly between 1950 and 1960, but after 1960, Filipino growth was the largest of any of the major groups, growing more than 100 percent during the 20 year period, partly because of the change in the U.S. immigration laws allowing more Filipinos to come to the U.S., and, therefore, to Guam as well.

 

Table 8.2.  Change in Ethnicity: 1920 to 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                  1960 to   1950 to   1940 to   1930 to   1920 to

Ethnicity            1980      1960      1950      1940      1930

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

    Total......      58.1      12.7     166.9      20.4      39.4

Chamorros......      37.6      28.2      34.4      23.0      34.3

Filipinos......     161.6      18.2    1175.6      55.9      ‑7.8

Whites.........      29.8      ‑9.6    2819.7     ‑34.9     330.4

_________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports.

 

PLACE OF BIRTH

 

     By 1980, almost 3 out of every 10 persons on Guam were foreign born (see also Chapter 7 on migration.)  The proportion of foreign born (those not born in the United States, Guam, or one of the U.S. territories) almost doubled between 1970 and 1980, although it had remained pretty constant between 1950 and 1950 and 1970.  Data for Filipinos and for Guam's population as a whole before 1950 are not comparable with the later data because persons born in the Philippines were considered native from 1898 at the end of the Spanish‑American war until Philippines independence in 1944.  So, for the earlier censuses it is not possible to tell what percentage of

the "natives" were born in the Philippines; these persons are listed as foreign born in 1950 and after (Table 8.3 and Figure 8.2).

 

     The proportion of foreign born Chamorros has remained small, but has been increasing in recent years, and, in fact, almost doubled between 1960 and 1980, increasing from about 3 percent of the Chamorro population in 1960 to more than 5 percent in 1980.  It is not clear what proportion of these Chamorros are part‑Chamorro, and how that would affect reporting for ethnicity and birthplace.

 

     The foreign‑born White population increased significantly between 1960 and 1980, the percentage being more than 4 times as large in 1980 as in 1960, but much of this increase is probably due to the redefinition of "White" in 1980.  It will be necessary to look at the 1990 census results which will allow for self‑identification of "Whites" to see whether this is a real trend.

 

     The proportion of foreign‑born Filipinos has been decreasing since 1950, the first decennial census to include Philippines as foreign born.  The percentage of foreign‑born Filipinos decreased from 94 percent in 1950 to 83 percent in 1960 and 77 percent in 1980.  As Filipinos have children on Guam and their children have children, the proportion of native born should increase (unless there is further massive immigration of Filipinos from the Philippines.)

 

 

Figure 8.2  Percent Foreign Born: 1920 to 1980


Table 8.3.  Ethnicity by Birthplace: 1920 to 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Ethnicity and                                                        

Birthplace         1980    1970    1960    1950    1940    1930    1920

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

     Total.....105,979  84,996  67,044  59,498  22,290  18,509  13,275

  Native....... 75,063  71,512  57,345  51,459  22,114  18,300  13,113

  Foreign born. 30,916  13,484   9,699   8,039     176     209     162

    Percent....   29.2    15.9    14.5    13.5      .8     1.1     1.2

 

Chamorros...... 47,825     (NA) 34,762  27,124  20,177  16,402  12,216

  Native....... 45,173     (NA) 33,769  26,521  20,089  16,319  12,187

  Foreign born.  2,652     (NA)    993     603      88      83      29

    Percent...     5.5     (NA)    2.9     2.2      .4      .5      .2

 

Filipinos...... 22,447     (NA)  8,580   7,258     569     365     396

  Native.......  5,249     (NA)  1,489     403     568     364     394

  Foreign born. 17,198     (NA)  7,091   6,855       1       1       2

    Percent....   76.6     (NA)   82.6    94.4      .2      .3      .5

 

Whites......... 26,901     (NA) 20,724  22,920     785   1,205     280

  Native....... 22,204     (NA) 19,856  22,560     740   1,139     236

  Foreign born.  4,697     (NA)    868     360      45      66      44

    Percent....   17.5     (NA)    4.2     1.6     5.7     5.5    15.7

______________________________________________________________________

Notes:  People Born in Philippines considered native until 1944; Whites

        in 1980 were combinations of ethnic groups not comparable.

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

 

     The changes between adjacent censuses highlight the affects of the foreign born population on Guam.  During the early decades of the century, between 1920 and 1940, the increase in the native population was faster than the foreign born sector (with the foreign‑born actually showing a decrease between 1930 and 1940.)

 

     The data for foreign‑born Chamorros are probably suspect, and the numbers are rather small in any case.  Foreign‑born whites showed the same rollercoaster pattern of Whites in general, with native born Whites increasing more rapidly between 1920 and 1930, then both experienced about a one‑third decline during the next decade, native born whites in the military increasing more rapidly than foreign born during the big migration. (Although the foreign born increase of 700 percent is impressive, the relative numbers were small).  Between 1950 and 1960 the native born White population actually decreased by more than 10 percent while the foreign‑born Whites continued to increase, more than doubling during the decade.  And again, although the numbers for 1980 are suspect, the increase of foreign‑born between 1960 and 1980 was considerable.

 

Table 8.4.  Change in Ethnicity by Birthplace: 1920 to 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Ethnicity and   1970 to 1960 to 1950 to 1940 to 1930 to 1920 to

Birthplace         1980    1970    1960    1950    1940    1930

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

     Total.....    24.7    26.8    12.7   166.9    20.4    39.4

  Native.......     5.0    24.7    11.4   132.7    20.8    39.6

  Foreign born.   129.3    39.0    20.6  4467.6   ‑15.8    29.0

 

Chamorros......    37.6     NA     28.2    34.4    23.0    34.3

  Native.......    33.8     NA     27.3    32.0    23.1    33.9

  Foreign born.   167.1     NA     64.7   585.2     6.0   186.2

 

Filipinos......   161.6     NA     18.2  1175.6    56.0    ‑7.8

  Native.......   252.5     NA    269.5     ...     ...     ...

  Foreign born.   142.5     NA      3.4     ...     ...     ...

 

Whites.........    29.8     NA     ‑9.6  2819.7   ‑34.9   330.4

  Native.......    11.8     NA    ‑12.0  2948.6   ‑35.0   382.6

  Foreign born.   441.1     NA    141.1   700.0   ‑31.8    50.0

_______________________________________________________________

Note: The figures in the 1970‑1980 column for the ethnic groups represent

      the change between 1960 and 1980 since ethnic data were not collected

      in the 1970 census.

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

 

     In 1980, Chamorros still maintained the dominance experienced since the beginning of the century.  Of the 105,979 persons, 44,299 or 42 percent reported single Chamorro ethnicity, that is Chamorro and no other ethnicity (Table 8.5).  Another 3,546 (3 percent) reported Chamorro in combination with other ethnicity responses. A final 1 percent reported "Guamanian", a difficult group to deal with since it is not known whether these are latter‑day Chamorros who feel a kind of separation from older Chamorros or these are persons of other races or ethnic groups who have chosen Guamanian ethnicity because of birthplace or affiliation.

 

     Once again, the second largest ethnic group was Filipino (21 percent).  No other major group had as much as 10 percent of the population.  There were almost 2,000 Japanese and about an equal number of Koreans, defined by single ancestry.  About 1,300 Palauans identified themselves on the basis of ethnicity.

 

     More than 3 of every 4 persons born on Guam in 1980 were Chamorro single ancestry, and another 6 percent were part‑Chamorro.  Almost 9 percent of all persons born on Guam and living on the island in 1980 were Filipino.  On the other hand, more than 4 in every 10 persons born off island were Asian, with 1 in 3 of all off‑islanders being Filipino.  That is, one‑third of all the persons living on Guam in 1980 but not born on the island were Filipinos.  About 1 in 7 were "European".

 

     The final column in Table 8.5 shows the percentage of persons in each of the ethnic groups who were born on Guam.  Only 49 percent of Guam's population was born on island.  As would be expected, more than 9 of every

10 Chamorros were born on Guam, with most of the rest presumably born in the Northern Mariana Islands.  More than 8 in 10 of the Guamanians were born on island as were more than 3 out of every 4 persons claiming multiple ethnic responses.

 

     On the other hand, only 18 percent of the Asians were born on Guam, 1 in 5 of the Filipinos, 1 of every 10 Japanese, and 1 of every 14 Koreans.  Europeans constituted 8 percent of those born on Guam.

 

Table 8.5. Ethnicity by Birthplace: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                 Numbers              Percent       Percent

                         ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑   Guam

                                   Guam    Not           Guam    Not    of

Ethnicity                  Total   Born   Guam   Total   Born   Guam  Total

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

   Total persons.........105,979 52,113 53,866   100.0  100.0  100.0   49.2

Single Ethnic group...... 94,839 48,332 46,507    89.5   92.7   86.3   51.0

  Chamorro............... 44,299 40,461  3,838    41.8   77.6    7.1   91.3

  Guamanian..............    830    694    136      .8    1.3     .3   83.6

  Palauan................  1,335    480    855     1.3     .9    1.6   36.0

  Other Pacific Islander.    891    210    681      .8     .4    1.3   23.6

  Asian.................. 28,647  5,099 23,548    27.0    9.8   43.7   17.8

    Filipino............. 22,447  4,519 17,928    21.2    8.7   33.3   20.1

    Japanese.............  1,855    197  1,658     1.8     .4    3.1   10.6

    Korean...............  1,873    126  1,747     1.8     .2    3.2    6.7

  European...............  8,442    629  7,813     8.0    1.2   14.5    7.5

  Other single group..... 10,395    759  9,636     9.8    1.5   17.9    7.3

Multiple ethnic group....  3,990  3,105    885     3.8    6.0    1.6   77.8

  Chamorro and other.....  3,546  3,036    510     3.3    5.8     .9   85.6

  Asian and other........  2,963  2,643    320     2.8    5.1     .6   89.2

  European and other.....    914    392    522      .9     .8    1.0   42.9

Not spec./Not reported...  7,150    676  6,474     6.7    1.3   12.0    9.5

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54, Table 26.

 

MEDIAN AGE

 

     Again, because of migration, the median age of the various population components has not shown the kinds of general trends expected in modernizing populations.  The median age of the population increased between 1930 and 1950, then decreased to 1960, and then increased again to 1980, partly as a result of the influx of relatively older Filipino migrants and reduced fertility of Chamorro women (Table 8.6 and Figure 8.3).

 

     The Chamorro population, as it has in many areas, shows a fairly typical pattern of an economically developing population.  The median age decreased fairly steadily from 1930 to 1960, and then suddenly increased between 1960 and 1980.  As was discussed in the fertility chapter, the decrease in median age was almost certainly due to decreasing mortality, and the subsequent increase in fertility, followed in the 1960s and 1970s by delay of marriage and child bearing.

 

     Because of the large numbers of immigrants, neither the Filipinos nor the Whites show this pattern.  Among the Filipinos, for example, the median age started out lower than for Chamorros in 1930 and 1940, but as immigration increased, so did the median age, rising to 33.3 in 1960 (but still being offset by the very low median age of Chamorros, in what might be called a Renaissance of Chamorro fertility.)  The median age of the White population has fluctuated quite a bit, depending on military activity.

 

Table 8.6.  Median Age of Ethnic Groups: 1930 to 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Age Group               1980       1960       1950        1940       1930

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

   Total........        22.3       20.8       22.8        17.9       18.8

Chamorro........        18.2       14.4       16.6        17.5       18.1

Filipino........        27.9       33.6       27.2        15.0       17.8

White...........        23.5       22.7       24.1        27.4       24.6

_________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports.

 

 

 

Figure 8.3   Median Age by Ethnic Group: 1940 to 1980


     The young age of the Chamorro is seen in the distribution by age group (Table 8.7).  The percentage of the population under 5 increased from 18 percent in 1930 to 21 percent in 1950 before decreasing to only 13 percent in 1980, a decrease of one‑third during the 30 years.  The very low median age for 1960 is seen in the young ages for that census, and the gradual aging of the population in 1980.  The percentage of aged remains low.

 

Table 8.7. Chamorros by Age: 1930 to 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Age Group               1980       1960       1950        1940       1930

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

  Total.........      47,845     34,762     27,124      20,177     16,402

    Percent.....       100.0      100.0      100.0       100.0      100.0

Less than 5 yrs.        13.2       18.9       20.6        17.0       18.0

5 to 9 yrs......        14.3       17.4       12.6        14.9       13.7

10 to 14 yrs....        14.1       15.4       13.3        12.9       12.1

15 to 19 yrs....        13.2        8.9       11.0        10.2       10.2

20 to 24 yrs....         8.3        6.8        8.6         7.8        8.6

25 to 29 yrs....         7.4        5.6        6.5         7.4        7.5

30 to 34 yrs....         6.2        5.6        5.6         6.2        6.1

35 to 44 yrs....         8.3        8.3        9.3         9.5        9.7

45 to 54 yrs....         7.1        6.3        6.0         6.5        6.5

55 to 64 yrs....         4.3        3.9        3.7         4.3        4.9

65 yrs or more..         3.6        2.8        2.7         3.1        2.7

_________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports.

 

     The change between adjacent censuses is also revealing (Table 8.8).  The number of persons 0 to 4 years old decreased by more than 4 percent between 1960 and 1980, the only age group for Chamorros to decrease during the half century.  On the other hand, the population 15 to 19 more than doubled, probably because of the double affects of the baby boom, and the smaller than average group of 15 to 19 year olds in 1960.  The persons who would have been 15 to 19 in 1960 would have been born between 1941 and 1945, during the period of the Japanese occupation when fertility was unnaturally low because of the conditions on the island.  This phenomenon is seen in the very small increase in the 15 to 19 year olds between 1950 and 1960, and the even smaller increase for persons 20 to 24 in between 1950 and 1960.

 

Table 8.8. Change in Chamorro Population by Age: 1930 to 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                     1960 to    1950 to    1940 to     1930 to

Age Group               1980       1960       1950        1940

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

  Total.........        37.6       28.2       34.4        23.0

Less than 5 yrs.        ‑4.1       17.6       62.8        16.6

5 to 9 yrs......        12.6       77.6       13.6        33.4

10 to 14 yrs....        26.7       47.7       38.5        31.6

15 to 19 yrs....       103.4        4.0       44.9        23.6

20 to 24 yrs....        68.1        1.1       47.5        12.3

25 to 29 yrs....        80.6       10.5       18.7        20.1

30 to 34 yrs....        53.4       27.2       21.4        25.4

35 to 44 yrs....        36.9       14.6       31.3        21.1

45 to 54 yrs....        54.7       34.6       24.5        22.2

55 to 64 yrs....        51.8       36.2       15.7         7.1

65 yrs or more..        78.8       32.1       16.7        43.5

______________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports.

 

     The change in the distribution of the Filipino population shows the affects of migration (Table 8.9).  Although the Filipino populations in 1930 and 1940 were very small, they showed fairly regular distributions. By 1950, more than half of the Filipino population was between 20 and 29 years old, and this bulge continued through the 1960 and 1980 censuses, although other immigrants came during the later periods as well.

 

Table 8.9.  Filipinos by Age: 1930 to 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Age Group               1980       1960       1950        1940       1930

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

  Total.........      22,447      8,580      7,258         569        365

    Percent.....       100.0      100.0      100.0       100.0      100.0

Less than 5 yrs.        11.0        8.7        2.6        19.2       17.5

5 to 9 yrs......        10.4        6.2         .7        15.3       16.4

10 to 14 yrs....         9.0        2.5         .5        15.6       10.7

15 to 19 yrs....         7.8         .9        1.8        10.0        9.6

20 to 24 yrs....         6.4        1.4       33.2         6.9        9.9

25 to 29 yrs....         9.3       10.5       25.5         4.9        8.5

30 to 34 yrs....         9.4       27.3       12.8         5.4        6.3

35 to 44 yrs....        12.8       28.4       17.2         9.8        9.6

45 to 54 yrs....        12.1       12.3        4.9         5.4        4.1

55 to 64 yrs....         8.1        1.4         .6         4.4        3.0

65 yrs or more..         3.8         .3         .1         3.0        4.4

_________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports.

 

      Between 1930 and 1940, Filipinos increased by 56 percent, and then by 1176 percent during the next decade because of the relatively large immigration after the war (and Philippines' independence.)  The median age for Filipinos decreased between 1930 and 1940, mostly due to fertility, although there may also have been some emigration during the decade.  The

largest increase was in the 20 to 44 year age groups.  However, in 1950 a clear indication of the heavy immigration was seen in the 20 to 54 year old ages.  Most of this increase was due to alien laborers imported for construction work with the military where massive construction activities took place, and the rebuilding of Guam's civilian infrastructure from the destruction caused by World War II.

 

     Between 1950 and 1960, the number of Filipinos increased by 18 percent.  While the proportion of children increased, the working age group 20 to 29 years old decreased by 126 percent.  On the other hand, the age group 30 to 34 increased by 442 percent, again because of selective immigration.  Because of the labor shortage hampering Guam's growth, the Filipinos moved into the labor force as the need for more construction workers developed.  In late 1962, another disaster struck Guam in the form of Typhoon Karen, devastating about 90 percent of its homes; more Filipinos came then in order to build houses and other structures.

 

     The Filipino population, the third ranking group in 1980, more than doubled between 1960 and 1980, and comprising 21 percent of the population in 1980.  Another typhoon, this time named Pamela, hit the island in 1976, eliminating almost every wooden structure on the island, and causing renewed immigration of Filipinos.

 

Table 8.10. Change in the Filipino Population by Age: 1930 to 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                     1960 to    1950 to    1940 to     1930 to

Age Group               1980       1960       1950        1940

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

  Total.........       161.6       18.2     1175.6        55.9

Less than 5 yrs.       231.9      290.6       75.2        70.3

5 to 9 yrs......       339.7      983.7      ‑43.7        45.0

10 to 14 yrs....       832.7      456.4      ‑56.2       128.2

15 to 19 yrs....      2077.5      ‑39.4      131.6        62.9

20 to 24 yrs....      1050.0      ‑94.8     6071.8         8.3

25 to 29 yrs....       131.0      ‑51.2     6514.3        ‑9.7

30 to 34 yrs....       ‑10.2      151.7     2900.0        34.8

35 to 44 yrs....        17.6       95.0     2132.1        60.0

45 to 54 yrs....       157.4      195.0     1054.8       106.7

55 to 64 yrs....      1426.9      197.5       60.0       127.3

65 yrs or more..      3316.0      150.0      ‑41.2         6.2

______________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports.

 

     The second largest ethnic group was the Whites (Table 8.11).  In 1940, Whites (785 persons) had decreased 35 percent from the 1,205 persons in 1930.  After the Liberation of Guam on July 21, 1944, an influx of military personnel with their dependents greatly increased the count of Whites; in 1950 where this group comprised almost 38 percent of the total population, an increase of 3820 percent since 1940.

 

Table 8.11. Whites by Age: 1930 to 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Age Group               1980       1960       1950        1940       1930

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

  Total.........      26,901     20,724     22,920         785      1,205

    Percent.....       100.0      100.0      100.0       100.0      100.0

Less than 5 yrs.        12.3       14.6        7.3         7.4        4.7

5 to 9 yrs......         9.6       10.8        4.0         5.2        4.5

10 to 14 yrs....         6.7        7.3        1.6         2.5        1.9

15 to 19 yrs....         8.3        7.7       15.9         4.2       13.3

20 to 24 yrs....        18.5       18.3       26.0        21.4       28.0

25 to 29 yrs....        13.7       11.2       14.3        19.0       17.9

30 to 34 yrs....        11.7        9.7       11.9        15.9       11.8

35 to 44 yrs....        11.3       13.6       12.4        15.8       11.4

45 to 54 yrs....         4.4        4.8        5.3         4.7        4.6

55 to 64 yrs....         2.4        1.7        1.1         2.7        1.4

65 yrs or more..         1.0         .4         .2         1.1         .5

_________________________________________________________________________

Note:   Whites in 1980 derived by adding European single and multiple

        ethnicity, other single ethnicity, and not reported.

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports.

 

     The most significant change was in the age group 15‑19 years which increased 10,970 percent (Table 8.12) from 1940 to 1950.  By 1960, the same age group (15‑19) decreased by 57 percent.  While uniformed personnel declined by 10 percent, an increase of the younger ages occurred, an indication that immigration of military dependents took place.  By 1980,  this category increased 30 percent (26,901 persons) making up 25 percent of the total population (105,979).

 

Table 8.12. Change in the White Population by Age: 1930 to 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                     1960 to    1950 to    1940 to     1930 to

Age Group               1980       1960       1950        1940

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

  Total.........        29.8       ‑9.6     2819.7       ‑34.9

Less than 5 yrs.         9.7       80.0     2793.1         1.8

5 to 9 yrs......        15.9      145.8     2122.0       ‑24.1

10 to 14 yrs....        20.3      309.5     1735.0       ‑13.0

15 to 19 yrs....        40.9      ‑56.5    10969.7       ‑79.4

20 to 24 yrs....        31.1      ‑36.3     3444.0       ‑50.1

25 to 29 yrs....        59.1      ‑29.5     2106.7       ‑31.0

30 to 34 yrs....        56.0      ‑26.2     2076.8       ‑12.0

35 to 44 yrs....         7.3        ‑.7     2196.8        ‑9.5

45 to 54 yrs....        20.5      ‑18.8     3191.9       ‑33.9

55 to 64 yrs....        77.6       47.2     1071.4        23.5

65 yrs or more..       284.9      102.8      300.0        50.0

______________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

 


CHARACTERISTICS OF ETHNIC GROUPS

 

     Although ethnicity was not one of the major variables used in the cross‑tabulations for the 1980 census (in PC80‑1‑C/D54), most of the major variables were cross‑tabulated with ethnicity, so a picture of the ethnic make‑up of the population in 1980 can be determined.

 

     The major ethnic group, Chamorro, was divided into full‑ and part‑Chamorro for the census tabulations, with full‑Chamorro being persons who stated that they were only of Chamorro ancestry and part‑Chamorros declaring Chamorro and other ancestries.  Almost 48,000 persons claimed either full‑ or part‑Chamorro ancestry.  The single and multiple designations were not considered for Filipino since the multiple could not be disaggregated from all Asian multiples; only Filipinos with single ancestry reports were used.  The procedures described previously for defining Whites were used in the cross‑tabs presented here.

 

     As noted in Table 8.8, the median age for the population on Guam in 1980 was 22.3 years.  The Chamorro median age was 18.2, Filipino median age was 27.9, and the median for Whites was 23.5.  The median age for full‑Chamorros of 18.9 years was somewhat higher than the 12.5 years for part‑Chamorros.  This phenomenon of younger aged multiples has been discussed for United States populations previously (Levin and Farley, 1982), and is caused by the fact that multiples can occur either as the offspring of two singles or from a single and a multiple, or from two multiples, whereas a single ancestry response should normally come only as the offspring of identical single reports.  Since the universe for singles is more restricted, they tend to be older.

 

     Almost 60 percent of the part‑Chamorros were under 15 years old compared to only 40 percent of the full‑Chamorros (Table 8.13).  In this table Whites were defined as those of single and multiple European ancestry and "other" single ancestry.  The largest percentages of Whites were between 20 and 44 years old, while Chamorros were focussed in the younger ages, and Filipinos were older with 1 in 4 being between 35 and 54 years old.

 

Table 8.13. Ethnicity by Age: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                               Chamorro                        Not

                     All‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑  Fili‑       Specif.    All

Age Group        Persons  Total   Full   Part   pino  White  or NR Others

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

  Total......... 105,979 47,845 44,299  3,546 22,447 19,751  7,150  8,786

    Percent.....   100.0  100.0  100.0  100.0  100.0  100.0  100.0  100.0

Less than 5 yrs.    12.3   13.2   12.7   19.8   11.0   12.9   10.8   10.3

5 to 9 yrs......    11.9   14.3   13.8   19.8   10.4    9.7    9.4   10.0

10 to 14 yrs....    10.7   14.1   13.6   20.5    9.0    6.5    7.2    8.4

15 to 19 yrs....    10.4   13.2   12.7   19.8    7.8    7.9    9.4    8.0

20 to 24 yrs....    10.5    8.3    8.2    8.7    6.4   18.4   18.7    8.5

25 to 29 yrs....     9.7    7.4    7.5    5.6    9.3   14.2   12.4   11.6

30 to 34 yrs....     8.8    6.2    6.6    1.7    9.4   11.8   11.1   12.2

35 to 44 yrs....    10.7    8.3    8.8    1.3   12.8   11.2   11.6   16.4

45 to 54 yrs....     7.7    7.1    7.6    1.2   12.1    4.2    5.1    9.8

55 to 59 yrs....     2.7    2.4    2.6     .6    5.2    1.4    1.5    2.3

60 to 64 yrs....     1.8    1.9    2.0     .6    2.9     .8    1.2    1.4

65 yrs or more..     2.8    3.6    3.9     .5    3.8     .9    1.6    1.2

Median              22.3   18.2   18.9   12.5   27.9   23.5   21.5   27.9

_________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 21.

 

     Table 8.14 shows the distribution for each of the 5 year age groups.  Although Chamorros made up 45 percent of Guam's total population in 1980, they were 60 percent of the 10 to 14 year olds and 57 percent of the 15 to 19 year olds.  Their numbers generally decreased for the older ages, but they were 58 percent of the persons 65 years and over.

 

     Chamorros were less than 1 in every 3 of the persons 30 to 34 years old.  In this age group, more than 1 in 5 were Filipino, and 1 in 4 were "White".  More than 1 in 3 of all persons on Guam between 35 and 64 years old were Filipino in 1980.

 

Table 8.14. Percent Ethnicity by Age: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                               Chamorro                        Not

                     All‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑  Fili‑       Specif.    All

Age Group        Persons  Total   Full   Part   pino  White  or NR Others

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

  Total.........   100.0   45.1   41.8    3.3   21.2   18.6    6.7    8.3

Less than 5 yrs.   100.0   48.5   43.1    5.4   19.0   19.6    5.9    7.0

5 to 9 yrs......   100.0   54.0   48.5    5.6   18.5   15.2    5.3    6.9

10 to 14 yrs....   100.0   59.7   53.3    6.4   17.9   11.4    4.6    6.5

15 to 19 yrs....   100.0   57.4   51.0    6.4   15.8   14.3    6.1    6.4

20 to 24 yrs....   100.0   35.6   32.8    2.8   12.8   32.8   12.0    6.8

25 to 29 yrs....   100.0   34.1   32.2    1.9   20.2   27.1    8.6    9.9

30 to 34 yrs....   100.0   32.1   31.4     .7   22.6   25.2    8.6   11.5

35 to 44 yrs....   100.0   35.1   34.7     .4   25.4   19.5    7.3   12.7

45 to 54 yrs....   100.0   41.7   41.1     .5   33.3   10.1    4.5   10.5

55 to 59 yrs....   100.0   39.9   39.2     .7   39.9    9.5    3.8    6.9

60 to 64 yrs....   100.0   46.6   45.6    1.0   33.9    8.7    4.6    6.3

65 yrs or more..   100.0   58.5   57.9     .5   28.6    5.7    3.7    3.5

_________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 21.

 

     Table 8.15 summarizes information from several of the previous tables.  Again, while Chamorros displayed the characteristics of a fairly normal age distribution, with a gradual tapering off with age, because of the immigrant nature of the Filipinos and Whites, their age structures differed considerably from a "normal" distribution.

 

Table 8.15.  Ethnicity by Age for Major Ethnic Groups: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                         All                                          All

Age Group            Persons   Chamorro   Filipino       White     Others

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

  Total.........     105,979     47,845     22,447      26,901      8,786

    Percent.....       100.0      100.0      100.0       100.0      100.0

Less than 5 yrs.        12.3       13.2       11.0        12.3       10.3

5 to 9 yrs......        11.9       14.3       10.4         9.6       10.0

10 to 14 yrs....        10.7       14.1        9.0         6.7        8.4

15 to 19 yrs....        10.4       13.2        7.8         8.3        8.0

20 to 24 yrs....        10.5        8.3        6.4        18.5        8.5

25 to 29 yrs....         9.7        7.4        9.3        13.7       11.6

30 to 34 yrs....         8.8        6.2        9.4        11.7       12.2

35 to 44 yrs....        10.7        8.3       12.8        11.3       16.4

45 to 54 yrs....         7.7        7.1       12.1         4.4        9.8

55 to 59 yrs....         2.7        2.4        5.2         1.4        2.3

60 to 64 yrs....         1.8        1.9        2.9          .9        1.4

65 yrs or more..         2.8        3.6        3.8         1.0        1.2

_________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 21.

 

     Also, when focussing on the distribution of the three large ethnic groups, the impact of migration is clearly seen.  Whites made up 45 percent

of the persons 20 to 24 in 1980, mostly because of the large number of persons of that age in the military (Table 8.16).

 

Table 8.16. Percent Ethnicity by Age for Major Ethnic Groups: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                         All                                          All

Age Group            Persons   Chamorro   Filipino       White     Others

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

  Total.........       100.0       45.1       21.2        25.4        8.3

Less than 5 yrs.       100.0       48.5       19.0        25.5        7.0

5 to 9 yrs......       100.0       54.0       18.5        20.5        6.9

10 to 14 yrs....       100.0       59.7       17.9        15.9        6.5

15 to 19 yrs....       100.0       57.4       15.8        20.3        6.4

20 to 24 yrs....       100.0       35.6       12.8        44.8        6.8

25 to 29 yrs....       100.0       34.1       20.2        35.7        9.9

30 to 34 yrs....       100.0       32.1       22.6        33.7       11.5

35 to 44 yrs....       100.0       35.1       25.4        26.9       12.7

45 to 54 yrs....       100.0       41.7       33.3        14.6       10.5

55 to 59 yrs....       100.0       39.9       39.9        13.3        6.9

60 to 64 yrs....       100.0       46.6       33.9        13.2        6.3

65 yrs or more..       100.0       58.5       28.6         9.4        3.5

_________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 21

 

LABOR FORCE PARTICIPATION

 

     Because we will not be discussing labor force participation until Chapter 10, a few conventions are presented here.  The economically active population comprised all persons 16 years and over of both sexes who furnished the supply of labor available for the production of economic goods and services, and included both persons employed and unemployed during the reference period.  The employed comprised all persons, including family workers who were at work or who had jobs during the specified period, whether they were full‑time or part‑time workers.  The unemployed consisted of all persons 16 years and over who were not working and were not seeking work for pay or profit during the reference period, including those who never worked before.  The total economically active population was the sum of the civilian economically active population and the armed forces.  However, members of the Armed Forces were separated from the economically active population.  Secondly, the group not economically active population comprised home‑workers, students, persons in institutions, income‑recipients, and all other persons not included in the economically active population.

 

     While almost 2 out of every 3 adults 16 years and over on Guam were in the labor force (including military personnel), only 55 percent of the Chamorros were in this category (with about the same proportions of full‑ and part‑Chamorros.)  On the other hand, more than 7 in every 10 Filipinos were in the labor force, as were more than 8 in 10 of the Whites (again, as defined earlier in the broadest sense) (Table 8.17).

 

     Part of the smaller proportions of Chamorros in the labor force can be attributed to fewer of them being in the Armed Forces.  Since many Whites

and Filipinos came to Guam specifically to be in the Armed Forces, they appear in both the numerator and the denominator compared to many Chamorros who were here, and did not choose the join the military.  Only 247 (2 percent) Chamorros were in the labor force and were in the military compared to 8 percent for Filipinos and 59 percent for Whites.  [Still, the proportion of Chamorros in the labor force is somewhat below that of the other named groups.]

 

     Also, Chamorros were somewhat less likely to work part‑time than Whites, but slightly more likely than Filipinos to be in this category.  About 14 percent of the employed population on Guam worked part‑time; about 13 percent of the Chamorros were in this category, compared to 12 percent of the Filipinos, and almost 18 percent of the Whites.

 

     All other ethnic groups, comprised of Koreans, Japanese, Chinese, Palauans, and other Asian and Pacific Islanders, constituted 9 percent of the total population 16 years and over.  About 63 percent of these groups were in the labor force, and about 2 percent were in the Armed Forces.  These groups made up about 11 percent of those employed in 1980, and about 8 percent of the unemployed.

 

       As noted in Chapter 10 on labor force participation, using census data to analyze unemployment is rather problematic since the data are only at one particular point in time and are very susceptible to variabilities in economic conditions at the time of the census.  Labor force surveys are more appropriate mechanisms for obtaining unemployment information, partly because they are more timely, and partly because unemployment entails use of a number of concepts, not all of which are readily used in census enumeration procedures.

 

      Nevertheless, altogether about 5 percent of the civilian labor force on Guam in 1980 was unemployed.  Less than 6 percent of Chamorros were unemployed, while 4 percent of the Filipinos and 5 percent of the Whites were in this category.

 

Table 8.17. Ethnicity by Labor Force Participation: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                       Chamorro                   Not   All

                              All‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ Fili‑      Specif   Ot‑

Labor Force Participation  Person Total  Full  Part  pino White or NR  hers

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

     Total 16 yrs and over. 66773 26542 25292  1250 15230 13780  5111  6110

In the labor force......... 44484 14541 13851   690 10741 11170  4206  3826

      Percent..............  66.6  54.8  54.8  55.2  70.5  81.1  82.3  62.6

    Armed Forces........... 10125   247   231    16   801  6610  2310   157

       Percent.............  22.8   1.7   1.7   2.3   7.5  59.2  54.9   4.1

    Civilian Labor Force... 34359 14294 13620   674  9940  4560  1896  3669

     Employed.............. 32692 13498 12878   620  9506  4316  1835  3537

      At work 35+ hrs...... 27346 11410 10934   476  8098  3438  1537  2863

      At work part‑time....  4415  1715  1593   122  1117   752   261   570

        Percent............  13.9  13.1  12.7  20.4  12.1  17.9  14.5  16.6

     Unemployed............  1667   796   742    54   434   244    61   132

        Percent............   4.9   5.6   5.4   8.0   4.4   5.4   3.2   3.6

Not in Labor Force......... 22289 12001 11441   560  4489  2610   905  2284

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D57A 1980, Table 38.

 

     Of the 32,692 employed persons in the civilian labor force on Guam in 1980, 13,498 (41 percent) were Chamorro.  Another 9,505 (29 percent) were Filipino, about 19 percent were either a White ethnic group or not reported (and assumed to be White), and about 11 percent were other ethnic groups.

 

     Industry.  Besides "subsistence" with only 14 persons, there were 11 major industry categories in the 1980 census (Table 8.18 and Figure 8.4).  For the whole population of Guam, retail trade was the largest category with about 1 in 5 persons in that industry.  Almost the same number worked in professional and related activities (such as doctors and nurses, teachers and teacher's aides).  Slightly fewer worked in public administration.

 

     The distribution for the ethnic groups differed significantly depending on the group.  For example, more than 1 in every 4 Chamorros was in public administration (compared to less than 1 in 5 for the general population.)  Also, Chamorros were in professional and related activities in slightly greater proportions than the general population, but it is important to remember here that this category included persons of all different occupations and skill levels; that is, persons who were teachers' aides at schools or nurses' aides at a hospital or clinic were included here with doctors, teachers, and lawyers.  Although 20 percent of Guam's population worked in retail trade, this was true for only 13 percent of the Chamorros (although 22 percent of the part‑Chamorros were in retail trade compared to only 13 percent of the full‑Chamorros).  Also, although only 1 in 10 of Guam's employed workers were in transportation, communication, and other utilities, 1 in 7 of the Chamorros were doing these activities.  The percentage of Chamorros in construction was slightly more than half of the total population, and only 3 percent of Chamorros were in entertainment and personal industry activities compared to more than 6 percent of the total population.

 

     The characteristics for Filipinos were very different.  More than 1 in every 4 Filipinos was involved in some aspect of retail trade in 1980. The second largest industry category for Filipinos was construction, with almost 1 in every 6 Filipinos involved in this category (compared to about 1 in 20 for Chamorros).  Also, more than 1 in 10 employed Filipinos were in entertainment and personal activities.  Much smaller proportions of Filipinos than either Chamorros or the general population were in professional and related activities, and public administration.

 

 

 

Figure 8.4  Ethnicity by Industry: 1980

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

     The activities of Whites as defined by single or multiple European ancestry and other single ethnic responses were much more restricted by category.  Almost exactly 1 in every 3 Whites was in professional or related activities; another 1 in 6 were in retail trade, and about an equal number were in public administration.  Hence, about 2 out of every 3 White workers were in one of these three industry categories.  Consequently, few Whites worked in other industries.  Only 4 percent of Whites worked in construction compared to 9 percent of Guam's population, and 8 percent worked in transportation, communication, and other utilities.

 

Table 8.18.   Ethnicity by Industry: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                       Chamorro                   Not   All

                              All‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ Fili‑      Specif   Ot‑

Industry                   Person Total  Full  Part  pino White or NR  hers

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

    Employed persons....... 32692 13498 12878   620  9506  4316  1835  3537

      Percent.............. 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Agricul., forest., fishing.    .9    .7    .8    .3   1.1    .6    .9   1.0

Construction, mining.......   9.3   5.4   5.4   5.0  16.1   3.7   5.8  14.8

Manufacturing..............   4.9   4.1   4.1   4.2   6.7   4.4   5.6   3.3

Transport, commun, utility.  10.2  14.5  14.7  11.0   6.1   7.6  10.2   7.7

Wholesale trade............   2.3   1.8   1.7   3.4   2.5   2.7   2.5   3.4

Retail trade...............  20.0  13.4  12.9  22.1  26.4  16.9  17.5  33.6

Finance, insurance.........   4.8   4.8   4.7   7.1   4.7   5.9   4.4   3.7

Business and repair serv...   3.6   3.1   3.1   4.2   3.8   3.4   3.7   5.3

Entertainment, personal....   6.4   2.9   2.8   6.1  10.5   5.3   5.7  10.5

Professional and related...  19.6  21.8  22.1  16.3  11.9  33.3  28.9  10.3

Public administration......  17.9  27.3  27.6  20.3  10.3  16.2  14.8   6.3

Primarily subsistence......    .0    .1    .1   0.0   0.0   0.0   0.0    .1

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D57A 1980, Table 43

 

     In Table 8.19 we have disaggregated the ethnic data a little more to show the distribution for Japanese, Koreans, and Palauans.  Of the 377 Palauans employed in 1980, 27 percent were in retail trade, 18 percent were doing entertainment and other personal activities, 13 percent were in transportation, communications and other utilities, and 11 percent were doing professional and related activities.  Only 8 percent were in public administration.

 

     The 855 Koreans had a very different distribution.  More than 1 in every 3 Koreans were in construction in 1980, the largest percentage of any of the selected ethnic groups, and more than twice the percentage of the Filipinos.  Another 31 percent of the Koreans were in retail trade, a percentage second only to the Japanese (at 37 percent).  With 2 out of every 3 Koreans in either construction or retail trade, only small numbers were doing other types of industrial activities.  About 9 percent of the Koreans were in business and repair services (also more than any other group).  If Koreans are representative of Asian immigrants, we can expect the make up of their part of the labor force to be somewhat different from the other groups.

 

     As noted previously, 37 percent of employed Japanese were working in retail trade in 1980.  Another 17 percent were in entertainment and personal services, and 14 percent were in transportation, communication, and other utilities.  As with Koreans and Palauans, the numbers of Japanese in the labor force were still comparatively small, and further immigration may produce a different distribution of activities.

 

Table 8.19.   Ethnicity by Percent Industry: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                             Asian

                              All Cham‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑      Palau‑

Industry                   Person  orro Total Japan Korea Flpno White    an

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

    Employed persons....... 32692 13498 12754   927   855  9506  4316   377

       Percent............. 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Agricul., forest., fishing.    .9    .7   1.0    .4   1.1   1.1    .6    .5

Construction, mining.......   9.3   5.4  15.9   6.5  36.1  16.1   3.7   7.4

Manufacturing..............   4.9   4.1   5.8   1.6   1.9   6.7   4.4   4.0

Transport, commun, utility.  10.2  14.5   6.5  14.1   2.7   6.1   7.6  13.3

Wholesale trade............   2.3   1.8   2.7   3.7   1.8   2.5   2.7   4.5

Retail trade...............  20.0  13.4  28.5  37.0  31.0  26.4  16.9  27.1

Finance, insurance.........   4.8   4.8   4.6   4.1   2.0   4.7   5.9   2.4

Business and repair serv...   3.6   3.1   4.2   4.9   9.0   3.8   3.4   4.5

Entertainment, personal....   6.4   2.9  10.3  16.6   7.7  10.5   5.3  17.8

Professional and related...  19.6  21.8  11.3   7.2   4.7  11.9  33.3  10.6

Public administration......  17.9  27.3   9.1   3.8   2.1  10.3  16.2   8.0

Primarily subsistence......    .0    .1    .0    .1   0.0    .0   0.0   0.0

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D57A 1980, Table 43.

 

    Once again, 41 percent of employed persons were Chamorro, 39 percent were Asian, and about 13 percent were "White".  There was considerable variation from this pattern for individual industries.  For example, Chamorros constituted 59 percent of all persons in transportation, communication, and utilities, but only 19 percent of those in entertainment and personal services, 24 percent of those in construction, and 28 percent of persons in retail trade.   On the other hand, Asians were 67 percent of all persons in construction, 62 percent of those in entertainment and personal services, and 56 percent of those in retail trade.  (Filipinos were more than half of all persons in construction and almost half of those in entertainment and personal services.)  Whites had proportionally more than their average in professional and related activities (22 percent), finance, insurance and real estate (16 percent), and wholesale trade (also 16 percent).  Koreans constituted 10 percent of all persons in construction, and 6 percent of those in business and repair services; Japanese were 7 percent of all persons in entertainment and personal services and 5 percent of those in retail trade, while Palauans were 3 percent of the entertainment and personal services industry.

 

     There were more Filipinos employed in manufacturing than any other ethnic group, with 40 percent.  The second largest group in this industry was Chamorro, making up 35 percent, followed by Whites with 12 percent, while all others contributed smaller amounts.  In the wholesale trade industry, Chamorros and Filipinos were present in about equal amounts ( 31 percent each), while Whites were 16 percent.  The retail trade industry was dominated by Filipinos (38 percent), Chamorros (28 percent), and Whites (11 percent).

 

Table 8.20.   Percent Ethnicity by Industry: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                             Asian

                              All Cham‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑      Palau‑

Industry                   Person  orro Total Japan Korea Flpno White    an

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

    Employed persons....... 100.0  41.3  39.0   2.8   2.6  29.1  13.2   1.2

Agricul., forest., fishing. 100.0  35.2  47.0   1.4   3.2  37.4   9.6    .7

Construction, mining....... 100.0  23.8  66.7   2.0  10.1  50.3   5.2    .9

Manufacturing.............. 100.0  34.7  46.1    .9   1.0  39.8  11.8    .9

Transport, commun, utility. 100.0  58.9  24.8   3.9    .7  17.4   9.9   1.5

Wholesale trade............ 100.0  31.4  45.1   4.5   2.0  30.9  15.5   2.3

Retail trade............... 100.0  27.5  55.6   5.2   4.0  38.3  11.1   1.6

Finance, insurance......... 100.0  41.8  37.4   2.4   1.1  28.4  16.3    .6

Business and repair serv... 100.0  35.9  45.3   3.8   6.5  30.3  12.4   1.4

Entertainment, personal.... 100.0  18.9  62.3   7.3   3.1  47.6  10.9   3.2

Professional and related... 100.0  46.0  22.5   1.0    .6  17.6  22.4    .6

Public administration...... 100.0  62.9  19.9    .6    .3  16.7  11.9    .5

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D57A 1980, Table 43.

 

     We have briefly described characteristics for the three major groups on Guam in 1980.  Since 1980 was the first time that a decennial census collected ethnicity data for Guam, these data are only a first step in analyzing the characteristics of the population.

 

LANGUAGE SPOKEN AT HOME AND ABILITY TO SPEAK ENGLISH

 

     About 36 percent of the population 5 years and over on Guam in 1980 spoke only English at home (Table 8.21).  Except for Whites, of course, none of the other large ethnic groups spoke English in more than half of their homes.  Only 23 percent of Chamorros spoke English at home, compared to 19 percent of the Filipinos, 23 percent of the Japanese, 15 percent of the Palauans, and 7 percent of the Koreans.  Slightly more than half of the part‑Chamorros spoke English at home, probably due to the interracial make‑up of these marriages, while only 1 in 5 of the full‑Chamorros spoke English at home.

 

     Of the 64 percent of the population 5 years and over who did not speak English at home, about 4 in 10 spoke another language more frequently than English.  The published 1980 census tabulations did not specify which language was spoken if English was not spoken, so it is not possible to tell whether Chamorros were speaking Chamorro, Filipinos speaking a language from the Philippines, etc., but certain assumptions can be made.

 

     Less than 1 percent of Guam's population did not speak English at all, but more than 1 percent of the Filipinos spoke no English, and more than 3 percent of the Japanese and 4 percent of the Koreans fell into this category.

 

     Although 28 percent of the population spoke English more frequently than the other language, more Chamorros were in this category (especially part‑Chamorros at 53 percent), while fewer Japanese (23 percent), Palauans

(20 percent), Filipinos (18 percent), and Koreans (12 percent) were in this category.  On the other hand, more than half of the Koreans, and almost half of the Filipinos, Japanese, and Palauans spoke another language at home more often than English.

 

Table 8.21.  Ethnicity by Language and Ability to Speak English: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                       Chamorro

                              All‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                             per‑        Sin‑ Mult‑ Fili‑ Japan  Kor‑   Pa‑

Language and Ability         sons Total   gle   ple  pino  ‑ese   ean lauan

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

     Total 5 yrs and over.. 92977 41538 38694  2844 19971  1667  1694  1172

        Percent............ 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Speaks only English........  35.7  23.1  21.1  50.5  19.4  23.3   7.3  15.3

 

Speaks other language...... 59795 31925 30516  1409 16103  1278  1571   993

        Percent............ 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

  English more frequently..  27.9  33.0  32.1  52.7  17.7  23.2  12.2  20.0

  Both equally often.......  31.3  35.2  35.4  29.8  32.9  25.3  21.1  30.8

  Other language more often  40.1  31.5  32.1  17.5  48.9  48.4  62.8  48.6

  Doesn't speak English....    .7    .4    .4   0.0   1.5   3.1   3.8    .5

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 31.

 

     There was an inverse relationship between English language speaking at home and age; that is, the older the person, the less likely he or she was to speak English at home (Table 8.22, Figures 8.5 and 8.6).  While persons over 65 constituted 3 percent of the population, for example, they were less than 1 percent of persons speaking English.  On the other hand, 23 percent of the children 5 to 9 spoke English at home, compared to their 14 percent of the population.

 

     The 1980 census did show that the Chamorro language was still strong.  Altogether 32,034 persons 5 years and over were recorded as speaking Chamorro at home compared to the 33,182 speaking English ‑ about equal numbers.  Although smaller proportions than their 5 to 9 year olds spoke Chamorro (10 percent of all Chamorro speakers compared to 14 percent of the population of that age), there was a slightly larger proportion of 10 to 14 year Chamorro speakers than in the total population.  These numbers are only inferential, but do give the impression that Chamorro is still spoken in most Chamorro homes.

 

     The distribution of Philippines language speakers was much more concentrated at older ages, because of the immigration of these persons at older ages.

 


 

Figure 8.5 Speak Only English at Home by Age: 1980

  (Percent)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Figure 8.6 Speak Only Chamorro at Home by Age: 1980

  (Percent)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 


 

Table 8.22.   Language Spoken at Home by Age: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                          Non‑English Language

                                ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                     All English               Cham‑  Phlppn       All

Age Group        Persons    Only     Total      orro   langs    Others

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

  Total.........  92,977  33,182    59,795    32,034  15,487    12,274

    Percent.....   100.0   100.0     100.0     100.0   100.0     100.0

5 to 9 yrs......    13.6    22.8       8.5      10.4     4.9       8.0

10 to 14 yrs....    12.2    16.3       9.9      12.8     6.0       7.5

15 to 19 yrs....    11.8    12.3      11.5      14.0     7.6      10.1

20 to 24 yrs....    11.9    14.0      10.8      10.4     7.7      15.8

25 to 29 yrs....    11.1    10.5      11.4      10.0    12.1      14.2

30 to 34 yrs....    10.0     8.8      10.7       8.7    12.7      13.2

35 to 44 yrs....    12.1     8.8      14.0      11.7    17.1      16.1

45 to 54 yrs....     8.8     3.9      11.5      10.3    16.0       9.1

55 to 59 yrs....     3.1     1.2       4.2       3.6     6.9       2.5

60 to 64 yrs....     2.1      .7       2.8       2.8     4.0       1.5

65 yrs or more..     3.2      .7       4.6       5.3     5.2       2.0

_______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 21.

 

     Table 8.23 shows the percentages of speakers of languages at home by age.  Once again, while 36 percent of the population 5 years and over spoke only English at home, 64 percent spoke another language; Chamorro was spoken by 34 percent of the total, Philippines languages by 17 percent, and 13 percent spoke other languages.  Although 60 percent of the 5 to 9 year olds spoke English at home, this was not true for any of the other age groups.  In fact, as was seen in Table 8.22, the older the age group, the less likely they were to speak English at home.

 

     Although about 1 in 3 persons on Guam spoke Chamorro in 1980 (Figure 8.7), more than 4 in 10 of the 15 to 19 year olds were in this category, as were about 4 in 10 of persons 45 to 64 and more than half of those over 65 years old.

 

Table 8.23.   Percent Language Spoken at Home by Age: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                          Non‑English Language

                                ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                     All English               Cham‑  Phlppn       All

Age Group        Persons    Only     Total      orro   langs    Others

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

  Total.........   100.0    35.7      64.3      34.5    16.7      13.2

5 to 9 yrs......   100.0    59.9      40.1      26.4     6.0       7.7

10 to 14 yrs....   100.0    47.6      52.4      36.0     8.2       8.2

15 to 19 yrs....   100.0    37.3      62.7      40.8    10.7      11.2

20 to 24 yrs....   100.0    41.9      58.1      29.9    10.7      17.5

25 to 29 yrs....   100.0    33.8      66.2      31.2    18.2      16.9

30 to 34 yrs....   100.0    31.3      68.7      30.1    21.2      17.4

35 to 44 yrs....   100.0    25.8      74.2      33.3    23.4      17.5

45 to 54 yrs....   100.0    15.7      84.3      40.3    30.3      13.6

55 to 59 yrs....   100.0    13.7      86.3      39.4    36.4      10.4

60 to 64 yrs....   100.0    12.3      87.7      46.0    31.9       9.8

65 yrs or more..   100.0     8.1      91.9      56.6    26.9       8.4

_______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 21.

 

 

 

 

Figure 8.7  Chamorro Spoken at Home by Age: 1980

  (Percent)


SUMMARY

 

     Chamorros continued to be the largest single ethnic group on Guam  in 1980 (45.1 percent of the total population), though at the lowest levels recorded in any census this century.  Whites were second in numbers here (25.4 percent), Filipinos third (21.2 percent).  The proportions of Whites and Filipinos here is increasing, that of Chamorros is decreasing.  Fully 78 percent of full Chamorros were born on Guam, as were 61 percent of part Chamorros.  The median age of Chamorros (18.2 years) was the lowest of any ethnic group; that of the Filipinos (27.9 years) was highest.  Almost 60 percent of part Chamorros were less than 15 years of age, as were 40 percent of full Chamorros.  Whites were primarily 20 to 44 years of age, Filipinos were 35 to 44 years.

 

     About 2 out of 3 of those 16 years and older were in the labor force; however, only 55 percent of Chamorros were in the labor force, compared to 70 percent of Filipinos and 81 percent of Whites.  This was partly due to small numbers of Chamorros in the Armed Forces or working only part time.  Those in the "Other" ethnic groups represented only 9 percent of the population but 63 percent were in the labor force.  By industry, Chamorros were mostly in the fields of public administration or professional and related services, Filipinos in retail trade or construction and mining, Whites were in professional and related services or retail trade, and others were in retail trade or construction and mining.

 

     Of the population 5 years and older, 36 percent spoke only English at home; except for Whites, no other group spoke only English in more than half of the homes.  Less than 1 percent spoke no English at all.  Older persons were less likely than younger ones to speak English at home.

 

     Guam is becoming increasingly multi‑ethnic and there is some evidence that multi‑lingualism will continue for some time based on the current age structure of the population and the likelihood for continued immigration from Asia, the Pacific Islands, and the United States.  The Census data give some general information about the ethnic distribution of the population in 1980; unfortunately since 1970 data were not available, many comparison were not possible.  After the 1990 census, a better set of trends will be developed to help planners and policy makers determine the best programs for Guam's future.

 


 CHAPTER 9

 EDUCATION

 

     Guam has been an unincorporated Territory of the United States since 1898.  Therefore, its population has had a long term exposure to the United States system of education.  In fact, when the island schools were first set up, both curriculum content and sequence, and the patterns of organization common to the state of California were used as models.  The public schools, Guam Community College, and University of Guam are all accredited by the Western Association of Schools and Colleges (WASC), which also accredits schools in California, Hawaii, and other Western states.

 

     Educational statistics from decennial censuses give snapshots of the school enrollment and educational attainment.  The census collects two sets of characteristics for assessing the educational status of a population:  level of school enrollment and level of educational attainment for adults no longer in school.  These data can be used in conjunction with data from the Department of Education and other sources to obtain information about the size and characteristics about the educated and uneducated populations.  Although statistical data are collected annually by the Department of Education in order to obtain adequate information about school enrollment and to assess needs for special programs in bilingual education and special education, the census allows more in‑depth analysis of various characteristics of the school population, such as ethnicity, birthplace, and language spoken at home.

 

     Also, the census collects data on educational attainment.  These data can be used to assess the relationship between educational attainment and participation in the labor force, occupation and industry, income and poverty, and other characteristics.

 

     Three questions, numbers 7, 8 and 9, on the 1980 census collected information on school enrollment and educational attainment.  Data were also collected on literacy in question 17, and vocational training in questions 20a and 20b.

 

SCHOOL ENROLLMENT

 

     The data on school enrollment were derived from answers to questions 7 and 8.  Persons were classified as enrolled in school if they reported attending a "regular" school or college at any time between February 1, 1980 and the time of enumeration.  Regular schooling was defined as  pre‑kindergarten, kindergarten, elementary school, and schooling which led to a high school diploma or college degree.  Schooling in trade or business schools, company training, or schooling obtained through a tutor was to be reported only if the course credits obtained were regarded as transferable to a regular elementary school, high school, or college.  Children were included as enrolled in pre‑kindergarten only if the school included instruction as an important and integral phase of its program.  Children enrolled in "Head Start" programs, or similar programs sponsored by local agencies to provide pre‑primary education to young children, were included as enrolled in school.  Persons who had been enrolled in a regular school since February 1, 1980, but who had not actually attended, for example, because of illness, were counted as enrolled in school.  Schooling which was generally regarded as not "regular" included that given in a pre‑kindergarten which simply provided custodial day care; in specialized vocational, trade, or, business schools; in on‑the‑job training; and through correspondence courses.


 

     Public, Church‑Related, or Other Private School.  Persons who were enrolled in school were also classified as attending a public, church‑related, or other private school.  In general, a "public school" was defined as any school which was controlled and supported primarily by a government agency.  A "church‑related" school was defined as a private school which was controlled or supported primarily by a religious organization.  An "other private" school was defined as a school controlled primarily by private groups other than religious organizations.

 

     Level and Year of School in Which Enrolled.  Persons who were enrolled in school were classified according to the level and year of school in which they were enrolled, as reported in question 8.  The levels separately identified in this report are pre‑kindergarten, kindergarten, elementary school, high school, and college.  Children in "Head Start" or similar programs were counted under "Pre‑kindergarten" or "Kindergarten" as appropriate.  Elementary school, as defined here, includes grades 1 to 8, and high school includes grades 9 to 12.  Persons attending junior high school were reported in elementary school or high school according to their grade.  The term "college" included junior or community college, 4‑year colleges, universities, and graduate or professional schools.

 

     Comparability with Earlier Census Data.  School enrollment questions in some form have been included in the census since 1930; grade attended was added in 1950.  The wording of the type of school question was changed from parochial in 1970 to church‑related in 1980 in an attempt to make the affiliation with a religious group clearer to respondents.  The intention was to include all schools controlled by religious groups rather than only particular denominations or religions.

 

     In 1940, the question on schooling referred to the period since the preceding March 1.  In 1950, the reference period was changed to that between February 1 and the time of enumeration.  The same reference period was used in 1960, 1970, and 1980.

 

     The age range for which enrollment data have been obtained varied for the several censuses.  Information on enrollment was recorded for persons 5 to 24 years old in 1940 and 1950, for those 5 to 34 years old in 1960, and for those 3 years old and over in 1970 and 1980.  Most of the published enrollment figures related to ages 5 to 24 in 1940 and in 1950, 5 to 34 in 1960, 3 to 34 in 1970, and 3 years and over in 1980.  The extended coverage for the published enrollment data in the recent censuses reflects increased interest in the number of persons who were attending regular colleges and universities at older ages.

 

     In the 1950 census, grade of enrollment was available for the first time; grade or year could be identified for elementary school through college.  In 1960, kindergarten was separately identified and included with the regular enrollment figures.  In 1970, nursery school enrollment was added to the levels of school separately identified.  In 1980, "nursery school" was replaced by "pre‑kindergarten."

 

YEARS OF SCHOOL COMPLETED

 

     The data on years of school completed were derived from answers to questions 8 and 9.  These questions on educational attainment applied only to progress in "regular" schools as defined under the definition for school enrollment.  The first question called for the highest grade attended, regardless of "skipped" or "repeated" grades.  Persons whose education was received in foreign school systems or an ungraded school were expected to report the approximate grade in the regular school system.  An instruction printed on the form, "If high school was finished by equivalency test (GED), mark '12'" (meaning grade 12), was to ensure that persons who dropped out of school before high school graduation but later earned a diploma with an equivalency test would be counted as high school graduates.  Those diploma recipients who also attended college would be credited with college attendance as reported.

 

     The second question on educational attainment asked whether or not the highest grade attended had been finished.  It was to be answered "Finished," if the person had successfully completed the entire grade or year indicated in question 8.  If the person had completed only part of the year, had dropped out, or failed to pass the last grade attended, the question was to be answered "Did not finish."  If the person was still attending school in that grade, he or she answered "Now attending."  The number in each category of highest grade of school completed represented the combination of (a) persons who reported the indicated grade as the highest grade attended and that they had finished it, (b) those who had attended the next higher grade but had not finished it, and (c) those still attending the next higher grade.  Persons who had not completed the first year of elementary school were classified as having no years of school completed.

 

     "Percent high school graduates" included persons who completed four years of high school by graduation or an equivalency test and persons who reported that they had attended some level of college.

 

     Comparability with Earlier Census Data.  Educational attainment questions in terms of years of school completed have been included on the census of Guam since 1950.  In 1950, a single question was asked on highest grade of school completed.  Since 1960 two questions have been used.

 

     The 1980 instruction for persons who received a high school diploma by virtue of passing an equivalency test was not included on past census questionnaires.  Persons who took equivalency tests may or may not have been reported as high school graduates in earlier censuses; however, completing high school by such means was not as common in earlier decades as it was in the decade prior to the 1980 census.

 

ABILITY TO READ AND WRITE

 

     The data on ability to read and write were derived from answers to question 17.  This question was asked of persons 5 years old and over.  Ability to read and write was not limited to any particular language.  Consequently, the category "Able to read and write," included persons who were able to read and write in English, Spanish, Chamorro, various languages used in the Philippines, etc.  Persons who could only read and those who could write only their own names were classified as "Unable to read and write."

 

VOCATIONAL TRAINING

 

     The data on vocational training were derived from answers to questions 20a and 20b, which were asked for the first time in the 1980 census.  Persons were included in the tabulations only if they had completed the requirements for a vocational program at a trade school, business school, hospital or some other kind of school for occupational training.  Vocational training was defined as a school program designed to prepare a person for work in an occupational field.  Thus, training which leads to certification to practice carpentry, electronics, nursing, or accounting was vocational, provided a baccalaureate degree was not granted for that training.  Included as "vocational training" were formal vocational training programs received in high school, through an apprenticeship program, in a school of business, in a nursing school or trade school, in a technical institute, in the U.S. Armed Forces, in the Job Corps, and in a correspondence school.  Excluded from "vocational training programs" were single courses which were not part of an organized program of study, on‑the‑job training, and basic training in the U.S. Armed Forces.  Persons who had completed a vocational training program were asked to designate the kind of school where the training was received (e.g., business school, trade school, 2‑year college, high school, training program at place of work, etc.).

 

SCHOOL ENROLLMENT CHARACTERISTICS

 

     During this century, generally larger and larger proportions of the school‑age population have been in school at each decennial census (Table 9.1).

 

Table 9.1  Percent of Persons Age 5 to 24 Years Enrolled

           in School: 1940 to 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                       1980     1970     1960     1940

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 Total age 5 to 24.    71.4     64.8     61.9     47.9

5 to 13............    96.9     88.4     82.7     68.5

14 to 17...........    95.2     91.2     89.2     47.4

18 to 24...........    21.9     16.2     17.6      5.6

_________________________________________________________

Note: Data not available for 1950.

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

 

     The post‑war years in Guam have witnessed a substantial increase in the percentage of young people enrolled in school.  Although only 48 percent of the population aged 5 to 24 in 1940 were enrolled at the time of the census,  the percentage increased to 62 percent in 1960, 65 percent in 1970, and 71 percent in 1980.

 

     In 1960, 83 percent of those in the appropriate age category were enrolled in elementary school, 89 percent in high school, and nearly 18 percent in college or university.

 

     By 1970, the enrollment levels increased considerably for elementary school ages, increased to a lesser degree for the high school ages, and declined somewhat for the college ages.  One explanation for the decline at the college level may be the high level of enlistment and participation in the Vietnam conflict in all segments of the population, both civilian and military personnel.

 

     School enrollment at all levels increased further by 1980.  Children were going to school in greater proportions than ever before, with 97 percent of elementary age children and 95 percent of high school aged children in school.  The enrollment rate for persons aged 18 to 24 increased to 22 percent.

 

     Kindergarten level (5 to 6 years) showed an increase in enrollment of 28 percent from 1970 to 1980.  Enrollment rates for those in the compulsory attendance ages (6 to 16 years) also increased, from 6 percent in 1970 to 9 percent in 1980.

 

Table 9.2. Percent School Enrollment by Age: 1930 to 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Age Group              1980     1970     1960     1950     1940     1930

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

5 and 6.......         89.2     62.2     42.8     12.5      1.3      7.1

7 to 13.......         99.2     96.5     96.1     98.0     91.8     96.3

14 and 15.....         98.8     94.9     95.5     95.4     60.3     63.6

16 and 17.....         91.5     86.9     81.4     69.8     32.4     24.2

18 and 19.....         43.7     44.6     35.3      0.0     11.5      4.4

________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

 

     The changing pattern of school enrollment has been affected by the varying proportion of young adults in the military.  Data for 1980 showed a marked difference in enrollment rates between the civilian and military populations (Table 9.3).  The civilian enrollment rate for persons aged 5 to 24 years was nearly 80 percent compared to 71 percent island‑wide, while it was only 43 percent for military persons.  Males were enrolled at a slightly higher rate than females in the civilian population, but at a lower rate in the military population.  Although data are not available, it is probable that enrollment rates for persons 5 to 19 years of age were very similar in both the military and civilian populations and that the determining factor in the overall lower enrollment rates for the military in 1980 was the 18 to 24 year age group.  That age group contained many active duty personnel employed full‑time with the military, plus their spouses, who may not have pursued a higher education.

 

Table 9.3  Percent of Persons 5 to 24 Years Enrolled

           in School by Sex and Civilian‑Military/

           Dependent Status: 1980              ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Status                      Total     Male   Female

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

  Total 5 to 24 yrs.....    46071    24161    21910

Total enrolled in school    32885    16939    15946

Percent enrolled........     71.4     70.1     72.8

 

  Civilian 5 to 24 yrs..    35876    17976    17900

Total enrolled in school    28518    14695    13823

Percent enrolled........     79.5     81.7     77.2

 

  Military 5 to 24 yrs..    10195     6185     4010

Total enrolled in school     4367     2244     2123

Percent enrolled........     42.8     36.3     52.9

___________________________________________________

Source:  U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980

         Tables 19 and 34; PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980

         Civilian Tables 19 and 34.

 

     School enrollment and labor force status in 1980 for persons 16 to 19 years of age is shown in Table 9.4.  About 9 percent of all young adult persons in the civilian population had not yet completed high school.  In the military population, the rate was less than 1 percent.  Almost 60 percent of the non‑completers in the civilian population considered themselves not in the labor force, and less than one‑third of these individuals were employed.  Without data by sex, it is impossible to know whether the employment rate for dropouts was significantly different between males and females.  It is possible that a large proportion of non‑completers were females who were not part of the labor force because of family responsibilities.

 

Table 9.4  School Enrollment and Labor Force Status for Persons

           16 to 19 Years by Civilian‑Military/Dependent Status: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                  Number               Percent

                           ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                             Total    Civ    Mil  Total    Civ    Mil

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

   Persons 16 to 19........   8759   7202   1557  100.0   82.2   17.8

Armed Forces Active Duty...    962    (X)    962   11.0    (X)   11.0

Civilian (not Armed Forces)   7797   7202    595   89.0   82.2    6.8

 Enrolled in school........   5862   5515    347   66.9   63.0    4.0

 Not enrolled in school....   1935   1687    248   22.1   19.3    2.8

   High school graduate....   1050    881    169   12.0   10.1    1.9

     Employed..............    602    532     70    6.9    6.1     .8

     Unemployed............     67     50     17     .8     .6     .2

     Not in labor force....    381    299     82    4.3    3.4     .9

   Not high school graduate    885    806     79   10.1    9.2     .9

     Employed..............    281    259     22    3.2    3.0     .3

     Unemployed............     82     71     11     .9     .8     .1

     Not in labor force....    522    476     46    6.0    5.4     .5

_____________________________________________________________________

Source:  U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980 Table 39;

         PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980 Civilian Table 39.

 

     Most of the non‑completers in the civilian population (72 percent) were born on Guam, and had a dropout rate of 12 percent (Table 9.5).  Persons born in the Philippines had a dropout rate of 9 percent, and persons born in the Commonwealth of the Northern Marianas had a dropout rate of 21 percent.

 

Table 9.5  School Enrollment and Labor Force Status by Place of Birth

           of Persons in the Civilian Community: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                        Place of Birth

                            ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

School Enrollment and                    Trust      Philip Other       Else‑

Labor Force Status     Total  Guam  CNMI Terr. Japan pines  Asia  U.S. Where

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

  Persons 16 to 19.... 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Enrolled in school....  76.6  75.5  67.1  89.5  79.5  78.7  87.1  78.1  75.2

Not enrolled in school  23.4  24.5  32.9  10.5  20.5  21.3  12.9  21.9  24.8

  High school graduate  12.2  12.1  11.9   6.1  16.1  11.8   7.5  15.0  15.6

     Employed.........   7.4   7.2   7.1   3.5  11.6   7.8   4.3   8.7   8.5

     Unemployed.......    .7    .6   0.0   0.0    .9   1.0   0.0   1.4   0.0

     Not in labr force   4.2   4.3   4.8   2.6   3.6   3.0   3.2   4.9   7.1

  Not high school grad  11.2  12.3  21.0   4.4   4.5   9.4   5.4   6.9   9.2

     Employed.........   3.6   3.6   4.3    .9    .9   5.2   2.2   2.5   2.1

     Unemployed.......   1.0   1.2   1.9   0.0   0.0    .5   0.0    .6   0.0

     Not in labr force   6.6   7.5  14.8   3.5   3.6   3.8   3.2   3.8   7.1

____________________________________________________________________________

Note:    Else includes unknown place of birth.

Source:  U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980 Civilian Table 27.

 

     English language ability may have some effect on the high school completion rate (Table 9.6).  The non‑completer rate was 6 percent for those who spoke only English at home, 13 percent if another language was also spoken in the home, and 18 percent when English was spoken less frequently.

 

Table 9.6. School Enrollment and Labor Force Status by Frequency

           of Speaking English in the Home in the Civilian

           Community For Persons 16 to 19: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                         Speak Another Language

                                    ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                               Speak        Speak  Speak  Speak

School Enrollment and           Only         More   Same   Less

Labor Force Status       Total  Eng. Total  Freq.  Freq.  Freq.

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

  Persons 16 to 19...... 100.0 100.0 100.0  100.0  100.0  100.0

Enrolled in school......  76.6  83.1  73.8   78.7   73.9   67.4

Not enrolled in school..  23.4  16.9  26.2   21.3   26.1   32.6

  High school graduate    12.2  10.6  12.9   11.8   12.3   15.1

    Employed............   7.4   6.3   7.9    7.3    7.0    9.7

    Unemployed..........    .7    .8    .7     .7     .7     .6

    Not in labor force..   4.2   3.6   4.4    3.7    4.7    4.9

  Not high school grad.   11.2   6.3  13.3    9.5   13.8   17.4

    Employed............   3.6   1.9   4.3    2.9    4.2    6.2

    Unemployed..........   1.0    .7   1.1     .9    1.1    1.4

    Not in labor force..   6.6   3.7   7.8    5.6    8.4    9.8

_______________________________________________________________

Note:    "Less Freq." includes those who do not speak English.

Source:  U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980 Civilian Table 32.

 

     School enrollment for persons 5 to 6 years old increased by 27 percentage points at the kindergarten level between 1970 and 1980; this was 8 percentage points more than the 1960 to 1970 change in school enrollment for children of the same ages (Table 9.7).  In the 18 and 19 year old category, there was a 9 percentage point decrease in school enrollment between 1970 to 1980 for those continuing their school to a higher level.

 

Table 9.7.  School Enrollment for Persons 5 to 19 Years: 1960 to 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                          Total Population   In School     Percent in School

                           ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Age Group                1980  1970 1960  1980  1970  1960  1980  1970  1960

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

   Total............... 34963 30115 21412 31402 25424 16701  89.8 84.4  78.0

5 and 6 years..........  4986  4749  3826  4447  2955  1639  89.2 62.2  42.8

7 to 13 years.......... 16735 15392 11368 16596 14851 10927  99.2 96.5  96.1

14 and 15 years........  4483  3672  1996  4429  3485  1907  98.8 94.9  95.5

16 and 17 years........  4398  3126  1601  4024  2717  1303  91.5 86.9  81.4

18 and 19 years........  4361  3176  2621  1906  1416   925  43.7 44.6  35.3

____________________________________________________________________________

Source:  U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980 Table 34; PC80‑1‑B54

         1980 Table 16; PC(1)‑B54 1970 Tables 5 and 10; General Population

         Characteristics 1960 Table 7.

 

     About 59 percent of civilian‑military/dependent males 25 to 29 years old were enrolled in an institute of higher education (Table 9.8).  This high enrollment indicates that the civilians at these ages were attending school under the G.I. Bill, or seeking higher level positions in the job market, or, for the military, to be earning credits that could be used to move to a higher rank.

 

     Fully 57 percent of the 46 enrollees 55 to 64 years of age were female.  Females also dominated in the age groups 40 to 54 and 65 and older.  There could be several contributing factors to why there were more women in those age groups enrolled in school than there were men: these women could have been mothers that have reared their children and then decided to go to college, and some, perhaps, were divorced women who decided to start a career.

 

Table 9.8. Percent School Enrollment for Persons 3 Years Old and Over

           by Age, Sex, and Civilian‑Military/Dependent Status: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                    Total       Civilian    Military

                           ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Age                 Total Percent Males Fmles Males Fmles Males Fmles

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

    Total in school. 36002 100.0 18598 17404 15815 14962  2783  2442

      Percent........100.0 100.0  51.7  48.3  43.9  41.6   7.7   6.8

3 Years............... 208 100.0  52.4  47.6  33.7  27.9  18.8  19.7

4 Years............... 685 100.0  50.1  49.9  36.1  37.2  14.0  12.7

5 Years...............2042 100.0  52.1  47.9  40.9  36.8  11.1  11.2

6 Years...............2405 100.0  50.4  49.6  41.7  39.6   8.7  10.1

7 Years...............2626 100.0  50.3  49.7  42.1  40.0   8.1   9.7

8 Years...............2480 100.0  51.6  48.4  43.0  41.0   8.6   7.5

9 Years...............2462 100.0  52.0  48.0  43.8  39.8   8.2   8.2

10 Years..............2357 100.0  51.4  48.6  43.7  41.1   7.7   7.5

11 years..............2183 100.0  51.9  48.1  45.9  41.9   6.0   6.2

12 Years..............2286 100.0  51.0  49.0  45.5  42.8   5.6   6.1

13 Years..............2202 100.0  52.2  47.8  47.1  42.9   5.1   4.9

14 Years..............2229 100.0  51.0  49.0  46.4  44.6   4.6   4.4

15 years..............2200 100.0  50.0  50.0  45.6  46.0   4.5   4.0

16 Years..............2111 100.0  52.1  47.9  48.4  44.9   3.7   3.0

17 Years..............1913 100.0  52.4  47.6  48.9  44.5   3.5   3.1

18 Years..............1242 100.0  55.2  44.8  50.3  41.0   4.9   2.9

19 Years.............. 664 100.0  52.3  47.7  47.1  45.5   5.1   2.3

20 Years.............. 420 100.0  45.0  55.0  38.1  52.4   6.9   2.6

21 years.............. 328 100.0  46.6  53.4  35.4  49.1  11.3   4.3

22 Years.............. 273 100.0  54.2  45.8  38.5  37.7  15.8   8.1

23 Years.............. 246 100.0  57.7  42.3  39.8  35.4  17.9   6.9

24 Years.............. 216 100.0  55.1  44.9  39.4  31.9  15.7  13.0

25 to 29 Years........ 856 100.0  58.8  41.2  38.6  31.8  20.2   9.5

30 to 34 Years........ 601 100.0  54.4  45.6  32.3  34.6  22.1  11.0

35 to 39 Years........ 318 100.0  50.3  49.7  28.9  41.2  21.4   8.5

40 to 44 Years........ 199 100.0  49.7  50.3  38.2  44.7  11.6   5.5

45 to 54 Years........ 190 100.0  48.4  51.6  44.7  48.4   3.7   3.2

55 to 64 Years........  46 100.0  43.5  56.5  43.5  56.5   0.0   0.0

65 Years and Over.....  14 100.0  42.9  57.1  42.9  57.1   0.0   0.0

_____________________________________________________________________

Source:  U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 34;

         PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980 Civilian, Table 34.

 

YEARS OF SCHOOL COMPLETED

 

     The population of Guam underwent a marked increase in the level of educational attainment in the years since 1940, as shown in Table 9.9.  The proportion of adults who finished high school rose from 5 percent in 1940 to 66 percent in 1980.  At the same time, the proportion of persons completing less than 5 years of elementary education fell from 56 percent in 1940 to 8 percent in 1980.  This dramatic increase in educational attainment was no doubt caused by compulsory education for all persons up to 16 years, which began on Guam in 1950.  The proportion completing college increased from 1 percent in 1940 to 18 percent in 1980, probably the result of the opening of the Guam college in 1961 (which later became the University of Guam), which made a higher education available locally.

 

Table 9.9.  Educational Attainment for Persons Age 25 and Over:

            1940 to 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Educational Attainment          1980   1970   1960   1950   1940

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

  Total....................... 100.0  100.0  100.0  100.0  100.0

Less than 5 years of                                      

  elementary school...........   8.2   14.2   20.4   29.7   55.6

Between 5 and 11 years........  26.2   36.3   41.9   38.4   39.6

High school (12 or more years)  65.6   49.5   37.7   31.9    4.8

  College (16 or more years)..  17.5   10.6    6.3    4.7    1.0

Median years completed........  12.5   11.9    9.7    8.4    4.7

__________________________________________________________________

Note:   For 1960, persons whose years of school completed was not

        reported are excluded.

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports.

 

     The increase in the proportion of adults with high school diplomas was partially influenced by a significantly higher level of educational attainment in the military community.  High school diplomas or GED certificates are now required for enlistment in the new, all volunteer armed service (Table 9.10).  This was reflected in the 94 percent of military males and 80 percent of military females aged 25 and over who had high school diplomas.  Approximately 80 percent of all adults had a high school diploma in 1980; this figure was slightly higher for males and slightly lower for females.

 

Table 9.10. Educational Attainment for Persons Age 25 and Over by

            Sex and Civilian‑Military/Dependent Status: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                     Number            Percent

                             ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Educational Attainment         Total  Male  Fmle Total  Male  Fmle

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

    Total, 25 yrs. and over... 46906 24540 22366 100.0 100.0 100.0

Less than 5 yrs...............  3831  1493  2338   8.2   6.1  10.5

Between 5 and 11 yrs.......... 12299  6046  6253  26.2  24.6  28.0

High school (12 yrs.+)........ 30776 17001 13775  65.6  69.3  61.6

  College (16 yrs. +).........  8232  4510  3722  17.5  18.4  16.6

 

    Civilian 25 yrs and over.. 37575 19063 18512 100.0 100.0 100.0

Less than 5 yrs...............  3627  1446  2181   9.7   7.6  11.8

Between 5 and 11 yrs.......... 11398  5754  5644  30.3  30.2  30.5

High school (12 yrs.+)........ 22550 11863 10687  60.0  62.2  57.7

  College (16 yrs. +).........  6600  3552  3048  17.6  18.6  16.5

 

    Military 25 yrs and over..  9331  5477  3854 100.0 100.0 100.0

Less than 5 yrs...............   204    47   157   2.2    .9   4.1

Between 5 and 11 yrs..........   901   292   609   9.7   5.3  15.8

High school (12 yrs.+)........  8226  5138  3088  88.2  93.8  80.1

  College (16 yrs. +) ........  1632   958   674  17.5  17.5  17.5

__________________________________________________________________

Source:  U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980 Table 22;

         PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980 Civilian Table 22.

 

     There was a decrease of 2.3 percentage points in the proportion of the population finishing 4 years of college between 1970 and 1980 (Table 9.11).  This does not necessarily represent a significant decrease in attainment; a contributing factor in this case could be that most college students who began their education on Guam transferred and attended other universities or colleges off‑island. A "High School and Beyond" survey conducted in school year 1986‑87 by the Division of Research, Planning and Evaluation of the Guam Department of Education indicated that 60 percent of high school seniors graduating that year planned to enroll and attend college off‑island.

 

Table 9.11. Educational Attainment: 1940 to 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

School Attainment             1980   1970   1960   1950  1940

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

     Persons 25 yrs & over.  100.0  100.0  100.0  100.0 100.0

No school..................    1.5     .5     .0     .6    .8

Elementary:  1 to 6 years..   13.6    7.7     .5    9.2   9.3

             7 and 8 years.    6.1    4.7     .3    5.5   5.7

High school: 1 to 3 years..   13.1   11.8    3.6   13.2  20.7

             4 years.......   31.2   34.0   46.5   31.4  34.6

College:     1 to 3 years..   16.8   19.6   31.1   17.3  15.6

             4 years.......   11.2   13.5    9.9   14.4  10.4

             5 or more year    6.4    8.2    8.1    8.5   2.9

_____________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports.

 

     The proportion of males completing 4 years of high school ranged between 30 percent in 1950 to 48 percent in 1960 (Table 9.12).  Only 3 percent of males had completed 5 or more years of college in 1940; this proportion increased to 8 percent in 1960, then slowly decreased to 7 percent in 1980.

 

Table 9.12. Educational Attainment: Males, 1940 to 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Educational Attainment        1980   1970   1960   1950  1940

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

     Males 25 yrs & over...  100.0  100.0  100.0  100.0 100.0

No school..................    1.0     .4     .0     .6    .5

Elementary:  1 to 6 years..   11.0    7.6     .5    9.9  12.1

             7 and 8 years.    5.9    5.0     .3    6.5   5.8

High school: 1 to 3 years..   12.8   12.6    3.6   15.3  21.6

             4 years.......   31.7   33.8   46.7   29.5  33.1

College:     1 to 3 years..   19.2   20.4   31.1   17.0  15.5

             4 years.......   11.0   12.0    9.4   13.0   8.4

             5 or more year    7.4    8.0    8.2    8.1   3.1

_____________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports.

 

     In general, women's level of attainment was lower than that of men (Table 9.13).  More males continued their education at the secondary level through high school, and males generally also had a higher level of attainment toward a degree in college.  High school, college, and post‑secondary completion rates for females also decreased between 1970 and 1980.

 

Table 9.13. Educational Attainment: Females, 1940 to 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Educational Attainment        1980   1970   1960   1950  1940

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

    Females 25 yrs & over..  100.0  100.0  100.0  100.0 100.0

No school..................    2.1     .6    0.0     .6   1.0

Elementary:  1 to 6 years..   16.5    7.7    0.6    7.9   7.0

             7 and 8 years.    6.4    4.0    0.0    4.1   5.6

High school: 1 to 3 years..   13.4   10.4    2.1   10.2  20.1

             4 years.......   30.8   34.5   43.2   34.2  35.8

College:     1 to 3 years..   14.2   17.9   30.4   17.6  15.7

             4 years.......   11.4   16.3   17.4   16.5  11.9

             5 or more year    5.3    8.6    6.2    9.0   2.8

_____________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

 

     In 1980, 66 percent of the population 25 years and over had completed 4 years of high school, as had 69 percent of males 25 and over and 62 percent of females.  Of those born on Guam, 50 percent had finished 4 years of high school (52 percent of males and 48 percent of females), while this was true of 61 percent of those born in the Philippines (60 percent of males and 62 percent of females).  Only 6 percent of the adult population had completed more than 5 years of college (7 percent of males and 5 percent of females), compared to 2 percent of those born on Guam and 14 percent of those born in the U.S.

 

Table 9.14. Educational Attainment by Birthplace: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                                Asia                     

                                             ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑             Else‑

School Attainment           Total  Guam   USA Total Phil.  CNMI Palau where

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

     Persons 25 yrs & over. 46906 16972 10562 15488 12111   963   580  2349

No school.................. 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Elementary:  1 to 6 years..  98.5  97.5  99.9  98.6  98.9  96.8  97.8  99.1

             7 and 8 years.  84.9  77.4  99.1  83.3  81.8  74.5  75.9  92.0

High school: 1 to 3 years..  78.7  68.6  98.2  76.4  74.3  63.7  70.5  88.2

             4 years.......  65.6  49.6  93.7  63.6  61.3  45.0  51.2  80.3

College:     1 to 3 years..  34.4  16.2  54.2  40.5  42.3  16.1  21.9  46.7

             4 years.......  17.5   6.7  28.1  23.3  24.1   4.4   4.8  19.4

             5 or more yrs.   6.3   2.4  14.1   5.6   6.0   1.9   1.0   8.0

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54, 1980 Table 27.

 

     Males born in the United States had higher proportions who had completed 5 or more years of college, followed by those born Elsewhere (Table 9.15).  Males born in Palau had the lowest proportions of their population who had completed 5 or more years of college.

 

Table 9.15. Educational Attainment by Birthplace: Males, 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                                Asia                     

                                             ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑             Else‑

School Attainment           Total  Guam   USA Total Phil.  CNMI Palau where

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

     Males 25 years and ove 24803  7762  6584  8045  6703   434   247  1468

No school.................. 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.1

Elementary:  1 to 6 years..  99.0  98.1  99.9  99.0  99.1  97.9  99.2  99.5

             7 and 8 years.  88.1  81.0  99.2  85.1  83.6  79.0  82.2  95.0

High school: 1 to 3 years..  82.3  72.0  98.3  77.8  75.4  68.9  77.3  91.7

             4 years.......  69.6  51.8  94.9  63.6  60.3  49.3  61.1  84.8

College:     1 to 3 years..  38.3  18.0  55.1  40.6  38.9  21.4  29.1  52.4

             4 years.......  19.2   6.9  28.7  21.8  19.2   6.0   4.9  20.2

             5 or more year   8.3   2.6  15.3   5.5   5.1   2.3   1.2   9.4

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54, 1980 Table 27.

 

     While 6 percent overall and 7 percent of males had completed 5 or more years of college, only 5 percent of females had done so (Table 9.16).  Females had higher proportions who had no school (2 percent) than did males (1 percent).  Females born in the CNMI had the highest percentages with no school (over 4 percent), while those born in the U.S. had the lowest (0 percent).

 

Table 9.16. Educational Attainment by Birthplace: Females 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                                Asia                     

                                             ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑             Else‑

School Attainment           Total  Guam   USA Total Phil.  CNMI Palau where

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

    Females 25 yrs and over 22103  9210  3978  7435  5408   529   333   881

No school.................. 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0  99.8

Elementary:  1 to 6 years..  97.9  96.9 100.0  98.2  98.6  95.8  96.7  98.4

             7 and 8 yrs...  81.2  74.3  99.1  81.4  79.5  70.7  71.2  87.1

High school: 1 to 3 yrs....  74.7  65.7  98.0  75.0  72.9  59.4  65.5  82.3

             4 years.......  61.1  47.8  91.7  63.5  62.6  41.4  43.8  72.9

College:     1 to 3 years..  30.0  14.7  52.7  40.4  46.5  11.7  16.5  37.2

             4 years.......  15.6   6.5  27.2  24.9  30.3   3.0   4.8  18.0

             5 or more yrs.   4.1   2.2  12.2   5.8   7.2   1.5    .9   5.7

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54, 1980 Table 27.

 

     While 66 percent of the population 25 years and older were high school graduates, over 75 percent of those in the labor force and 96 percent of those in the military had completed high school (Table 9.17).  Females generally had higher proportions of their population who had finished high school; the exceptions were those in the civilian labor force, both employed and unemployed.  The employed females in the civilian labor force had a higher proportion of college graduates (77 percent) than had the employed males (18 percent).

 

Table 9.17  Labor Force Participation by Educational Attainment: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                                 Civilian LF

                                         In      ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑Not In

                                     Labor Mili‑ Empl‑ Unem‑  Labor

Educational Attainment          Total Force  tary  ploy  ploy Force

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

   Persons 25 yrs. and over...  46906 32779  5554 26347   878 14127

Percent High School Graduates.   65.5  75.3  95.5  71.5  63.6  43.0

Percent College Graduates.....   17.5  21.7  18.0  22.9  13.4   7.7

 

     Males 25 yrs. and over...  24540 21448  5232 15835   381  3092

Percent High School Graduates.   69.2  74.2  95.4  95.4  67.6   7.1

Percent College Graduates.....   18.3  20.0  17.6  17.6  21.1   2.4

 

   Females 25 yrs. and over...  22366 11331   322 10512   497 11035

Percent High School Graduates.   61.6  77.4  97.2  77.3  66.2  45.4

Percent College Graduates.....   16.6  24.9  23.6  25.5  14.7   8.0

____________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54, 1980 Table 39.

 

     Table 9.18 shows median and mean income by educational attainment.  There was a direct correlation between education and income, that is, the more educated the person was in 1980, the more income he or she obtained.  Of the college graduates (4 year degree), 21 percent made more than $25,000 per year, although 9 percent made $7,000 or less.  Of those with 1 to 3 years of college, 20 percent earned more than $25,000, and 18 percent had income between $15,000 and $25,000.

 

Table 9.18  Educational Attainment by Income: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                          Total  Persons with income (Dollars)

                          (incl.‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                             w/o              7K‑ 10K‑ 15K‑       Med‑    

School Attainment         income   Tot   <7K  10K  15K  25K 25K+   ian  Mean

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

     Persons 25 yrs & over 46906 37618 11097 7350 9352 7379 2440 10149 11700

       Percent............ 100.0 100.0 100.0 100. 100. 100. 100.   ...   ...

No school.................   1.5   1.2   3.2   .6   .5   .2   .1  2712  4491

Elementary:  1 to 6 years.  13.6  11.4  21.0 10.4  7.3  6.1  2.6  6279  8024

             7 and 8 yrs..   6.2   5.5   7.0  5.6  4.8  4.5  2.7  8770 10223

High school: 1 to 3 yrs...  13.1  12.1  15.2 12.5 12.1  9.1  5.4  8910 10130

             4 years......  31.2  31.9  26.7 39.1 37.3 28.3 23.3 10124 11283

College:     1 to 3 years.  16.8  18.3  15.0 20.7 20.6 17.6 19.8 10417 12772

             4 years......  11.2  12.3   8.7  8.5 12.8 17.7 21.4 12441 14330

             5 or more yrs   6.4   7.5   3.3  2.6  4.6 16.2 24.8 18392 19144

____________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54, Table 49.

 

ABILITY TO READ AND WRITE

 

     Fully 99 percent of those 10 to 17 years old in the South could read and write in 1980, as could 95 percent of those in the North and 93 percent in the Central region (Table 9.19).  Of those 18 years and older in 1980, 97 percent of those in the North could read and write, 97 percent of those in the South, and 96 percent of those in the Central region.

 

Table 9.19.  Persons 10 years and Over by Ability to

             Read and Write By Region: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                    Region

                       ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Age Group                Total   North   Central   South

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

    Persons 10 yrs +...  80345   36111    26799    17435

Prcnt Able read/write..   96.2    96.5     94.6     97.1

  10 to 17 years.......  17970    7769     5908     4293

Prcnt Able read/write..   95.0    94.6     93.1     98.6

  18 yrs. and over.....  62375   28342    20891    13142

Prcnt Able read/write..   96.6    97.0     95.0     96.6

 _______________________________________________________

SOURCE:  U.S. Bureau of the Census STF 3A Table 161.

 

VOCATIONAL TRAINING

 

     While 69 percent of those 16 to 64 years were in the labor force, the proportion was higher (87 percent) for those who had completed the requirements of a vocational training program (Table 9.20).  The highest labor force participation rate was for those who were in a training program at their place of work (92 percent), followed by those whose school was not reported (90 percent).

 

Table 9.20.  Vocational Training by Labor Force Participation: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                          In           Civilian LF      

                                     Labor Force       ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑Perc.

                                     ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑Mili‑ Empl‑ Unem‑ Unem‑

Vocational Training             Total  Nmbr Perc.  tary  ploy  ploy  ploy

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

  Persons 16 to 64 yrs........  63788 43951  68.9 10121 32175  1655   4.9

Completed Requirements........  16657 14444  86.7  5587  8448   409   4.6

     Type of School:

  Business, trade, 2‑yr coll..   4863  3885  79.9   452  3264   169   4.9

  High School Voc. Prgm.......   1721  1375  79.9   340   967    68   6.6

  Training prgm at place of wk   6107  5637  92.3  2673  2856   108   3.6

  Other school................   2082  1846  88.7  1101   707    38   5.1

  School not reported.........   1884  1701  90.3  1021   654    26   3.8

_________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 Table 39.

 

     Over 55 percent of those 16 to 64 years old who were in the military in 1980 had completed the requirements of a vocational training program (Table 9.21).  Only about 25 percent of those who were in the civilian labor force and unemployed in 1980 had finished a training program.  The most common type of program completed was a training program at a place of work, except for those in the civilian labor force: both those employed (39 percent) and unemployed (41 percent) in 1980 had attended a business, trade, or 2‑year college for their training.

 

Table 9.21. Type of Vocational Training by Labor Force

            Participation: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                                    Civilian LF

                                           In       ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Type of                                 Labor  Mili‑  Empl‑  Unem‑

Vocational Training              Total  Force   tary   ploy   ploy

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

  Persons 16 to 64 yrs........   63788  43951  10121  32175   1655

Completed Requirements........    26.1   32.9   55.2   26.3   24.7

 

     Type of School...........  100.00 100.00 100.00 100.00 100.00

  Business, trade, 2‑yr coll..   29.19  26.90   8.09  38.64  41.32

  High School Voc. Prgm.......   10.33   9.52   6.09  11.45  16.63

  Training prgm at place of wk   36.66  39.03  47.84  33.81  26.41

  Other school................   12.50  12.78  19.71   8.37   9.29

  School not reported.........   11.31  11.78  18.27   7.74   6.36

__________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 Table 39.

 

     In 1980, among males 16 to 64 years of age, 34 percent had had vocational training (Table 9.22).  In the North, 33 percent of males had had such training, as had 32 percent in the Central region, and 40 percent of males 16 to 64 years of age in the South.

 

Table 9.22.  Persons 16 to 64 Years by Age by Vocational Training

             By Region: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                              Number                   Percent

                      ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑  ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Persons                Total North Cntrl South  Total  North  Cntrl  South

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

Males 16 to 64 years.. 11527  4943  3718  2866   34.0   32.6   31.9   40.5

 16 to 17 years.......   119    38    34    47    5.2    3.9    4.3    8.9

 18 to 24 years.......  3377  1344  1194   839   39.9   40.5   36.2   45.4

 25 to 64 years........ 8031  3561  2490  1980   34.7   32.8   33.0   42.0

 

Females 16 to 64 years  5130  2343  1545  1242   17.2   16.9   16.0   19.4

 16 to 17 years.......    87    40    17    30    4.1    4.4    2.3    6.5

 18 to 24 years.......  1463   650   472   341   20.9   20.4   19.9   23.5

 25 to 64 years.......  3580  1653  1056   871   17.2   16.9   16.2   19.5

 __________________________________________________________________________

SOURCE:  U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A 1980 Table 161.

 

     Table 9.22 also shows females 16 to 64 years of age who reported having had vocational training.  Only 17 percent of females overall had such training, with those residing in the South having the highest proportion at 19 percent, the North region second at 17 percent, and the Central region having the lowest proportion at 16 percent.  Women 18 to 24 years generally had higher proportions of their populations reporting having had vocational training than women of any other age.

 

SUMMARY

 

     The 1980 census shows that both school enrollment and educational attainment have increased dramatically since 1940 for the Guam population.  Increases have been somewhat moderated due to the relatively large military population on Guam.  The military population contains active duty personnel as well as spouses who may not have a desire to pursue further education.  Differential high school completion was also noted between the civilian and military 16 to 19 year old population.  Some evidence was presented that the child's home language affected high school completion rates.  Those speaking only English at home had a lower dropout rate than those speaking English and other languages.

 

     In this chapter we have seen the increase in the number of women obtaining college educations, which correlated with professional levels of employment.  As could be anticipated, those having more academic education were those more likely to be employed, and obtaining a higher income.


CHAPTER 10

 LABOR FORCE PARTICIPATION

 

     As Guam has developed economically, labor force participation has provided a measure of how well the government and the private sector have done in providing jobs for the population.  Although some data on labor force participation are obtained from periodic surveys on Guam, data for the whole population can only be obtained from a census.  Since the decennial census is, by definition, collected only once each decade, it provides a measure every ten years of labor force participation at the particular point in time.  By the same token, the census does not provide temporal data; we cannot see change in the labor force characteristics except at the chosen points in time, and the data themselves are extremely affected by temporary ups and downs in the economic situation on Guam, as well as in the United States.  In fact, as is sometimes noted, when the United States sneezes economically, Guam often gets a severe case of pneumonia.

 

REFERENCE WEEK

 

     The data on labor force status relate to the calendar week preceding the date on which respondents were interviewed by enumerators.  This week was not the same week for all respondents since the enumeration was not completed in one week.  However, for the majority of persons the reference week for the 1980 census was the last week in March 1980.  Good Friday occurred in the following week (the first week of April 1980).  Many workers presumably took time off from work to observe the holiday, so the holiday could have affected the data on hours worked for some areas if the first week of April was the reference week for a significant number of persons.  The holidays probably did not affect the overall measurement of labor force status since labor force data were based on work activity during the entire reference week.

 

LABOR FORCE STATUS

 

     The data on labor force status were derived from answers to questions 22, 23, and 24.

 

     The series of questions on labor force status was asked of all persons 15 years old and over and was designed to identify, in this sequence: (a) persons who worked at a job or business any time during the reference week; (b) persons who did not work at a job or business during the reference week but who had jobs or businesses from which they were temporarily absent (excluding layoff); (c) persons on layoff; and (d) persons who did not work at a job or business during the reference week, but who were looking for work to earn money during the four weeks and were available for work during the reference week.

 

     Most of the labor force status data shown in this report relate to persons 16 years old and over.  In 1950 and 1960, labor force status data were presented for persons 14 years old and over.  The change in the universe was made in 1970 to agree with the official measurement of the labor force as revised in January 1967.  Selected labor force status data were shown in 1970 for persons 14 and 15 years old, but were not presented in 1980.


 

     Employed.  Employed persons included all civilians 16 years and over who were either (a) "at work," at a job or business ‑ those who did any work at all during the reference week as paid employees or in their own business or profession, or on their own farm, or who worked 15 hours or more as unpaid workers on a family farm or in a family business, or (b) were "with a job but not at work," those who did not work during the reference week but had jobs or businesses from which they were temporarily absent due to illness, bad weather, industrial dispute, vacation, or other personal reasons.  Excluded from the employed were persons whose only activity consisted of work around the house, subsistence activity, or volunteer work for religious, charitable, and similar organizations.

 

     Unemployed.  Persons were classified as unemployed if they were civilians 16 years and over and (a) were neither "at work" at a job or business, nor "with a job but not at work" during the reference week, (b) were looking for work to earn money during the last 4 weeks, and (c) were available to accept a job.  Examples of jobseeking activities included: (1) registering at a public or private employment office, (2) meeting with prospective employers, (3) investigating possibilities for starting a professional practice or opening a business, (4) placing or answering advertisements, (5) writing letters of application, and (6) being on a union or professional register.

 

     Also included as unemployed were persons who did not work at all at a job or business during the reference week and were waiting to be called back to a job from which they had been laid off.

 

     Civilian Labor Force.  The civilian labor force consisted of persons classified as employed or unemployed in accordance with the criteria described above.

 

     Experienced unemployed.  Unemployed persons who had worked at any time in the past excluding subsistence activity were classified as the "Experienced unemployed."

 

     Experienced Civilian Labor Force.  The "experienced civilian labor force" comprised the employed and the experienced unemployed.

 

     Labor Force.  The labor force included all persons classified in the civilian labor force plus members of the armed forces (persons on active duty with the United States Army, Air Force, Navy, Marine Corps, or Coast Guard).

 

     Not in Labor Force.  All persons 16 years old and over who were not classified as members of the labor force were defined as "not in labor force."  This category consisted mainly of students, housewives, retired workers, seasonal workers enumerated in an "off" season who were not looking for work, inmates of institutions, disabled persons, persons doing subsistence activity only, and persons doing only incidental unpaid family work (less than 15 hours during the reference week).

 

     Subsistence Activity.  A person engaged in subsistence activities if he or she produced goods for his or her own or family's use and needs, such as growing/gathering food, fishing, cutting copra for home use, raising livestock, making handicrafts for home use, and other productive activities not for commercial purposes.  When subsistence activity are shown in conjunction with the "employed" and the "Not in Labor Force" categories of the Labor Force Status concept, they related to activities engaged in during the census reference week.

 

     Worker.  The term "Worker" appeared in connection with several subjects in this report:  class of worker, weeks worked in 1979, and the number of workers in family in 1979.  Its meaning varied and, therefore, should be determined in each case by referring to the definition of the subject in which it appears.

 

     Comparability with Earlier Census Data.  The questionnaire items and labor force status concepts for the 1980 census were similar to those used in the 1970 census except that in 1980 a distinction was made between regular work and subsistence activity.  However, these concepts differed in many respects from those associated with the 1950 and 1960 censuses.

 

     Comparability with Data from Other Sources.  Because employment data from the census are obtained from respondents in households, they differ from statistics based on reports from individual business establishments, farm enterprises, and certain government programs.  Persons employed at more than one job were counted only once in the census and were classified according to the job at which they worked the greatest number of hours during the reference week.  In statistics based on reports from business and farm establishments, persons who worked for more than one establishment may be counted more than once.  Moreover, other series, unlike those presented here, may exclude private household workers, unpaid family workers, and self‑employed persons, but may include workers less than 16 years of age.

 

     An additional difference in the data arises from the fact that persons who had a job but were not at work are included with the employed in the statistics shown here whereas many of these persons are likely to be excluded from employment figures based on establishment payroll reports.  Furthermore, the labor force status data in this report include persons on the basis of place of residence regardless of where they work, whereas establishment data report persons at their place of work regardless of where they live.  This latter consideration is particularly significant when comparing data from workers who commute between areas.

 

     Actual Hours Worked.  All persons who reported working at a job or business during the reference week were asked to report in item 22b the number of hours that they worked (excluding any hours spent doing subsistence activity).  The number of persons who worked only a small number of hours is probably understated since such persons sometimes consider themselves as not working.

 

LABOR FORCE STATUS IN 1979

 

     The data on labor force status in 1979 were derived from answers to question 29.  Persons 16 years old and over were classified as "in labor force in 1979" if (a) in 1979 they worked one or more weeks for pay or profit (including weeks on paid vacation or on paid sick leave) or worked without pay on a family farm or in a family business or were on active duty in the U.S. Armed Forces; or (b) had any weeks of unemployment in 1979.  The categories "Worked in 1979" and "With unemployment in 1979" were not mutually exclusive.

 

     Worked in 1979 (Work Status in 1979).  Persons 16 years old and over who worked one or more weeks according to the criteria described below were classified as "worked in 1979"; all other persons 16 years old and over "did not work in 1979".  Some tables showing work status in 1979 include 15 year olds; those persons were classified as "Did not work in 1979", by definition.

 

     Weeks worked in 1979.  The data on weeks worked in 1979 were derived from answers to questions 29a and 29d.  Question 29d (Weeks worked in 1979) was asked of persons 16 years old and over who indicated in question 29a that they worked in 1979.

 

     The data pertained to the number of weeks during 1979 in which a person did any work for pay or profit (including paid vacation and sick leave) or worked without pay on a family farm or in a family business.  Weeks of active service in the U.S. Armed Forces were also included.  Persons who did only subsistence activity in 1979 were tabulated in the category "did not work in 1979".  It is probable that the number of persons who worked in 1979 and the number of weeks worked were understated since there was some tendency for respondents to forget intermittent or short periods of employment or to exclude weeks worked without pay.

 

     Usual Hours Worked in 1979.  The data on usual hours worked per week in 1979 were derived from answers to question 29e.  This question was for persons 16 years old and over who indicated that they worked in 1979.

 

     The data pertain to the number of hours a person usually worked during the weeks worked in 1979.  The respondent was to report the number of hours worked per week in the majority of the weeks he or she worked in 1979.  If the hours worked per week varied considerably during 1979, the respondent was to report an approximate average of hours worked per week.  The statistics on usual hours worked per week in 1979 were not necessarily related to the data on actual hours worked during the census reference week (question 22b).

 

     Persons 16 years old and over who reported that they usually worked 35 or more hours per week during the weeks they worked were classified as "usually worked full‑time"; persons who reported that they usually worked 1 to 34 hours were classified as "usually worked part‑time".

 

     Year‑Round Full‑Time Workers.  Persons 16 years old and over who usually worked 35 or more hours per week for 50 to 52 weeks in 1979 were classified as "year‑round full‑time workers".

 

     With Unemployment in 1979.  Persons 16 years old and over who had one or more weeks of unemployment in 1979 according to the criteria described below were classified as "with unemployment in 1979".

 

     The data on weeks of unemployment in 1979 pertained to the number of weeks during 1979 in which a person 16 years old and over did not work or did subsistence activity only, but spent looking for work to earn money (that is, trying to get a job or start a business or professional practice) or on layoff from a job.  Examples of looking for work to earn money are presented in the definition of unemployed.  Excluded from weeks of unemployment are any weeks in which the person worked for pay or profit even for one hour; or any weeks in which the person received any wages or salaries; or which the person was on active duty in the U.S. Armed Forces, on paid vacation or on paid leave.  The question on weeks of unemployment did not inquire whether persons who recorded looking for work were available to accept a job.  The number of weeks of unemployment is the total number of weeks accumulated during the entire calendar year 1979, regardless of whether the periods of unemployment were continuous.

 

     Mean Weeks of Unemployment.  The mean is based on the distribution of persons with unemployment by individual weeks of unemployment from 1 to 52 weeks.

 

     Number of Workers in Family in 1979.  The term "Worker" as used for these data is defined according to the criteria described in the section on "Work in 1979".

 

     Comparability With Earlier Census Data.  The data on weeks worked collected in the 1980 census are comparable with data from the 1970 census but may not be entirely comparable with data from the 1960 census of Guam.  On the two most recent census questionnaires, two separate questions were used to obtain this information.  The first identified persons with any work experience during the year and thus, indicated those persons from whom the questions on number of weeks worked was applicable.  In 1960, however, the questionnaires contain only a single question on number of weeks worked.

 

     In 1970, persons responded to the weeks worked question by indicating one of six weeks‑worked intervals; in 1980 persons were asked to enter the specific number of weeks they worked.

 

     The data on weeks spent looking for work in previous year (1979), on usual hours worked, and on subsistence activity in 1979 were collected in 1980 for the first time.

 

LABOR FORCE CHARACTERISTICS

 

     Labor force participation for all persons 16 years and over has fluctuated over the years since 1950 (Table 10.1).  In that year, 72 percent of those 16 and over were in the labor force; the percent in the labor force decreased to 64 percent, its lowest level, in 1960.  The proportion of eligible persons who were in the labor force then increased with each census, until it was at 67 percent in 1980.  The proportion of the labor force who were in the Armed Forces decreased every year, from 42 percent in 1950 to 23 percent in 1980.  The proportion of unemployed stayed at about 2 percent until 1980, when it jumped to nearly 5 percent.

 

Table 10.1.  Labor Force Participation: 1950 to 1980                   

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Labor Force Participation          1980       1970       1960       1950

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

     Persons 16 yrs & over...    66,773     49,548     41,026     44,133

Labor force..................    44,484     32,493     26,304     31,965

      Percent................      66.6       65.6       64.1       72.4

  U.S. Armed Forces..........    10,125      9,997      8,705     13,294

      Percent................      22.8       30.8       33.1       41.6

  Civilian Labor Force.......    34,359     22,496     17,599     18,671

    Employed.................    32,692     22,112     17,208       (NA)

    Unemployed...............     1,667        384        391       (NA)

      Percent................       4.9        1.7        2.2       (NA)

Not in the labor force.......    22,289     17,055     14,722     12,168

________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports                   

 

     Tables 10.2 and 10.3 show that the increase in the labor force participation of males from 1960 to 1970 was 12 percent, and that the male participation rate increased another 15 percent between 1970 and 1980; but the increase in the labor force participation rate of females between 1960 and 1970 was 92 percent compared to 114 percent between 1970 and 1980, clearly showing that large numbers of women entered the labor force in the 1960s and 1970s.

 

Table 10.2.  Male Labor Force Participation: 1950 to 1980              

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Labor Force Participation          1980       1970       1960       1950

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

     Males 16 years and over.    35,293     29,085     25,952     32,572

Labor force..................    29,000     25,274     22,551     28,792

      Percent................      82.2       86.9       86.9       88.4

  U.S. Armed Forces..........     9,224      9,878      8,660     13,208

      Percent................      31.8       39.1       38.4       45.9

  Civilian Labor Force.......    19,776     15,396     13,891     15,584

    Employed.................    18,994     15,245     13,680       (NA)

    Unemployed...............       782        151        211       (NA)

      Percent................       4.0        1.0        1.5       (NA)

Not in the labor force.......     6,293      3,811      3,401      3,780

________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports                   

 

 

Table 10.3. Female Labor Force Participation: 1950 to 1980             

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Labor Force Participation          1980       1970       1960       1950

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

    Females 16 yrs and over..    31,480     20,463     15,074     11,561

Labor force..................    15,484      7,219      3,753      3,173

      Percent................      49.2       35.3       24.9       27.4

  U.S. Armed Forces..........       901        119         45         86

      Percent................       5.8        1.6        1.2        2.7

  Civilian Labor Force.......    14,583      7,100      3,708      3,087

    Employed.................    13,698      6,867      3,528       (NA)

    Unemployed...............       885        233        180       (NA)

      Percent................       6.1        3.3        4.9       (NA)

Not in the labor force.......    15,996     13,244     11,321      8,388

________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports                    

 

MILITARY

 

     Because Guam was obtained by the United States primarily to function as a strategic outpost, the presence of active duty military has been an especially strong influence in the overall number of employed persons since 1930, the first census to recognize them separately (Table 10.4).

 

Table 10.4.  Armed Forces, Civilian, and Non‑Civilian Employment: 1930  

             to 1980                                                    

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Labor Force Participation   1980    1970    1960    1950     1940     1930

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

    In the Labor Force... 44,484  32,493  26,304  31,965    6,885    6,175

Armed Forces............. 10,125   9,997   8,705  13,294      640    1,019

      Percent............   22.8    30.8    33.1    41.6      9.3     16.5

  Males..................  9,224   9,878   8,660  13,208      640    1,019

  Females................    901     119      45      86        0        0

      Percent Female.....    8.9     1.2      .5      .6      0.0      0.0

Civilian................. 34,359  22,496  17,599  18,671    6,245    5,156

   Percent change........   52.7    27.8    ‑5.7   199.0     21.1      ...

__________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports                     

 

     Active duty military personnel accounted for 1,039 persons (16 percent) of the total labor force in 1930, and 640 (9 percent) in 1940.  On July 23, 1944, during the liberation of Guam by the U.S. Marines, Navy personnel came ashore at Orote peninsula.  They constructed the Naval Operating Base, and many other installations.  The total number of armed services personnel for all branches was 37,735 in 1947 when the largest part of the construction was taking place, but decreased to 13,294 by 1950.

 

     Although the number of military personnel was greatly reduced in peacetime Guam, they represented 42 percent of the employed labor force in 1950.  Military activities continued to decrease through the 1950's, so active military employment was only 34 percent of all employed on the island in 1960.  Some build‑up in the number of military personnel occurred by 1970 to support the Vietnam War effort, but their percent of employed continued to decrease, to 31 percent in 1970.  Between 1970 and 1980, although active duty armed forces again increased, their percentage continued to decrease to 23 percent.

 

     Military women did not appear separately in a Guam census until 1950, when they represented less than 1 percent of the total active duty personnel.  Their numbers remained small until 1980 when the participation of women jumped to nearly 9 percent of all military personnel, or 901 women out of 10,125 persons.  While the number of women increased substantially, the number of males decreased between 1970 and 1980.

 

CIVILIAN EMPLOYMENT

 

     A summary of the change of civilian employment between 1930 and 1980 is also shown in Table 10.4.  The changes in civilian employment followed the same pattern as changes in total employment during the 50 year period.  The labor needs of the military affected civilian employment drastically during the 1940's, contributing to the increase of over 12,000 workers between 1940 and 1950.

 

     The temporary nature of the military's labor needs brought about a decrease in the number of civilian workers as a slowdown in military construction activities occurred between 1950 and 1960.  Permanent in‑migration and immigration beginning in 1962 contributed to the large increase in civilian employment by 1970, growth that continued to accelerate during the following decade.  Civilian employment increased by 28 percent between 1960 and 1970, and by 48 percent between 1970 and 1980.

 

     Males made up most of the increase in civilian employment during the 1940's, and almost all of the decrease between 1950 and 1960.  The number of males increased by 11 percent between 1960 and 1970, however, and by 25 percent over the following decade.  On the other hand, the number of female workers nearly doubled during the 1940's.  While civilian male employment decreased during the 1950's, females continued to enter the civilian labor force.  After 1960 women began to enter the work place in much larger numbers.  Between 1960 and 1970, female civilian workers increased in strength by 95 percent, and by 100 percent the following decade.  During the 1960 to 1980 period, there were 10,170 additional female workers, far greater than the 5,314 increase in male workers.

 

     Females were 19 percent of civilian employment in 1930.  As ever increasing numbers of females sought employment, the percent of female participation increased to 31 percent of all civilian workers in 1970 and to 42 percent of civilian workers in 1980.

 

CHAMORRO AND NON‑CHAMORRO EMPLOYMENT

 

     Chamorro employment.  While Chamorros were 80 percent of all employed persons in 1930, their percentage increased to 87 percent in 1940, corresponding with a reduction of military personnel shown during that year.  Despite an increase in the number of employed Chamorros of 14 percent between 1940 and 1950, the greatly increased number of workers on the island by 1950 left Chamorro workers at only 21 percent of the work force.  Their percentage increased to 28 percent in 1960 with the decreased level of imported workers and active duty military.  Chamorro workers did not show large gains, however, increasing by only 8 percent over 1950.  It was the 1960 to 1980 period that showed the most gains in the number of Chamorros employed.  Chamorro workers increased by 6,385 persons in 20 years, or 87 percent.

 

     Because employment for persons other than Chamorros also grew rapidly during the same period, the percentage of Chamorros among the employed rose only slightly, to 32 percent by 1980.

 

     When active duty military are excluded, Chamorros constituted 92 percent of the civilian labor force in 1930 and 1940.  Their percentage decreased to 35 percent in 1950, and increased to 41 percent in 1960 and 1980, in spite of an increase in the number of workers of 89 percent between 1960 and 1980.

 

     The history of the growth of Chamorro employment has been related to the transformation of the Guam economy from a subsistence agrarian life style prior to World War II to a wage‑based economy beginning in 1944.  In 1930, 53 percent of all civilian employment was in agriculture; the percentage decreased to 45 percent in 1940, and then suddenly to 6 percent in 1950, less than 1 percent in 1970, and 2 percent in 1980.  Chamorros were more heavily involved in agriculture than the general population; for Chamorro males, for example, while almost two‑thirds were in agriculture in 1930, and 6 in 10 in 1940, the proportions dropped to 1 in 5 in 1950 and less than 1 in 16 in 1960.  Although no data by sex were available for 1980, since only 99 full‑ and part‑Chamorros were in agriculture, the proportions for males had to be very small.

 

 

 

 

     Non‑Chamorro Employment.  In 1930, there were only 387 non‑Chamorro workers on Guam who were not active duty military.  These persons represented less than 8 percent of all civilian employment.  By 1940, non‑Chamorros had increased by 30 percent, but increases in Chamorro employment caused non‑Chamorro employment to rise only slightly, to 8 percent.  During the 1940's, the number of non‑Chamorros in civilian employment increased by 11,635, to 65 percent of all employed.  With a decline in military construction between 1950 and 1960, the number of immigrant workers temporarily decreased.  But cancellation of the Naval security requirement for entrance to and exit from the island in 1962, and changes in the immigration law in 1965, allowed the number of non‑Chamorro workers in the civilian labor force to increase to over 19,000 workers by 1980.  At that point, non‑Chamorros in the civilian labor force represented well over half of all civilian employment.

 

     After World War II, the military was unsuccessful in recruiting sufficient numbers of U.S. construction workers to Guam, and also found the local labor supply too small and unskilled to meet needs.  The Navy therefore entered into an exchange of notes with the Philippine government in 1947, an arrangement not complying with immigration laws, but being expedient in fulfilling the military's pressing temporary labor problems.  In a non‑resident census in 1947, 6,964 (    percent) of the 12,566 non‑resident contract workers were American, and another 5,143 (    percent) were Filipino.

 

     In more recent censuses, the proportion of non‑Chamorros in the labor force has steadily increased because of in‑migration of Americans and immigration of Filipinos, Micronesians, and others.

 

     Agricultural employment.  The decrease of agricultural employment for Chamorros from 1930 is entwined with changes in Guam's economic status.  Because historic events between 1930 and 1980, especially in the 1940s, were so important to the development of Guam;s Chamorro labor force, a brief recapitulation is appropriate here:

 

     The worst typhoon since 1918 hit Guam on November 3, 1940.  Winds of 130 knots destroyed crops and left thousands homeless.  Governor McMillan reported that copra production, Guam's largest industry, would not be normal for 5 years due to the destruction of coconut trees.  Swine herds and poultry flocks were reduced due to the lack of locally produced feed, and tree crops such as breadfruit, avocados and bananas would not produce normal crops for at least 18 months.

 

     Just 6 months later, as the island struggled to recover from the typhoon, the Japanese attacked and occupied the island on December 8, 1941.  Economic development and employment expansion stopped completely for the 2 1/2 year occupation period.  During the first part of the occupation, people who wished to remain on their farms were permitted to do so, although they were also able to find some employment.  During the last 6 or 7 months, however, conditions degenerated.  The Japanese forced all able‑bodied persons over the age of 12 to work in the fields, with only a limited amount of food for payment.

 

     Widespread war damage and the possibility of sniper attacks for some months afterward, prevented most Chamorros from engaging in agriculture; many Chamorros, however, joined the non‑agricultural work force in the reconstruction efforts.

 

     It was during this time that the decline in agriculture by Chamorros was first mentioned by the military government as a concern.  A September 4, 1944 Summary Report of Military Government states that, "Agriculture has made good progress, but is handicapped by uncertainty as to what land will be left by base development.  There is also a strong possibility that much agricultural labor will be diverted by naval enlistment and the great demand for Guamanian labor and clerical help by all units."

 

     Much of the best agricultural land was being taken by the military.  The combined pressures of agricultural land takings and the high demand for Chamorro labor within the military government contributed to the neglect of the land and the change of Guam from an agricultural to a money‑based economy.  From that point on, fewer Chamorros were engaged in agriculture.

 

LABOR FORCE PARTICIPATION

 

     Labor force participation at all age groups for females increased during the 1970s while rates for most age groups of males decreased (Table 10.5).  For the youngest group, aged 16 to 19, females in the labor force increased from 23 to 29 percent, while males increased from 42 to 45 percent.  The age group from 20 to 24 years could not be compared directly because different age breaks were used in the two censuses, but there was a downward trend for males, and a more dramatic upward trend for females in this age group.  For the oldest group, those 65 years and over, females increased from 5 to 8 percent, while males increased from 26 to 29 percent in the labor force.  Throughout all age groups the percentage of males in the labor force was always greater than the percentage of females, and for almost all age groups, the differences were significant.  For example, in 1970 only 29 percent of the females 45 to 64 were in the labor force compared to 88 percent of the males.

 

     There is some evidence that women are working longer than they used to, while men seem to be retiring a little earlier than before.  The proportion of males 45 to 64 in the labor force decreased from 88 to 82 percent during the decade, while the female labor force participation jumped from 29 to 42 percent.  Some of the change for males could be attributed to military personnel departing during the decade and not being replaced; since military persons are in the labor force, by definition, they appear in both the numerator and the denominator when determining labor force participation.

 

Table 10.5. Labor Force Participation by Age and Sex: 1970 and 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                              Males                   Females  

                       ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑   ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Age Group                 1980        1970        1980        1970

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

16 to 19 years....        44.9        42.4        29.3        23.1

20 to 24 years....        90.1        (NA)        58.5        (NA)

  20 and 21 years.        (NA)        92.8        (NA)        52.3

  22 to 24 years..        (NA)        94.4        (NA)        48.9

25 to 34 years....        94.4        96.8        58.3        38.5

35 to 44 years....        95.6        97.1        58.9        38.7

45 to 64 years....        82.0        87.9        42.5        28.7

65 years and over.        29.2        26.2         7.8         4.8

__________________________________________________________________

Source: PC80‑1‑C/D54, Table 36, and PC(1)‑B54, Tables 5 and 12  

 

     The trend for labor force participation by age is seen more clearly in the smaller age ranges of Table 10.6.  By 20 to 24 years old, 3 out of every 4 persons on Guam were in the labor force in 1980, including 9 out of every 10 males and about 6 of every 10 females.  The proportions increased for every age group to the 35 to 44 year olds, and then dropped off progressively.  These trends are very clear for males, but for females, the proportions remained somewhat the same throughout the ages of 20 to 44 years old, and then dropped off more quickly than those for the males, perhaps because women were dropping out of the labor force to take care of their growing children.  It is also possible, however, that for the older women, their children had grown, and that these women never entered the work force, and so appeared in the denominator, but not in the numerator.

 

     Women entered the labor force in great numbers during the 1970s, a time when the absolute growth in the labor force was only slightly greater than the gains in the working age population.  Indeed, women accounted for most of the growth of Guam's labor force between 1970 and 1980.  While the male component of the labor force remained larger than the female component, it failed to keep pace with the increase of the male working age population.  Female participation in the labor force increased by a dramatic 114 percent between 1970 and 1980, accompanied by an increase in the female working age population of only 54 percent.

 

     The profile of growth has not been limited to younger women.  The 1980 profile showed a substantial growth for every age classification compared to 1970, although the smallest change over time was among women 16 to 24 years old.  Marriage, early childbearing, and higher education probably retarded more dramatic growth among young women.

 

Table 10.6. Age and Sex by Labor Force Participation: 1980               

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                                     Percent

                              ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Age Group                               Total          Males        Females

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

     Total.................              66.6           82.2           49.2

16 to 19 years.............              37.7           44.9           29.3

20 to 24 years.............              75.6           90.1           58.5

25 to 29 years.............              76.0           93.2           58.5

30 to 34 years.............              77.7           95.6           58.1

35 to 44 years.............              78.5           95.6           58.9

45 to 54 years.............              70.6           87.8           50.4

55 to 59 years.............              59.8           78.9           35.3

60 to 64 years.............              42.0           61.9           20.1

65 years and over..........              17.9           29.2            7.8

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54, Table 36                 

 

     Not only did women enter the labor force in record numbers between 1970 and 1980, but these women were increasingly likely to be married and have children Table 10.7). In 1960, only 21 percent of women in the labor force were married, but during the ensuing 20 years, there was a 415 percent increase in the number of married women in the labor force, the number increasing from 1,003 in 1960 to 10,318 in 1980.  Married women comprised almost half of all women in the labor force in 1980.

 

     By 1980, working mothers had become the "rule" rather than the exception.  Of the 15,484 women in the labor force on Guam in 1980, 41 percent had children under 6 years old, and another 32 percent had children between 6 and 17 years old.  In contrast, in 1970 31 percent of the 7,219 women in the labor force had children under 6 and 20 percent had children of school age (between 6 and 17 years old).  Therefore, there were more women in the labor force in 1980 and they had more children at home to support.  In fact, the presence of children appears to be a factor which is strongly correlated with women in the work force.  The number of women in the labor force with children living at home more than tripled (increasing by 212 percent) between 1970 and 1980, while the number of women in the labor force with no children under 18 years old increased by only 18 percent.  The most dramatic increase was among those mothers with school age children, an increase of 257 percent.

 

     Labor force participation of females used to be somewhat dependent on whether they had young children.  The traditional communal society  found in Guam might have freed women to work because of having elderly people as built‑in babysitters, but many women would be unlikely to join the labor force because they were taking care of their young children.  Part‑time paid employment also is a recent development in the Pacific, so females would probably not have been able to avail themselves of many work opportunities in the past.

 

     The percentage of females 16 years and over with own children less than 18 years old almost doubled, but the percentage of these women in the labor force more than tripled from 3,600 to 11,210 between 1970 and 1980.

 

Table 10.7.  Females with Own Children by Labor Force: 1970 and 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                       Percent    Percent       Percent of

                               Number   Change   of Total       Category

                        ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ 1970 to‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Labor Force                1980   1970    1980   1980   1970   1980   1970

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

     Females, 16 + yrs..31,480 20,463     53.8  100.0  100.0    ...    ...

With own child < 18 yrs.22,188 11,159     98.8   70.5   54.5  100.0  100.0

  In the labor force....11,210  3,592    212.1   35.6   17.6   50.5   32.2

  Not in labor force....10,978  7,567     45.1   34.9   37.0   49.5   67.8

With own child < 6 yrs..13,054  7,285     79.2   41.5   35.6  100.0  100.0

  In the labor force.... 6,282  2,213    183.9   20.0   10.8   48.1   30.4

  Not in labor force.... 6,772  5,072     33.5   21.5   24.8   51.9   69.6

With own child 6‑17 only 9,134  3,874    135.8   29.0   18.9  100.0  100.0

  In the labor force.... 4,928  1,379    257.4   15.7    6.7   54.0   35.6

  Not in labor force.... 4,206  2,495     68.6   13.4   12.2   46.0   64.4

__________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A, Table 57;       

        PC(1)‑B54, 1970, Table 12                                       

 

     The percentage of adult females with own children under 6 and in the labor force increased from 30 percent in 1970 to 48 percent in 1980, and the absolute number almost tripled during the period.  Women with children 6 to 17 years old and in the labor force had similar increases.

 

     About 55 percent of the adults born on Guam were in the labor force in 1980, including 68 percent of the males and 44 percent of the females (Table 10.8).  The highest labor force participation rates in 1980 were for persons born in the United States (94 percent for males and 59 percent for females).  The rates for persons born in Asia were also high.  In‑migration by women from the U.S. and immigration from Asian countries contributed in large measure to the growth of the female labor force during the 1970s.  By 1980, only 39 percent of the female labor force was composed of women born on Guam, 24 percent were immigrants from the U.S. and 31 percent were born in Asia.

 

Table 10.8.  Birthplace by Labor Force Participation: 1980               

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                             Percent in the Labor Force  

                              ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Birthplace                              Total          Males        Females

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

     Total.................              66.6           82.2           49.2

Guam.......................              54.8           67.5           43.8

Northern Mariana Islands...              49.7           69.0           33.4

TTPI.......................              53.1           71.5           37.2

  Palau....................              52.8           72.8           38.2

  Marshall Islands.........              45.2           68.8           20.0

  Fed. States Micronesia...              54.5           69.5           35.8

United States..............              80.6           94.1           58.7

Asia.......................              69.4           86.0           52.1

  Japan and Okinawa........              68.4           88.7           55.8

  Korea....................              64.3           87.1           45.6

  Philippines..............              70.8           85.8           53.4

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D57A, Table 37                

 

     As might be expected, there was a direct correlation between educational attainment and labor force participation (albeit with a very slight drop for persons with exactly 8 years of elementary school)(Table 10.9).  About 7 in every 10 persons 25 years and over were in the labor force, with about 7 out of every 8 males and about half the females.  For every level of educational attainment male labor force participation was greater than for females, although the gap narrowed considerably with increasing educational attainment.  More than 9 out of every 10 males and 6 of every 10 females with some college education were in the labor force in 1980.

 

     Education and labor force participation were strongly related in 1980.  The more highly educated a woman was, the more likely she was to seek work.  In 1980, the labor force participation rate for women with 4 or more years of college was 79 percent, compared to 57 percent for those with a high school education, and 30 percent for those with less than a high school education.

 

 

Table 10.9.  Years of Schooling Completed by Labor Force Status: 1980    

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                             Percent in the Labor Force  

                              ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Years of Schooling                      Total          Males        Females

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

     Persons, 25 + years...              69.9           87.4           50.7

None.......................              22.2           37.6           13.9

Elementary: 1 to 4 years...              31.6           52.5           17.8

            5 and 6 years..              47.2           68.9           29.9

            7 years........              53.1           73.3           31.4

            8 years........              53.0           75.0           32.0

High School: 1 year........              59.1           82.7           35.7

             2 years.......              64.0           86.5           39.9

             3 years.......              65.6           87.9           41.2

             4 years.......              76.1           93.2           56.9

College:     1 to 3 years..              81.2           92.9           63.8

             4 years.......              84.3           95.3           72.6

             5 and 6 years.              90.3           95.6           83.8

             7 or more yrs.              92.1           95.6           82.9

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D57A, Table 39                

 

     About 22,300 persons 16 years and over were not in the labor force in the week before the census (Table 10.10).  Of these, 49 percent had never worked.  About 45 percent of those who did report a year last worked had worked last in either 1979 or 1980.  About 48 percent of the non‑workers from the south last worked in one of those two years, with about 44 percent of those who worked before having done so in 1980.

 

Table 10.10.  Year Last Worked for Persons Not in Labor Force: 1980   

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                           Numbers             |            Percent   

                    ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑|‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                    Cen‑       |              Cen‑    

Year Last Worked      Total  North  tral South | Total North  tral South

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑|‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                               |                      

  Prsns 16+, Not LF.22,289  9,417 7,591 5,281  | 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Never worked........10,960  4,693 3,770 2,497  |  49.2  49.2  49.8  49.7

Worked..............11,329  4,724 3,821 2,784  | 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

  1980.............. 1,614    617   522   475  |  14.2  13.1  13.7  17.1

  1979.............. 3,470  1,473 1,149   848  |  30.6  31.2  30.1  30.5

  1978.............. 1,251    551   411   289  |  11.0  11.7  10.8  10.4

  1975 to 1977...... 1,646    742   529   375  |  14.5  15.7  13.8  13.5

  1970 to 1974...... 1,943    783   681   479  |  17.2  16.6  17.8  17.2

  1969 or earlier... 1,405    558   529   318  |  12.4  11.8  13.8  11.4

                                               ________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A, Table 167     

 

     Also, in looking at female labor force participation, it is important to note that jobs for women on Guam have evolved from more than half of all employed women working in private household occupations in 1940, to a high proportion of professional, managerial, clerical, sales, and service occupations in 1980.  Dependence on household employment dwindled after 1950, as women applied for jobs created by the federal and territorial governments.  Unprecedented growth in Guam's economy between 1970 and 1980 further affected the private sector job market, producing more jobs for women in the private sector than in the public sector for the first time.  By 1980, employment for women had become heavily oriented toward occupations which were performed equally well by both sexes and where male workers faced increasing competition from women.  (These concepts are explored in Chapter 11).

 

LABOR FORCE PARTICIPATION IN 1979

 

     In addition to information on labor force participation in the week before the census, the 1980 census also collected information on labor force participation in all of 1979 (the year before the census).  Labor force participation in the week before the census allows us to obtain data about the labor force once every decade, as a snapshot for that week, but the week may not be representative of labor force participation over a year, so another series of questions is used to obtain that type of information.

 

     The data on labor force status in 1979 were derived from answers to question 29 on the 1980 census form.  Persons 16 years old and over were classified as "in labor force in 1979 if (a) in 1979 they worked 1 or more weeks for pay or profit (including weeks on paid vacation or on paid sick leave, or in a family business), or were on active duty in the U.S. Armed Forces; or (b) had any weeks of unemployment in 1979.  The categories "Worked in 1979" and "With unemployment in 1979" were not mutually exclusive.

 

     About 72 percent of the population 16 years and over were in the labor force in 1979 (Table 10.11).  The northern region had the highest percentage in the labor force in 1979 (74 percent), followed by the central region (71 percent) and the south (70 percent).

 

Table 10.11. Labor Force Participation in 1979:  1980                   

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                              Numbers            |            Percent   

                        ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑|‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                    Cen‑         |              Cen‑    

Labor Force             Total North tral  South  | Total North  tral South

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑|‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                                 |                      

   Persons, 16 + yrs.... 66773 30232 22410 14131 | 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

In Labor Force in 1979.. 48033 22233 15978  9822 |  71.9  73.5  71.3  69.5

  Worked in 1979........ 46253 21344 15450  9459 |  69.3  70.6  68.9  66.9

    With unemployment...  2854  1280   884   690 |   4.3   4.2   3.9   4.9

    No unemployment..... 43399 20064 14566  8769 |  65.0  66.4  65.0  62.1

  No work in 1979, with                          |                      

   unemploymt in 1979...  1780   889   528   363 |   2.7   2.9   2.4   2.6

Not in labor force...... 18740  7999  6432  4309 |  28.1  26.5  28.7  30.5

__________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A, Table 58        

 

     Of the 48,033 persons in the labor force on Guam in 1979, 46,253 worked in 1979 (96 percent).  Of these, only 2,854 (6 percent) experienced some unemployment.   There were also 1,780 additional persons (3 percent of those 16 years and older) who, by definition, did not work in 1979.

 

     As was true for labor force participation in the week before the census, male labor force participation in 1979 was greater than female labor force participation (Tables 10.12 and 10.13).  About 86 percent of all adult males were in the labor force in 1979, as were about 57 percent of all adult females.  The rates by region were comparable to those seen for the total population.  Unemployment rates were low for both males and females.

 

Table 10.12. Male Labor Force Participation in 1979: 1980               

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                              Numbers            |            Percent   

                        ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑|‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                    Cen‑         |              Cen‑    

Labor Force             Total North tral  South  | Total North  tral South

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑|‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                                 |                      

     Males, 16 + yrs.... 35293 15774 12141  7378 | 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

In Labor Force in 1979.. 30158 13594 10260  6304 |  85.5  86.2  84.5  85.4

  Worked in 1979........ 29469 13268 10020  6181 |  83.5  84.1  82.5  83.8

    With unemployment...  1344   564   431   349 |   3.8   3.6   3.5   4.7

    No unemployment..... 28125 12704  9589  5832 |  79.7  80.5  79.0  79.0

  No work in 1979, with                          |                      

   unemploymt in 1979...   689   326   240   123 |   2.0   2.1   2.0   1.7

Not in labor force......  5135  2180  1881  1074 |  14.5  13.8  15.5  14.6

__________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A, Table 58         

 

     Although women were working in larger numbers than ever before, only one‑half of those who worked in 1979 had full time jobs and worked year‑round.  Working women past peak childbearing years were more likely to hold full‑time, year‑round jobs than 16 to 29 year olds.  Sufficient data to analyze which women chose to work part‑time and why are not available; however, home responsibilities and the presence of children probably played a major role in the number of hours women worked.

 

Table 10.13.  Female Labor Force Participation in 1979: 1980            

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                              Numbers            |            Percent   

                        ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑|‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                    Cen‑         |              Cen‑    

Labor Force             Total North tral  South  | Total North  tral South

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑|‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                                 |                      

     Females, 16 + yrs.. 31480 14458 10269  6753 | 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

In Labor Force in 1979.. 17875  8639  5718  3518 |  56.8  59.8  55.7  52.1

  Worked in 1979........ 16784  8076  5430  3278 |  53.3  55.9  52.9  48.5

    With unemployment...  1510   716   453   341 |   4.8   5.0   4.4   5.0

    No unemployment..... 15274  7360  4977  2937 |  48.5  50.9  48.5  43.5

  No work in 1979, with                          |                       

   unemploymt in 1979...  1091   563   288   240 |   3.5   3.9   2.8   3.6

Not in labor force...... 13605  5819  4551  3235 |  43.2  40.2  44.3  47.9

__________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A, Table 58        

 

     Respondents were also asked to give the number of hours they usually worked each week in 1979.  These data pertained to the number of hours a person usually worked during the weeks worked in 1979.  The respondent was to report the number of hours worked per week in the majority of the weeks he or she worked in 1979.  If hours worked per week varied considerably in 1979, the respondent was to report an approximate average of the hours worked per week.

 

     About 79 percent of the males who worked in 1979 worked between 50 and 52 weeks (Table 10.14).  On the other hand, about 10 percent worked less than half of the year (1 to 26 weeks).

 

     Fully 93 percent of the males worked full‑time (35 or more hours per week) during 1979.  Of these, most worked the whole year, so were considered year‑round full‑time workers.  Very few males on Guam worked only part‑time in 1979.  Fewer of the females (57 percent) worked for the whole year.

 

Table 10.14.   Persons Who Worked in 1979 by Usual Hours Worked in 1979

              and Weeks Worked: 1980                                  

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Hours and                  Numbers                     Percent        

  Weeks           ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑  ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 Worked               Total    Males  Females    Total    Males  Females

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

  Persons, 16+ yrs    46253    29469    16784    100.0    100.0    100.0

50 to 52 weeks....    32759    23261     9498     70.8     78.9     56.6

40 to 49 weeks....     4000     2302     1698      8.6      7.8     10.1

27 to 39 weeks....     2591     1114     1477      5.6      3.8      8.8

1 to 26 weeks.....     6903     2792     4111     14.9      9.5     24.5

 

Usually worked                                                       

  35+ hrs/week....    41026    27415    13611     88.7     93.0     81.1

50 to 52 weeks....    31040    22431     8609     67.1     76.1     51.3

40 to 49 weeks....     3504     2105     1399      7.6      7.1      8.3

27 to 39 weeks....     2009      920     1089      4.3      3.1      6.5

1 to 26 weeks.....     4473     1959     2514      9.7      6.6     15.0

 

Usually worked                                                       

  1‑34 hrs/week...     5227     2054     3173     11.3      7.0     18.9

50 to 52 weeks....     1719      830      889      3.7      2.8      5.3

40 to 49 weeks....      496      197      299      1.1      0.7      1.8

27 to 39 weeks....      582      194      388      1.3      0.7      2.3

1 to 26 weeks.....     2430      833     1597      5.3      2.8      9.5

________________________________________________________________________

Source:  U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A 1980 Table 59.

 

DATA FROM CURRENT LABOR FORCE SURVEY

 

     Because of the limitations of census data in providing timely pictures of the employment situation on Guam, the Department of Labor's Bureau of Labor Statistics conducts quarterly Current Labor Force Surveys (CLFS)  throughout the island.  The universe covered by the CLFS is the civilian non‑institutional population on Guam, excluding members of the U.S. Armed Forces and their families living on military reservations.  Permanent resident aliens (immigrants) are included in the survey whereas non‑resident aliens (non‑immigrants) are excluded.  The over 20,000 housing units excluding the units inside the military reservations and alien construction workers barracks form the sampling frame for the CLFS.

 

     The estimates presented here are based on data obtained in the March 1980 CLFS.  Approximately 1,800 housing units were randomly selected for interview during the reference period of March 1980.  Of that number, about 200 occupied units were visited but interviews were not obtained because the occupants were not found at home after repeated calls, or were unavailable for some other reason.  There were also about 350 sample units which were visited but were found to be vacant or otherwise ineligible for interview.

 

Table 10.15 presents data from the CLFS from March 1980 to March 1987; Table 10.17 compares the CLFS data with 1980 Census data.  For this table, the Civilian labor force included those 16 years of age and over excluding non‑immigrant aliens, members of the U.S. Armed Forces and their dependents living in military installations.

 

     According to the Current Labor Force Survey, the proportion of the civilian labor force who were employed rose from 91 percent in 1980 to 94 percent in 1987.  The majority of employed in each year were full‑time workers.

 

Table 10.15.  Current Labor Force Survey Data: March 1980 to March 1987 

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Categories                  1987  1986  1985  1984  1983  1982  1981  1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

    Civilian Labor Force.. 36250 35590 33440 33490 33860 33000 34460 33800

Total Employed............ 34270 33460 31270 30670 30830 30120 32230 30390

      Percent.............  94.5  94.0  93.5  91.6  91.1  91.3  93.5  91.4

  Full‑time Workers....... 31460 30660 28370 27820 26840 25890 28840 27730

  Part‑time Workers.......  2810  2800  2900  2850  3980 42230  3380  3060

 

  U.S. Citizens........... 28850 29010 26990 25490 25520 23660 25840 25560

  Immigrant Aliens........  5420  4460  4280  5180  5310  6460  6390  5320

__________________________________________________________________________

Note: Civilian labor force includes those 16 years old and over excluding

      non‑immigrant aliens, members of the U.S. Armed Forces and their  

      dependents living in military installations.                      

Source: Bureau of Labor Statistics, Department of Labor, Government of Guam

 

     Based on the 1980 Census, the total labor force was 44,484 persons (Table 10.16).  The CLFS, due to the way it is conducted, has the civilian labor force as its total labor force; the CLFS labor force is correspondingly smaller than the Census figure.

 

Table 10.16  Comparison of Current Labor Force Survey   

             (CLFS) and Census: 1980                    

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Item                 Census     CLFS

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

Total labor force.    44484    33800

Total unemployed..     1667     2910

Unemployment rate.      3.7      8.6

_________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Census Bureau PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980 Table 36;

        Bureau of Labor Statistics, Department of Labor,

        Government of Guam.                            

 

     The difference in the unemployment count between the 1980 Census and the March 1980 Current Labor Force Survey was probably due to different definitions of unemployment.  The difference in the unemployment rates was mainly due to the fact that the CLFS excluded the Armed Forces.  Since there are no unemployed persons in the Armed Forces, their presence in the denominator increases the labor force population without adding to the unemployed in the numerator, thus reducing the unemployment rate.

 

SUMMARY

 

     This chapter has shown the increase in the labor force over the years, especially in the number of females entering the labor force.  In the last 10 years, the number of women in the labor force more than doubled, especially those with children under the age of 18.

 

     Labor force participation rates by place of birth showed that those born in the U.S. and Asia were more likely to be employed than those from the Trust Territory or the CNMI.  Educational attainment was correlated with employment status, as could be expected, with those having more education being more likely to be employed.

 

     For those not currently employed in 1980, most had worked in the year before the census (1979), with proportions almost evenly distributed among the island's three regions.


CHAPTER 11

INDUSTRY, OCCUPATION, AND CLASS OF WORKER

 

            The data on industry, occupation, and class of worker were derived from answers to questions 26, 27, and 28.

 

      This series of questions was used to obtain industry, occupation, and class of worker information for the employed, the experienced unemployed, and experienced workers not currently in the labor force.  The last two categories applied to persons who had worked at some time during the past 5 years.  All three items related to one specific job that the person held.  For an employed person, the information referred to the job held during the reference week.  Those who were employed at two or more jobs reported the job at which they worked the greatest number of hours during the reference week.  For experienced unemployed persons and for those not in the labor force, the information referred to the last job they held.

 

     Clerical staff in the Census Bureau’s processing office in California converted the written industry and occupation descriptions from the questionnaire to identifying codes by relating these descriptions to an entry in the Alphabetical Index of Industries and Occupations (PHC80-R3), 1982, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.  For the industrial code, these coders first referred to a Company Name List.  This list, prepared from the Standard Statistical Establishment List developed by the Bureau of the Census for use in the economic censuses and surveys, contained the names of establishments and their Standard Industrial Classification code converted to population census equivalents.  This listing facilitated coding and helped maintain industrial classification comparability.

 

     There was an important addition to the Industry and Occupation coding for Guam.  Some people living on Guam did not have regular jobs, but did work-like activities to support themselves.  These are called “subsistence activities” and included activities such a cutting and selling copra, making or selling handicrafts, fishing for one’s own food, and growing food for one’s own use.  Persons who reported a subsistence activities receive special industry and occupation codes that were not found in the Alphabetical index.

 

Occupation Classification System

     The system developed for the 1980 census consisted of 503 specific occupation categories arranged into 6 summary and 13 major occupation groups.  The Classified Index of Industries and Occupations (PHC80-R4), 1982, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C., provided information on the composition of the detailed categories in the census system.

 

     This classification was developed to be consistent with the 1980 Standard Occupational Classification Manual (SOC), published by the U.S. Department of Commerce, Office of Federal Statistical Policy Standards, and was the first time a United States standard was used in developing the census occupational classification.

 

     The conversion of the census classification to the SOC caused the 1980 census classification to be less comparable with the classifications used in earlier censuses (See the section on “Comparability”.)

 

Industry Classification System

     The industry classification system developed for the 1980 Census of Population consisted of 231 categories classified into 13 major industry groups.  Since 1940 the industrial classification has been based on the Standard Industrial Classification Manual (SIC).  The 1980 Census classification was developed from the 1972 SIC published by the Executive Office of the President, Office of Management and Budget, and the 1977 supplement to that manual.

 

     Relation to Standard Industrial Classification.  The Standard Industrial Classification (SIC) was developed under the sponsorship of the Office of Management and Budget and was designed for the classification of establishments by type of industrial activity in which they were engaged.  One of the major purposes of the SIC is to promote uniformity and comparability in the presentation of statistical data collected by various agencies.  Accordingly, in the Census of Population the industry categories were defined in these terms.  However, population census reports, which are collected from households, differ in nature and detail from those obtained from establishment reports.  Therefore, the population census classification system, though defined in SIC terms, cannot reflect the full detail of the SIC system.

 

     In addition, population census data may differ from other industrial data because the dates to which the data refer may not be the same: workers who lived in one geographic area and work in another may have been reported at their place of residence by the population census but at their place of work in surveys; and dual jobholders may be counted in the reports of two establishments but counted in the census for only their major job.

 

     Relation of Some Industry Groups to Similar Classes of Worker.  The industry category “Public Administration” was limited to regular government functions such as legislative, judicial, administrative, and regulatory activities of governments.  Other government organizations such as schools, hospitals, liquor stores, and bus lines were classified by industry according to the activity in which they were engaged.  On the other hand, the class of worker government categories included all government workers.

 

CLASS OF WORKER

     The class of worker item on the questionnaire consisted of seven categories which were defined as follows:

 

  1. Private wage and salary workers were persons who worked for a private employer for wages, salary, commission, tips, pay-in-kind, or at piece rates.  Private employers included churches and other non-profit organizations.
  2. Government workers were persons who worked for any governmental unit, regardless of the activity of the particular agency.  This category was subdivided by the level of government: (a) United States and (b) local (territorial and its subdivision).
  3. Self-employed workers had their own businesses, where incorporated or not. (a) Self-employed workers in won business not incorporated were persons who worked for profit or fees in their own unincorporated business, profession, or trade, or who operated a farm.  Included here were the owner-operators of large stores and manufacturing establishments as well as small merchants, independent craftpersons and professionals, farmers, peddlers, and other persons who conducted enterprises of their own. (b) Self-employed workers in own business incorporated were persons who considered themselves self-employed but worked for corporations.  In most cases the respondents owned or were part of a group that owned controlling interest in the corporation.  Since all workers of a corporation were defined as wage and salary workers, this category was tabulated with “private wage and salary workers,” and shown as a subcategory of that group.
  4. Unpaid family workers were persons who worked without pay on a farm or in a business operated by a person to whom they were related by blood or marriage.  These were usually the children or the wife of the owner of a business or farm.
  5. Subsistence activity workers were those who worked without pay, mainly to produce goods for his or her own family’s use or needs.

 

Edit and Allocation Procedures

 

     Occasionally respondents supplied industry, occupation, or class of worker descriptions which were not sufficiently specific for precise classification or did not report on these items.  Some of these cases were corrected through the field editing process and during the coding and tabulation operations.  In the coding operation certain types of incomplete entries were corrected using the Alphabetical Index of Industries and Occupations.  For example, it was possible in certain situations to assign an industry code based on the occupation reported.

 

     Following the coding operation, there was a computer edit and allocation process.  The edit first determined whether a respondent was in the universe which required an industry and occupation code.  The codes for the three items (industry, occupation, and class of worker) were checked to makes sure that they were valid and were edited for their relation to each other.  Invalid and inconsistent codes were either blanked or changed to a consistent code.

 

     If one or more of the three codes were blank after the edit, a code was allocated from a “similar” person based on other items such as age, sex, education, farm or nonfarm residence, and weeks worked.  This was the first census that allocated industry and occupation to detailed categories.

 

Comparability with Earlier Censuses

     In 1950 information on occupation was obtained from the last job of persons who worked as civilians in 1949.  Comparability of industry and occupation data is affected by a number of factors, a major one being the systems used to classify the questionnaire responses.  For both the industry and occupation classification systems, the basic structures were generally the same from 1940 to 1970, but changes in the individual categories limited comparability of the data from one census to another.  These changes resulted from the need to recognize the “birth” of new industries and occupations, the “death” of others, and growth and decline in existing industries and occupations, as well as the desire of analysts and other users for increased detail in presentation of the data.  Probably the greatest cause of incomparability is the movement of a segment of a category to a different category in the next census.  Such movements are necessitated by changes in functions and respondent terminology, and refinement of category composition.

 

     In the 1980 census, the industry classification underwent limited change to reflect changes to the SIC.  The occupation classification, however, was substantially revised because of the adoption of the Standard Occupational Classification by Federal agencies.  During this entire period, from 1940 to 1980, the number of categories in the industry classification system increased from 132 to 231, and in the occupation system from 224 to 503.

 

     Other factors that affect data comparability include the universe to which the data refer (in 1970, the age cutoff for labor force was changed from 14 years to 16 years); how the industry and occupation questions are worded on the questionnaire (for example, important changes were made in 1970); improvement in the coding procedures (the Company Name List technique was introduced in 1980); and how the “not reported” cases were handled.  Prior to 1970, the not reporteds were placed in residual “Industry not reported” and “Occupation not reported” categories.  In 1970, an allocation process was introduced through which these cases were assigned to major groups.  In 1980, the “not reported” cases were assigned to individual categories.  Therefore, the 1980 data for individual categories included some numbers of persons who would have been tabulated in a “not reported” category in previous censuses.

 

Comparability with Other Data

     Comparability between statistics presented here and statistics from other sources is affected by many of the factors described in the section of “Labor force status”.  These factors are primarily geographic differences between residence and place of work, different dates of reference, and differences in counts because of dual job holding.  Industry data from population censuses cover all industries and all kinds of workers, government workers, and the self-employed.  Also, the replies from household respondents may differ in detail and nature from those obtained from establishments. 

 

     Occupation data form the census and data from government licensing agencies, professional associations, trade unions, etc., may not be as comparable as expected.  Organizational listings often include persons not in the labor force or persons devoting all or most of their time to another occupation; or the same person may be included in two or more different listings.  In addition, relatively few organizations, except those requiring licensing, attain complete coverage of membership in a particular occupation field.

 

INDUSTRY CHARACTERISTICS

     In all, there were 32,692 employed persons 16 years and over in 1980.  The largest industry category in 1980 was retail trade, which was a shift from 1970, when the largest industry category was public administration (Table 11.1 and Figure 11.1).  The second largest category was professional and related services which increased from 17 percent of employed adults in 1970 to 20 percent in 1980.  Public administration was the third largest category in 1980 with 18 percent, moving down from being the largest in 1970.  The percentage of employed adults in construction decreased rather significantly from 17 percent in 1970 to 9 percent in 1980.

 

     The impact from the development of tourism was evident in two categories: retail trade and personal, entertainment, and recreational services.  The percentage of the population involved in personal, entertainment, and recreational services increased between 1970 and 1980, from 4 percent to 6 percent.

 

Table 11.1  Industry: 1950 to 1980

 

 

 

 

Industry

1980

1970

1960

1950

     Employed 16 yrs and over

32,692

22,112

17,208

18,671

         Percent

99.9

100.2

99.8

99.8

Agriculture, fishing, mining

0.9

0.8

2.6

6.6

Construction

9.3

16.6

30.5

33.6

Manufacturing

4.9

6.2

2.9

2.1

  Nondurable goods

2.5

1.8

1.7

1.3

  Durable goods

2.4

4.5

1.2

0.8

Transportation

5.8

5.1

6.0

13.4

Communications

4.4

3.7

0.9

1.3

Wholesale trade

2.3

1.5

1.6

1.3

Retail trade

20.0

15.2

11.8

8.5

Finance, insurance and real estate

4.8

2.5

0.9

0.5

Business and repair

3.6

6.6

1.2

1.9

Personal, entertainment & recreation

6.4

3.9

5.2

5.7

Professional and related

19.6

17.1

9.7

5.1

  Health

4.1

3.9

2.9

1.9

  Education

12.0

10.3

5.7

2.4

  Other professional

3.5

2.9

1.1

0.7

Public administration

17.9

20.9

25.9

19.0

Subsistence and not stated

0.0

0.0

0.6

0.9

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

 

 

 

/Figure 11.1/

     The 18,994 employed males 16 years and over in 1980 made up 58 percent of the total work force.  Of these, the largest proportion was in public administration at 21 percent (Table 11.2).  That is, approximately 1 in every 5 employed males in 1980 was in the public sector.  Although still a large proportion, the percentage of males employed in public administration steadily decreased, from 28 percent in 1960 to 21 percent in 1980.  The second largest industry category for males was in retail trade, which employed 15 percent of the males in 1980, an increase from the 11 percent in this category in 1970.  Construction followed closely as the third largest employer, accounting for 15 percent in 1980,  However, unlike retail trade, this figure decreased significantly from 23 percent in 1970.  Finance, insurance, and real estate more than doubled from 1.5 percent in 1970 to 3.2 percent in 1980, as did personal, entertainment, and recreational services, which increased from 2.4 to 5.2 percent during the decade.

 

Table 11.2  Industry, Males: 1950 to 1980

 

 

 

Industry

1980

1970

1960

1950

     Employed males16 yrs and over

18,994

15,245

13,680

15,584

         Percent

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

Agriculture, fishing, mining

1.3

1.0

2.9

7.4

Construction

14.8

23.1

38.2

39.4

Manufacturing

6.9

7.5

3.1

2.1

  Nondurable goods

3.0

2.0

1.7

1.3

  Durable goods

3.9

5.5

1.4

0.8

Transportation

8.0

6.5

7.3

16.0

Communications

6.1

4.6

0.9

1.4

Wholesale trade

2.9

1.8

1.8

1.3

Retail trade

15.0

11.2

7.8

5.5

Finance, insurance and real estate

3.2

1.5

0.5

0.3

Business and repair

4.8

9.0

1.4

2.2

Personal, entertainment & recreation

5.2

2.4

3.0

3.4

Professional and related

11.0

8.9

4.9

2.5

  Health

2.0

2.0

1.8

1.0

  Education

6.0

4.6

2.3

0.9

  Other professional

3.0

2.3

0.7

0.6

Public administration

20.7

22.5

27.7

17.5

Subsistence and not stated

0.1

0.0

0.6

1.0

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

 

 

 

     One of the more significant findings of the 1980 census was the large increase in the female labor force (as noted in Chapter 10).  Again, the number of employed females more than doubled during the previous decade, from 6,967 in 1970 to 13,698 in 1980 (Table 11.3).  The largest industry category for females remained professional and related services at 32 percent.  The second largest industry was retail trade which accounted for 27 percent.  Other categories remained basically the same from 1970 with only minor fluctuations.

 

     The male-female differences can be seen even more starkly in Table 11.4, which shows the percent female for each of the categories included.  Also, Table 11.5 clarifies the sexual differences further by providing industry data by sex.

 

     The percentage of employed females by industry in 1980 increased to 42 percent from 31 percent in 1970 (Table 11.4).  The so-called “traditional” industries for women – health and educational services – remained fairly high with 72 percent and 71 percent, respectively.  In other words, about 7 out of every 10 workers in these subcategories were females.  On the other hand, proportions of women in non-traditional industries for women such as business and repair services increased significantly from 6 percent in 1970 to 22 percent in 1980.  Also, most of the other industries accounted for a higher percentage of women, which is indicative of women’s increasing participation in Guam’s economy.

 

Table 11.3  Industry, Females: 1950 to 1980

 

 

 

Industry

1980

1970

1960

1950

     Employed females16 yrs and over

13,698

6,867

3,528

3,087

         Percent

99.8

100.0

99.9

100.0

Agriculture, fishing, mining

0.4

0.3

1.8

2.5

Construction

1.6

1.9

0.8

4.0

Manufacturing

2.2

3.3

2.1

2.5

  Nondurable goods

1.7

1.2

1.6

1.4

  Durable goods

0.4

2.1

0.4

1.0

Transportation

2.7

2.0

1.2

0.6

Communications

2.1

1.8

1.0

0.8

Wholesale trade

1.5

1.0

1.2

1.4

Retail trade

27.0

24.1

27.4

23.7

Finance, insurance and real estate

7.0

4.6

2.4

1.2

Business and repair

1.9

1.3

0.3

0.4

Personal, entertainment & recreation

8.1

7.1

13.7

17.4

Professional and related

31.5

35.3

28.5

18.1

  Health

6.9

8.2

6.9

6.7

  Education

20.3

23.0

18.9

10.2

  Other professional

4.3

4.1

2.7

1.3

Public administration

13.9

17.3

18.8

26.8

Subsistence and not stated

0.0

0.0

0.8

0.6

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

 

 

 

     Without crossing the industry data with occupational data, it is difficult to really assess the vertical mobility females were achieving in the economy (Table 11.5).  For example, although 62 percent of the category of finance, insurance, and real estate were women, many of these could have been bank clerks rather than in management positions.  Besides the professional and related services, retail trade and personal, entertainment, and recreational; services both accounted for higher female employment percentages with 56 percent and 53 percent, respectively.

 

Table 11.4  Percentage of Employed Females by Industry: 1950 to 1980

Industry

1980

1970

1960

1950

     Employed females16 yrs and over

13,698

6,867

3,528

3,087

         Percent

41.9

31.1

20.5

16.5

Agriculture, fishing, mining

17.6

11.2

13.9

6.4

Construction

7.1

3.6

0.5

2.0

Manufacturing

18.5

16.3

14.5

19.0

  Nondurable goods

29.4

20.5

20.1

17.5

  Durable goods

7.3

14.6

7.0

20.1

Transportation

19.6

12.4

4.2

0.7

Communications

20.0

14.8

21.4

10.5

Wholesale trade

26.9

20.8

15.2

17.6

Retail trade

56.5

49.2

47.5

45.9

Finance, insurance and real estate

61.5

58.6

55.6

43.5

Business and repair

22.5

6.2

5.8

3.6

Personal, entertainment & recreation

52.8

57.0

54.3

50.3

Professional and related

67.4

64.0

60.2

59.4

  Health

71.5

65.4

49.2

57.7

  Education

70.8

69.1

67.6

70.2

  Other professional

51.1

44.0

49.7

28.5

Public administration

32.6

25.7

14.9

23.3

Subsistence and not stated

14.3

NA

27.6

10.9

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

 

 

 

     Table 11.6 (and Figure 11.2) presents employment figures for the Guam-born labor force and for those not born on Guam, by industry, as well as percentages of Guam-born employees in each of the categories.  The industry that had the highest percentage of Guam-born was communications, with 65 percent being born on Guam.  Public administration had the second largest percentage of Guam-born as its labor force.  Public administration was also the largest employer of Guam-born with 28 percent of Guam-born labor force being employed in this category.  In other words, more than 1 out of every 4 Guam-born workers held a job in public administration.  On the other hand, only about 1 out of every 20 Guam-born held a job in construction, and only 22 percent of the construction labor force was Guam-born, indicating the increasing H-2 foreign labor force penetrating into Guam’s construction industry.

 

Table 11.5  Industry by Sex: 1980

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Numbers

Percent

Percent

Industry

Total

Male

Fmle

Total

Male

Fmle

Female

     Employed 16 yrs and over

32,692

18,994

13,698

100.0

100.0

100.0

41.9

Agriculture, fishing, mining

306

252

54

0.9

1.3

0.4

17.6

Construction

3,025

2,810

215

9.3

14.8

1.6

7.1

Manufacturing

1,606

1,309

297

4.9

6.9

2.2

18.5

  Nondurable goods

813

574

239

2.5

3.0

1.7

29.4

  Durable goods

793

735

58

2.4

3.9

0.4

7.3

Transportation

1,884

1,515

369

5.8

8.0

2.7

19.6

Communications

1,449

1,159

290

4.4

6.1

2.1

20.0

Wholesale trade

754

551

203

2.3

2.9

1.5

26.9

Retail trade

6,545

2,844

3,701

20.0

15.0

27.0

56.5

Finance, insurance and real estate

1,565

602

963

4.8

3.2

7.0

61.5

Business and repair

1,185

918

267

3.6

4.8

1.9

22.5

Personal, entertainment & recreation

2,106

995

1,111

6.4

5.2

8.1

52.8

Professional and related

6,403

2,087

4,316

19.6

11.0

31.5

67.4

  Health

1,332

380

952

4.1

2.0

6.9

71.5

  Education

3,919

1,144

2,775

12.0

6.0

20.3

70.8

  Other professional

1,152

563

589

3.5

3.0

4.3

51.1

Public administration

5,850

3,940

1,910

17.9

20.7

13.9

32.6

Subsistence and not stated

14

12

2

0.0

0.1

0.0

14.3

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census 1980 PC80-1-C/D54, Table 23

 

 

 

 

/Figure 11.2/

 

Table 11.6  Industry by Birthplace: 1980

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Birthplace

Percent

Percent

Industry

Total

Guam

Not Guam

Total

Guam

Not Guam

Guam born

     Employed 16 yrs and over

32,682

13,001

19,681

100.0

100.0

100.0

60.2

Agriculture, fishing, mining

306

96

210

0.9

0.7

1.1

68.6

Construction

3,025

678

2,347

9.3

5.2

11.9

77.6

Manufacturing

1,606

534

1,072

4.9

4.1

5.4

66.7

  Nondurable goods

813

206

607

2.5

1.6

3.1

74.7

  Durable goods

793

328

465

2.4

2.5

2.4

58.6

Transportation

1,884

965

919

5.8

7.4

4.7

48.8

Communications

1,449

944

505

4.4

7.3

2.6

34.9

Wholesale trade

754

217

537

2.3

1.7

2.7

71.2

Retail trade

6,545

1,674

4,871

20.0

12.9

24.7

74.4

Finance, insurance and real estate

1,565

608

957

4.8

4.7

4.9

61.2

Business and repair

1,185

385

800

3.6

3.0

4.1

67.5

Personal, entertainment & recreation

2,106

386

1,720

6.4

3.0

8.7

81.7

Professional and related

6,403

2,891

3,512

19.6

22.2

17.8

54.8

  Health

1,332

556

776

4.1

4.3

3.9

58.3

  Education

3,919

1,967

1,952

12.0

15.1

9.9

49.8

  Other professional

1,152

368

784

3.5

2.8

4.0

68.1

Public administration

5,840

3,613

2,227

17.9

27.8

11.3

38.1

Subsistence and not stated

14

10

4

0.0

0.1

0.0

28.6

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census 1980 PC80-1-C/D54, Table 28

 

 

 

 

 

     The data presented in Table 11.7 show the distribution of industry for Chamorros and Filipinos, expanding somewhat on data shown in Chapter 8 on ethnicity.  In obtaining these data, persons who responded as Chamorro only or Filipino only were combined with those responding “Chamorro and other group” or “Filipino and other group”.  Persons who indicated they were Chamorro-Filipino were therefore counted as both Chamorro and Filipino.

 

     There were 13,498 Chamorro workers and 9.506 Filipino workers in 1980.  Chamorros made up 41 percent of all workers on Guam.  The largest percentage of Chamorros were in public administration (27 percent) and in professional and related services (22 percent).  Fully 14 percent of the Chamorros were in communications and transportation, and 13 percent were in retail trade.  Only 5 percent were in construction.

 

     On the other hand, more than half of all Filipino workers were in just three categories – 1 out of 4 in retail trade, 1 out of 6 in construction, and 1 out of 9 in professional services.  Another one-fourth of the Filipinos were in three categories – personal, entertainment, and recreational services (10 percent), public administration (also 10 percent), and manufacturing (7 percent).

 

     The last column in Table 11.7 shows the proportion of workers in each industry that were Chamorro in 1980.  Although slightly more than 40 percent of all workers were Chamorro, 63 percent of all persons in public administration were Chamorro, as were 59 percent in communications and transportation, and 46 percent of persons in professional services.  At the opposite end, only 19 percent of employed persons in personal, entertainment, and recreation, and 24 percent of those in construction were Chamorro.

 

Table 11.7  Industry by Ethnicity: 1980

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Ethnicity

Percent

Percent

Industry

Total

Cham.

Filip.

Total

Cham.

Filip.

Cham

     Employed 16 yrs and over

32,692

13,498

9,506

100.0

100.0

100.0

41.3

Agriculture, fishing, mining

281

99

105

0.9

0.7

1.1

35.2

Construction

3,050

726

1,535

9.3

5.4

16.1

23.8

Manufacturing

1,606

558

639

4.9

4.1

6.7

34.7

Transportation, communications

3,333

1,962

581

10.2

14.5

6.1

58.9

Wholesale trade

754

237

233

2.3

1.8

2.5

31.4

Retail trade

6,545

1,802

2,505

20.0

13.4

26.4

27.5

Finance, insurance and real estate

1,565

654

444

4.8

4.8

4.7

41.8

Business and repair services

1,185

425

359

3.6

3.1

3.8

35.9

Personal, entertainment & recreation

2,106

398

1,002

6.4

2.9

10.5

18.9

Professional and related

6,403

2,944

1,127

19.6

21.8

11.9

46.0

Public administration

5,850

3,682

975

17.9

27.3

10.3

62.9

Subsistence and not stated

14

11

1

0.0

0.1

0.0

78.6

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census 1980 PC80-1-C/D54, Table 43

 

 

 

 

     Table 11.8 distinguishes full Chamorros from part-Chamorros.  The total number of full Chamorro employees was 95 percent of the total Chamorro labor force.  The largest percentage of full Chamorros was in public administration (28 percent).  The second largest percentage of full Chamorros was in professional and related services with 22 percent of the total full Chamorros working in this category.  On the other hand, the largest percentage of the total part-Chamorro employees was in retail trade (22 percent).  The second largest percentage was in public administration.  The last column in the table shows the percentage of each category that was full Chamorro.  For example, 98 percent of agriculture, fishing, and forestry workers were full Chamorros.  Both professional and related services, and public administration had 97 percent of the Chamorros claiming only that ethnicity.

 

     There was also a relationship between education and industry (Table 11.9, Figure 11.3).  Altogether, 72 percent of employed persons 25 years and over were high school graduates, as were 68 percent of males and 77 percent of the females.  Since large-scale female labor force participation is a recent phenomenon. The percentage for females was higher because they were probably younger, and therefore more likely to have graduated from high school.

 

Table 11.8  Industry of Full and Part-Chamorros: 1980

 

 

 

 

 

 

Chamorros

Percent

Percent

Industry

Total

Full

Part

Total

Full

Part

Full

     Employed 16 yrs and over

13,498

12,878

620

100.0

100.0

100.0

95.4

Agriculture, fishing, mining

99

97

2

0.7

0.8

0.3

98.0

Construction

726

695

31

5.4

5.4

5.0

95.7

Manufacturing

558

532

26

4.1

4.1

4.2

95.3

Transportation, communications

1,962

1,894

68

14.5

14.7

11.0

96.5

Wholesale trade

237

216

21

1.8

1.7

3.4

91.1

Retail trade

1,802

1,665

137

13.4

12.9

22.1

92.4

Finance, insurance and real estate

654

610

44

4.8

4.7

7.1

93.3

Business and repair services

425

399

26

3.1

3.1

4.2

93.9

Personal, entertainment & recreation

398

360

38

2.9

2.8

6.1

90.5

Professional and related

2,944

2,843

101

21.8

22.1

16.3

96.6

Public administration

3,682

3,556

126

27.3

27.6

20.3

96.6

Subsistence and not stated

11

11

0

0.1

0.1

0.0

100.0

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census 1980 PC80-1-C/D54, Table 43

 

 

 

 

 

     About 9 out of every 10 persons employed in finance, insurance, and real estate, and professional and related services were high school graduates (Table 11.9).  Also, 82 percent of those in wholesale trade and 72 percent of public administrators were high school graduates. Conversely, only about half of those employed in agriculture, fishing, and forestry, about 3 in every 5 construction workers were high school graduates.

 

     There were differences in educational attainment by sex.  Fully 87 percent of the males working in finance, insurance, and real estate, compared to 92 percent of the females, were high school graduates.  Generally, with a few exceptions in personal, entertainment, and recreation, and retail trade, females were more highly educated than males.

 

Table 11.9  Industry by Percent High School Graduates by Sex: 1980

 

 

 

Numbers

Percent

Industry

Total

Male

Female

Total

Male

Female

     Employed 25 yrs and over

26,347

15,835

10,512

71.5

67.6

77.3

Agriculture, fishing, mining

225

188

37

53.8

51.1

67.6

Construction

2,694

2,537

157

57.6

56.1

82.2

Manufacturing

1,343

1,124

219

69.5

67.2

81.3

Transportation, communications

2,802

2,310

492

67.3

62.9

87.6

Wholesale trade

581

441

140

82.1

80.7

86.4

Retail trade

4,711

2,040

2,671

67.0

68.3

66.0

Finance, insurance and real estate

1,188

517

671

90.2

87.3

92.4

Business and repair services

891

714

177

70.5

68.2

79.7

Personal, entertainment & recreation

1,547

701

846

60.1

68.0

53.4

Professional and related

5,450

1,786

3,664

83.3

81.6

84.1

Public administration

4,906

3,470

1,436

72.1

67.9

82.3

Subsistence and not stated

9

7

2

33.3

28.6

50.0

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census 1980 PC80-1-C/D54, Table 44

 

 

 

 

/Figure 11.3/

     In 1980, among the 32,175 employed persons 16 to 64 years of age, 8,488 had vocational training (about 1 out of every 4)(Table 11.10 and Figure 11.4).  About 34 percent of public administrators had had this training, but only 18percent of those in personal, entertainment, and recreation, and 19 percent  of those in retail trade.

 

     Of all the persons who were trained in some kind of vocational education program, 20 percent were in retail trade in 1980, and another 20 percent were in professional and related services.

 

Table 11.10  Industry by Persons Completing Vocational Training: 1980

 

 

With Vo-

Percent

Percent

 

 

cational

of all

of this

Industry

Total

Training

training

Industry

     Employed 16 to 64 years

32,175

8,448

100.0

26.3

Agriculture, fishing, mining

273

60

0.7

22.0

Construction

3,006

887

10.5

29.5

Manufacturing

1,587

530

6.3

33.4

Transportation, communications

3,298

1,012

12.0

30.7

Wholesale trade

748

163

1.9

21.8

Retail trade

6,436

1,236

14.6

19.2

Finance, insurance and real estate

1,543

439

5.2

28.5

Business and repair services

1,165

360

4.3

30.9

Personal, entertainment & recreation

2,046

359

4.2

17.5

Professional and related

6,318

1,432

17.0

22.7

Public administration

5,746

1,968

23.3

34.2

Subsistence and not stated

9

2

0.0

22.2

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census 1980 PC80-1-C/D54, Table 44

 

 

/Figure 11.4/

     

      Table 11.11 shows the employment figures by industry and region.  Out of the total labor force 16 years and over, 15,747 workers came from the Northern region, 10,851 from the Central region, and 6,094 from the Southern region.  The three largest industry categories for the North were retail trade (23 percent of the employed workers living there), professional and related services (16 percent), and public administration (13 percent).  The three largest for Central were in professional and related services (22 percent), public administration (21 percent), and retail trade (18 percent).  The largest categories for Southern region workers were public administration (24 percent), professional and related services (24 percent), and retail trade (16 percent).

 

Table 11.11 Industry by Region: 1980

 

 

 

 

Industry

Total

North

Central

South

     Employed 16 yrs and over

32,692

15,747

10,851

6,094

         Percent

99.9

100.1

99.9

100.0

Agriculture, fishing, mining

0.9

0.8

1.0

1.2

Construction

9.3

11.1

8.4

5.8

Manufacturing

4.9

4.6

4.7

5.9

  Nondurable goods

2.5

2.7

2.5

1.8

  Durable goods

2.4

1.9

2.2

4.1

Transportation

5.8

5.6

5.2

7.4

Communications

4.4

3.8

4.9

5.1

Wholesale trade

2.3

2.8

2.2

1.3

Retail trade

20.0

23.3

17.5

16.1

Finance, insurance and real estate

4.8

5.0

5.4

3.3

Business and repair

3.6

4.0

3.6

2.6

Personal, entertainment & recreation

6.4

9.5

4.1

2.9

Professional and related

19.6

16.5

21.7

23.8

  Health

4.1

4.1

4.3

3.6

  Education

12.0

9.2

13.5

16.6

  Other professional

3.5

3.2

3.9

3.7

Public administration

17.9

13.1

21.1

24.5

Subsistence and not stated

0.0

0.0

0.1

0.0

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census 1980 Sumamry Tape File 3A, Table 65

 

     Table 11.12 provides percentage breakdowns of the total workers in each industry category into the three regions.   On average, the Northern region held roughly half the workers in each category in 1980.  The region that held the second largest proportion of the jobs was the Central area.  The Southern region provided less than 1 out of 5 workers on Guam.  This labor contribution order in all categories was fairly consistent, with exceptions in the educational services category and public administration, where Central region was the largest contributor of workers in these categories.

 

Table 11.12.  Industry by Percent Region: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Industry                              Total    North    Central  South

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

     Employed 16 yrs and over.....    100.0     48.2     33.2     18.6

Agriculture, fishing, mining......    100.0     39.9     35.3     24.8

Construction......................    100.0     58.0     30.3     11.7

Manufacturing.....................    100.0     45.6     31.9     22.5

  Nondurable goods................    100.0     53.0     33.3     13.7

  Durable goods...................    100.0     38.0     30.5     31.5

Transportation....................    100.0     46.4     29.8     23.8

Communications....................    100.0     41.5     37.1     21.5

Wholesale trade...................    100.0     57.8     31.8     10.3

Retail trade......................    100.0     56.0     29.1     15.0

Finance, insurance & real estate...   100.0     49.8     37.3     12.9

Business and repair...............    100.0     53.1     33.3     13.6

Personal entertainment and

  recreation services.............    100.0     70.7     20.9      8.4

Professional and related services.    100.0     40.6     36.8     22.7

  Health..........................    100.0     48.6     35.1     16.4

  Educational services............    100.0     36.8     37.5     25.7

  Other professional services.....    100.0     44.2     36.3     19.5

Public Administration.............    100.0     35.3     39.2     25.5

Subsistence.......................    100.0     21.4     57.1     21.4

______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census 1980 Summary Tape File 3A, Table 65

 

 

OCCUPATION CHARACTERISTICS

 

     Of the total number of employed persons 16 years and over, the occupation category that had the highest percentage was technical, sales, and administrative support, with 31 percent.  The second largest category was the managerial and professional occupations with 25 percent of the labor force working in this category (Table 11.13 and Figure 11.5).  When we calculate the percentages for males and females separately, the figures change significantly.  For males, the two largest occupation categories were precision production, craft and repair services (25 percent) and professional services (24 percent).  For female workers, the two highest percentages of workers were in technical, sales, and administrative support (48 percent) and managerial and professional services (24 percent).  The last column in Table 11.13 shows the percentages of females for each occupation category.  The categories that had the highest percentages of female workers were private household (92 percent), administrative support (71 percent), and professional services (58 percent).  As expected, categories such as protective services and precision craft production, craft and repair services, and transportation and material movers had the lowest percentages of females.

 

Table 11.13.  Occupation by Sex: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                    Numbers           Percent     Per‑

                               ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ cent

                                             Fe‑              Fe‑  Fe‑

Occupation                     Total Males males Total Males mles mles

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

   Employed 16 yrs and over....32692 18994 13698 100.0 100.0  100 41.9

Managerial and profess special. 8146  4570  3576  24.9  24.1 26.1 43.9

  Executive, administrative.... 3939  2807  1132  12.0  14.8  8.3 28.7

  Professional................. 4207  1763  2444  12.9   9.3 17.8 58.1

Tech,sales and admin. support..10200  3597  6603  31.2  18.9 48.2 64.7

  Technicians.................. 1099   807   292   3.4   4.2  2.1 26.6

  Sales........................ 3299  1099  2200  10.1   5.8 16.1 66.7

  Administrative support....... 5802  1691  4111  17.7   8.9 30.0 70.9

Service........................ 5476  2556  2920  16.8  13.5 21.3 53.3

  Private household............   61     5    56    .2    .0   .4 91.8

  Protective service...........  938   855    83   2.9   4.5   .6  8.8

  Other service................ 4477  1696  2781  13.7   8.9 20.3 62.1

Farming, forestry and fishing..  381   335    46   1.2   1.8   .3 12.1

Precisn product. craft & repair 5030  4812   218  15.4  25.3  1.6  4.3

Oper., fabricators, and laborer 3445  3112   333  10.5  16.4  2.4  9.7

  Machine operator, assembler..  712   585   127   2.2   3.1   .9 17.8

  Transport and material move.. 1377  1339    38   4.2   7.0   .3  2.8

  Handlrs, equip cleaners, labr 1356  1188   168   4.1   6.3  1.2 12.4

Subsistence activity...........   14    12     2    .0    .1   .0 14.3

______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census 1980 PC80‑1‑C/D54, Table 23

 

Figure 11.5 Females by Occupation: 1980

  (Percent)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 


     Altogether 40 percent of all employed persons were born on Guam.  Of those born on Guam, 33 percent were working in technical, sales, and administrative support positions, and 20 percent were in managerial and professional positions (Table 11.14 and Figure 11.6).  Of the "foreign born" workers, those not born on Guam, 30 percent were working in technical, sales, administrative support positions, and 28 percent in managerial and professional positions.   There was not much difference in the percentages and the types of occupations between Guam‑born and foreign born.  Almost 7 out of 10 protective service workers were Guam‑born, but only 16 percent of private household service workers were Guam‑born.

 

 

Figure 11.6  Occupation by Birthplace: 1980

   (Percent Born in Guam)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 


 

Table 11.14.  Occupation by Birthplace: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                   Numbers            Percent     Per‑

                            ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ cent

                                            Not              Not  Guam

Occupation                   Total  Guam   Guam  Total Guam Guam  Born

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

  Emplyd 16 yrs and over.. 32,692 13,001 19,691 100.0 100.0 100.0 39.8

Managerial and profess....  8,146  2,605  5,541  24.9  20.0  28.1 32.0

  Exec, administrative....  3,939  1,461  2,478  12.0  11.2  12.6 37.1

  Professional............  4,207  1,144  3,063  12.9   8.8  15.6 27.2

Tech, sales, admin. supprt 10,200  4,293  5,907  31.2  33.0  30.0 42.1

  Technicians.............  1,099    365    734   3.4   2.8   3.7 33.2

  Sales...................  3,299    868  2,431  10.1   6.7  12.3 26.3

  Administrative support..  5,802  3,060  2,742  17.7  23.5  13.9 52.7

Service...................  5,476  2,371  3,105  16.8  18.2  15.8 43.3

  Private household.......     61     10     51    .2    .1    .3 16.4

  Protective service......    938    640    298   2.9   4.9   1.5 68.2

  Other service...........  4,477  1,721  2,756  13.7  13.2  14.0 38.4

Farming, frstry and fishing.  381    205    176   1.2   1.6    .9 53.8

Precision production craft. 5,030  1,754  3,276  15.4  13.5  16.6 34.9

Opratrs, fabricators, lbrs. 3,445  1,763  1,682  10.5  13.6   8.5 51.2

  Machine optr, assembler..   712    276    436   2.2   2.1   2.2 38.8

  Transport, material move. 1,377    798    579   4.2   6.1   2.9 58.0

  Handlrs, equip cleaners,. 1,356    689    667   4.1   5.3   3.4 50.8

Subsistence activity.......    14     10      4    .0    .1    .0 71.4

______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census 1980 PC80‑1‑C/D54, Table 28

 

     Table 11.15 shows the employment figures by occupation and region on Guam.  The three largest distributions of Northern region workers were in technical, sales, and administrative support positions (31 percent), managerial and professional positions (24 percent), and services positions (18 percent).  The largest categories of Central region workers were in technical, sales, and administrative support (32 percent), managerial and professional (27 percent), and services and precision production, craft and repair positions (both 15 percent).  Lastly, the Southern region workers were largely distributed in technical, sales, and administrative support (31 percent), managerial and professional (23 percent), and services (16 percent).  In general, significantly large discrepancies did not exist between the regions in 1980.

 

Table 11.15.  Occupation by Region: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Occupation                            Total    North  Central    South

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

     Employed 16 yrs and over.....   32,692   15,747   10,851    6,094

         Percent..................    100.0    100.0    100.0    100.0

Managerial and profess special....     24.9     24.3     26.9     22.9

  Executive, administrative.......     12.0     12.1     13.5      9.2

  Professional....................     12.9     12.2     13.4     13.7

Technical, sales and admin. support    31.2     30.6     32.0     31.3

  Technicians.....................      3.4      3.2      3.7      3.2

  Sales...........................     10.1     11.9      8.8      7.8

  Administrative support..........     17.7     15.6     19.4     20.3

Service...........................     16.8     18.1     15.0     16.3

  Private household...............       .2       .2       .2       .1

  Protective service..............      2.9      2.3      2.8      4.4

  Other service...................     13.7     15.5     12.1     11.9

Farming, forestry and fishing.....      1.2       .9      1.2      1.8

Precision production craft & repair    15.4     16.2     15.0     13.9

Operators, fabricators, and laborer.   10.5      9.8      9.8     13.8

  Machine operator, assembler.....      2.2      2.2      1.9      2.4

  Transportation and material move..    4.2      3.7      3.9      6.2

  Handlers, equip cleaners, laborer.    4.1      3.9      4.0      5.1

Subsistence activity................     .0       .0       .1       .0

______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census 1980 Summary Tape File 3A, Table 66

 

     Table 11.16 provides percentage breakdowns of the total workers in each occupation category for the three regions.  Again, on average, the Northern region workers held about half of all occupations on Guam.  The Central region remained second.  With exception of subsistence activity, where the Central region had the highest percent, the order of labor contribution size was consistent throughout each category.

 

Table 11.16.  Occupation by Percent Region: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Occupation                            Total    North  Central    South

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

     Employed 16 yrs and over.......  100.0     48.2     33.2     18.6

Managerial and professional special.  100.0     47.0     35.9     17.1

  Executive, administrative.........  100.0     48.5     37.3     14.2

  Professional......................  100.0     45.6     34.5     19.9

Technical, sales and admin. support.  100.0     47.3     34.0     18.7

  Technicians.......................  100.0     45.3     36.9     17.7

  Sales.............................  100.0     56.7     28.9     14.4

  Administrative support............  100.0     42.3     36.4     21.3

Service.............................  100.0     52.0     29.8     18.2

  Private household.................  100.0     57.4     34.4      8.2

  Protective service................  100.0     39.3     32.3     28.4

  Other service.....................  100.0     54.6     29.2     16.1

Farming, forestry and fishing.......  100.0     37.5     33.3     29.1

Precision production craft & repair.  100.0     50.8     32.4     16.8

Operators, fabricators, and laborer.  100.0     44.8     30.8     24.3

  Machine operator, assembler.......  100.0     49.4     29.6     20.9

  Transportation and material move..  100.0     42.2     30.5     27.3

  Handlers, equip cleaners, laborer.  100.0     45.1     31.8     23.1

Subsistence activity................  100.0     21.4     57.1     21.4

______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census 1980 Summary Tape File 3A, Table 66

 

 

SUMMARY

 

     The employment by industry/occupation data in the preceding tables show significant increases in the private sector employment.  Of the increases, retail and wholesale categories experienced the most pronounced growth.  Although construction employment figures showed a significant decrease since 1970, there were many major construction projects planned for the 1980's (especially in hotel construction), and thus the construction figure has increased.

 

     Female employment has steadily increased in the past 30 years.  In almost all the industry categories, female employment figures show steady increases.  Although it is certain that the female labor force is holding a larger portion of the Guam job market, when looking at the occupation by sex, the numbers still suggest that the quality of the jobs held by the increasing numbers of women workers may be lower than jobs held by their male counterparts.  The percentage of the labor force employed in public administration has steadily decreased over the years.

 

     Retail trade and wholesale trade have shown steady increases, and should keep the same trends in the years to come.  Guam's transition to a commercial economy (compared to a public sector economy) is evident in the figures obtained in the 1980 census.  Also, Guam's economy is steadily increasing its service‑oriented industry base, and should be tailoring its education/training programs to prepare the labor force for such jobs.  Furthermore, females on Guam have good potential to share an equal footing in Guam's employment opportunities.  Although  women still tend to lag in vertical mobility in certain industries, with careful encouragement this too should change in the future.

 

 

CLASS OF WORKER CHARACTERISTICS

 

     Class of worker data since 1950 show a shift in employment from private to government employment, then back to private (Table 11.17).  In 1950, 55 percent of all those 16 years and older who were employed were private wage and salary earners, 36 percent were in government, and 8 percent were self‑employed.  By 1970, private employment had fallen to 46 percent of workers and government employment rose to 52 percent.  Those who were self‑employed were only 2 percent of workers.  By 1980, however, private employment and self‑employment had increased while the proportion of those in government work had fallen.

 

Table 11.17.  Class of Worker: 1950 to 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Class of Worker                1980       1970        1960        1950

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

  Employed, 16+ yrs.....     32,692     22,112      17,208      18,671

     Percent............      100.0      100.0       100.0       100.0

Private wage and salary.       50.7       45.8        52.4        55.1

Government..............       46.1       52.0        42.4        35.8

  Federal government....       18.4       27.8        (NA)        (NA)

  Local government......       27.7       24.3        (NA)        (NA)

Self‑employed...........        3.1        1.9         4.6         7.8

Unpaid family worker....         .1         .2          .5         1.3

Subsistence.............         .0        0.0         0.0         0.0

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

 

     In 1950, 58 percent of employed males over the age of 16 worked for private companies, 8 percent were self‑employed, and 33 percent were government workers (Table 11.18).  In 1970, government employment reached its peak of 49 percent of male workers while private employment and self‑employment were at their lowest levels.  By 1980, the proportion of those self‑employed had nearly doubled, private employment increased, and government employment decreased.

 

Table 11.18      Class of Male Worker: 1950 to 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Class of Worker                1980       1970        1960        1950

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

  Employed males, 16+...     18,994     15,245      13,680      15,584

     Percent............      100.0      100.0       100.0       100.0

Private wage and salary.       50.6       48.5        54.5        58.3

Government..............       45.7       49.4        40.9        32.6

  Federal government....       21.5       29.8         0.0         0.0

  Local government......       24.3       19.6         0.0         0.0

Self‑employed...........        3.6        2.0         4.3         8.0

Unpaid family worker....         .0         .1          .3         1.1

Subsistence.............         .1        0.0         0.0         0.0

 

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

 

     Females were employed mainly as government workers in 1950 (52 percent), followed by private companies (39 percent) and self‑employment (7 percent) (Table 11.19).  Their pattern of decreasing private employment and increasing government work until 1970, followed by a reverse in 1980, closely matched that of male workers.

 

Table 11.19      Class of Female Worker: 1950 to 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Class of Worker                1980       1970        1960        1950

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

  Employed females, 16+.     13,698      6,867       3,528       3,087

     Percent............      100.0      100.0       100.0       100.0

Private wage and salary.       50.9       39.9        44.4        38.8

Government..............       46.5       57.9        48.3        52.4

  Federal government....       14.1       23.2        (NA)        (NA)

  Local government......       32.5       34.7        (NA)        (NA)

Self‑employed...........        2.5        1.9         5.8         6.9

Unpaid family worker....         .1         .4         1.4         1.8

Subsistence.............         .0        0.0         0.0         0.0

 

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

 

 

 

 

     Tables 11.20 through 11.22 highlight the reversal in type of employment mentioned earlier.  There was a 48 percent increase between 1970 and 1980 in numbers of those 16 years and older and employed (Table 11.20 and Figure 11.7).  By class, the number of private workers had increased by 64 percent, local government workers by 69 percent, and self‑employed workers by 137 percent.  The number of those working for the Federal government decreased by 2 percent.  Unpaid family workers showed the largest drop, with a 35 percent decrease.

 


Table 11.20.  Change in Class of Worker: 1970 and 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                           Percent                 

                               Number       Change          Percent 

                      ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑   1970 to‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Class of Worker            1980     1970      1980      1980      1970

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

  Employed, 16+ yrs.....  32692    22112      47.8     100.0     100.0

Private wage and salary.  16575    10135      63.5      50.7      45.8

Federal government......   6001     6141      ‑2.3      18.4      27.8

Local government........   9056     5365      68.8      27.7      24.3

Self‑employed...........   1020      431     136.6       3.1       1.9

Unpaid family worker....     26       40     ‑35.0        .1        .2

Subsistence.............     14     (NA)      (NA)        .0      (NA)

______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980 Table 23;

        PC(1)‑B54 1970 Table 15

 

Figure 11.7  Class of Worker: 1970 and 1980

  (Percent)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 


 

     The number of employed males increased by 25 percent between 1970 and 1980, with the largest gains in the areas of self‑employment and local government (Table 11.21).  The greatest decreases were in unpaid family workers and Federal government employees.

 

Table 11.21.   Change in Class of Male Worker: 1970 and 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                           Percent                  

                              Number       Change          Percent  

                      ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑   1970 to‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Class of Worker            1980     1970      1980      1980      1970

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

  Employed males, 16+...  18994    15245      24.6     100.0     100.0

Private wage and salary.   9605     7397      29.8      50.6      48.5

Federal government......   4075     4548     ‑10.4      21.5      29.8

Local government........   4609     2984      54.4      24.3      19.6

Self‑employed...........    684      302     126.5       3.6       2.0

Unpaid family worker....      9       14     ‑35.7        .0        .1

Subsistence.............     12     (NA)      (NA)        .1      (NA)

______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Census Bureau PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980 Table 23; PC(1)‑B54 1970

        Table 15                                                    

 

     There was a nearly 100 percent increase in the number of females in the labor force between 1970 and 1980, with the highest gains being in the areas of self and private employment (Table 11.22).  The only category to shrink was that of unpaid family workers, which decreased by 35 percent.

 

Table 11.22.   Change in Class of Female Worker: 1970 and 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                           Percent                   

                               Number       Change          Percent 

                      ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑   1970 to‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Class of Worker            1980     1970      1980      1980      1970

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

  Employed females, 16+.  13698     6867      99.5     100.0     100.0

Private wage and salary.   6970     2738     154.6      50.9      39.9

Federal government......   1926     1593      20.9      14.1      23.2

Local government........   4447     2381      86.8      32.5      34.7

Self‑employed...........    336      129     160.5       2.5       1.9

Unpaid family worker....     17       26     ‑34.6        .1        .4

Subsistence.............      2     (NA)      (NA)        .0      (NA)

______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980 Table 23;

        PC(1)‑B54 1970 Table 15                           

 

 

     In 1980, 45 percent of workers who were born on Guam were employed by the local government; the private sector was the second largest category of employment, with 32 percent of Guam‑born employees (Table 11.23 and Figure 11.8).  For all other employees, the private sector was the largest source of employment, with proportions ranging from 75 percent of "other"‑born employees, to 48 percent of those born in the U.S.  Workers born in the Philippines had Federal government as the second most common category of employment; for persons born in the U.S. and other areas, local government was second.

 

Table 11.23.  Class of Worker by Birthplace: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                        Numbers        |            Percent

                   ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                        Phil‑       Ot‑|             Phil‑         Ot‑

Class of Worker     Guam ppns  USA  her| Total  Guam  ppns   USA   her

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                       |

  Emplyd, 16+ yrs..13001 9188 5636 4867| 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Prvt wage and sal.. 4092 6100 2713 3670|  50.7  31.5  66.4  48.1  75.4

Federal government. 2751 1686 1231  333|  18.4  21.2  18.4  21.8   6.8

Local government... 5847 1151 1427  631|  27.7  45.0  12.5  25.3  13.0

Self‑employed......  289  244  261  226|   3.1   2.2   2.7   4.6   4.6

Unpaid family......   12    7    4    3|    .1    .1    .1    .1    .1

Subsistence........   10    0    0    4|    .0    .1   0.0   0.0    .1

                                       |

______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980 Table 28

 

Figure 11.8  Class of Worker by Birthplace: 1980

  (Percent)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 


 

     Employed males followed the pattern set by all workers, except for the U.S. born (Table 11.24).  Their second largest source of jobs was the Federal government, as opposed to the local government, which was the second most common source of employment of all U.S. born employees.  Considering that most U.S. born males were presumed to be in the military, this finding is not surprising.

 

Table 11.24.   Class of Male Worker by Birthplace: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                        Numbers        |            Percent

                   ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                        Phil‑       Ot‑|             Phil‑         Ot‑

Class of Worker     Guam ppns  USA  her| Total  Guam  ppns   USA   her

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                       |

 Emplyd males, 16+. 7400 5832 2954 2808| 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Prvt wage and sal.. 2215 3843 1428 2119|  50.6  29.9  65.9  48.3  75.5

Federal government. 1876 1319  687  193|  21.5  25.4  22.6  23.3   6.9

Local government... 3118  494  657  340|  24.3  42.1   8.5  22.2  12.1

Self‑employed......  180  174  180  150|   3.6   2.4   3.0   6.1   5.3

Unpaid family......    3    2    2    2|    .0    .0    .0    .1    .1

Subsistence........    8    0    0    4|    .1    .1   0.0   0.0    .1

                                       |

______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980 Table 28

 

     Except for Guam‑born employed females, private companies employed the greatest proportions of females (Table 11.25).  The local government was where most Guam‑born women were employed.

 

Table 11.25.  Class of Female Worker by Birthplace: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                        Numbers        |            Percent

                   ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                        Phil‑       Ot‑|             Phil‑         Ot‑

Class of Worker     Guam ppns  USA  her| Total  Guam  ppns   USA   her

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                       |

  Emplyd fmles,16+  5601 3356 2682 2059| 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Prvt wage and sal.  1877 2257 1285 1551|  50.9  33.5  67.3  47.9  75.3

Federal government.  875  367  544  140|  14.1  15.6  10.9  20.3   6.8

Local government... 2729  657  770  291|  32.5  48.7  19.6  28.7  14.1

Self‑employed......  109   70   81   76|   2.5   1.9   2.1   3.0   3.7

Unpaid family......    9    5    2    1|    .1    .2    .1    .1    .0

Subsistence........    2    0    0    0|    .0    .0   0.0   0.0   0.0

                                       |

______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980 Table 28

 

     Of the 32,692 employed persons 16 years and over, most (51 percent) were private wage and salary workers (See Tables 11.26 and 11.27), followed by local government employees.  The Northern region had the highest proportion of its residents being private employees (61 percent), followed by the Central region (46 percent) and the South (32 percent).  Tamuning was the election district with the greatest percentage of private employees (72 percent); Umatac had the least (18 percent).

 

     The South had 29 percent of its residents employed by the Federal government, with Santa Rita the village with the highest percentage.  Only 15 percent of those residing in the North were working for the Federal government.  Most (37 percent) of Southern residents worked for the local government, the single greatest employer of those in the South.  Fully 57 percent of those living in Inarajan were local government employees.

 

Table 11.26.  Class of Worker by Election District: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                      Federal Local   Self    Unpaid

                              Private Govern‑ Govern‑ Em‑     Family/

Election District     Total   Wage    ment    met     ployed  Subsis

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

     Guam.............   32692   16575    6001    9056    1020      40

 

Northern..............   15747    9640    2320    3246     525      16

  Dededo..............    7530    4297    1336    1697     194       6

  Tamuning............    5975    4310     446     949     262       8

  Yigo................    2242    1033     538     600      69       2

 

Central...............   10851    5012    1900    3546     374      19

  Agana...............     419     230      45     104      35       5

  Agana Heights.......    1127     472     201     424      28       2

  Asan................     688     302     171     185      30       0

  Barrigada...........    2331    1095     436     722      76       2

  Chalan Pago/Ordot...     961     340     155     428      36       2

  Mangilao............    2165    1016     352     753      41       3

  Mongmong‑Toto‑Maite.    1721     947     272     425      76       1

  Piti................     561     272     101     156      29       3

  Sinajana............     878     338     167     349      23       1

 

Southern..............    6094    1923    1781    2264     121       5

  Agat................    1213     344     444     403      21       1

  Inarajan............     589     156      85     336      12       0

  Merizo..............     469     128     110     214      17       0

  Santa Rita..........    1727     616     729     348      34       0

  Talofofo............     583     192      99     278      13       1

  Umatac..............     192      34      66      89       2       1

  Yona................    1321     453     248     596      22       2

 

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census 1980 Summary Tape File 3A, Table 67

 

     The region with the highest proportion of its residents who were self‑employed was the Central region (3 percent), with Agana (8 percent) the village with the largest percentage (Table 11.27).  Agana was also the village with the greatest proportion of unpaid family and subsistence workers, with over 1 percent of its workers.

 

Table 11.27.   Percent Class of Worker by Election District: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                      Federal Local   Self    Unpaid

                              Private Govern‑ Govern‑ Em‑     Family/

Election District     Total   Wage    ment    met     ployed  Subsis

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

     Guam.............   100.0    50.7    18.4    27.7     3.1     0.1

 

Northern..............   100.0    61.2    14.7    20.6     3.3     0.1

  Dededo..............   100.0    57.1    17.7    22.5     2.6     0.1

  Tamuning............   100.0    72.1     7.5    15.9     4.4     0.1

  Yigo................   100.0    46.1    24.0    26.8     3.1     0.1

 

Central...............   100.0    46.2    17.5    32.7     3.4     0.2

  Agana...............   100.0    54.9    10.7    24.8     8.4     1.2

  Agana Heights.......   100.0    41.9    17.8    37.6     2.5     0.2

  Asan................   100.0    43.9    24.9    26.9     4.4     0.0

  Barrigada...........   100.0    47.0    18.7    31.0     3.3     0.1

  Chalan Pago/Ordot...   100.0    35.4    16.1    44.5     3.7     0.2

  Mangilao............   100.0    46.9    16.3    34.8     1.9     0.1

  Mongmong‑Toto‑Maite.   100.0    55.0    15.8    24.7     4.4     0.1

  Piti................   100.0    48.5    18.0    27.8     5.2     0.5

  Sinajana............   100.0    38.5    19.0    39.7     2.6     0.1

 

Southern..............   100.0    31.6    29.2    37.2     2.0     0.1

  Agat................   100.0    28.4    36.6    33.2     1.7     0.1

  Inarajan............   100.0    26.5    14.4    57.0     2.0     0.0

  Merizo..............   100.0    27.3    23.5    45.6     3.6     0.0

  Santa Rita..........   100.0    35.7    42.2    20.2     2.0     0.0

  Talofofo............   100.0    32.9    17.0    47.7     2.2     0.2

  Umatac..............   100.0    17.7    34.4    46.4     1.0     0.5

  Yona................   100.0    34.3    18.8    45.1     1.7     0.2

 

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census 1980 Summary Tape File 3A, Table 67

 

 

ECONOMIC CENSUS DATA

 

     In addition to collecting information on employment in certain industries in the Census of Population, the Census Bureau has taken Economic Censuses of Guam approximately every 5 years beginning in 1958.  The kinds of data gathered include numbers and kinds of businesses (e.g., construction, manufacturing, retail trade, etc.), their location, number of employees, and the legal organization of the industry.

 


     The following conventions are used:

 

     Establishments: An establishment is a single physical location at which business is conducted.  It is not necessarily identical with its parent company or enterprise, which may consist of one establishment or more.  The published census figures represent a summary of reports for individual establishments rather than companies.  The establishment count represents those establishments in business at the end of the reference year.

 

     When two activities or more were carried on at a single location under a single ownership, they generally were grouped together as a single establishment and the entire establishment classified on the basis of its major activity, with all its data included in that classification. However, when distinct and separate economic activities (with different industry classification codes) were conducted under the same ownership at a single location, and when conditions prescribed by the SIC Manual for recognizing the existence of more than one establishment were met, separate establishment reports for each of the different activities were obtained in the census.

 

     Paid Employees for the Reference Week: Paid employees, including salaried officers and executives of corporations, were those full‑ and part‑time employees who were on the payroll during the reference week used in the census.  Included were employees on paid sick leave, paid holidays, and paid vacations.  Proprietors and partners of unincorporated businesses were not included.

 

     Table 11.28 shows the number and percent of establishments by industry that were in business at the end of the reference year.  In each census, retail trade was by far the largest single category of industry, though the proportion declined in each survey.  The next largest industry, in terms of number of establishments, was selected services.  In 1958, selected services businesses were only 19 percent of establishments.

 

Table 11.28.  Establishments by Industry: 1958 to 1982

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Industry             1982     1977     1972     1967     1963     1958

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

     Total......     1377      900      710      553      443      457

       Percent..    100.0    100.0    100.0    100.0    100.0    100.0

Construction....      4.4      8.2      9.9     (NA)     (NA)     (NA)

Manufacturing...      1.6      2.2      4.1      4.2      2.7      2.0

Wholesale trade.      6.5      5.7      8.5      6.9      7.4      4.4

Retail trade....     58.2     59.0     58.6     70.0     70.0     74.6

Selected Services.   29.3     24.9     19.0     19.0     19.9     19.0

______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census OAC82‑6 1982, Table 1     

Notes: Starting in 1977, selected services also included travel

       agencies, dental laboratories, and legal and engineering, architectural, and surveying services.          

 

     The smallest industry on island both in number and proportion of establishments was manufacturing.  In 1958 only 9 places had manufacturing as major industry; this increased to a peak of only 29 establishments in 1972.  The highest proportion that manufacturing ever had of all industry establishments was only 4.2 percent in 1967, which was a 92 percent increase from the previous census.

 

     The wholesale trade industry has shown the greatest change in the number of establishments counted in each survey (Table 11.29).  Between 1958 to 1963, the number of wholesale trade establishments grew by 65 percent, but increased by only 15 percent between 1963 and 1967.  From 1967 to 1972, it grew by 58 percent, then decreased by 15 percent between 1972 and 1977.  In 1982, the industry had increased by 75 percent over 1977 levels.  Selected services remained at about 19 percent of all establishments until 1977, when they experienced a 31 percent increase, then grew even more (80 percent) by 1982.

 

Table 11.29. Change in Number of Establishments by Industry:

             1958 to 1982

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                      1977 to  1972 to  1967 to  1963 to  1958 to

Industry                 1982     1977     1972     1967     1963

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

     Total..........     53.0     26.8     28.4     24.8     ‑3.1

Construction........    ‑17.6      5.7     (NA)     (NA)     (NA)

Manufacturing.......     10.0    ‑31.0     26.1     91.7     33.3

Wholesale trade.....     74.5    ‑15.0     57.9     15.2     65.0

Retail trade........     51.0     27.6      7.5     24.8     ‑9.1

Selected Services...     79.9     65.9     28.6     19.3      1.1

_________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census OAC82‑6 1982, Table 1

Notes: See Table 11.28                              

 

     Although there were only 2,670 paid employees listed for the various industries in 1958, by 1982 11,871 persons were included, the highest ever recorded.  The greatest number of employees were in the retail trade industry, followed by selected services, except for 1972, when construction had the second highest number of employees (Table 11.30).

 

Table 11.30.  Paid Employees for Reference Week: 1958 to 1982

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Industry             1982     1977     1972     1967     1963     1958

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

     Total.......  11,871   10,405   11,128    4,403    2,814    2,670

       Percent...   100.0    100.0    100.0    100.0    100.0    100.0

Construction.....    11.7     24.3     26.7     (NA)     (NA)     (NA)

Manufacturing....     5.4      6.6     10.8     18.5     12.7      6.6

Wholesale trade..     8.3      5.2      8.5      9.7     13.6      9.2

Retail trade....     45.5     39.1     34.8     60.0     63.0     73.2

Selected Services    29.2     24.7     19.2     11.7     10.7     11.0

______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census OAC82‑6 1982, Table 1

Notes: See Table 11.28.                              

 

     In 1972, construction followed retail trade as the industry with the most paid employees, reflecting a boom period in building on the island.  After 1972, however, the percentage of paid employees in the construction industry decreased, until in 1982 they were only 12 percent of total paid employees.

 

     Between 1967 and 1972, the total number of paid employees jumped by 153 percent, most of which was accounted for by the selected services field, which increased by 315 percent (Table 11.31).  None of the industries decreased during this period, but between 1972 and 1977, 3 of the 5 industries did so: construction by 15 percent, manufacturing by 43 percent and wholesale trade by 42 percent.  Numbers of paid employees in retail trade increased only modestly (5 percent), while selected services grew by 20 percent.  During the next 5 year period, only construction and manufacturing decreased (by 45 and 7 percent, respectively), but the other industries showed increases in their numbers of paid employees.

 

Table 11.31. Change in Number of Paid Employees: 1958 to 1982

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                      1977 to  1972 to  1967 to  1963 to  1958 to

Industry                 1982     1977     1972     1967     1963

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

     Total..........     14.1     ‑6.5    152.7     56.5      5.4

Construction........    ‑45.4    ‑14.8     (NA)     (NA)     (NA)

Manufacturing.......     ‑7.0    ‑42.9     47.2    127.9    103.4

Wholesale trade.....     79.7    ‑42.2    120.8     12.0     55.9

Retail trade........     32.7      5.2     46.3     49.1     ‑9.3

Selected Services...     35.0     20.0    314.9     71.4      2.4

 

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census OAC82‑6 1982, Table 1

Notes: See Table 11.28                              

 

     Retail trade businesses had the highest proportions in every category of form of organization in 1982, with selected services in second place (Table 11.32).  Of the 571 individual proprietorships, 67 percent were retail trade establishments, as were 65 percent of partnerships and 51 percent of corporations.  There were no partnerships in the wholesale trade industry, and only 1 each in construction and manufacturing.

 

Table 11.32. Legal Form of Organization by Industry: 1982

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                     Indi‑                    

                                    vidual                    

                                  Proprie‑   Partner‑    Corpor‑

Industry                  Total    torship      ships     ations

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

     Total..........     1,377        571         68        738

       Percent......     100.0      100.0      100.0      100.0

Construction........       4.4        1.4        1.5        7.0

Manufacturing.......       1.6         .5        1.5        2.4

Wholesale trade.....       6.5        2.8        0.0        9.9

Retail trade........      58.2       67.1       64.7       50.8

Selected Services...      29.3       28.2       32.4       29.8

_______________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census OAC82‑6 1982, Table 2

Notes:  See Table 11.28                             

 

     Corporations held the highest percentages of every industry except for retail trade, where they were a close second place.  Individual proprietorships were the next most common form of organization.

 

Table 11.33. Legal Form of Organization by Percent Industry: 1982

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                     Indi‑                     

                                    vidual                    

                                  Proprie‑   Partner‑    Corpor‑

Industry                  Total    torship      ships     ations

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

     Total..........      100.0       41.5        4.9       53.6

Construction........      100.0       13.1        1.6       85.2

Manufacturing.......      100.0       13.6        4.5       81.8

Wholesale trade.....      100.0       18.0        0.0       82.0

Retail trade........      100.0       47.8        5.5       46.8

Selected Services...      100.0       40.0        5.5       54.6

________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census OAC82‑6 1982, Table 2

Notes:  See Table 11.28                             

 

     Of the 11,871 paid employees in 1982, 10,697 worked for corporations, 1,103 for individual proprietorships, and only 71 for partnerships (Table 11.34).  All of those working for partnerships did so in the area of retail trade.

 

Table 11.34.  Legal Form of Organization by Paid Employees: 1982

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                     Indi‑                     

                                    vidual                     

                                  Proprie‑   Partner‑    Corpor‑

Industry                  Total    torship      ships     ations

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

     Total..........    11,871      1,103         71     10,697

       Percent......     100.0      100.0      100.0      100.0

Construction........      11.7        5.1        0.0       12.4

Manufacturing.......       5.4        3.1        0.0        5.6

Wholesale trade.....       8.3        5.7        0.0        8.6

Retail trade........      45.5       58.7      100.0       43.8

Selected Services...      29.2       27.4        0.0       29.6

_______________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census OAC82‑6 1982, Table 2

 

     For the 10,697 paid employees who worked for corporations, 44 percent were in the area of retail trade, 30 percent in selected services, and 12 percent in construction.  Nearly 59 percent of employees of individual proprietorships were in retail trade, and all of partnership employees.

 

     As can be seen in Table 11.35, corporations had the greatest proportions of employees, followed by individual proprietorships.  Fully 96 percent of construction employees were working for corporations, with the remainder in individual proprietorships.  Retail trade had the only paid employees working for partnerships.

 

Table 11.35. Percent Legal Form of Organization by Paid

             Employees: 1982

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                     Indi‑                      

                                    vidual                      

                                  Proprie‑   Partner‑    Corpor‑

Industry                  Total    torship      ships     ations

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

     Total..........      100.0        9.3         .6       90.1

Construction........      100.0        4.0        0.0       96.0

Manufacturing.......      100.0        5.3        0.0       94.7

Wholesale trade.....      100.0        6.4        0.0       93.6

Retail trade........      100.0       12.0        1.3       86.7

Selected Services...      100.0        8.7        0.0       91.3

 

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census OAC82‑6 1982, Table 2

 

     The data from the Economic Censuses show that several industries had a pattern of continued growth, such as retail trade and selected services, and can be expected to grow in the future.  Some industries, such as construction and manufacturing, are cyclical and were in a stage of either slow growth or actively decreasing in 1982, but are expected to show an upswing of activity in the 1987 Economic Census.   With an increase in activity will come an associated increase in the number of paid employees in each industry.

 

 

AGRICULTURE CENSUS

 

     The first agriculture census of Guam was taken in 1920 as part of the decennial census, a practice that continued through 1960.  The 1964 Census of Agriculture was the first quinquennial (5‑year) census to be taken in Guam.  In 1976, Congress authorized the census of agriculture to be taken for 1978 and 1982 to adjust the data reference year to coincide with the 1982 Economic Census.  After 1982, the agriculture reverted to a 5‑year cycle, to cover years ending in "2" and "7".

 

     For the agriculture data presented here, the following conventions are used:

 

     Farm was defined as a place on which any crop, vegetable, or fruit was harvested or gathered during the reference year, or on which there was any livestock or 15 or more poultry at the time of enumeration.

 

     Land in Farms was determined from the answers to questions 1 through 7 in section 2 of the report form.  The amounts of land reported as owned, rented from others, used under permit, occupied without permit, or furnished by the government were added together, and the amount of land reported as rented to others was subtracted from that sum.  The result represented "land in farms".

 

     Land owned included all land held by the operator or his/her spouse under title, purchase contract, homestead law, or as heir or trustee of an undivided estate at the time of enumeration.  However, land used by the military services was excluded even though owned by the operator.

 

     Land rented to others included all land the operator rented or leased to others and all land assigned to others on shares or rent free during the reference year.  The tenant is considered to be the operator of land leased, rented, or worked on shares, even though the landlord may supervise the operations.  The landlord is considered to be the operator of only that portion of the land not assigned to tenants.

 

     Land rented from others included not only land that the operator rented or leased from others, but also land worked on shares for others and land occupied rent free.

 

     Land occupied by permit included all land for which the operator had a Government of Guam permit.  Rights to use land owned or controlled by the Government of Guam were in the form of permits rather than lease or rental arrangements.

 

     Land occupied without permit included all land  occupied by the operator as a "Borrower" or "nonpermittee" without ownership rights to the land, or without any kind of permit, lease, or rental agreement.

 

     Land furnished by the Government included all land that the Government of Guam furnished to the operator in connection with his/her living quarters.

 

     Land use in farms was categorized according to the way it was being used on enumeration day.  The land uses described in the following paragraphs are mutually exclusive in that each acre of land was counted only once, even though it may have had more than one use during the year.

 

     Cropland used for crops included all land planted in crops at the time of enumeration.  Land was to be reported only once, even if two or more crops were planted on it.  Land in crops included (1) land in bearing and nonbearing fruit and nut trees or plants or any other tree crops, (2) land that had partial but not total crop failure, and (3) land in home gardens.

 

     Cropland used for pasture included all cropland on the place that was used only for pasture.  Land planted in crops, even though the crops were not to be harvested, was not to be included here.

 

     Cropland not used for crops or pasture included cropland on the place that was not used for crops or pasture.  It did not include land so hilly, rocky, or wet that the cost of improving it for cultivation would be more than the operator could pay.  Nor did it include land in roads, streams or swamps.  It did include land on which there was total crop failure due to flood, drought, insects, fire, or other causes; cropland lying idle; and cropland planted with soil‑improvement grasses, or other cover crops planted for the purpose of improvement.

 

     Pastureland used for pasture or grazing included land used for grazing livestock at the time of enumeration.  It did not include cropland, even though cattle or other livestock may have been grazed on it.

 

     Pastureland not used for pasture or grazing referred to all land suitable for pasture or grazing that was not being used for grazing livestock at the time of enumeration.  It included land that, in the opinion of the operator, could have supported enough plant growth, either native or planted for grazing, provided the clearing and grazing of the land would not seriously damage it.

 

     All other land included all land not qualifying as either cropland or pastureland as defined previously.  It included land in house lots, barn lots, ponds, ditches, swamps, steep slopes, roads, brushland, wasteland, and forest areas.

 

     Operator characteristics: Data were obtained to classify the operators according to selected characteristics, two of which (age and main occupation) are shown here.

 

     Age of operator: Operators were classified by age into six groups.  The average age was obtained by dividing the sum of the ages of all operators by the number reported.

 

     Main occupation: This question was asked to determine whether the principal occupation of the operator was agricultural or nonagricultural.  If the operator devoted 50 percent or more of his/her work time to agricultural activities, his/her main occupation was considered to be agriculture.

 

 

AGRICULTURE CHARACTERISTICS

 

     Between 1960 and 1982, the total amount of land in farms decreased from 32,109 acres to 26,662 acres (Table 11.36).  By region, the South had the largest amount of land in farms in all years, except for 1975, when the Central region had the highest amount.

 

     Between 1960 and 1964, the amount of land in farms in the South decreased, reducing the average size of farms there from 24.8 acres to 7.5 acres per farm (Table 11.36).  The North also decreased in land for farms, but the Central region doubled in the amount of farmland recorded.  Between 1964 and 1970, farmland decreased by almost one‑half in the Central area, but grew slightly in the South.  This pattern of leaps and drops stopped in 1975: the land in farms increased or decreased in smaller amounts after that time, as did the average size of farms.

Table 11.36  Land and Average Size of Farms: 1960 to 1982

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                Land (in acres)              Average Size (acres)

         ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Year     Total  North  Cntrl  South    Total  North  Cntrl  South

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

1982.....  26662   2052  12087  12523   13.0    3.2   18.1   17.2

1978.....  28619   1688  12381  14548   14.3    3.5   19.4   16.5

1975.....  29766   2305  13947  13514   18.9    5.4   27.2   21.3

1970.....  26158   2444   6749   8907   23.3    8.2   16.6   25.7

1964.....  30100   4383  18476   7236   11.9   10.1   16.4    7.5

1960.....  32109   5557   9087  17462   15.8   13.0   10.1   24.8

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Source:  U.S. Bureau of the Census AC82‑A‑53 1982 Table 10; AC78‑A‑53

         1978 Table 10; Census of Agriculture Vol 1, Part 53 Table 10;

         Census of Agriculture 1964 Vol. 1, Part 51, Table 6.       

 

     Table 11.37 shows the number of farms from 1960 to 1982, and the percentage change in number of farms between censuses.  In 1960, there were 2,028 farms on the island.  The number peaked at 2,529 farms in 1964, dropped by 56 percent by 1970, then increased to 2,044 in 1982.  The sharp drop in the number of farms between 1964 and 1970 was evident in all 3 regions, with the North losing the most farms (723) and the South losing the highest proportion (64.1 percent of 1964 farms).  By 1982, all regions except the South were growing in the number of farms.

 

 

     Between 1978 and 1982, the South lost 155 farms, 18 percent of the 1978 total.  This may have been due to reporting problems.

 

Table 11.37. Number of Farms and Percent Change: 1960 to 1982

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

             Number of Farms               Percent Change

       ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                       1978‑ 1975‑ 1970‑ 1964‑  1960‑

Region  1982 1978 1975 1970 1964 1960  1982  1978  1975  1970   1964

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

  Guam  2044 1999 1576 1121 2529 2028   2.3  26.8  40.6 ‑55.7   24.7

North..  648  476  430  298  435  429  36.1  10.7  44.3 ‑31.5    1.4

Central  667  639  512  406 1129  896   4.4  24.8  26.1 ‑64.0   26.0

South..  729  884  634  346  965  703 ‑17.5  39.4  83.2 ‑64.1   37.3

____________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census AC82‑A‑53 1982 Table 10; AC78‑A‑53

        1978 Table 10; Census of Agriculture Vol. 1 Part 53 1974 Table

        10; Census of Agriculture Vol. 1 Part 51 1964 Table 6.      

 

    Of the 32,109 acres of land in farms in 1960, 28 percent was cropland used for pasture, 23 percent was pastureland used for pasture or grazing, and only 10 percent was cropland used for crops (Table 11.38).  In 1964, the proportion of cropland actually used for crops increased by 17 percent, from 3,243 acres to 3,793 acres. The percentage of pastureland used for pasture or grazing nearly doubled, from  23 percent to 42 percent.  In the succeeding censuses, the amount of land in farms decreased, as did the proportion of cropland used for crops.  By 1975, cropland not used for either crops or pasture jumped to 39 percent of the total land in farms, while land used for crops was only 8 percent of the total.  In 1982, the category "All other land" comprised the greatest amount of land in farms, while cropland used for crops was only 7 percent.

 

Table 11.38.  Land in Farms by Land Use: 1960 to 1982

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                          Cropland              Pastureland

                   ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

      Land in                     Not used  Used for  Not used   All

       Farms           Used for    crops/   pasture/  pasture/  other

Year  (acres) Total Crops Pasture pasture   grazing   grazing   land

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

1982..  26662 100.0    6.6    2.5       8.7      13.4      21.0   47.8

1978..  28619 100.0    5.0    2.6      41.9      39.0       2.2    9.3

1975..  29766 100.0    7.8    4.3      38.7      42.0        .4    6.8

1970..  26158 100.0    8.5   25.3       7.2      36.2       5.3   17.5

1964..  30100 100.0   12.6   22.4       9.7      41.8       2.8   10.6

1960..  32109 100.0   10.1   27.7      15.1      23.2       3.2   20.6

______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census AC82‑A‑53 1982 Table 1; Census of

        Agriculture 1975 Vol. 1, Part 53 Table 1; Census of     

        Agriculture 1964 Vol. 1, Part 51 Table 8.               

 

     In 1960, 62 percent of farm operators were full owners of their farms, 18 percent were nonpermittees, 16 percent held permits to work the farmland, and 4 percent were tenants (Table 11.39).  The proportion of full owners rose to a  peak of 81 percent in 1970, fell to its lowest point (77 percent) in 1975, then rose and fell again in 1978 and 1982.  All categories of tenure exhibited this roller‑coaster trend except that of tenants: after peaking at 8 percent in 1964 and dropping by 49 percent to 4.2 percent in 1970, the proportion of tenant farmers steadily rose to 6.8 percent in 1982.

 

Table 11.39.  Farms by Tenure: 1960 to 1982

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

               Number of Farms                    Percent

Tenure     1982 1978 1975 1970 1964 1960 1982 1978 1975 1970 1964 1960

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

  All opr..2044 1999 1576 1121 2529 2028  100  100  100  100  100  100

Full ownr..1595 1609 1208  913 1985 1253 78.0 80.5 76.6 81.4 78.5 61.8

Part ownr..  27   31   45    4   60   14  1.3  1.6  2.9   .4  2.4   .7

Tenants.... 138  116   81   47  211   72  6.8  5.8  5.1  4.2  8.3  3.6

Permittees. 237   93  216  114  224  316 11.6  4.7 13.7 10.2  8.9 15.6

Nonprmtee..  23  116   16   37   31  355  1.1  5.8  1.0  3.3  1.2 17.5

Others.....  24   34   10    6   18   18  1.2  1.7   .6   .5   .7   .9

______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census AC82‑A‑53 1982 Table 3; AC78‑A‑53

        1978 Table 3; Census of Agriculture Vol. 1, Part 53 1974 Table

        3; Census of Agriculture Vol. 1, Part 51 1964 Table 5.

 

     As can be seen in Table 11.40, most farm operators were 35 years old and over in all 4 census years from 1970 to 1982.  The average age was either 50 years (1970 to 1978) or 51 years (1982).  Most farmers reported that their main occupation was non‑agricultural: this ranged from 66 percent in 1970 to 91 percent of all farmers in 1982.

 

Table 11.40. Operators by Age and Main Occupation: 1970 to 1982

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                                Percent

                                            ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Age/Occupation      1982  1978  1975  1970  1982  1978  1975  1970

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

  All operators...  2044  1999  1572   876 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Less than 25......    31    20    28    10   1.5   1.0   1.8    .9

25 to 34..........   244   221   172    83  11.9  11.1  10.9   7.4

35 to 44..........   403   423   344   225  19.7  21.2  21.8  20.1

45 to 54..........   606   725   511   258  29.6  36.3  32.4  23.0

55 to 64..........   508   414   333   188  24.8  20.7  21.1  16.8

65 and over.......   252   196   184   112  12.3   9.8  11.7  10.0

Not Reported......     0     0     4   245   0.0   0.0    .3  21.9

Mean age..........    51    50    50    50   ...   ...   ...   ...

 

Agricultural......   192   326   266   168   9.4  16.3  16.9  15.0

Nonagricultural...  1852  1671  1304   745  90.6  83.6  82.7  66.4

Not Reported......     0     2     6   208   0.0    .1    .4  18.6

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Source:  U.S. Bureau of the Census AC82‑A‑53 1982 Table 3; AC78‑A‑53

         1975 Table 20.                                            

 

     In 1986, the College of Agriculture and Life Sciences of the University of Guam conducted a survey of commercial farmers on Guam.  While these data are not comparable to census data, they do reflect changes in the approach to farming on Guam.

 

Table 11.41  Farmers, Farmland, and

             Production: 1986

  (Acres are rounded to nearest ten.)

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Category                      Number  Percent

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

  Farmers..................      137   100.0

In cooperatives............       85    62.0

Free agents................       52    38.0

 

  Farmland (in acres)......     9180   100.0

Very suitable for crops....     4600    50.1

Moderately suitable........     2200    24.0

Suitable for forest/pasture      380     4.1

 

Acres in crop production...      560     6.1

Acres not in production....     8620    93.9

____________________________________________

Source:  College of Agriculture and Life

         Sciences, University of Guam.

 

     In 1986, there were 137 commercial farmers on Guam (Table 11.41).  Of these commercial farmers, 85 (62 percent) were members of farm cooperatives, while 52 were free agents.  There were 5 farming cooperatives in operation at that time; one had failed during the previous year.  The survey also looked at farmland: there were 9,180 acres of land identified and designated as potential areas for agriculture; 4,600 acres (50 percent) were deemed very suitable for crop production.  Another 2,200 acres (24 percent) were moderately suitable for modern farming if the farmers were given some knowledge of farm management techniques, and 380 acres (4 percent) were suitable for forest or pasture.

 

     Crop production took up 560 acres.  This left 8,620 acres of potential farmland, of differing quality, not listed as being used for crops.

 

 

SUMMARY

 

     The information presented in this chapter has shown trends in the areas of industry, occupation, class of worker, and agriculture.  Private sector employment is increasing; public sector (government) employment is slowly decreasing.  In the private sector, retail and wholesale trade categories experienced the greatest growth.  Construction, though decreasing from 1970 to 1980, is expected to show some growth by 1990.  Agriculture is still a small industry, and is not likely to grow by 1990.  Selected services, however, is expected to continue to increase as an industry category.

 

     Female employment has risen, though the occupations that females hold have not significantly changed.  The proportion of high school graduates who are employed is expected to remain at about the same levels; the percentage of certain ethnic groups in selected industries is not expected to change.

 


 

  CHAPTER 12

      INCOME

 

     Income data help various levels of local government assess community socioeconomic statuses and needs and help determine potential programs to alleviate poverty; the business community to gauge changes in consumer buying practices and inflationary trends that reflect consumers' spending ability and their affluence; and the U.S. Federal government to assess comparisons with Stateside income data.

 

     The data on income in 1979 were derived from answers to questions 30 and 31.  Information on money income received in the calendar year 1979 was requested from persons 15 years old and over.  "Total" income is the algebraic sum of the amounts reported separately for wage and salary income; nonfarm net self‑employment income; farm net self‑employment income; interest, dividend, net royalty or rental income; Social Security or Retirement income; public assistance or welfare income; and, all other income (including remittances).  "Earnings" is defined as the algebraic sum of wage or salary income and net income from farm and nonfarm self‑employment.  The earnings figures represent the amount of income received regularly before deductions for personal income taxes, Social Security, bond purchases, union dues, medicare deductions, etc.

 

     Receipts from the following sources were not included as income: money received from the sale of property (unless the recipient was engaged in the business of selling such property); the value of income "in kind" from food stamps, public housing subsidies, medical care, employer contributions for pensions, etc.; withdrawal of bank deposits; money borrowed; tax refunds; exchange of money between relatives in the same household; gifts and lump‑sum inheritances, insurance payments, and other types of lump‑sum receipts.

 

TYPES OF INCOME

 

     The seven types of income reported in the census were defined as follows:

 

    Wage or Salary Income was total money earnings for work performed as an employee during the calendar year 1979.  It included wages, salary, U.S. Armed Forces pay, commissions, tips, piece‑rate payments, and cash bonuses earned, before deductions were made for taxes, bonds, pensions, union dues, etc.

 

    Nonfarm Self‑Employment Income was net money income (gross receipts minus expenses) from one's own business, professional enterprise, or partnership.  Gross receipts included the value of all goods sold and services rendered.  Expenses included costs of goods purchased, rent, light, power, depreciation charges, wages and salaries paid, business taxes (not personal income taxes), etc.


 

    Farm Self‑Employment Income was net money income (gross receipts minus operating expenses) from a farm or fishing operation by a person on his or her own account, as an owner, renter, or sharecropper.  Gross receipts included the value of all products sold, government farm programs, money received from the rental of farm equipment to others, and incidental receipts from the sale of wood, sand,

gravel, etc.  Operating expenses included cost of feed, fertilizer, seed, and other farming supplies, cash wages paid to farm‑hands, depreciation charges, cash rent, interest on farm mortgages, farm building repairs, farm taxes (not personal income taxes), etc.  The value of fuel, food, or other farm products used for family living was not included as part of net income.

 

    Interest, Dividend, or Net Rental Income included interest on savings or bonds, dividends from stockholdings or membership in associations, net royalties, and net income from rental of property to others and receipts from boarders or lodgers.

 

    Social Security Income included Social Security pensions and survivors benefits and permanent disability insurance payments made by the Social Security Administration, prior to deductions for medical insurance, and railroad retirement insurance checks from the U.S. Government.  "Medicare" reimbursements are not included.

 

    Public Assistance Income included (1) supplementary security income payments made by Federal or territorial welfare agencies to low income persons who were aged (65 years or older), blind, or disabled; (2) aid to families with dependent children; (3) general assistance.  Separate payments received for hospital or other medical care (vendor payments) were included in this item.

 

    All Other Income included unemployment compensation, veteran's payments, public or private pensions, alimony or child support, worker's compensation, periodic payments from estates and trust funds, periodic receipts from annuities or insurance, contributions received periodically from persons not living in the household, military family allotments, net gambling winnings, and other kinds of periodic income other than earnings.

 

    Median income is the amount which divides the distribution into two equal groups, one having incomes above the median, and the other having incomes below the median.  The median for persons in all areas was based on persons with income.  The median income value for persons were computed on the basis of more detailed income intervals than shown in this report.  Median income figures were calculated using linear interpolation.

 

    Mean income is the amount obtained by dividing the total income of a particular statistical universe by the number of units in that universe.  Thus, mean income is obtained by dividing the total income for persons by the total number of persons with income.

 

     Care should be exercised in using and interpreting mean income values for small subgroups for the population.  Since the mean is strongly influenced by extreme values in the distribution, it is especially susceptible to effects of sampling variability, misreporting, and processing errors.  The median, which is not affected by extreme values, is, therefore, a better measure than the mean when the population base is small.  The mean, nevertheless, is shown here for most small subgroups because, when weighted according to the number of cases, the means can be added to obtain summary measures for areas and groups other than those shown here.

 

    Limitations of the data.  Since questionnaire entries for income were frequently based on memory and not on records, many persons tended to forget minor or irregular sources of income, and therefore, underreported their income.  Underreporting tended to be more pronounced for income sources that were not derived from earnings, such as Social Security, public assistance, or net income from interest, dividends, and rentals.  In addition, there were errors of reporting due to misunderstanding of the income questions.  One such error was the reporting of gross rather than net dollar amounts for the two questions on net self‑employment income, which resulted in an overstatement of these items.  Another common error was the reporting of identical dollar amounts in two of the 7 types of income items where a respondent with only one source of income assumed that the second amount should be entered to represent total income.  Such instances of over‑reporting would have an impact on the level of mean nonfarm or farm self‑employment income and mean total income published for the various geographical subdivisions on Guam.

 

     Extensive review procedures were instituted in the coding operation to reduce some of these reporting errors and to improve the accuracy of the income data.  Moreover, many reporting errors were rectified through the coding and the computer editing procedures, with the result that consistency of reported income items with work experience, occupation, and class of worker information was improved.  For example, if a person reported he or she was self‑employed on his/her own farm, not incorporated, but had reported wage and salary earnings only, the latter amount was shifted to net farm self‑employment income.  Also, if a person reported total income only, the amount was generally assigned to one of the types of income items according to responses to the work experience and class of worker questions.  Another type of problem involved the non‑reporting of income data.  Where income information was not reported, computer allocation procedures were devised to impute appropriate values (either no income or positive or negative dollar amounts) for the missing entries.

 

Comparability

 

    Data from earlier censuses.  The income data collected in the 1960 and 1970 censuses were basically similar to the 1980 census data, but there were variations in the detail of the questions.  In 1970, each person was required to report (a) wage or salary income, (b) net non‑farm self‑employment, (c) net farm self‑employment, (d) social security or railroad retirement, (e) public assistance or welfare payments, and (f) income from all other sources in 1969.  Between the 1970 and 1980 censuses, there were also some changes in the processing of the data.  In the 1970 census, all missing values were imputed either as "None" or as a dollar amount.  If a person reported a dollar amount in (a) wage or salary income, (b) net non‑farm self‑employment income, or (c) net farm self‑employment income, the person was considered as unallocated only if no further dollar amounts were imputed for any additional missing entries.  In the 1980 census, all persons with missing values in one or more of the seven types of income items and total income were designated as allocated.  If total income was reported and one or more of the types of income filled was not answered, then the entry in total income was generally assigned to one of the income types according to socioeconomic characteristics of the income recipient.  This person was designated as unallocated.  Moreover, there was a difference in the methods of computer

derivation of aggregate income from individual amounts that were coded in tens, hundreds, and thousands of dollars in the coding operation.  In the 1970 census processing, $50 and $5,000, respectively, were added to each amount coded in the hundreds of dollars (under $100,000) and tens of thousands ($100,000 or more).  Entries of $990,000 or more were treated as $995,000 and losses of $9,900 or more were treated as minus $9,950.  In the 1980 census, income amounts less than $100,000 were coded in the tens of dollars, the amounts of $100,000 or more were coded in thousands of dollars; $5 was added to each amount coded in tens of dollars and $500 was added to each amount coded in thousands of dollars.  Entries of $999,000 or more were treated as $999,500 and losses of $9,990 or more were treated as $9,995 in all of the computer derivations of income aggregates.  The coding schemes used in both the 1970 and 1980 census were developed to accommodate space limitations on the questionnaires.

 

     In both the 1970 and 1980 censuses, all nonrespondents on income (whether heads of families or other persons) were assigned the reported income of persons with similar characteristics.

 

     In 1960, data on income were obtained from all persons 14 years old and over.  Each person was requested to report (a) wage and salary income, (b) net self‑employment income, and (c) income other than earnings received in 1959.  An assumption was made in the editing process that no other type of income was received by a person who reported the receipt of either wage or salary income or self‑employment but had failed to report the receipt of other money income.

 

INCOME CHARACTERISTICS

 

     The median household income for Guam in 1979 was $15,752 (Table 12.1).  The median family income was $16,203 and median income of unrelated individuals was $6,713.  The median income, again, is the measure of central tendency, dividing the number of income observations in half, and is useful for comparing the 3 regions.  Of the three regions, the Northern and Central household income medians were slightly higher than the overall median; these regions included 11 villages above the median.  The median household income for the Southern region was $15,357.  Dededo had the highest median income of the Northern villages at $16,873.  In the Central region, Piti had the highest median income  at $19,194 and Agana the lowest at $12,794.  The villages of Talofofo and Yona in the Southern region had the highest household medians of $17,329 and $18,858 respectively.  Santa Rita was the lowest at $13,614.

 

Table 12.1.  Median Household, Family, and "Unrelateds" Income by

             Election District: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                 Median         Median  Median Income

                              Household         Family   of Unrelated

Election District                Income         Income    Individuals

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

     Guam.................       $15,752        $16,203        $6,713

 

Northern..................       $16,209        $16,557        $7,012

  Dededo..................       $16,873        $17,131        $7,212

  Tamuning................       $15,091        $15,615        $8,624

  Yigo....................       $14,525        $14,644        $6,365

 

Central...................       $16,786        $17,579        $6,560

  Agana...................       $12,794        $15,000        $7,531

  Agana Heights...........       $16,728        $17,868        $6,735

  Asan....................       $18,321        $18,976        $7,600

  Barrigada...............       $15,916        $16,391        $6,136

  Chalan Pago/Ordot.......       $16,517        $16,974        $6,125

  Mangilao................       $16,062        $16,734        $7,567

  Mongmong‑Toto‑Maite.....       $14,874        $15,826        $7,603

  Piti....................       $19,194        $20,475        $6,516

  Sinajana................       $16,418        $17,938        $5,500

 

Southern..................       $15,357        $15,738        $6,422

  Agat....................       $15,495        $15,907        $6,333

  Inarajan................       $15,455        $15,951        $2,250

  Merizo..................       $15,659        $16,786        $7,000

  Santa Rita..............       $13,614        $13,705        $6,394

  Talofofo................       $17,329        $17,608        $8,000

  Umatac..................       $15,686        $16,055        $3,000

  Yona....................       $18,858        $19,720        $7,792

_____________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A, Tables 69, 74

        and 82

 

    Median and mean comparisons show that the median household income for Guam in 1979 ($15,752) was somewhat lower than the mean household income of $21,595 (Table 12.2).  The Central region which had a higher mean household income than the Northern and Southern regions, was also higher than the overall mean household income for Guam.  Villages having the highest mean household income were Tamuning in the North,  with a high of $24,662,  Agana in Central ($29,688) and Yona in the Southern region ($23,302).  A majority of the election districts were


higher than the overall mean household income of $21,595 (Table 12.2).  Umatac had the lowest mean household income at $17,877.

 

     Mean family income ($17,089) and mean income of unrelated individuals ($8,461) did not vary as much over the regions and remained close to the overall mean for Guam (Table 12.2).  The village of Yona had a much higher mean family income at $20,071 compared to the Southern region average of $17,171.  For income of unrelated individuals, the highest mean was for the village of Barrigada at $10,638.  The mean income is the value obtained by adding total income reported and dividing by the number of observations.  As always, in comparing the income distributions, the mean value is more affected by the addition of extreme cases than the median, so the median is the standard measure.

 

Table 12.2.  Mean Household, Family, and "Unrelateds" income by

             Election District: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                    Mean           Mean    Mean Income

                               Household         Family   of Unrelated

Election District                 Income         Income    Individuals

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

     Guam..................      $21,595        $17,089         $8,461

 

Northern..................       $21,533        $16,733         $9,050

  Dededo..................       $20,664        $18,445         $8,079

  Tamuning................       $24,662        $14,697        $10,310

  Yigo....................       $19,120        $16,544         $7,814

 

Central...................       $23,214        $17,547         $8,194

  Agana...................       $29,688        $15,122         $9,215

  Agana Heights...........       $24,056        $17,170         $9,163

  Asan....................       $25,593        $19,239        $10,638

  Barrigada...............       $22,267        $19,260         $6,489

  Chalan Pago/Ordot.......       $20,917        $17,977         $7,391

  Mangilao................       $22,302        $16,456         $8,618

  Mongmong‑Toto‑Maite.....       $23,447        $16,198         $9,041

  Piti....................       $26,934        $19,342         $8,297

  Sinajana................       $22,688        $17,089         $7,625

 

Southern..................       $19,424        $17,171         $7,574

  Agat....................       $19,121        $16,275         $6,729

  Inarajan................       $18,585        $16,375         $6,418

  Merizo..................       $19,839        $16,515         $8,319

  Santa Rita..............       $17,942        $16,594         $7,417

  Talofofo................       $20,477        $17,055         $8,484

  Umatac..................       $17,877        $16,646         $6,593

  Yona....................       $23,302        $20,071         $9,421

______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A, Tables 9, 10,

        70, 77, 82, and 83

 

TYPES OF INCOME

 

     Table 12.3 shows comparable data on type of family income by region for the year before the census for the 1970 and 1980 decennial censuses.  The dollar amounts are in 1979 dollars, that is, the 1969 amounts have been adjusted for inflation.

 

     Between 1969 and 1979 the amount of money income earned from wages and salaries on Guam increased by a very small amount, from $17,900 to $18,200.  Central region experienced the biggest increase in real income, from $17,500 in 1969 (less than the mean for Guam as a whole) to $18,900 in 1979).  Southern region also experienced a real gain in income, from $16,800 in 1969 to $17,400 in 1979, an amount that was still about $800 less than the mean for all of Guam.  Families in the Northern region, on the other hand, had a decrease of about $1000, from $19,000 to $18,000 during the decade.

 

     Non‑farm income was about the same in 1969 as in 1979, although both Northern and Southern regions saw substantial decreases in mean non‑farm income, while Central region had an even larger increase in this type of income, averaging almost $5,000 for those families receiving this type of income.  On the other hand, for all of Guam, farm income decreased precipitously.  While the average farm family in 1969 received about $5,200 for farm products, by 1979 this amount had decreased to only 2,000, more than a 50 percent decrease in 1979 dollars.  Data by region were not available since there were too few farmers in the election districts (there were 93 families with farm income in 1969).

 

     The amount of social security income increased for Guam, and for each of the regions between 1969 and 1979, while public assistance income decreased for Guam, and Central region.  Families in Central region in 1979 receiving public assistance received about $1000 less than those receiving assistance in 1969, although the number and composition of the families changed during the decade.  Finally, the amount of "other" income increased for Guam and for the regions between 1969 and 1979.

 

Table 12.3. Mean Income by Type of Income in 1969: 1970

            (Values in 1979 dollars)

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Election                  Wage &    Non‑           Social  Public     All

District                  Salary    farm    Farm Security Assist.   Other

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

1969

    Guam.................$17,927 $12,225  $5,154   $3,087  $2,639  $4,075

Northern.................$18,960 $13,582    (NA)   $3,141  $2,055  $3,918

Central..................$17,509 $10,014    (NA)   $3,251  $3,207  $4,432

Southern.................$16,824  $8,953    (NA)   $2,862  $2,623  $3,685

 

1979

    Guam.................$18,195 $12,556  $2,049   $3,342  $2,344  $5,758

Northern.................$18,023 $12,526  $2,367   $3,210  $2,247  $6,223

Central..................$18,945 $14,827  $2,444   $3,488  $2,221  $5,692

Southern.................$17,442  $7,743  $1,353   $3,321  $2,612  $5,116

_________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census, PC(1)‑B54, 1970, Table 16, and

        Summary Tape File 3, Tables 71 and 72

 

 

 

 

     The wage and salary category had the highest mean incomes reported, showing Guam's strong private sector and government sector during 1979 (Table 12.4).   The mean income from wages and salary was $18,195.  The highest mean occurred in the Central region at $18,945, with Piti being the village having the highest mean at $22,318.  While the Southern region mean for wage and salary was $17,442, the village of Yona was the highest at $20,802.

 

     Non‑farm income was second to wages and salary with a mean income of $12,556.  Nonfarm self‑employment income includes net income less expenses derived from a business enterprise or business activity.  The majority of business activities fall in the retail, professional and related services and public administration area. Central region had the highest mean non‑farm income at $14,827 compared to the overall average of $12,556.  The village of Mongmong‑Toto‑Maite had the highest non‑farm income at $21,845.  (The key business categories in this particular region were in the professional and related services, public administration and, particularly, retail trade, all of which produce relatively high incomes).  Southern villages had a mean of $7,743. The majority of income earnings fell in the public administration category, professional and related services and retail trade.  A total of 14 of the 19

villages fell below the overall non‑farm average.

 

Table 12.4.  Mean Income by Type of Income in 1979: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Election        Wage &    Non‑          Inter‑  Social   Publ.     All

District        Salary    farm    Farm     est    Sec.   Asst.   Other

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

   Guam.....  $18,195 $12,556  $2,049  $2,235  $3,342  $2,344  $5,758

 

Northern......$18,023 $12,526  $2,367  $1,955  $3,210  $2,247  $6,223

  Dededo......$18,605  $9,484  $1,841  $1,590  $3,259  $2,442  $6,292

  Tamuning....$17,946 $15,523  $2,798  $2,884  $2,920  $1,975  $6,276

  Yigo........$16,945 $10,136  $2,442  $1,398  $3,732  $2,017  $5,897

 

Central.......$18,945 $14,827  $2,444  $2,893  $3,488  $2,221  $5,692

  Agana.......$19,742 $11,726    $498  $7,190  $3,163  $1,137  $6,104

  Agana Hts...$18,450  $7,484 $15,589  $3,103  $3,774  $2,033  $6,364

  Asan........$21,207  $9,185  $2,192  $2,341  $2,940  $2,534  $6,213

  Barrigada...$19,472 $16,811    $711  $2,428  $3,504  $2,202  $4,942

  Chalan Pago/

  Ordot.......$18,797 $16,902    $517  $2,805  $3,975  $2,672  $5,984

  Mangilao....$18,161 $14,875  $1,465  $2,382  $3,506  $2,736  $5,085

  Mong‑Toto‑

  Maite.......$17,726 $21,845    $985  $3,426  $3,381  $1,830  $6,072

  Piti........$22,318 $16,524  $2,905  $1,696  $3,135  $1,650  $6,978

  Sinajana....$18,383 $10,801    $822  $3,936  $3,303  $1,831  $5,006

 

Southern......$17,442  $7,743  $1,353  $1,886  $3,321  $2,612  $5,116

  Agat........$17,424  $8,976    $923  $2,581  $3,533  $2,412  $5,523

  Inarajan....$16,305 $10,330    $859    $897  $3,197  $2,534  $5,029

  Merizo......$16,186  $7,155  $1,400  $1,062  $3,063  $2,555  $5,688

  Santa Rita..$16,493  $6,203    $752  $1,228  $3,153  $2,513  $4,739

  Talofofo....$17,885 $10,477  $3,694  $2,503  $3,663  $2,882  $6,169

  Umatac......$15,544  $5,165    $318  $2,692  $3,880  $2,231  $6,360

  Yona........$20,802  $8,069  $1,505  $4,887  $3,126  $2,834  $4,427

_____________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A, Tables 71

        and 72

 

     The mean income for farming activities in 1979 was $2,049.  Farming practices have shown some erratic patterns in the past which to some extent continue today (See the discussion of Agricultural censuses in Chapter 11).  Table 12.4 shows Agana Heights having the highest mean income at $15,589, which is 661 percent higher than the overall mean farm income.  Several conclusions can be drawn as to how this income reporting can occur.  Since place of residence and actual farm sites are not distinguished by census reports, although the South would be expected to have the majority of farms, since persons are reported where they live rather than where they farm, this assumption may not hold true in the case of farm self‑employment income.  Agana had the lowest mean farm income at $498.  The village of Talofofo was second with a mean income of $3,694 and Tamuning third at $2,798.  It is true, however, that the Southern district seems to be experiencing a resurgence in farming activities which may eventually be reflected in the net money income earnings and farm size.  Some changes in farming practices have been seen in farm management, particularly in partnership arrangements which allow farmers and part‑time farmers an opportunity to expand and share common resources and interest.

 

    Mean interest income in 1979 was $2,235, with Agana having the highest village mean ($7,190) and Yona being second ($4,887).  No comparative data for 1969 were available; presumably interest income was included in the "other" category, which would indicate that the increase in the combination of interest and "other" income is even more than that shown in Table 12.4.  As financial services and private investments improve, interest earnings may continue to show some dramatic shifts in the regions.  With the advent of foreign capital, manifested in real estate acquisition, local land owners who sell property at increased values, to an extent, place themselves in a higher level of disposable income.  Thus, investment interests in financial services increase and investment brokers accommodate the trends in capital earned through investment, both local and foreign. Net income from rental of property also continues to increase due to the competitiveness of Guam's real estate market.  However, real estate is finite and restricted to available land and infrastructure resources; interest earnings become subjected to changes in the economy and may or may not be a major factor in the types of income reported.

 

     The mean social security income reported in 1979 was $3,342.  As noted earlier, this figure was about 10 percent more than the 1969 figure; because Guam has a relatively young population, the full impact of social security income has yet to be felt.  With an aging population, however, the elderly  will become more dependent on pension and survivor benefit earnings.  Chamorros currently represent the bulk of potential recipients of Guam's welfare assistance programs.  Although the traditional way of accommodating Guam's elderly within the extended family structure remains, planning for future elderly accommodations and services must exist concurrently.  Although only 3 percent of the population was 65 years or older in 1980, the proportion is likely to increase as the population ages.  Also, the Micronesians whose political status allows them to migrate, will be eligible for Guam's programs. These factors may become concerns as the various sub‑populations move into the labor force, work, and then retire.

 

     While social security earnings had a higher mean of $3,342 for Guam, recipients in 1979 for public assistance earned a mean of $2,344.  Public Assistance expenditures totalled $4,919,283 in 1979.  Steady support of Guam's senior citizens will continue in the years ahead particularly in services targeted to the elderly with the greatest economic needs.  A variety of services will be offered to cater specifically to this group.  Health care and welfare recipients will continue to see public assistance programs and services increase.

 

     All other income had a mean of $5,758 in 1980, with the Northern region having a slightly higher mean of $6,223.  The village with the highest "all other income" mean was Piti, with $6,978; the lowest mean was in Yona, at $4,427.  All other income is a "catch‑all" category, encompassing income from veteran's payments, public or private pensions, alimony, child support, periodic receipts from annuities or trust funds, and other periodic income other than earnings; the recipients of such earnings are not easily stratified by demographic factors such as age and sex.  That is, there is no one group that would be more likely to receive such income than another group, as would be the case of social security income or farm income.

 

INCOME FOR WORKERS PER FAMILY

 

     Although the mean family income in 1979 was almost $18,000, there were large differences, depending on the number of workers per family (Table 12.5).  There was a direct correlation between the number of workers per family and mean family income.  The mean income for families with no workers was $5,732, and for one worker was $13,940.   However, the mean was $21,935 for two worker families, $29,699 for three worker families, and $37,235 for families with 4 or more workers.

 

     Except for families with no workers, families in the Central region earned more money than those in the North or the South.  In two worker families the Central region families earned more than $2000 more, more than $3000 more in three worker families, and more than $5000 more in families with 4 or more workers.

 

Table 12.5.  Mean Income of Workers in Families in 1979: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                              No         1         2        3        4

Election District        Workers    Worker   Workers  Workers  Workers

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

     Guam.............    $5,732   $13,940   $21,935  $29,699  $37,235

Northern..............    $6,490   $13,911   $21,158  $28,873  $35,266

Central...............    $5,546   $14,527   $23,530  $31,912  $40,749

Southern..............    $4,812   $13,240   $21,369  $28,244  $35,645

 

NUMBER OF FAMILIES

 

     Guam.............      1243      7871      9821     1834     1011

Northern..............       470      3593      4722      878      446

Central...............       484      2405      3034      577      348

Southern..............       289      1873      2065      379      217

______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A, Tables 79

        and 80

 

     There were also differences in family income by workers in families for the election districts.  Agana had the highest income for 2 worker families, Asan for 3 worker families, and Barrigada for 4 worker families (Table 12.6).

 

Table 12.6.  Mean Income of Workers in Families in 1979: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                           No         1         2        3    4 or more

Election District        Workers    Worker   Workers  Workers  Workers

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

     Guam..............   $5,732   $13,940   $21,935  $29,699  $37,235

 

Northern...............   $6,490   $13,911   $21,158  $28,873  $35,266

  Dededo...............   $7,439   $14,035   $20,972  $28,369  $34,759

  Tamuning.............   $5,470   $14,422   $22,686  $29,981  $36,081

  Yigo.................   $5,748   $12,923   $19,836  $28,596  $36,291

 

Central................   $5,546   $14,527   $23,530  $31,912  $40,749

  Agana................   $5,990   $14,478   $31,130  $28,930  $43,734

  Agana Heights........   $8,286   $15,824   $22,607  $31,899  $36,029

  Asan.................   $6,772   $17,231   $23,697  $36,584  $38,771

  Barrigada............   $4,534   $13,929   $22,977  $31,649  $49,551

  Chalan Pago/Ordot....   $5,963   $14,337   $23,430  $32,112  $37,063

  Mangilao.............   $5,920   $13,801   $22,499  $29,974  $36,115

  Mongmong‑Toto‑Maite..   $3,796   $14,125   $23,220  $36,072  $42,601

  Piti.................   $4,407   $17,798   $29,741  $27,509  $35,171

  Sinajana.............   $5,949   $13,255   $23,551  $29,179  $35,825

 

Southern...............   $4,812   $13,240   $21,369  $28,244  $35,645

  Agat.................   $4,444   $13,893   $22,294  $25,333  $33,773

  Inarajan.............   $4,305   $12,007   $20,044  $25,878  $31,453

  Merizo...............   $6,476   $13,381   $22,254  $26,672  $36,090

  Santa Rita...........   $4,535   $12,688   $19,194  $30,156  $38,101

  Talofofo.............   $4,654   $14,132   $22,102  $29,509  $29,833

  Umatac...............   $6,652   $13,279   $19,566  $21,965  $27,894

  Yona.................   $4,893   $14,272   $26,349  $31,801  $41,269

______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A, Tables 79

        and 80

 

PER CAPITA INCOME

 

     Per capita income is the measure of the average income per person in an area or population and is derived by determining the income of all persons from all sources and dividing by the total number of persons in the area or population.  The per capita income on Guam in 1979 as determined by the 1980 census was $4793 (Table 12.7).   The per capita income in the United States for 1979 was $7,298, so Guam's per capita income was only 66 percent of that for the U.S.  In 1969, the per capita income for Guam was $2008 ($3,936 in 1979 dollars).  Per capita income in the United States for 1969 was $3,119 ($ 6,176 in 1979 dollars).  The change in per capita income between 1969 and 1979 was 22 percent.

 

 

Table 12.7. Per Capita Income in 1969 and 1979: 1970 and 1980

            (Values in 1979 dollars)

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                  1979                  1969

Election                 ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

District                     Persons     Income    Persons      Income

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

    Guam.................   105,979     $4,793     84,996      $3,976

 

Northern.................    47,583     $4,871     32,540      $4,490

  Dededo.................    23,644     $4,297     10,780      $4,166

  Tamuning...............    13,580     $5,898     10,218      $4,960

  Yigo...................    10,359     $4,834     11,542      $4,378

 

Central..................    34,526     $5,095     31,266      $3,830

  Agana..................       896     $6,565      2,119      $5,007

  Agana Heights..........     3,284     $5,312      3,156      $4,493

  Asan...................     2,034     $5,791      2,629      $4,112

  Barrigada..............     7,756     $5,046      6,356      $3,162

  Chalan Pago/Ordot......     3,120     $4,044      2,931      $2,772

  Mangilao...............     6,840     $4,808      3,228      $3,716

  Mongmong‑Toto‑Maite....     5,245     $4,788      6,057      $4,768

  Piti...................     2,866     $7,029      1,284      $2,822

  Sinajana...............     2,485     $4,382      3,506      $3,257

 

Southern.................    23,870     $4,200     21,190      $3,404

  Agat...................     3,999     $3,737      4,308      $3,180

  Inarajan...............     2,059     $3,295      1,897      $2,154

  Merizo.................     1,663     $3,796      1,529      $2,433

  Santa Rita.............     9,183     $4,672      8,109      $4,453

  Talofofo...............     2,006     $3,747      1,935      $2,820

  Umatac.................       732     $3,028        813      $2,303

  Yona...................     4,228     $4,631      2,599      $2,764

______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census, STF3A, 1980, Table 85, and

        PC(1)‑B54, 1970, Table 16

 

     Northern region had the highest per capita income in 1969 at $4,500, about $500 more than for Guam as a whole.  While Central region's per capita was close to the Guam average, the Southern region average was about $500 less than the Guam average.  The $500 discrepancy for Southern region continued in 1979, but Central region at $5,100 surpassed Northern region (at $4,900).

 

     In 1969, Agana and Tamuning had the highest per capita incomes ($5,000).  Mongmong‑Toto‑Maite was third highest at $4,800.  In 1979, Piti had the highest per capita income at $7,000, almost three times its 1969 value.  Since Piti's dependency ratio (the ratio of dependents to workers) was only 30, compared to about 60 for the territory as a whole, this high value is not too surprising.  The large number of military personnel probably contributed to the higher value.  Agana continued to have the second highest per capita rate ($6,565), and Tamuning was third ($5,900).

 

PERSONAL INCOME

 

     Tables on income of persons by sex show some differences in income received by males and females.  Of the 36,408 males 15 years and over, 31,486 (86 percent) had income in 1979 (Table 12.8).   For females, only 19,481 of the 32,599 (60 percent) had income.   The median for all individuals in 1979 was $8392: $9,926 for males and $6,133 for females.

 

     The mean income data were similar, but were slightly higher for males.  The mean income for all individuals for 1979 was $9,965, $11,835 for males and $6,942 for females.  Of the total females with income, 16 percent fell within the $7,000 to $9,999 category compared to 19 percent for the males.  The largest category for males (23 percent) was the $10,000 to $14,999 category.

 

Table 12.8. Income of Persons in 1979 by Sex: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                         Numbers                    Percent

                ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Income             Total    Males  Females     Total    Males  Females

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

     Total......  69,007   36,408   32,599       ...      ...      ...

    With income.  50,967   31,486   19,481     100.0    100.0    100.0

$1 to $499/loss.   1,691      617    1,074       3.3      2.0      5.5

$500 to $999....   2,162      801    1,361       4.2      2.5      7.0

$1000 to $1999..   2,842    1,076    1,766       5.6      3.4      9.1

$2000 to $2999..   2,320      857    1,463       4.6      2.7      7.5

$3000 to $4999..   4,460    1,892    2,568       8.8      6.0     13.2

$5000 to $6999..   7,453    4,574    2,879      14.6     14.5     14.8

$7000 to $9999..   9,690    6,075    3,615      19.0     19.3     18.6

$10000 to $14999  10,188    7,237    2,951      20.0     23.0     15.1

$15000 to $24999   7,680    6,115    1,565      15.1     19.4      8.0

$25000 or more..   2,481    2,242      239       4.9      7.1      1.2

Median..........  $8,392   $9,926   $6,133       ...      ...      ...

Mean............  $9,965  $11,835   $6,942       ...      ...      ...

______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54, Table 46

 

     Table 12.9 shows median and mean income by birthplace.  About 64 percent of those earning income in 1979 were not born on Guam, reflecting certain programs such as the construction industry's use of contract workers having H‑2 status.  These same workers increased the mean income for non‑Guam born workers to $10,219 compared to the $9,504 for workers with income who were born on Guam.  Other influences on these figures include the military as well as firms having expatriates to run corporate subsidiary operations.  

 

Table 12.9. Income of Persons in 1979 by Birthplace: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                         Birthplace                 Percent

                ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Income              Total     Guam Not‑Guam    Total     Guam Not‑Guam

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

     Total......  69,007   26,944   42,063       ...      ...      ...

With income.....  50,967   18,085   32,882     100.0    100.0    100.0

$1 to $499/loss.   1,691      787      904       3.3      4.4      2.7

$500 to $999....   2,162    1,161    1,001       4.2      6.4      3.0

$1000 to $1999..   2,842    1,308    1,534       5.6      7.2      4.7

$2000 to $2999..   2,320      934    1,386       4.6      5.2      4.2

$3000 to $4999..   4,460    1,649    2,811       8.8      9.1      8.5

$5000 to $6999..   7,453    1,685    5,768      14.6      9.3     17.5

$7000 to $9999..   9,690    3,181    6,509      19.0     17.6     19.8

$10000 to $14999  10,188    3,823    6,365      20.0     21.1     19.4

$15000 to $24999   7,680    2,927    4,753      15.1     16.2     14.5

$25000 or more..   2,481      630    1,851       4.9      3.5      5.6

Median..........  $8,392   $8,510      (NA)      ...      ...      ...

Mean............  $9,965   $9,504  $10,219       ...      ...      ...

______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D57A, Table 47

 

     About 7 in every 10 persons 25 years and over and receiving income in 1979 were high school graduates (Table 12.10).  The percentage for males and females was the same.  Except for the very low income levels (which may have been affected by low numbers), there was a direct correlation between income level and percent high school graduate.  These trends held for both males and females.

 

Table 12.10. Income of Persons in 1979 by Percent High School                               Graduates:1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                         Numbers             Percent High School Grads

                ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Income              Total    Males  Females    Total    Males  Females

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

   Total, 25+ yr  46,906   24,540   22,366      65.6     69.2     61.6

With income.....  37,618   23,474   14,144      69.9     70.3     69.2

$1 to $499/loss.     717      153      564      56.8     49.8     58.7

$500 to $999....   1,038      271      767      41.4     36.9     43.0

$1000 to $1999..   1,478    1,336      142      47.0     46.9     48.3

$2000 to $2999..   1,351      445      906      51.4     48.5     52.8

$3000 to $4999..   2,764    1,025    1,739      53.5     48.1     56.7

$5000 to $6999..   3,649    1,744    1,905      61.4     58.9     63.7

$7000 to $9999..   7,350    4,535    2,815      70.9     69.8     72.7

$10000 to $14999   9,352    6,700    2,652      75.4     70.9     86.7

$15000 to $24999   7,479    5,949    1,530      78.9     75.3     92.9

$25000 or more..   2,440    2,216      224      89.1     90.0     80.4

______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54, Table 49

 

     In 1979, Chamorro speakers had the highest median income, followed by those who spoke a Philippine language (Table 12.11).  English speakers had the lowest median income, but the highest mean income.  This was more than likely caused by over 7 percent of those who spoke English being in the income category of $25,000 or more, compared to only 4 percent of Chamorro speakers and 2 percent of Philippine language speakers.

 

Table 12.11. Income of Persons in 1979 by Language Spoken at Home: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                         Language                    Percent

                ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                            Eng‑  Cham‑  Phil.        Eng‑ Cham‑ Phil.

Income             Total    lish   orro  lang. Total  lish  orro lang.

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

   Total........  69,007  20,222 24,610 13,804   ...   ...   ...   ...

With income...... 50,967  15,866 17,001 10,202 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

$1 to $499/loss..  1,691     567    673    227   3.3   3.6   4.0   2.2

$500 to $999.....  2,162     594    997    323   4.2   3.7   5.9   3.2

$1000 to $1999...  2,842     761  1,173    477   5.6   4.8   6.9   4.7

$2000 to $2999...  2,320     634    852    465   4.6   4.0   5.0   4.6

$3000 to $4999...  4,460   1,202  1,563    958   8.8   7.6   9.2   9.4

$5000 to $6999...  7,453   2,692  1,615  1,432  14.6  17.0   9.5  14.0

$7000 to $9999...  9,690   3,025  3,016  2,182  19.0  19.1  17.7  21.4

$10000 to $14999. 10,188   2,937  3,690  2,227  20.0  18.5  21.7  21.8

$15000 to $24999.  7,680   2,292  2,819  1,652  15.1  14.4  16.6  16.2

$25000 or more...  2,481   1,162    603    259   4.9   7.3   3.5   2.5

Median........... $8,392  $8,369 $8,703 $8,560   ...   ...   ...   ...

Mean............. $9,965 $10,579 $9,676 $9,575   ...   ...   ...   ...

______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54, Table 48

 

POVERTY

 

     Families and individuals are classified as being above or below the poverty level using the poverty definition developed at the Social Security Administration in 1964 and revised in 1969 and 1980.  The poverty index was based solely on money income and did not reflect the fact that many low‑income persons received non‑cash benefits such as food stamps, medicaid and public housing.  The weighted average poverty level based on money income used for 1980 is shown in Table 12.12.

 

Table 12.12  Weighted Average Poverty Levels Based on Money Income for

             Families and Individuals: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                            Size of Unit

                         1              2

                  ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑  ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                  Total <65 65+  Total <65 65+  3    4    5    6     7+

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Income............ 4190 4290 3949 5363 5537 4983 6565 8414 9966 11269 13995

___________________________________________________________________________

Source:  U.S. Bureau of the Census, Statistical Abstract of the United

         States: 1984 (104th edition).

 

     In 1979, there were 101,539 persons on Guam for whom poverty status was determined (all persons who were not in group quarters) (Table 12.13).  Of this number, 16 percent were below poverty level; 11 percent of whom were in "extreme poverty", below 75 percent of poverty level.  Nearly 50 percent of those in the poverty universe were below 200 percent of poverty level.

 

Table 12.13.  Poverty Status in 1979: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Poverty Status                                Number           Percent

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

  Total in Poverty Universe..........       101,539              100.0

Below 75 Percent of Poverty Level....        10,667               10.5

Below Poverty Level..................        16,571               16.3

Below 125 Percent of Poverty Level...        25,338               25.0

Below 150 Percent of Poverty Level...        34,313               33.8

Below 200 Percent of Poverty Level...        50,698               49.9

______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A, Table 95.

 

     There were 21,780 families for whom poverty status was determined in 1979; 86 percent were above poverty level, the remainder below (Table 12.14).  Of those above poverty level, 76 percent had related children in the family; for those below poverty level, 88 percent of families had related children.  Fully 7 percent of families above poverty level were headed by a female householder with no husband present; this figure was over 35 percent for those families below poverty level.  Female householders below poverty level had related children in the family in 92 out of 100 homes.

 

Table 12.14.  Percent Families by Type by Poverty Status in 1979

              by Children: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                            Female Householder,

                         Total              No Husband Present

                    ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                           Income      Income      Income      Income

                           Above       Below       Above       Below

Families                  Poverty     Poverty     Poverty     Poverty

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

       Total.........       18770        3010        1352        1063

     Percent.........       100.0       100.0       100.0       100.0

With related children        75.8        87.8        77.0        91.1

  Under 6 yrs and 6‑17 yrs   23.7        35.4        19.9        33.6

  Under 6 years......        21.1        24.2        15.2        22.9

  6 to 17 years only.        31.0        28.2        41.9        34.6

Without related children...  24.2        12.2        23.0         8.9

_____________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A, Table 86

 

     For families with related children (Table 12.15), and above poverty level, regardless of whether the householder was male or female with no husband present, the majority (41 and 54 percent, respectively), had children who were between 6 to 17 years old.  Of all families with income below poverty, the majority (40 percent) had children who were either under 6 years, or 6 to 17 years old; female householders below poverty were nearly equally split between having children under 6 years old or 6 to 17 years (37 percent), or only between 6 to 17 years old (38 percent).

 

Table 12.15. Families by Type by Poverty Status in 1979 by Children:                1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                                              Female Householder,

                             Total              No Husband Present

                      ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

                            Income      Income      Income      Income

                             Above       Below       Above       Below

Families                   Poverty     Poverty     Poverty     Poverty

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

     Total............         ...         ...         ...         ...

With related children.       100.0       100.0       100.0       100.0

  Under 6 yrs and 6‑17 yrs.   31.2        40.4        25.8        36.9

  Under 6 years............   27.9        27.5        19.8        25.1

  6 to 17 years only.......   40.9        32.1        54.4        38.0

Without related children...    ...         ...         ...         ...

______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A, Table 86

 

SUMMARY

 

     Median income of unrelated individuals in 1979 was shown to be lower than median income of both households and families; mean income of households was higher than either family or individuals.  Wage and salary income was the highest mean income type; farm income was the lowest.  The Central region had the highest mean income for all types except for Public Assistance (Southern region was highest) and All Other income (Northern region ranked first).  Each increase in the number of workers in families by 1 increased the income by between 6 to 8 thousand dollars.

 

     Per capita income for the island was $4,793 in 1979, compared to $7,298 for the U.S.  Per capita income on Guam increased by 22 percent between 1969 and 1979 when adjusted for inflation.  While 20 percent of all persons with income and 23 percent of males with income earned between $10,000 and $14,999 in 1979, only 15 percent of females with income did so; their most frequently earned income was between $7,000 and $9,999.  Over 7 percent of males and 5 percent of all persons earned $25,000 or more in 1979; only 1 percent of females did so.  Guam born persons had a mean income of $9,504, lower than either all persons ($9,965) or the non‑Guam born ($10,219).  High school graduates and English speakers were more frequently represented in the higher income brackets than non‑graduates and speakers of other languages.

 

     Fully 16 percent of Guam's population were considered as being below poverty level in 1979, while nearly 50 percent were below 200 percent of poverty status.  The majority of these families had children, most of whom were under 6 to 17 years of age.


CHAPTER 13

  ESTIMATES AND PROJECTIONS

 

     Population and housing censuses, the crucial source of data on the size, structure and distribution of population and housing, are taken at regular intervals.  They involve a great deal of planning, enumeration, compilation, analysis, publication, and require tremendous expenditures of money and human energy.  They also require considerable time to make available the details of information collected at a certain point in time.  Since the Government of Guam needs the most up‑to‑date information about the size and structure of the population in order to make reasonable plans for development, estimates of the population between censuses are needed.  Data from Censuses, surveys, and other statistical data can be used to make estimates in between complete population counts.  Projections are also made based on these data to help understand future needs.  The government uses estimates and projections for its planning, but is not the only user of population estimates and projections, since social service organizations, university and social research centers, market research centers, and business organizations often also need estimates and projections for their own purposes.

 

     Estimates for current populations and projections for the future help planners by providing them with likely consequences of current trends.

 

     In this chapter we discuss post‑censal estimates and projections for the years following the 1980 census.  Estimates and projections are based on factual information as well as assumptions.  The accuracy of the estimates, therefore, depends on the accuracy of the available data and assumptions.  Furthermore, when projections of a population are made for some future date, they are based on certain assumptions as to the likely course of vital events.  The components of population ‑ fertility, mortality, and migration ‑ are likely to follow certain courses.  The initial data used as the base to make the projections must be error‑free.  Also, we know that if the period of population projection is long, there is a greater likelihood of error in the projections because the assumptions may not hold for long periods.

 

     The accuracy of the population estimates or projections depends on the extent to which the assumptions prove correct and not on the level of sophistication of the method of calculating the projections.  Better techniques are being developed as time goes by.  (Before undertaking population estimates or projections, it is important that the data be evaluated and adjusted for errors, incompleteness, and other inconsistencies).

 

ESTIMATES

 

     The Population Estimates Branch staff, Population Division, Bureau of the Census used the 1980 census as base year to make annual estimates after 1980.  The balancing equation, with births, deaths and net migration was used to estimate the population.


 

     The estimates of the population of Guam were developed by adding the components of change to the relevant population base.  The July 1, 1980, through 1986 estimates were derived using a base composed of the 1980 census count less the estimated population on April 1, 1980, who were born in the United States,

with the April 1, 1980 American population on Guam being estimated based on data furnished by the Guam Department of Commerce and the U.S. Department of Defense.  The population base is restricted because of the large and relatively transient Federally affiliate population for which migration is substantial and difficult to estimate.  Rather than estimate migration for this population group, administrative records were used to determine the number of Federally affiliated persons on each estimate date.  The following were added to the relevant population base:

 

1. Natural increase.  The excess of births over deaths to the population is based on reported birth and death statistics.  Births and deaths occurring in the U.S. Naval Hospital are excluded.

 

2. Change in alien contract workers.  This category is primarily composed of contract workers brought in from the Philippines by the Department of Defense.  The estimates are based on information provided by the Guam Department of Commerce.

 

3. Net alien immigration.  These are persons accepted for permanent residence in the United States.   The estimate is based on Immigration and Naturalization Service (INS) figures on immigrants who reported on their visa applications that they intended to live on Guam.  It is assumed that 40 percent of the immigrants each year either leave Guam or inaccurately reported their intention of living on Guam.  This assumption is based on an analysis of expected versus actual change in the alien population between 1970 and 1980.  Expected change was derived from INS records on immigrants and naturalizations plus the change in alien contract workers (recorded in item 2 above).  Actual change was based on the net change in the annual alien registration data collected by INS until 1982.

 

4. Federally affiliated population.  The number of Armed Forces stationed on Guam was obtained from the U.S. Department of Defense.  The Guam Department of Commerce provided data on the numbers of Federal civilian employees and dependents of both Federal civilian employees and the military.

 

5. Guamanian inductions less discharges.  The number of persons in the Armed Forces in the United States who lived on Guam before joining the military is available from the Department of Defense.  One half the change in pre‑service residence on Guam was used to approximate inductions less discharges on Guam.

 

   No data are available on the movement of the nonfederally affiliated population who are not covered above, but this component of net migration is assumed not to be large.

 

     Limitations of the Estimates.  The estimates are based on the special estimating method described above which yields point estimates of the various subcategories of the population.  The test of this method for the 1960‑1970 period showed an overestimate of about 10 percent.  This level and direction of error still existed in the estimates in 1980, when the actual 1980 census count of 105,979, was 10,272 (9.7 percent) less than the estimate.  Likely explanations for this difference include the lack of accurate migration data as well as conflicting information on persons who were born in the 50 States and on the special populations employed in the current methodology.

 

 

Table 13.1.  Estimates of the Population of Guam: 4/1/80 to 7/1/86

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Population    From: 4/1/80  7/1/80  7/1/81  7/1/82  7/1/83  7/1/84  7/1/85

Group           To: 7/1/80  7/1/81  7/1/82  7/1/83  7/1/84  7/1/85  7/1/86

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

Base population.... 85,603  86,323  89,682  92,946  95,886  98,928 102,063

Births.............    458   2,137   2,136   2,100   2,205   2,303   2,300

Deaths.............     97     369     360     390     405     375     400

Change alien works.      0       1     114       0       0       0       0

Inductions less

  discharges Guam..     29     270      54     ‑30     ‑46      96     ‑38

Alien immigrants...    550   2,200   2,200   2,100   2,147   1,851   2,065

Alien emigrants....    220     880     880     840     859     740     826

Federal population:

  Cvln emply dpnts.  1,327   1,213     860     785     811     700     603

  Armed Forces.....  9,420   8,493   8,070   7,994   7,649   9,556   9,301

  AF dependents....  9,799  10,472   8,653  11,311  12,463  11,550  11,701

 

End: Resident pop..106,869 109,860 110,529 115,976 119,851 123,869 126,769

     Civilian pop.. 97,449 101,367 102,459 107,982 112,202 114,313 117,468

 

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Unpublished Worksheets

 

 

 

 

Figure 13.1  Estimates of the Civilian and Resident Populations:

Guam, 1980 to 1986


 

PROJECTIONS

 

     The U.S. Bureau of the Census's Center for International Research has developed a program called RUP (Rural‑Urban Projection) to do component projections for various country and sub‑country populations.  The projections are done by single years of age and for single years of time.  The program is calendar‑year oriented, meaning that vital rates and events are those occurring during the calendar year (January 1 to December 31) while the populations always refer to midyear (approximately July 1).

 

     The series of projections presented here run from 1980 through 2030.  Age specific fertility information was obtained from the 1980 census.  The 1980 own children information discussed in Chapter 5 was used for the entire period, the assumption being that since fertility is already very low for Guam, it is unlikely to go much lower.  Although it is likely that continued immigration will bring females with higher‑than‑average fertility, this is offset by the fertility of Chamorro and Filipino women born on Guam decreasing to become more like that of all women on Guam.

 

     The Coale‑Demeny Model Life Table obtained from the children ever born and children surviving in the 1980 census using the Brass procedure provided life expectancies and mortality schedules used for these runs.  Since mortality was already very low in 1980 (and life expectancy high), changing mortality was not incorporated into the model.

 

     Table 13.2 shows the age specific projections for females when migration is ignored.  The number of females on Guam will approximately double to about 100,000 about 2015.

 

Table 13.2.  Projections Without Migration for Females: 1980 to 2030

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Age    1980  1985  1990  1995  2000  2005  2010   2015   2020   2025   2030

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

  Tot 50658 56849 63343 70065 77000 84187 91623  99302 107189 115238 123451

 0‑ 4  6382  6946  7432  7902  8408  9000  9648  10319  11017  11757  12560

 5‑ 9  6174  6370  6931  7417  7887  8392  8982   9629  10299  10993  11734

10‑14  5503  6167  6364  6922  7408  7879  8383   8973   9618  10289  10981

15‑19  5144  5496  6159  6357  6913  7398  7870   8370   8961   9606  10275

20‑24  5089  5133  5486  6148  6346  6899  7383   7854   8354   8944   9588

25‑29  5130  5075  5118  5470  6131  6328  6880   7364   7833   8331   8919

30‑34  4435  5113  5058  5101  5451  6110  6306   6857   7339   7805   8302

35‑39  2860  4414  5088  5032  5077  5426  6080   6277   6823   7304   7769

40‑44  2399  2841  4385  5053  4996  5042  5389   6037   6236   6777   7253

45‑49  2018  2372  2808  4337  4996  4939  4986   5328   5967   6165   6701

50‑54  1745  1981  2330  2757  4259  4906  4849   4896   5231   5859   6054

55‑59  1280  1695  1924  2265  2680  4139  4765   4709   4758   5081   5691

60‑64   919  1223  1619  1835  2162  2557  3953   4546   4491   4542   4849

65‑69   689   848  1129  1493  1693  1996  2359   3651   4192   4141   4190

70‑74   417   598   736   980  1293  1467  1730   2044   3167   3628   3586

75‑79   271   324   465   573   763  1002  1139   1345   1588   2463   2807

80 +    203   253   311   423   537   707   921   1103   1315   1553   2192

 

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Unpublished Tabulations

 

 

 

Figure 13.2  Projections Without Migration by Sex: 1980 to 2030


 

     Because of the presence of the military on Guam, there will continue to be more males than females into the future (Table 13.3).  Again, by 2015, there will be more than 100,000 males on the island.

 

Table 13.3. Projections Without Migration for Males: 1980 to 2030

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Age    1980  1985  1990  1995  2000  2005  2010   2015   2020   2025   2030

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

  Tot 55321 61581 68058 74676 81438 88380 95528 102913 110492 118224 126179

 0‑ 4  6620  7248  7754  8244  8772  9389 10065  10766  11493  12266  13104

 5‑ 9  6458  6599  7226  7729  8218  8746  9360  10034  10733  11456  12227

10‑14  5835  6445  6585  7212  7713  8202  8729   9342  10014  10712  11433

15‑19  5849  5820  6427  6569  7194  7692  8180   8703   9316   9987  10685

20‑24  6019  5825  5796  6399  6541  7165  7659   8147   8668   9278   9945

25‑29  5194  5989  5797  5766  6369  6507  7131   7622   8107   8626   9232

30‑34  4854  5167  5959  5769  5736  6337  6474   7095   7583   8065   8582

35‑39  3386  4823  5135  5920  5733  5700  6296   6433   7051   7536   8014

40‑44  2650  3356  4779  5090  5866  5681  5649   6237   6374   6987   7468

45‑49  2171  2611  3307  4707  5012  5779  5594   5565   6142   6278   6880

50‑54  2238  2114  2542  3222  4588  4882  5632   5449   5422   5982   6119

55‑59  1634  2140  2022  2433  3083  4390  4669   5387   5208   5186   5719

60‑64  1008  1519  1986  1876  2260  2864  4079   4336   5005   4832   4815

65‑69   729   895  1349  1759  1662  2005  2538   3620   3844   4440   4278

70‑74   392   598   736  1109  1440  1363  1649   2084   2978   3154   3650

75‑79   185   287   436   538   809  1041   988   1199   1512   2170   2288

80 +     99   145   222   334   442   637   836    894   1042   1269   1740

 

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Unpublished Tabulations

 

     A second series of projections was run, but with migration included.  Migration data were obtained by intercensal demographic analysis for the 1970 to 1980 period.  After accounting for births and deaths to the population, residential estimates of net migration were obtained.  Since there had been a large military build‑up during the Vietnam War, and fewer military were living on Guam in 1980, the population had experienced net out‑migration during the period.  Altogether, there was a net annual outflow of 412 males and net inflow of 15 females (Table 13.4).  The annual rate was ‑8 males per 1000 and less than 1 female per 1000.

 

Table 13.4.  Average Annual Net Migration and Rate by Age: 1970 to 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

          Average Annual Net Migration         Annual Migration Rate

Age    ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Group        Total      Males    Females      Total      Males    Females

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

  Total       ‑397       ‑412         15      ‑7.68      ‑8.05        .37

  0‑  4       ‑104        ‑56        ‑48     ‑16.71      ‑8.82      ‑7.89

  5‑  9       ‑172        ‑83        ‑89     ‑28.16     ‑13.19     ‑14.97

 10‑ 14         38         36          2       6.67       6.38        .29

 15‑ 19         87         51         36      18.28      10.29       7.99

 20‑ 24         ‑7        ‑43         36       1.56      ‑6.87       8.43

 25‑ 29        130         54         76      32.35      12.51      19.84

 30‑ 34        ‑77       ‑122         45     ‑16.34     ‑29.30      12.96

 35‑ 39        ‑48        ‑52          4     ‑14.00     ‑15.59       1.59

 40‑ 44        ‑79        ‑69        ‑10     ‑28.86     ‑24.18      ‑4.68

 45‑ 49        ‑73        ‑65         ‑8     ‑34.24     ‑29.71      ‑4.53

 50‑ 54        ‑36        ‑36          0     ‑20.47     ‑20.47       0.00

 55‑ 59        ‑24        ‑21         ‑3     ‑18.82     ‑15.85      ‑2.97

 60‑ 64         ‑9         ‑6         ‑3     ‑12.01      ‑8.19      ‑3.82

 65‑ 69         ‑3         ‑1         ‑2      ‑6.96      ‑2.61      ‑4.35

 70‑ 74         ‑4          0         ‑4     ‑14.26       ‑.97     ‑13.29

 75+           ‑16          1        ‑17     ‑44.38       3.93     ‑48.31

 

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Source: Office of Vital Statistics, Department of Public Health and

        Social Service, Guam

 

     Since females experience net in‑migration their projected totals are greater than without migration (Table 13.5).  By 2015, there would be about 5,000 more females when migration is included in the package than when it is excluded.

 

Table 13.5. Projections with Migration for Females for Age: 1980 to 2030

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Age    1980  1985  1990  1995  2000  2005  2010   2015   2020   2025   2030

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

  Tot 50658 57413 64850 72670 80661 88791 97177 105954 115104 124435 133837

 0‑ 4  6382  7007  7834  8493  8981  9474 10120  10918  11782  12636  13494

 5‑ 9  6174  6020  6610  7388  8007  8469  8933   9543  10296  11112  11914

10‑14  5503  5945  5789  6358  7109  7704  8151   8596   9182   9906  10691

15‑19  5144  5611  6062  5900  6479  7247  7855   8311   8762   9360  10100

20‑24  5089  5350  5834  6303  6137  6736  7534   8166   8642   9111   9732

25‑29  5130  5450  5722  6245  6749  6568  7207   8063   8740   9250   9752

30‑34  4435  5547  5892  6193  6755  7297  7107   7799   8724   9453  10007

35‑39  2860  4584  5727  6078  6399  6972  7528   7340   8053   9008   9756

40‑44  2399  2821  4522  5644  5987  6311  6872   7416   7235   7938   8881

45‑49  2018  2318  2725  4371  5454  5785  6100   6639   7166   6990   7670

50‑54  1745  1958  2247  2642  4237  5291  5611   5916   6441   6951   6778

55‑59  1280  1681  1887  2166  2546  4084  5099   5405   5700   6208   6699

60‑64   919  1203  1577  1769  2034  2389  3835   4784   5070   5350   5821

65‑69   689   829  1089  1427  1599  1842  2159   3471   4324   4580   4841

70‑74   417   574   690   906  1186  1326  1532   1792   2890   3587   3796

75‑79   271   281   389   466   611   796   889   1034   1204   1956   2405

80 +    203   234   254   321   391   500   645    761    893   1039   1500

 

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Unpublished Tabulations

 

     Since males experience net out‑migration during the projection period, their projected populations are lower than when migration is excluded (Table 13.6).  The 1970 to 1980 period may turn out to be unusual, particularly if military are moved from the Philippines to Guam at some point in the future.

 

Table 13.6. Projections with Migration for Males by Age: 1980 to 2030

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Age    1980  1985  1990  1995  2000  2005  2010   2015   2020   2025   2030

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

  Tot 55321 59622 64389 69232 74186 79191 84534  90433  96863 103730 110985

 0‑ 4  6620  7297  8156  8841  9348  9863 10535  11364  12264  13155  14045

 5‑ 9  6458  6246  6886  7698  8342  8822  9308   9943  10723  11573  12415

10‑14  5835  6341  6121  6748  7548  8179  8650   9127   9749  10512  11346

15‑19  5849  6066  6596  6363  7016  7848  8504   8994   9492  10139  10929

20‑24  6019  5870  6094  6622  6395  7052  7888   8545   9034   9535  10190

25‑29  5194  6061  5932  6146  6688  6448  7111   7956   8621   9114   9620

30‑34  4854  4970  5815  5655  5877  6378  6171   6804   7608   8243   8709

35‑39  3386  4303  4409  5154  5022  5213  5663   5474   6035   6749   7314

40‑44  2650  3039  3866  3958  4630  4506  4679   5080   4916   5419   6059

45‑49  2171  2284  2615  3331  3411  3991  3880   4031   4374   4235   4669

50‑54  2238  1868  1962  2247  2859  2928  3424   3334   3460   3757   3635

55‑59  1634  1952  1631  1713  1962  2497  2557   2988   2912   3021   3280

60‑64  1008  1427  1705  1426  1496  1714  2181   2236   2611   2544   2640

65‑69   729   872  1231  1469  1229  1291  1479   1880   1928   2254   2193

70‑74   392   593   712  1002  1192   997  1052   1204   1532   1568   1835

75‑79   185   287   433   521   734   868   725    767    877   1119   1146

80 +     99   146   225   338   437   596   727    706    727    793    960

 

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Unpublished Tabulations

 

     Table 13.7 shows the projected proportion of the population which will be elderly over the next half‑century.  Although less than 3 percent of Guam's population was 65 years and over in 1980, the proportion will double in 25 years to 6 percent in 1005, and will be as much as 10 percent in 2030.  Because fertility is low, and life expectancy is high, the proportion of the population being elderly is certain to increase substantially.

 

Table 13.7. Projections Without Migration for Persons 65 Years and

            Over: 1980 to 2030

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Sex    1980  1985  1990  1995  2000  2005  2010   2015   2020   2025   2030

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

 

  Tot  2985  3948  5384  7209  8639 10218 12160  15940  19638  22818  24734

   %    2.8   3.3   4.1   5.0   5.5   5.9   6.5    7.9    9.0    9.8    9.9

Males  1405  1925  2743  3740  4353  5046  6011   7797   9376  11033  11959

Fmles  1580  2023  2641  3469  4286  5172  6149   8143  10262  11785  12775

 

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Unpublished Tabulations

 

CONCLUSIONS

 

     As was seen in Chapter 1, Guam's population has been extremely volatile both in its count, and in its characteristics.  Even populations experiencing massive migration of one sort or another, rarely see the roller coaster type changes in male‑female ratios and age patterns.  Since Guam has been especially influenced by

the fluctuations of the military and a great deal of Asian migration in recent years, the projections presented here have to seen as very tentative.  It is very likely that the number of military will continue to ebb and flow, that Asian migration will continue, and that new migration will come from the Micronesian areas.  Since the amount and characteristics of this migration is not yet known, it is not possible to account for them in the projections.


É[1]„!B„!ÉË

˂J
EÀÀ
E
JÀÀ
JJÀÀJLÀÎÎÐBZÐË
      ËÀLDÀÃ%‑à CHAPTER 14œƒ
Ã%ÃHOUSING CHARACTERISTICSœƒ
Ë     
Chapter 14

Housing

 

ËÀD
     The 1980 Census of Guam was conducted through direct enumeration.

Census takers canvassed each street or road and listed each occupied and

vacant housing unit.  The Census takers were instructed to read the questions

directly from the questionnaire in their personal interviews.  One

questionnaire was used per unit.  The following definitions and explanations

for each subject were drawn largely from various technical and procedural

materials used in the collection of the data.

LIVING QUARTERSœ

     Living quarters were classified in the census as either housing units or

group quarters.  Usually, living quarters were in structures intended for

residential use (e.g., a one family home, apartment house, hotel or motel,

boarding house, mobile home or trailer).  However, living quarters may also

have been in structures intended for nonresidential use (e.g., rooms in a

warehouse where a night guard lives), as well as in boats, tents, vans, etc.

     ”Housing units.•  A housing unit was a house, an apartment, a group of

rooms, or a single room occupied as a separate living quarters or, if vacant,

intended for occupancy as a separate living quarters.  Separate living

quarters were those in which the occupants lived and ate separately from any

other persons in the building and which had direct access from the outside of

the building or through a common hall.  The occupants may be a single family,

one person living alone, two or more families living together, or any other

group of related or unrelated persons who shared living arrangements (except

as described in the next section on group quarters).  For vacant units, the

criteria of separateness and direct access were applied to the intended

occupants whenever possible.  If that information could not be obtained, the

criteria were applied to the previous occupants.  Both occupied and vacant

housing units were included in the housing unit inventory except that boats,

tents, vans, caves, and the like were included only if they were occupied as

someone's usual place of residence.  Vacant mobile homes were included,

provided they were intended for occupancy on the site where they stood.

     ”Comparability with 1970 Census housing unit data.•  Although the 1980

census data were generally comparable with 1970 census data, certain changes

were introduced for 1980.  The part of the 1970 housing unit definition that

required a unit to have either (1) direct access or (2) cooking facilities

for exclusive use was modified.  For 1980, the cooking facilities for

exclusive use alternative was dropped, and direct access was required of all

housing units.  In 1970, vacant mobile homes were not counted as housing

units.  For 1980, they were included in the housing inventory, provided they

were intended for occupancy on the site where they stood.

     ”Group Quarters.•  Group quarters were any living quarters which were

not classified as housing units.  There were two types of group quarters: (1)

institutional group quarters and (2) noninstitutional group quarters.

Institutional group quarters were living quarters occupied by one or more

persons under care or custody, such as children in an orphanage, persons in a

nursing home, and prisoners in a penitentiary.  Noninstitutional group

quarters included living quarters such as college-owned dormitories,

fraternities, or sorority houses, nurses dormitories, and boarding houses.

In addition, noninstitutional group quarters included any living quarters

(other than those classified as institutional group quarters) which were

occupied by 9 or more persons unrelated to the person listed in column 1 of

the census questionnaire, or by 10 or more unrelated persons.  Information on

the housing characteristics of group quarters was not collected in the

census.

Ñÿÿ    [                                  [1]
ÿÑ     ”Comparability with 1970 Group Quarters Data.•  In 1970, a unit was

classified as group quarters if it was shared by the person in charge and 5

or more persons unrelated to him or her or if there was no person in charge,

by 6 or more unrelated persons.  For 1980, that requirement was raised to 9

or more persons unrelated to the person listed in column 1 of the census

questionnaire or 10 or more persons unrelated to each other.

     ”Rules for Hotels, Rooming Houses, Etc.•  Occupied rooms or suites of

rooms in hotels, motels, and similar places were classified as housing units

only when occupied by permanent residents; i.e., persons who considered the

hotel as their usual place of residence or had no usual place of residence

elsewhere.  Vacant rooms or suites of rooms were classified as housing rooms

only in those hotels in which 75 percent or more of the accommodations were

occupied by permanent residents.  If any of the occupants in a rooming or

boarding house lived and ate separately from everyone else in the building

and had direct access, their quarters were classified as separate housing

units.  The remaining quarters were combined.  If the combined quarters

contained 8 or fewer roomers unrelated to the householder, they were

classified as one housing unit.  If the combined quarters contained 9 or more

roomers unrelated to the householder or person in charge, they were

classified as group quarters.

     ”Staff living quarters.•  The living quarters occupied by staff

personnel within any group quarters were separate housing units if they

satisfied the housing unit criteria of separateness and direct access;

otherwise, they were considered as group quarters.

     ”Year-round housing units.•  Data on housing characteristics in the 1980

census reports were limited to year-round housing units; i.e., all occupied

units plus vacant units available or intended for year-round use.  Vacant

units intended for seasonal occupancy were excluded because of the difficulty

of obtaining reliable data on their characteristics.  Counts of the total

housing inventory, however, were given for each area presented in the

reports.

OCCUPANCY AND VACANCYœ

     ”Occupied housing units.•  A housing unit was classified as occupied if

it was the usual place of residence of the person or group of persons living

in it at the time of enumeration, or if the occupants were only temporarily

absent; e.g., away on vacation.  If all the persons staying in the unit at

the time of the census have their usual place of residence elsewhere, the

unit was classified as vacant.  A household included all the persons who

occupied a housing unit as their usual place of residence.  By definition the

count of occupied housing units was the same as the count of households in

the 1980 census of population reports.

     ”Householder.•  One person in household was distinguished as the

"householder".  In most cases, this was the person, or one of the persons, in

whose name the home was owned or rented and who was listed in column 1 of the

census questionnaire.  If there was no such person in the household, any

adult household member could be distinguished as the "householder".

     ”Persons in occupied housing units.•  Persons in occupied housing units

was the total population less those persons living in group quarters. Persons

per occupied housing unit was computed by dividing the population living in

housing units by the number of occupied housing units.  Data are also

presented separately for the population in owner-occupied and in

renter-occupied housing units.

     ”Vacant housing units.•  A housing unit was vacant if no one was living

in it at the time of enumeration, unless its occupants were only temporarily

absent.  Units temporarily occupied at the time of enumeration entirely by

persons who had a usual residence elsewhere were also classified vacant.

     New units not yet occupied were classified as vacant housing units if

construction had reached a point where all external windows and doors were

installed and final usable floors were in place.  Vacant units were excluded

if they were open to the elements; i.e., the roof, walls, windows, and/or

doors no longer protect the interior from the elements, or if there was

positive evidence (such as a sign on the house or in the block) that the unit

was to be demolished or was condemned.  Also, excluded were quarters being

used entirely for nonresidential purposes, such as a store or an office, or

quarters used for the storage of business supplies or inventory, machinery,

or agricultural products.

     ”Tenure.•  The data on tenure were derived from the answers to question

H26.  A housing unit was "owner-occupied" if the owner or co-owner lived in

the unit, even if it was mortgaged or not fully paid for.  All other occupied

units were classified "renter-occupied", including units rented for cash rent

and those occupied without payment of cash rent.

     ”Off-Base Military Housing•

     Off-base housing that was rented to members of the Armed Forces had to

pass acceptability criteria.  While an installation commander could declare a

unit as substandard at any time, most followed these general guidelines:

À    [
[ÀÀ
[
VÀ‚     a. The unit was within a one-hour commute by a privately-owned
        vehicle during rush hour or not further than 30 miles from
        the installation, or within other limits the installation
        commander set based on military necessity.
     b. It was structurally sound and did not pose a health or safety
        hazard.
     c. It had hot and cold running water, a shower or bath, and at
        least one flushable toilet.
     d. It had a heating system or air conditioning where the climate
        required one.
     e. It had electrical service.
     f. It had the minimum number of bedrooms to assure no more that
        two dependents shared a bedroom.
     g. It met such additional acceptability criteria as may have
        been determined by the installation commander.
     h. The maximum acceptable housing cost was the total of Basic
        Allowance for Quarters plus Variable Housing Allowance or
        other housing allowances plus the Maximum Monthly Housing
        Costs Above Allowances.  Military members who had to pay
        more than this total were considered not acceptably housed.
     i. Minimum square footage for housing units:  1 bedroom, 550
        sq. ft., 2 bedrooms: 750 sq. ft., 3 bedrooms: 960 sq. ft.,
        and 4 bedrooms: 1,190 sq. ft.
À
V     VÀÀ      V     
UTILIZATIONœ

     ”Persons.• 
All persons occupying the housing unit were included.  These

persons included not only occupants related to the householder but also any

lodger, roomers, boarders, roommates, wards, foster children, and resident

employees who shared the living quarters of the householder.  The data on

"persons in units" show the number of housing units occupied by the specified

number of persons.

     ”Rooms.•  The data on rooms were derived from the answers to question

H10.  The statistics on "rooms" were in terms of the numbers of housing units

with a specified number of rooms.  The intent of this question was to count

the number of whole rooms used for living purposes.  For each unit they

included living rooms, dining rooms, kitchen, bedrooms, finished recreation

rooms, enclosed porches suitable for year-round use, and larger rooms.

Excluded were strip or pullman kitchens, bathrooms, open porches, balconies,

halls, utility rooms, or other unfinished space used for storage.  A

partially divided room was a separate only if there was a partition from

floor to ceiling.

     ”Persons per room.•  "Persons per room" was a derived measure obtained

by dividing the number of persons in each occupied housing unit by the number

of rooms in the unit.  The figures shown refer, therefore, to the number of

occupied housing units having the specified ratio of persons per room.

PLUMBINGœ

     ”Plumbing Facilities.•  Data on plumbing facilities were derived from

questions H13, H14, and H15.  The category "Complete plumbing in this

building" consisted of units which had piped water (either hot and cold or

only cold), a flush toilet, and a bathtub or shower located inside the same

building as the living quarters being enumerated.  "Lacking complete plumbing

in this building" included those conditions when: (1) all three specified

plumbing facilities were present, but the equipment was located in a

different building from the living quarters even though the equipment may be

on the property; (2) some but not all the facilities were present; or (3)

none of the three specified plumbing facilities was present.

     Data were presented separately for water supply, bathtub or shower, and

toilet facilities.  For units with hot and cold piped water, data were

provided for the type of energy used to heat the piped water.  The categories

for type used were: (1) electricity; (2) gas, including underground piped

gas, bottled, or tank; (3) solar energy, if the primary type of energy was a

system which used the energy available in sunlight to gain and store heat; or

(4) other fuels such as fuel oil, etc.

     ”Comparability with 1970 Census Plumbing Facilities Data.•  In the 1970

census, only units with hot and cold or only cold piped water, a bathtub or

shower, and a flush toilet inside the structure for the exclusive use of the

occupants of the housing unit were classified as having complete plumbing

facilities.  In the 1980 census, "exclusive use" was not determined.  In

addition for 1980, if the unit did not have a flush toilet, the respondents

were asked to identify their toilet facilities as follows: "outhouse or

privy," or "other or none."

     ”Source of Water.•  Data for source of water were derived from the

answers to question H12.  Housing units could receive their water supply from

a number of sources.  A common source supplying water to six or more units

was classified as a "public system."  The water could be supplied by a

municipal water system, water district, water company, etc., or it could be

obtained from a well which supplied water to six or more housing units.  If

the water was supplied from a well on the property or on a neighboring

property serving five or fewer housing units, the units were classified as

having water supplied by an "individual well."  Included in this category was

well water that was drawn by hand, wind drawn, or engine drawn; piped or not

piped; stored in tanks or used directly from the well.  A source of water

could be "Catchment, tanks, or drums" in which rainwater was collected.  A

"public standpipe or street hydrant" was an elevated tank or a vertical

storage cylinder or a street hydrant which was connected to a public system

from which nearby residents drew water.  The category "some other source"

included water obtained privately from springs, creeks, rivers, irrigation

canals, lakes, etc.

     ”Sewage Disposal.• 
The data on sewage disposal were derived from the

answers to question H16.  Housing units were either connected to a public

sewer, to a septic tank or cesspool, or sewage was disposed in some other

way.  A public sewer could be operated by a government body or by a private

organization.  Small sewage treatment plants, which in some localities were

called neighborhood septic tanks, were also classified as public sewers.  A

housing unit was considered to be connected to a septic tank or cesspool when

the unit was provided with an underground pit or tank for sewage disposal.

The category "other means" included housing units which disposed of sewage in

some other way.

ÜÜ
STRUCTUREœ

     ”Year Structure Built.•  The data for year structure built were derived

from question H9.  "Year structure built" referred to when the building was

first constructed, not when it was remodeled, added to, or converted.  For a

houseboat or mobile home or trailer, the manufacturer's model year was

assumed to be the year built.  The figures shown here relate to the number of

units in structures built during specified periods and in existence at the

time of enumeration.

     ”Units in Structure.•  The data on units in structure were derived from

question H6.  A structure was a separate building that either had open space

on all sides or was separated from other structures by dividing walls that

extended from ground to roof.  In the determination of the number of units in

a structure, all housing units, both occupied and vacant, were counted.  The

statistics were presented for the number of housing units in structures of

specified type and size, not for the number of residential buildings.

Structures containing only one housing unit were further classified as

detached or attached.  A mobile home or trailer was classified as a

one-family house detached from any other house if one or more rooms had been

added or built on to it.  If, however, only a porch or shed had been added,

it was still classified as a mobile home or trailer.  Included in the count

of "Mobile homes or trailers, etc.," were units classified as tents, vans,

and any other living quarters occupied as a regular place of residence that

could not be classified into any of the listed categories.  Boats were also

included in the count of mobile homes or trailers, etc., unless they were

shown as a separate category.

     ”Type of Material Used for Outside Walls.•  Data for type of materials

used for outside walls were derived from question H7.   The enumerator

obtained data on this item based on his or her observation of the outside of

the structure, and on answers provided by the respondent.  Units were

classified according to the main type of material used in the construction of

the outside walls of the structure.  The categories for types of material

used were: (1) "Poured concrete;" (2) "Concrete blocks," which may or may not

have been covered with plaster cement; (3) " Metal," including zinc, steel,

tin, etc.; (4) "Wood," including woodboard, plywood, etc.; (5) "Thatch,"

including palm or pandanus thatch, palm leaves, straw, etc.; and (6) "Other,"

for all types of construction which could not be described by any of the

other specific categories.

     ”Type of Material Used for Roof.•  Data for type of material used for

roof were derived from the answers to question H8.  Data for this item were

also based on the enumerator's observation of the structure and on answers

provided by the respondent.  The classification identified the type of

material used for the major portion of the roof covering the structure.

Categories used were similar to those used in the identification of the type

of material used for outside walls.

EQUIPMENTœ

     ”Electric Power.•  The data for electric power were derived from the

answers to question H19.  The category "With electric power" included living

quarters equipped with electric lighting even though the current may have

been shut off because the unit was vacant or because the electric bills had

not been paid.  If the electricity was supplied by a company operated by a

government body or a private organization the unit was classified as

receiving power from a "public utility".  When electricity was supplied by a

generator owned by the household or someone else, the unit was classified as

receiving power from a "private generator".  A private generator may have

been operated by means of diesel oil, solar or other sources of energy.

     ”Cooking Facilities.•  The data for cooking facilities were derived from

the answers to question H17.  This item presented the number of housing units

with main cooking facilities classified by location (inside or outside the

building) and type of stove.  Main cooking facilities were the ones that were

used most often for the preparation of meals.  Units with the main cooking

facilities inside or outside the building were further classified as "With

electric stove," "With kerosene stove," "With gas stove," or "Other,"

depending on the type of stove used for cooking.  The category "Other"

included hotplate, fireplace, or any other type of cooking facilities

available either inside or outside the building.

     ”Comparability with 1970 Census Cooking Facilities Data.•  The 1970

Census cooking facilities question determined if the cooking facilities were

for the exclusive use of the occupants or if they were shared by another

household.  For the 1980 census, the concept of "exclusive use" was dropped.

     ”Refrigerator.•  The data for refrigerator were derived from the answers

to question H18.  The category "Mechanical" included housing units having any

type of refrigerator that was operated by electricity, gas, or kerosene.  The

category "Ice" referred to housing units having an icebox or ice chest.  The

refrigerator could be located elsewhere on the property.  The category "No

refrigerator" consisted of units using any other type of cooling mechanism,

such as a window box, a root cellar, or an open spring.

     ”Air-Conditioning.•  The data on air-conditioning were derived from the

answers to question H24.  "Air-conditioning" was defined as the cooling of

air by a refrigeration unit.  Air-conditioning did not include evaporative

coolers, fans, or blowers which were not connected to a refrigeration unit;

however, it did included heat pumps.  A "central system" was an installation

which air-conditioned a number of rooms.  In an apartment building, such a

system might cool all apartments in the building, each apartment may have had

its own central system, or there may have been several systems, each

providing central air-conditioning for a group of apartments.  A system with

individual room controls was a central system.  A "room unit" was an

individual air-conditioner which was installed in a window or an outside wall

and was generally intended to cool one room, although it could sometimes be

used to cool more than one room.

     ”Vehicles Available.•  The data for vehicles available were derived from

the answers to question H25.  Data for this item referred to the number of

households with vehicles available at home for the use of the members of the

household.  Included in this item were passenger cars, pickup trucks, small

panel trucks of 1-ton capacity or less, as well as station wagons, company

cars, and taxicabs kept at home for use of household members.  Cars rented or

leased for 1 month or more; police and government cars kept at home; and

company vans and trucks of 1-ton capacity or less were also included if kept

at home and used for nonbusiness purposes.  Dismantled cars, immobile cars

used as a source of power for some piece of machinery, and vans and trucks

kept at home but used only for business purposes were excluded.  The

statistics did not reflect the number of vehicles privately owned or the

number of households owning vehicles.

     ”Telephone in Housing Unit.•  The data for telephone were derived from

the answers to question H21.  A unit was classified as having a telephone if

there was a telephone in the living quarters.  Units where the respondent

used a telephone located inside the building but not in the respondent's

living quarters were classified as having no telephone.

     ”Radio.•  The data for radio were derived from answers to question H22.

Data for this item indicated the number of households having a radio set in

working order or being repaired.  Included as radios were all types of sets

whether floor, table, or portable.  Also included were individual units and

units combined with televisions, phonographs, clocks, etc.  Car radios,

transistor sets and radios which could be operated on both battery or

electric current were also included.  If the household reported only having

sending-receiving or crystal radio sets, the household was classified as

having "No radio".

     ”Television.•  The data for television were derived from the answers to

question H23.  This item showed the number of households having a television

set in the living quarters, regardless of ownership.  Only sets in working

order or being repaired were considered.  Included were television sets such

as floor, table, built-in or portable models, or combinations with radio or

record players, whether "black and white" or "color".  If the household had

no television set or only had television sets kept elsewhere other than the

living quarters, it was classified as having "No television".

FINANCIALœ

     ”Value.•  The data on value were derived from question H29b.  Value was

the respondent's estimate of how much the property (house and lot) or

condominium unit would sell for, if it were for sale.  For vacant units,

value was the price asked for the property.

     Value and price asked were tabulated separately for certain kinds of

housing units.  Value statistics were presented for "specified

owner-occupied" housing units and "specified vacant for sale only" housing

units.  These "specified" housing units included only one-family houses

without a commercial establishment or medical office on the property.  Mobile

homes, trailers, boats, tents or vans occupied as a usual residence, and

owner-occupied noncondominium units in multi-family buildings were also

excluded from the value tabulations.

     ”Rent.•  Data on rent were collected from all renter-occupied housing

units.  Respondents were asked to report rent only for the housing unit

enumerated and to exclude any rent paid for additional units or for business

purposes.

     ”Contract Rent.•  Data on contract rent were derived from question H27.

Contract rent was the monthly rent agreed to, or contracted for, regardless

of any furnishings, utilities, or services that may have been included.  For

vacant units, it was the rent asked for the unit at the time of enumeration.

Respondents were asked to report rent only for the housing unit enumerated

and to exclude any rent paid for additional units or for business premises.

Renter units occupied without payment of cash rent were shown separately as

"No cash rent" in the rent tabulations.

     ”Gross Rent.•  Data on gross rent were derived from the answers to

question H20.  The computed rent termed "Gross rent" was the contract rent

plus the estimated average monthly cost of utilities and fuels, (electricity,

water, oil, gas, kerosene, wood, etc.) if these were paid for by the renter

(or paid for the renter by someone else) in addition to rent.  "Gross rent"

was intended to eliminate differentials which resulted from varying practices

with respect to the inclusion of utilities and fuels as part of the rental

payment.  The estimated cost of fuels was reported on a yearly basis but was

converted to monthly figures in the computation process.  Renter units

occupied without payment of cash rent were shown separately as "No cash rent"

in the tabulations.

     ”Mortgage Status and Selected Monthly Owner Costs.•  The data for

mortgage status and selected monthly owner costs were derived from the

answers to questions H20, H30, H31, and H33.  The data were presented for

"Specified owner-occupied" housing units.  These "specified" housing units

included only one-family houses with no commercial establishment or medical

office of the property.  The data excluded owner-occupied condominium housing

units, mobile homes, trailers, boats, tents, or vans occupied as a usual

residence, as well as owner-occupied noncondominium units in multi-family

buildings.  Separate distributions were shown for units "With a mortgage" and

for units "Not mortgaged."  Selected monthly owner costs was the sum of

payments for mortgages, or similar debts on the property; real estate taxes;

fire and hazard insurance on the property; and utilities and fuels

(electricity, water, oil, gas, kerosene, wood, etc.).


OCCUPANCY AND VACANCY CHARACTERISTICSœ

À      [           The geographic distribution of houses

on Guam has changed markedly in the last

20 years (Table 14.1).  In 1960, the

Central region accounted for 41 percent of

the houses on the island, the South held

26 percent, and the North had 33 percent

of all houses.  In 1970, the North was the

only region that recorded a growth in the

proportion of houses located there; both

the Central and Southern regions, while

increasing in the number of houses,

decreased in the percent located there.

The situation remained the same in 1980:

the proportion of homes in the North grew

by 19 percent over 1970 levels, while the

Central and Southern regions decreased by

11 and 15 percent, respectively.
À   2     

À      [
[ÀTable 14.1  Housing Distribution By Region and Election District:
                              1960 to 1980
--------------------------------------------------------------------
                        Numbers           Percent     Percent Change
                  --------------------------------------------------
                                                        1970-  1960-
Geographic Area     1980  1970  1960  1980  1970  1960   1980   1970
--------------------------------------------------------------------

         Total.... 28249 16680 12373 100.0 100.0 100.0   69.4   34.8
North............. 13244  6559  4105  46.9  39.3  33.2  101.9   59.8
  Dededo..........  5558  2295  1176  19.7  13.8   9.5  142.2   95.2
  Tamuning........  4788  2208  1390  16.9  13.2  11.2  116.8   58.8
  Yigo............  2898  2056  1539  10.3  12.3  12.4   41.0   33.6

Central...........  9291  6153  5029  32.9  36.9  40.6   51.0   22.4
  Agana...........   384   515   331   1.4   3.1   2.7  -25.4   55.6
  Agana Hts.......   971   669   689   3.4   4.0   5.6   45.1   -2.9
  Asan............   589   581   602   2.1   3.5   4.9    1.4   -3.5
  Barrigada.......  1930  1307  1110   6.8   7.8   9.0   47.7   17.7
  Chalan Pago-                                                    
    Ordot.........   738   526   304   2.6   3.2   2.5   40.3   73.0
  Mangilao........  2067   740   355   7.3   4.4   2.9  179.3  108.5
  Mongmong-Toto-                                                   
    Maite.........  1490   896   667   5.3   5.4   5.4   66.3   34.3
  Piti............   503   239   275   1.8   1.4   2.2  110.5  -13.1
  Sinajana........   619   680   696   2.2   4.1   5.6   -9.0   -2.3

South.............  5714  3968  3239  20.2  23.8  26.2   44.0   22.5
  Agat............   990   819   587   3.5   4.9   4.7   20.9   39.5
  Inarajan........   455   321   269   1.6   1.9   2.2   41.7   19.3
  Merizo..........   398   271   234   1.4   1.6   1.9   46.9   15.8
  Santa Rita...... 
2253  1610  1356   8.0   9.7  11.0   39.9   18.7
  Talofofo........   445   350   208   1.6   2.1   1.7   27.1   68.3
  Umatac..........   147   130   110    .5    .8    .9   13.1   18.2
  Yona............ 
1026   467   475   3.6   2.8   3.8  119.7   -1.7
____________________________________________________________________
SOURCE:  U.S. Bureau of the Census 1960 Census of Housing Volume 1
         Part 9 Table 1; HC(1)-A54 1970 Table 1; HC80-1-A54 1980
         Table 1.                                                
À
[    
     The total number of persons in occupied housing units grew from 55,140

in 1960 to 75,233 in 1970 to 101,000 in 1980 (83 percent increase in 20

years) (Table 14.2).  The Northern region grew the most: 81 percent between

1960 and 1970, and 66 percent between 1970 and 1980.  The Central region grew

the least: 18 percent between 1960 and 1970, and 14 percent between 1970 and

1980.  The change in the distribution of persons in occupied housing units

follows that of the distribution of housing units shown in Table 14.1: growth

in the North, decline on the Central and Southern regions.

À      [

[ÀTable 14.2  Distribution of Persons in Occupied Housing Units by
            Region and Election District: 1960 to 1980
----------------------------------------------------------------------
                                  Numbers              Percent
                           -------------------------------------------
Geographic Area               1980   1970   1960   1980   1970   1960
----------------------------------------------------------------------

    Persons in occpd units. 101000  75233  55140  100.0  100.0  100.0
North......................  45930  27728  15311   45.5   36.9   27.8
  Dededo...................  23318   9941   4634   23.1   13.2    8.4
  Tamuning.................  13225   9062   5443   13.1   12.0    9.9
  Yigo.....................   9387   8725   5234    9.3   11.6    9.5

Central....................  32154  28253  23926   31.8   37.6   43.4
  Agana....................    885   1809   1433     .9    2.4    2.6
  Agana Hts................   3148   2889   3003    3.1    3.8    5.4
  Asan.....................   1999   2604   2593    2.0    3.5    4.7
  Barrigada................   7169   6224   5422    7.1    8.3    9.8
  Chalan Pago-Ordot........   3107   2885   1735    3.1    3.8    3.1
  Mangilao.................   6622   3095   1532    6.6    4.1    2.8
  Mongmong-Toto-Maite......   5215   4005   2929    5.2    5.3    5.3
  Piti.....................   1524   1247   1417    1.5    1.7    2.6
  Sinajana.................   2485   3495   3862    2.5    4.6    7.0

South......................  22916  19252  15903   22.7   25.6   28.8
  Agat.....................   3978   4200   3097    3.9    5.6    5.6
  Inarajan.................   2043   1879   1730    2.0    2.5    3.1
  Merizo...................   1651   1518   1389    1.6    2.0    2.5
  Santa Rita...............  
8311   6386   5277    8.2    8.5    9.6
  Talofofo.................   1980   1884   1352    2.0    2.5    2.5
  Umatac...................    732    813    744     .7    1.1    1.3
  Yona.....................  
4221   2572   2314    4.2    3.4    4.2
______________________________________________________________________
SOURCE:  U.S. Bureau of the Census General Population Characteristics
         1960 Table 26; HC(1)-A54 1970 Table 1; HC80-1-A54 1980 Table 2.
À

[    
     There were 4.83 persons per occupied unit in 1970, compared to 4.07

persons in 1980, a 16 percent decrease (Table 14.3).  Nearly 88 percent of

the total population were in occupied units in 1970; 12 percent were in group

quarters.  Only 5 percent were in group quarters in 1980, a decrease of 49

percent.  The proportion of persons in occupied units grew by 34 percent

between 1970 and 1980.

À      [

[ÀTable 14.3  Occupancy Characteristics: 1970 and 1980
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                    Number           Percent           
                               ---------------   --------------       
Occupancy Characteristics       1980     1970     1980     1970   Change
------------------------------------------------------------------------

     Total persons.........   105979    84996    100.0    100.0     24.7
Persons in occupied units..   101000    75233     95.3     88.5     34.2
    Per occupied unit......     4.07     4.83      ...      ...    -15.7
Group quarters.............     4979     9763      4.7     11.5    -49.0
________________________________________________________________________
SOURCE:  U.S. Bureau of the Census HC(1)-A54 1970 Table 1; HC80-1-A54
         1980 Table 2; HC80-1-B54 1980 Table 15.                   
À

[    
     Off-base housing made up 83 percent of all occupied housing units in

1980 (Table 14.4).  Both off- and on-base housing was primarily rented: 54

percent of off-base and 98 percent of on-base units were renter-occupied.

There were 3.51 persons per occupied housing unit in on-base housing and 4.19

per off-base unit.  There were more persons per unit in owner-occupied units

for off-base houses (4.87) than for on-base (2.58), but for renter-occupied

houses the reverse was true: on-base rental units had 3.51 persons per unit

to 3.32 persons for off-base homes.

À      [[ÀTable 14.4  Occupancy Characteristics and Tenure By Persons Living
            In On-base and Off-base Housing: 1980
-----------------------------------------------------------------
                                    Number            Percent
                            ------------------ -----------------
                                  Offbse Onbse      Offbse Onbse
Occupancy                    Total Hsing Hsing Total Hsing Hsing
----------------------------------------------------------------

    Occupied housing units.  24834 20478  4356 100.0 100.0 100.0
Owner occupied units.......  11469 11457    12  46.2  55.9    .3
Renter occupied units......  13365  9021  4344  53.8  44.1  99.7

   Persons in occpd units.. 101000 85713 15287 100.0 100.0 100.0
Owner occupied unit........  55811 55780    31  55.3  65.1    .2
Renter occupied unit.......  45189 29933 15256  44.7  34.9  99.8

   Persons per occpd unit..   4.07  4.19  3.51  (X)    (X)   (X)
Owner occupied.............   4.87  4.87  2.58  (X)    (X)   (X)
Renter occupied............   3.38  3.32  3.51  (X)    (X)   (X)
__________________________________________________________________
SOURCE:  U.S. Bureau of the Census HC-80-1-A54 1980 Tables 2 and 5.
À[     
     Slightly over 91 percent of housing on military bases was occupied in

1980, most (over 99 percent) was rented (Table 14.5).  The highest rate of

occupancy was at Agana Station at 99 percent; the lowest was at Marbo Annex

(80 percent).  Nearly all of the units that were rented were done so for no

cash rent.

À      [

[ÀTable 14.5  Housing on Military Base Areas: 1980
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                          No cash rent
                                                      ------------------
Military Base Areas          Total    Occupied  Rented   Number  Percent
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    On-base housing units..     4771     4356     4344     4236     97.2
Agana Hts. Naval Hospital..       71       68       68       66     97.1
Agana Station..............      487      483      483      465     96.3
Andersen Air Force Base....     1396     1135     1131     1126     99.2
Apra Harbor................     1432     1381     1374     1332     96.5
Finegayan..................      874      857      856      852     99.4
Marbo Annex................      363      292      292      271     92.8
Nimitz Hill Annex..........      148      140      140      124     88.6
________________________________________________________________________
SOURCE:  U.S. Bureau of the Census HC80-1-A54 1980 Table 5.
À

[    
     Of all occupied housing units in 1970, 54 percent were occupied by

renters; nearly 7 percent for no cash rent (Table 14.6).  In both 1970 and

1980, 9 percent of occupied housing units were vacant for sale only.  Those

units vacant for rent only in 1970 made up 38 percent of all vacant housing

units, in 1980 this rose to 41 percent.  Units vacant for other reasons made

up 53 percent of all vacant housing units in 1970, but only 32 percent of

units in 1980.

À      [
[ÀTable 14.6     Tenure: 1970 and 1980
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                             Number           Percent
                                        ---------------   --------------
Tenure                                   1980     1970     1980     1970
------------------------------------------------------------------------

     Occupied housing units.........    24834    15569    100.0    100.0
Owner occupied housing..............    11469     7165     46.2     46.0
  Percent of occupied housing.......     46.2     46.0      ...      ...
Renter occupied housing.............    13365     8404     53.8     54.0
  No cash rent......................     5704     1070     23.0      6.9

     Vacant housing units...........     3257     1107    100.0    100.0
Vacant for sale only................      276      100      8.5      9.0
  Homeowner vacancy rate............      2.3      1.4      ...      ...
    Vacant for sale 6 or more mos...       65      ...      2.0      ...
  With complete plumbing............      253      ...      7.8      ...
Vacant for rent.....................     1347      421     41.4     38.0
  Rental vacancy rate...............      9.2      4.8      ...      ...
    Vacant for rent 2 or more mos...      616      ...     18.9      ...
  With complete plumbing............     1328      ...     40.8      ...
Held for occasional use.............      198      ...      6.1      ...
Rented or sold awaiting occupant....      404      ...     12.4      ...
Other vacant........................     1032      586     31.7     52.9
  Boarded up........................       85      ...      2.6      ...
________________________________________________________________________
SOURCE:  U.S. Bureau of the Census HC(1)-A54 1970 Table 1; HC80-1-A54
         1980 Table 2; Summary Tape File 1A 1980 Tables 53 and 54.
À
[    

É[1]„!B„!ÉË

˂
J

EÀÀ

E

JÀÀ

JJÀÀJLÀÎÎÐBZÐË


ËÀL      Of those units that were vacant for sale only in 1980, over 23 percent

had been vacant for 6 or more months.  The rate was nearly twice as high for

units that were vacant for rent only for 2 or more months.  Those units that

were vacant for sale only had complete plumbing in 92 out of 100 homes; those

vacant for rent only had complete plumbing in nearly 99 of 100 homes.

 

 

UTILIZATION CHARACTERISTICSœ

 

     In 1980, 55 percent of all occupied housing units were owner-occupied;

the remaining 45 percent were rental units (Table 14.7).  Of all rental

units, 67 percent were single-family homes, 8 percent were duplexes, less

than 1 percent were mobile homes or trailers.  Structures with 3 or more

units comprised the final 25 percent of rental units.  Owner-occupied homes

were mainly single-family homes (95 percent) or duplexes (3 percent), with

just over 2 percent being structures with 3 or more units.

 

À      [[ÀTable 14.7. Persons in Occupied Housing Units by Owner/Renter

            Status by Units in Structure:1980

-------------------------------------------------------------

Units in                                        Percent

Structure                                1980  of Total Prcnt

-------------------------------------------------------------

 

         Total persons in housing...   101000    100.0    ...

1, detached.........................    68439     67.8    ...

1, attached.........................    14439     14.3    ...

2...................................     4935      4.9    ...

3 or 4..............................     3496      3.5    ...

5 or more...........................     8951      8.9    ...

Mobile home or trailer..............      715       .7    ...

Boat................................       25      0.0    ...

 

         Persons in rental units....    45189     44.7  100.0

1, detached.........................    17187     17.0   38.0

1, attached.........................    12928     12.8   28.6

2...................................     3565      3.5    7.9

3 or 4..............................     2817      2.8    6.2

5 or more...........................     8309      8.2   18.4

Mobile home or trailer..............      378       .4     .8

Boat................................        5      0.0    0.0

 

         Persons in owner occ units.    55811     55.3  100.0

1, detached.........................    51252     50.7   91.8

1, attached.........................     1511      1.5    2.7

2...................................     1370      1.4    2.5

3 or 4..............................      679       .7    1.2

5 or more...........................      642       .6    1.2

Mobile home or trailer..............      337       .3     .6

Boat................................       20      0.0    0.0

_____________________________________________________________

SOURCE:  Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A Table 104.

À[  

     In 1970, the category of number of persons in housing units that had the

highest frequency was that of 4 persons per unit, followed by 8 or more

persons per unit (Table 14.8).  By 1980, this had changed only somewhat: 4

persons per room still had the highest percentage, but the second most

frequent number of persons per unit was shared with 2 and 3 persons.  The

category of 1 person per unit showed the greatest change between 1970 and

1980: it increased by 119 percent.  The number of houses with 8 or more

persons per unit had the greatest decline: this category went from 17 percent

of housing units in 1970 to only 7 percent in 1980.

 

À      [[ÀTable 14.8.   Persons in Units: 1970 and 1980

---------------------------------------------------------------

                                       Change                

                       Number            From       Percent  

                  ------------------  1970 to------------------

Persons in Units       1980     1970     1980     1980     1970

---------------------------------------------------------------

 

         Total....    24834    15569     59.5    100.0    100.0

1 person..........     2226     1015    119.3      9.0      6.5

2 persons.........     4503     2375     89.6     18.1     15.3

3 persons.........     4499     2264     98.7     18.1     14.5

4 persons.........     4866     2661     82.9     19.6     17.1

5 persons.........     3263     2093     55.9     13.1     13.4

6 persons.........     2156     1493     44.4      8.7      9.6

7 persons.........     1474     1033     42.7      5.9      6.6

8 or more persons.     1847     2635    -29.9      7.4     16.9

Median............      3.7      4.6      ...      ...      ...

----------------------------------------------------------------------

--

Source:  U.S. Bureau of the Census HC80-1-A54, 1980 Table 3;

         HC(1)-A54, 1970, Table 1.

À[  

     Most housing structures had between 4 and 5 rooms in both 1970 and 1980

(Table 14.9).  Fully 31 percent of structures had 5 rooms in 1970; this

decreased to 29 percent in 1980.  Over 24 percent of houses had 4 rooms in

1970, rising to 36 percent in 1980, an increase of over 83 percent in the

number of homes with 4 rooms.  The categories that showed the greatest

increases between 1970 and 1980 were those of 7 and 8 or more rooms: the

number of units with 7 rooms increased by 120 percent; those with 8 or more

rooms grew by 113 percent.  No categories decreased during this time.

 

À      [[ÀTable 14.9.  Rooms in Structure: 1970 and 1980

--------------------------------------------------------------

                                       Change               

                       Number            From     Percent   

                  ------------------  1970 to------------------

Rooms                  1980     1970     1980     1980     1970

---------------------------------------------------------------

 

         Total....    28091    16676     68.5    100.0    100.0

1 room............      512      386     32.6      1.8      2.3

2 rooms...........     1264     1141     10.8      4.5      6.8

3 rooms...........     3195     2181     46.5     11.4     13.1

4 rooms...........     7437     4055     83.4     26.5     24.3

5 rooms...........     8000     5162     55.0     28.5     31.0

6 rooms...........     5251     2635     99.3     18.7     15.8

7 rooms...........     1662      755    120.1      5.9      4.5

8 or more rooms...      770      361    113.3      2.7      2.2

Median............      4.7      4.6      2.2      ...      ...

---------------------------------------------------------------

Source:  U.S. Bureau of the Census HC80-1-A54, Table 3;

         HC(1)-A54, 1970, Table 2.                                   

              

À[  

     Along with the change in the number of persons per unit, the number of

persons per room also changed (Table 14.10).  In 1960, the category of

persons per room with the highest percentage was that of "0.75 persons or

less per room".  In 1970, this had changed to "0.76 to 1.00 persons per

room".  However, there were additional categories of smaller numbers of

persons per room at this time.  The total two lower categories equal to "0.75

persons per room or less", compared to that category for 1960, would be

greater than 35 percent and higher than that of 1960, showing an increase in

that category over the intervening 10 years.

 

          By 1980, the highest single category of persons per room was that

of "0.50 or less".  Again, when categories are combined to make "0.75 or

less", the percentage rose to 51, an increase of 15 percentage points over 10

years.

 

     Owner-occupied units had more persons per room in all 3 Census years

than did renter-occupied units.  In 1960, the greatest frequency for

owner-occupied units was "1.51 or more" persons per room; for renters it was

"0.51 to 0.75" persons per room.  In 1970, the category for the owners had

not changed, but renters had shifted to "0.76 to 1.00" persons per room.  In

1980, owners had moved to the category of "0.76 to 1.00" but renters had

moved down to "0.5 or less" persons per room.

 

À     [
[ÀTable 14.10.  Persons per Room: 1960 to 1980

---------------------------------------------------------------------

                                    Number             Percent

                             -------------------  -------------------

Persons per Room              1980   1970   1960   1980   1970   1960

---------------------------------------------------------------------

 

  Year-round units.........  24834  15569  10830  100.0  100.0  100.0

0.50 or less...............   6678   2884   (X)    26.9   18.5   ...

0.51 to 0.75...............   5882   2634   3631   23.7   16.9   33.5

0.76 to 1.00...............   6218   4101   2959   25.0   26.3   27.3

1.01 to 1.50...............   3732   2644   1894   15.0   17.0   17.5

1.51 or more...............   2324   3306   2270    9.4   21.2   21.0

Not reported...............    ...    ...     76    ...    ...     .7

 

  Owner-occupied units.....  11469   7165   5028  100.0  100.0  100.0

0.50 or less...............   2431    991    (X)   21.2   13.8    ...

0.51 to 0.75...............   2020    786   1089   17.6   11.0   21.7

0.76 to 1.00...............   3060   1402    876   26.7   19.6   17.4

1.01 to 1.50...............   2427   1549   1177   21.2   21.6   23.4

1.51 or more...............   1531   2437   1855   13.3   34.0   36.9

Not reported...............    ...    ...     31    ...    ...     .6

 

  Renter-occupied units....  13365   8404   5802  100.0  100.0  100.0

0.50 or less...............   4247   1893    (X)   31.8   22.5    ...

0.51 to 0.75...............   3862   1848   2542   28.9   22.0   43.8

0.76 to 1.00...............   3158   2699   2083   23.6   32.1   35.9

1.01 to 1.50...............   1305   1095    717    9.8   13.0   12.4

1.51 or more...............    793    869    415    5.9   10.3    7.2

Not reported...............    ...    ...     45    ...    ...     .7

_____________________________________________________________________

Note:  (X) indicates persons per room is 0.75 or less in 1960.    

 

SOURCE:  U.S. Bureau of the Census HC-1-A54 1980 Table 3; HC(1)-A54

         1970 Table 2; Census of Housing Part 9 Chapter 54 1960 Table 1.

À
[    

PLUMBING CHARACTERISTICSœ

 

     The plumbing and sewage facilities available to island residents are not

only important for those concerned with housing, but to Public Health

officials as well.  Lack of clean, uncontaminated water, and improper

disposal of sewage can lead to epidemics of such diseases as Salmonella and

Shigella.  Guam has recorded several deaths from these diseases in the past.

Fortunately, the majority of housing units in both 1970 and 1980 had complete

plumbing facilities: 81 percent in 1970, and 96 percent in 1980 (Table

14.11).  In 1970, 64 percent of units had complete plumbing with both hot and

cold piped water, as did to 84 percent in 1980, a 31 percent increase in the

proportion of units with complete plumbing.  Only 17 percent of year-round

units had incomplete plumbing in 1970; this further decreased to 4 percent in

1980.  Renter-occupied units had higher proportions of homes with complete

plumbing than did owner-occupied units in both 1970 and 1980.

 

À      [[ÀTable 14.11.  Plumbing Facilities: 1970 and 1980

----------------------------------------------------------------

                                          Number        Percent

                                      ------------- ------------

Plumbing Facilities                    1980   1970   1980   1970

----------------------------------------------------------------

 

         Total year-round units.....  28091  16676  100.0  100.0

Complete plumbing...................  26919  13530   95.8   81.1

  With hot and cold piped water.....  23689  10729   84.3   64.3

  With only cold piped water........   3230   2801   11.5   16.8

Lacking complete plumbing...........   1172   3146    4.2   18.9

 

         Owner occupied units.......  11469   7165  100.0  100.0

Complete plumbing...................  10902   4950   95.1   69.1

  With hot and cold piped water.....   9083   3216   79.2   44.9

  With only cold piped water........   1819   1734   15.9   24.2

Lacking complete plumbing...........    567   2215    4.9   30.9

 

         Renter occupied units......  13365   8404  100.0  100.0

Complete plumbing...................  13052   7647   97.7   91.0

  With hot and cold piped water.....  12098   6716   90.5   79.9

  With only cold piped water........    954    931    7.1   11.1

Lacking complete plumbing...........    313    757    2.3    9.0

________________________________________________________________

SOURCE:  U.S. Bureau of the Census HC(1)-A54 1970 Table 3;

         HC80-1-A54 1980 Table 2.                        

À[  

     Water supply is also an important health concern (Table 14.12).  In

1960, nearly 55 percent of all year-round units had both hot and cold piped

water.  This proportion rose to over 65 percent in 1970, and nearly 85

percent in 1980.  An additional 36 percent of units had only cold piped water

in 1960, and 9 percent had no piped water at all.  This last category had

fallen to only one-half of one percent by 1980.  Renter-occupied units had

higher proportions with both hot and cold piped water in all 3 Census years.

It should be remembered that most on-base housing was renter-occupied, and

that such housing was constructed to different standards than local housing:

those living on-base demanded amenities.

 

ÎÎÐBdÐÀ      [

[ÀTable 14.12.  Water Supply: 1960 to 1980

---------------------------------------------------------------------

                                     Number              Percent

                             -------------------- -------------------

Water Supply                  1980   1970   1960   1980   1970   1960

---------------------------------------------------------------------

 

  Year-round units.........  28091  16676  12373  100.0  100.0  100.0

Hot and cold piped water...  23808  10966   6770   84.8   65.8   54.7

Only cold piped water......   4141   5440   4474   14.7   32.6   36.2

No piped water.............    142    270   1129     .5    1.6    9.1

 

  Owner-occupied units.....  11469   7165   5028  100.0  100.0  100.0

Hot and cold piped water...   9138   3357   1027   79.7   46.9   20.4

Only cold piped water......   2307   3654   3378   20.1   51.0   67.2

No piped water.............     24    154    623     .2    2.1    9.1

 

  Renter-occupied units....  13365   8404   5802  100.0  100.0  100.0

Hot and cold piped water...  12140   6802   4771   90.8   80.9   82.2

Only cold piped water......   1196   1551    856    8.9   18.5   14.8

No piped water.............     29     51    175     .2     .6    3.0

_____________________________________________________________________

SOURCE:  U.S. Bureau of the Census, Census of Housing Part 9 Chapter

         54 1960 Table 3; HC(1)-A54 1970 Table 3; HC80-1-A54 1980 Table 2.

À

[          Toilet facilities are another important health-related amenity (Table

14.13).  Flush toilets were present in over 69 percent of year-round units in

1960, and by 1980, in nearly 98 percent of units.  The majority were inside

the building.  Outhouses or privies were present in 30 percent of housing

units in 1960, but only 2 percent by 1980.  Very few units had no facilities

in 1960, but 3 percent in 1970 had facilities, then decreased to less than 1

percent in 1980.  As with water supply, renter-occupied units had higher

rates of toilet facilities than did owner-occupied units in all 3 Censuses.

À     [

Table 14.13.  Toilet Facilities: 1960 to 1980

---------------------------------------------------------------------

                                    Number              Percent

                             -------------------- -------------------

Toilet Facilities             1980   1970   1960   1980   1970   1960

---------------------------------------------------------------------

 

    Year-round units.......  28091  16676  12373  100.0  100.0  100.0

Flush toilet...............  27377  14043   8577   97.5   84.2   69.3

  Inside this building.....  27120  13851   8390   96.5   83.1   67.8

  Outside this building....    257    192    187     .9    1.2    1.5

Outhouse or privy..........    545   2076   3773    1.9   12.4   30.5

Other or none..............    169    557     23     .6    3.3     .2

 

    Owner-occupied units...  11469   7165   5028  100.0  100.0  100.0

Flush toilet...............  11154   5277   2301   97.3   73.6   45.8

  Inside this building.....  11002   5143   2163   95.9   71.8   43.0

  Outside this building....    152    134    138    1.3    1.9    2.7

Outhouse or privy..........    287   1534   2713    2.5   21.4   54.0

Other or none..............     28    354     14     .2    4.9     .3

 

    Renter-occupied units..  13365   8404   5802  100.0  100.0  100.0

Flush toilet...............  13185   7812   5183   98.7   93.0   89.3

  Inside this building.....  13110   7759   5141   98.1   92.3   88.6

  Outside this building....     75     53     42     .6     .6     .7

Outhouse or privy..........    131    468    610    1.0    5.6   10.5

Other or none..............     49    124      9     .4    1.5     .2

_____________________________________________________________________

SOURCE:  U.S. Bureau of the Census, Census of Housing Part 9 Chapter

         54 1960 Table 3; HC(1)-A54 1970 Table 3; HC80-1-A54 1980 Table 2.

À

[      [ÀÜÜ
ÎÎÐBZÐ

     Tank-type water heaters were present in nearly 85 percent of all housing

units in 1980, and in nearly 86 percent of occupied units (Table 14.14).

Owner-occupied housing units had the lowest percentage of tank-type water

heaters at 80 percent.  Electricity was the fuel most commonly used to

operate these heaters, followed by gas.  Very few water heaters were powered

by solar energy, and the majority of these were in owner-occupied units.

 

À     [
[ÀTable 14.14.  Energy Used by Tank-type Water Heaters by Region: 1980

------------------------------------------------------------------------

                                  Number                  Percent

                        ------------------------ -----------------------

Energy Type              Total North Cntrl South Total North Cntrl South

------------------------------------------------------------------------

 

    Total Units......... 28091 13175  9247  5669 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Electricity............. 22745 11009  7484  4252  81.0  83.6  80.9  75.0

Gas.....................  1008   775   178    55   3.6   5.9   1.9   1.0

Solar energy............    50    12    17    21    .2    .1    .2    .4

Other fuels.............     5     3     2     0   0.0    .0    .0   0.0

No tank-type wtr heater.  4283  1376  1566  1341  15.2  10.4  16.9  23.7

 

    Total occpd units... 24834 11595  8070  5169 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Electricity............. 20296  9723  6610  3963  81.7  83.9  81.9  76.7

Gas.....................   927   716   158    53   3.7   6.2   2.0   1.0

Solar energy............    50    12    17    21    .2    .1    .2    .4

Other fuels     ........     5     3     2     0   0.0    .0    .0   0.0

No tank-type wtr heater.  3556  1141  1283  1132  14.3   9.8  15.9  21.9

 

    Renter-occpd units.. 13365  6651  4089  2625 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Electricity............. 11832  6025  3572  2235  88.5  90.6  87.4  85.1

Gas.....................   294   247    31    16   2.2   3.7    .8    .6

Solar energy............    11     1     9     1    .1    .0    .2    .0

Other fuels.............     3     2     1     0   0.0    .0    .0   0.0

No tank-type wtr heater.  1225   376   476   373   9.2   5.7  11.6  14.2

 

    Owner-occpd units... 11469  4944  3981  2544 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Electricity.............  8464  3698  3038  1728  73.8  74.8  76.3  67.9

Gas.....................   633   469   127    37   5.5   9.5   3.2   1.5

Solar energy............    39    11     8    20    .3    .2    .2    .8

Other fuels.............     2     1     1     0   0.0    .0    .0   0.0

No tank-type wtr heater.  2331   765   807   759  20.3  15.5  20.3  29.8

________________________________________________________________________

SOURCE: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A Table 114.

À
[    

     In 1970, 98 percent of year-round units used the public system as their

source of water, as did over 99 percent in 1980 (Table 14.15).  Less than 1

percent in both years got their water from catchments, tanks or drums, or

from public standpipes or hydrants.  The proportion of year-round units which

relied on some other source for water fell from over 1 percent in 1970 to

well below 1 percent in 1980.

 

À      [[ÀTable 14.15.  Source of Water: 1970 and 1980

---------------------------------------------------------------

                                   Number            Percent

                               ---------------   ---------------

Source of Water                 1980     1970     1980     1970

---------------------------------------------------------------

 

    Year-round units.......    28091    16676    100.0    100.0

Public system..............    27972    16292     99.6     97.7

Individual well............        9        2      0.0      0.0

Catchment, tanks, drums....       34       75       .1       .4

Public standpipe, hydrant..        9       60      0.0       .4

Some other source..........       67      247       .2      1.5

_______________________________________________________________

SOURCE:  U.S. Bureau of the Census HC80-1-B54 1980 Table 10;

         HC(1)-B54 1970 Table 4.                          

À[  

 

À     [           Disposal of sewage is also a Public

Health concern, as mentioned earlier

(Table 14.16).  In 1980, 72 percent of all

year-round units used a public sewer, 25

percent used a septic tank, and the

remaining 3 percent used other means.  The

North had the highest proportion of units

using a public sewer (84 percent),

followed by the Central region at 62

percent, and the South, with 58 percent. 

In the North, 14 percent of units used a

septic tank, and 2 percent used other

means.  In the South, 35 percent of units

used septic tanks and over 7 percent used

other means.  The Central region had the

greatest proportion of units using septic

tanks, 35 percent, with the other 3

percent using other means.

À     2     

     Dededo was the village with the highest proportion of year-round units

using public sewers; Merizo and Umatac the lowest.  Barrigada had the

greatest percentage of units using septic tanks; Agana the smallest.  For

those villages using other means, Dededo had the highest proportion, Agana

the lowest.

 

À     [

[ÀTable 14.16.  Sewage Disposal By Election District: 1980

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

                                 Number                       Percent

                           ------------------------ -----------------------

                            Total      Septic Other Total      Septic Other

Sewage Disposal             Units Sewer  Tank Means Units Sewer  Tank Means

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

 

    Total year-round units. 28091 20116  7124   851 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

North...................... 13175 11061  1913   201  46.9  55.0  26.9  23.6

  Dededo...................  5495  4610   754   131  19.6  22.9  10.6  15.4

  Tamuning.................  4784  4336   423    25  17.0  21.6   5.9   2.9

  Yigo.....................  2896  2115   736    45  10.3  10.5  10.3   5.3

 

Central....................  9247  5751  3252   244  32.9  28.6  45.6  28.7

  Agana....................   383   348    31     4   1.4   1.7    .4    .5

  Agana Heights............   971   818   144     9   3.5   4.1   2.0   1.1

  Asan.....................   587   393   179    15   2.1   2.0   2.5   1.8

  Barrigada................  1909   861   988    60   6.8   4.3  13.9   7.1

  Chalan Pago-Ordot........   734   111   560    63   2.6    .6   7.9   7.4

  Mangilao.................  2054  1190   821    43   7.3   5.9  11.5   5.1

  Mongmong-Toto-Maite......  1490  1092   380    18   5.3   5.4   5.3   2.1

  Piti.....................   501   409    69    23   1.8   2.0   1.0   2.7

  Sinajana.................   618   529    80     9   2.2   2.6   1.1   1.1

 

South......................  5669  3304  1959   406  20.2  16.4  27.5  47.7

  Agat.....................   979   727   182    70   3.5   3.6   2.6   8.2

  Inarajan.................   452    17   340    95   1.6    .1   4.8  11.2

  Merizo...................   395     2   322    71   1.4   0.0   4.5   8.3

  Santa Rita...............  2246  1936   264    46   8.0   9.6   3.7   5.4

  Talofofo.................   444    12   380    52   1.6    .1   5.3   6.1

  Umatac...................   147     8   114    25    .5   0.0   1.6   2.9

  Yona.....................  1006   602   357    47   3.6   3.0   5.0   5.5

___________________________________________________________________________

SOURCE:  U.S. Bureau of the Census HC-1-B54 Table 10.

À

[    

STRUCTURAL CHARACTERISTICSœ

 

     In 1970, 52 percent of all year-round units had been built in the decade

1960 to 1969, and 48 percent prior to 1960 (Table 14.17).  In 1980, 70

percent of these units remained, but they accounted for only 41 percent of

all year-round housing units; 59 percent had been built between 1970 and

March 1980.  As both periods had seen Guam ravaged by major typhoons (Karen

in 1962 and Pamela in 1976), some of the units constructed after 1960 and

after 1970 were built to replace those lost to storms.  The majority,

however, were constructed to accommodate the growing population.

 

À     [
[ÀTable 14.17.  Year Structure Built: 1970 and 1980

--------------------------------------------------------------------

                                  Number             Percent

                               ---------------   ---------------

Year Structure Built            1980     1970     1980     1970

--------------------------------------------------------------------

 

   All year-round units....    28091    16676    100.0    100.0

1979 to March 1980.........     1007     ...       3.6      ...

1975 to 1978...............     5036     ...      17.9      ...

1970 to 1974...............    10458     ...      37.2      ...

1960 to 1969...............     7566     8666     26.9     52.0

1950 to 1959...............     3268     5537     11.6     33.2

1940 to 1949...............      672     2251      2.4     13.5

1939 or earlier............       84      222       .3      1.3

____________________________________________________________________

SOURCE:  U.S. Bureau of the Census HC(1)A54 1970 Table 1; HC80-1-B54

         1980 Table 9.                                            

À
[     [ÀÀ      [     

     In the Northern region, the largest

proportion - 41 percent - of all

year-round units had been built between

1970 and 1974, followed by those built

between 1960 to 1969 (Table 14.18).  This

was true for all regions except the South:

the second most common period that houses

were built in was from 1950 to 1959.

À     2     

À     [
[ÀTable 14.18. 
Year Structure Built By Region: 1980

---------------------------------------------------------------------

                             Number                  Percent

                     ------------------------ -----------------------

Year Built            Total North Cntrl South Total North Cntrl South

---------------------------------------------------------------------

 

 Year-round units.    28091 13175  9247  5669 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

 

1979 to March 1980     1007   518   330   159   3.6   3.9   3.6   2.8

1975 to 1978......     5036  1926  1960  1150  17.9  14.6  21.2  20.3

1970 to 1974......    10458  5401  3191  1866  37.2  41.0  34.5  32.9

1960 to 1969......     7566  4127  2296  1143  26.9  31.3  24.8  20.2

1950 to 1959......     3268   894  1198  1176  11.6   6.8  13.0  20.7

1940 to 1949......      672   298   237   137   2.4   2.3   2.6   2.4

1939 or earlier...       84    11    35    38    .3    .1    .4    .7

_____________________________________________________________________

SOURCE:  U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A Table 109.

À
[    

     Single-family houses, both attached and detached, made up the majority

of housing units in both 1970 and 1980 (74 percent), though there was a

slight decrease in the proportion of single-family units in 1980 (Table

14.19).  The percentage of double-family units ("duplexes") decreased sharply

between 1970 and 1980, from 19 percent to 5 percent, a 73 percent decrease.

This decrease was balanced by an increase in the proportion of

multiple-family housing units: in 1970, structures with 3 or more family

units accounted for 7 percent of all year-round units, and by 1980, had grown

to 20 percent.  Structures with 10 or more units made up 62 percent of this

subgroup in 1980, but only 29 percent of it in 1970.  Buildings with 50 or

more units ("condominiums") were not even in evidence in 1970, but accounted

for 4 percent of year-round housing units in 1980.

 

 

 


É[1]„!B„!ÉË

˂
J

EÀÀ

E

JÀÀ

JJÀÀJLÀÎÎÐBZÐË


ËÀL [ÀÀ      [

[ÀTable 14.19.  Units in Structure: 1970 and 1980

-------------------------------------------------------------------------

                                             Change                   

                                Number        From       Percent     

                           ---------------  1970 to----------------------

Units in Structure            1980    1970     1980       1980       1970

-------------------------------------------------------------------------

 

     Units in Structure..    28091   16676     68.5      100.0      100.0

1, detached..............    16300   11321     44.0       58.0       67.9

1, attached..............     4493    1072    319.1       16.0        6.4

2........................     1445    3140    -54.0        5.1       18.8

3 and 4..................     1205     482    150.0        4.3        2.9

5 or more................     4377     611    616.4       15.6        3.7

Boat.....................       13    (NA)     (NA)         .0        0.0

Mobile home or trailer...      258      50    416.0         .9         .3

 

-------------------------------------------------------------------------

Source: U.S Bureau of the Census HC80-1-B54, Table 9, and HC(1)-B54, 1970

        Table 1                                                       

À

[    

     In 1980, 82 percent of year-round housing units were constructed with

concrete outside walls; 74 percent had concrete roofs (Table 14.20).  Of the

remaining units, 9 percent had metal walls, 9 percent had wooden walls, and

less than 1 percent had walls constructed of some other material.  Metal

roofing material was to be found on 21 percent of houses, wood on 2 percent

and some other material on the remaining 2 percent of housing units.

 

À      [[ÀTable 14.20.  Material of Construction: 1980

---------------------------------------------------------------

                                  Number            Percent

                           -------------------  ---------------

Material Used                  Walls     Roof    Walls     Roof

---------------------------------------------------------------

 

  Year-round housing units.    28091    28091    100.0    100.0

Concrete...................    22982    20874     81.8     74.3

Metal......................     2420     5988      8.6     21.3

Wood.......................     2470      553      8.8      2.0

Other......................      219      676       .8      2.4

_______________________________________________________________

SOURCE:  U.S. Bureau of the Census HC80-1-B54 1980 Table 9.

À[   [ÀÀ      [     

     Table 14.21 shows housing by wall

material by region in 1980.  The most

common type of wall material was concrete

block, followed by poured concrete.  For

the Northern region, poured concrete was

the most common wall material, with

concrete block second.  Metal, wood and

other substances made up only 18 percent

overall of materials used for walls, but

over 25 percent of walls in the South were

made of these materials.

 

À     2      [ÀÀ      [
[ÀTable 14.21. 
Year-Round Housing by Type of Material Used For Outside

                  Walls: 1980

---------------------------------------------------------------------

                                Numbers             Percents

                     ------------------------ -----------------------

Material for walls    Total North Cntrl South Total North Cntrl South

---------------------------------------------------------------------

 

     Total Units..    28091 13175  9247  5669 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Poured Concrete...     9172  6217  1745  1210  32.6  47.2  18.9  21.3

Concrete Block....    13810  5151  5640  3019  49.2  39.1  61.0  53.2

Metal.............     2420   802   722   896   8.6   6.1   7.8  15.8

Wood..............     2470   938  1045   487   8.8   7.1  11.3   8.6

Other.............      219    67    95    59    .8    .5   1.0   1.0

_____________________________________________________________________

SOURCE:  U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A Table 171.

À
[     [ÀÀ      [2[À

     By far, the most common roofing

material in all regions was poured

concrete (Table 14.22).  Those roofs made

from materials other than concrete were

those most commonly lost in storms.  The

only region with a significant proportion

of roofs made of metal was the South:

their percentage was 46 percent higher

than that of the next highest region, the

Central, while the Central region had the

highest percentage of roofs made from

other materials.

À2[  

À     [
[ÀTable 14.22.
Year-Round Housing by Type of Material Used For Roof by

             Region: 1980

---------------------------------------------------------------------

                               Number                   Percent

                     ------------------------ -----------------------

Material for walls    Total North Cntrl South Total North Cntrl South

---------------------------------------------------------------------

 

     Total Units..    28091 13175  9247  5669 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Poured Concrete...    20874 10657  6554  3663  74.3  80.9  70.9  64.6

Metal.............     5988  2202  1994  1792  21.3  16.7  21.6  31.6

Wood..............      553   212   252    89   2.0   1.6   2.7   1.6

Other.............      676   104   447   125   2.4    .8   4.8   2.2

_____________________________________________________________________

SOURCE:  U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A Table 172.

À
[    

EQUIPMENT CHARACTERISTICSœ

 

     In 1970, nearly 98 percent of year-round housing units had electric

power, about the same as in 1980 (Table 14.23).  In both years, roughly 2

percent of year-round units had no electric power.  Of those with power in

1980, over 99 percent relied on the public utility; very few had private

generators.

 

À      [[ÀTable 14.23.  Source of Electric Power: 1970 and 1980

---------------------------------------------------------------

                                   Number            Percent

                               ---------------   --------------

                                1980     1970     1980     1970

---------------------------------------------------------------

 

     Year-round units......    28091    16676    100.0    100.0

With electric power........    27553    16298     98.1     97.7

No electric power..........      538      378      1.9      2.3

_______________________________________________________________

SOURCE:  U.S. Bureau of the Census HC(1)-A54 1970 Table 4;

         HC80-1-B54 1980 Table 10.                      

À[  

     In 1970, nearly 98 percent of year-round units had cooking facilities

for their own use, less than 1 percent shared cooking facilities, and almost

2 percent had no cooking facilities (Table 14.24).  In 1980, these

proportions had not changed significantly.  For occupied housing units,

nearly 99 percent had their own cooking facilities, and just over 1 percent

either shared cooking facilities or had none.  By 1980, over 99 percent had

cooking facilities in occupied units.  Of these facilities, 98 percent were

inside the building in both 1970 and 1980.  Electric stoves were used in over

77 percent of occupied housing units, and gas stoves in just over 19 percent.

Kerosene stoves and other cooking devices were used in the remaining

structures.

 

À     [

[ÀTable 14.24.  Cooking Facilities: 1970 and 1980

----------------------------------------------------------------------

                                            Number          Percent

                                        --------------  --------------

Cooking Facilities                      1980     1970     1980    1970

----------------------------------------------------------------------

 

     Total year-round units.........    28091   16676    100.0   100.0

For own use.........................    27587   16326     98.2    97.9

  Inside this unit..................    27000   16035     96.1    96.2

  Outside this unit.................      587     291      2.1     1.7

Also used by another household......      ...      41      ...      .2

No cooking facilities...............      504     309      1.8     1.9

 

     Occupied housing units.........    24834   15569    100.0   100.0

For own use.........................    24731   15389     99.6    98.8

  Inside this building..............    24260   15138     97.7    97.2

  Outside this building.............      471     251      1.9     1.6

Also used by another household......      ...      39      ...      .3

No cooking facilities...............      103     141       .4      .9

______________________________________________________________________

Note: Data on shared cooking facilities not collected in 1980.      

 

SOURCE:  U.S. Bureau of the Census HC(1)A54 1970 Table 4; HC-1-B54

         1980 Table 10.                                                   

À

[    

     In 1960, 91 percent of occupied units had mechanical refrigerators and 9

percent had no refrigerator (Table 14.25).  In 1970, only 88 percent had

mechanical refrigerators, 9 percent had ice boxes, and nearly 3 percent had

no refrigerators.  By 1980, the percentage with mechanical refrigerators had

risen to 98 percent, ice boxes had decreased to just over 1 percent, and

another 1 percent of units had no refrigerators.  This trend was followed in

units that were both owner- and renter-occupied, though renter-occupied units

had higher rates of having mechanical refrigerators than did owner-occupied

units in all 3 Census years.  The lower proportions having mechanical

refrigerators in 1970 may be explained by a change in definition.

 

À      [[ÀTable 14.25.  Refrigerator in Housing Units: 1960 to 1980

---------------------------------------------------------------

                                  Number           Percents

Type of                     ------------------ ----------------

Refrigerator                 1980  1970  1960  1980  1970  1960

---------------------------------------------------------------

 

    Occupied units......... 24834 15569 10830 100.0 100.0 100.0

Mechanical................. 24241 13720  9852  97.6  88.1  91.0

Ice........................   321  1450   ...   1.3   9.3   ...

No refrigerator............   272   399   978   1.1   2.6   9.0

 

    Owner-occupied units... 11469  7165  5028 100.0 100.0 100.0

Mechanical................. 11188  6013  4384  97.5  83.9  87.2

Ice........................   155   890   ...   1.4  12.4   ...

No refrigerator............   126   262   644   1.1   3.7  12.8

 

    Renter-occupied units.. 13365  8404  5802 100.0 100.0 100.0

Mechanical................. 13053  7707  5468  97.7  91.7  94.2

Ice........................   166   560   ...   1.2   6.7   ...

No refrigerator............   146   137   334   1.2   1.6   5.8

_______________________________________________________________

Note: 1960 has data on electric refrigerators only.

      No refrigerator includes not reported.                          

                    

 

SOURCE:  U.S. Bureau of the Census HC80-1-B54 1980 Table 10;

         HC(1)-A54 1970 Table 4; Census of Housing Part 9

         Chapter 54 1960 Table 2.

À[   [ÀÀ      [     

     Of 28,091 year-round housing units

identified in 1980, over 59 percent had

air conditioners (Table 14.26).  Of those

with air conditioners, 33 percent had

central air conditioning, 32 percent had 1

individual room unit, and 35 percent had 2

or more room units.  By region, the

Central area had the most air conditioning

units, followed by the North.  Most of the

housing units had 2 or more individual

room units in the North and South; those

in the Central area had only 1 room unit.

À     2     

À      [[ÀTable 14.26.  Air Conditioning in Unit By Region: 1980

------------------------------------------------------------------

                                Number             Percent

                           ------------------- -----------------

    Type            Total   North Cntrl South North Cntrl South

------------------------------------------------------------------

 

   Year-round units.   28091 13175  9247  5669 100.0 100.0 100.0

None................   11301  4852  3833  2616  40.2  36.8  41.5

Central.............    5567  3455  1308   804  19.8  26.2  14.1

1 ind. room unit..      5366  2529  1961   876  19.1  19.2  21.2

2 or more room units    5857  2339  2145  1373  20.9  17.8  23.2

__________________________________________________________________

SOURCE:  U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A Table 120.

À[2[À

     In 1980, only 7 percent of all

occupied housing units had no vehicle

available to them (Table 14.27).  In 45

percent of the occupied households there

was 1 vehicle for use; 2 vehicles were

available in 35 percent of households, and

13 percent of homes had 3 or more vehicles

that could be used.  Those residing in the

Southern region had the greatest

proportion of single-vehicle available

households; the North had the highest

percentage of households with 2 vehicles

for use, and the Central region had the

greatest proportion of homes with 3 or

more vehicles available for use.

À2[  

Table 14.27.  Vehicles Available in Household: 1980

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

                                      Number             Percent

                           ------------------------ -----------------------

Vehicles Available          Total North Cntrl South Total North Cntrl South

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

 

         Occupied units.... 24834 11595  8070  5169 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

None.......................  1622   643   605   374   6.5   5.5   7.5   7.2

1 vehicle.................. 11193  5296  3523  2374  45.1  45.7  43.7  45.9

2 vehicles.................  8716  4165  2764  1787  35.1  35.9  34.3  34.6

3 or more vehicles.........  3303  1491  1178   634  13.3  12.8  14.6  12.3

___________________________________________________________________________

SOURCE:  U.S. Bureau of the Census HC80-1-B54 1980 Table 10.            

À     [      [ÀÀ      [     

     In 1980, 31 percent of all occupied

housing units had no telephone, 4 percent

had no radio, and 7 percent had no

television (Table 14.28).  The Central

region had the highest proportions of

having none of these characteristics.

From a Civil Defense standpoint, if

information had to be disseminated to the

public, it would reach the largest

audience if it were relayed over the

radio.

À     2     

À     [

[ÀTable 14.28.  Selected Characteristics by Region: 1980

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

                                      Number                 Percent

                            ----------------------- -----------------------

Selected Characteristics    Total North Cntrl South Total North Cntrl South

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

 

  Occupied units........... 24834 11595  8070  5169 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

No telephone...............  7793  3638  2735  1420  31.4  31.4  33.9  27.5

No radio...................  1023   443   358   222   4.1   3.8   4.4   4.3

No television..............  1751   736   624   391   7.1   6.3   7.7   7.6

___________________________________________________________________________

SOURCE:  U.S. Bureau of the Census HC80-1-B54 1980 Table 10.

À

[    

     There were telephones in nearly 69 percent of occupied units in 1980

(though they did not necessarily work) (Table 14.29).  When reviewed by the

age of householder, the age group with the highest percentage of phones were

those who were 60 to 64 years of age, followed by those under 60.  The

elderly (65 and older) had the lowest rate of units with telephones.

À     [

Table 14.29.  Telephone in Unit by Age of Householder: 1980

------------------------------------------------------------------------

                                       Age of Householder

                           ---------------------------------------------

                                       Under   60 to   65 years

Telephone in unit              Total 60 years 64 years and over

------------------------------------------------------------------------

   Total occupied units....    24834    22419     1035     1380

With telephone.............    17041    15415      742      884

   Percent with phone......     68.6     68.8     71.7     64.1

________________________________________________________________________

SOURCE:  U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A 1980 Table 119.

À

[    

     Owner-occupied units had higher percentages of telephones in their units

than did all renter-occupied units (78 percent to 60 percent), but those

units that were occupied with no cash rent had the highest rates of all: 84

percent of those units had phones (Table 14.30).  This was true for each

region as well as the island as a whole.

 

À     [

[ÀTable 14.30.  Telephone in Unit by Tenure and Region: 1980

----------------------------------------------------------------------------

                                      Number                 Percent

                              ------------------------- --------------------

Telephone in Unit           Total  North Cntrl South Total North Cntrl South

----------------------------------------------------------------------------

 

  Total occupied units...   24834  11595  8070  5169 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

With telephone...........   17041   7957  5335  3749  68.6  68.6  66.1  72.5

 

  Renter occupied units..   13365   6651  4089  2625   ...   ...   ...   ...

   With cash rent........    7661   4121  2625   915 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

With telephone...........    3268   1679  1162   427  42.7  40.7  44.3  46.7

   No cash rent..........    5704   2530  1464  1710 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

With telephone...........    4784   2228  1083  1473  83.9  88.1  74.0  86.1

 

  Owner occupied units...   11469   4944  3981  2544 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

With telephone...........    8989   4050  3090  1849  78.4  81.9  77.6  72.7

____________________________________________________________________________

SOURCE: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A 1980 Table 118.

À

[    

FINANCIAL CHARACTERISTICSœ

 

     The value of a housing unit was the respondent's estimate of how much

the property (house and lot) or condominium unit would sell for, if it were

for sale.  For vacant units, value was the price asked for the property.

À     [     

     Table 14.31 shows the value of

housing units by region.  The responses

reflect subjective rather than totally

objective views of the value of the unit.

Those residing in the South and Central

regions stated most frequently that their

homes were worth between $60,000 and

$79,999, and those in the North felt their

units were worth between $50,000 and

$59,999.  The median amounts of value

listed ranged from $55,200 in the North to

$66,400 in the Central area.

À     2     

À      [[ÀTable 14.31.  Value of Housing Units by Region: 1980

-------------------------------------------------------------------

                             Number                 Percent

                   ----------------------- ------------------------

Value              Total North Cntrl South Total North Cntrl South

-------------------------------------------------------------------

Specified owner-                                                

occupied units.... 10489  4412  3706  2371 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

 

Less than $10,000.   395   166    89   140   3.8   3.8   2.4   5.9

$10,000-14,999....   298   102    82   114   2.8   2.3   2.2   4.8

$15,000-19,999....   274    88    90    96   2.6   2.0   2.4   4.0

$20,000-24,999....   332    88   119   125   3.2   2.0   3.2   5.3

$25,000-29,999....   393   197   104    92   3.7   4.5   2.8   3.9

$30,000-34,999....   440   202   139    99   4.2   4.6   3.8   4.2

$35,000-39,999....   397   183   117    97   3.8   4.1   3.2   4.1

$40,000-49,999....  1272   665   363   244  12.1  15.1   9.8  10.3

$50,000-59,999....  1770   994   443   333  16.9  22.5  12.0  14.0

$60,000-79,999....  2660  1091   959   610  25.4  24.7  25.9  25.7

$80,000-99,999....  1022   292   551   179   9.7   6.6  14.9   7.5

$100,000-149,999..   745   178   428   139   7.1   4.0  11.5   5.9

$150,000-199,999..   240    67   119    54   2.3   1.5   3.2   2.3

$200,000 or more..   251    99   103    49   2.4   2.2   2.8   2.1

Median............$57600 55200 66400 55400   ...   ...   ...   ...

___________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census HC80-1-A54 1980 Table 4.      

À[   [ÀÀ      [2[À

     The price asked for vacant for-sale

housing units was similar for all 3

regions on island in 1980: between $60,000

to $79,999 per unit, though those in the

North were slightly lower at $50,000 to

$59,999 (Table 14.32). The median prices

asked per region were slightly lower than

the median values per region, except for

the North, where the median price was

nearly 5 percent higher than the median

value given for housing units.  The other

regions had median prices asked that

ranged from 9 percent lower in the Central

area to 27 percent lower in the South.

À2[      [ÀÜÜ
ÎÎÐBbÐÀ      [[ÀTable 14.32. 
Price Asked for Vacant For Sale Units by Region: 1980

-------------------------------------------------------------------

                             Number                 Percent     

                   ----------------------- ------------------------

Price Asked        Total North Cntrl South Total North Cntrl  South

-------------------------------------------------------------------

Specified vacant                                                

for sale units....   193    96    71    26 100.0 100.0 100.0  100.0

 

Less than $10,000.    18     9     6     3   9.3   9.4   8.5   11.5

$10,000-14,999....     6     4     1     1   3.1   4.2   1.4    3.8

$15,000-19,999....     5     3     2     0   2.6   3.1   2.8    0.0

$20,000-24,999....     6     2     2     2   3.1   2.1   2.8    7.7

$25,000-29,999....     9     4     3     2   4.7   4.2   4.2    7.7

$30,000-34,999....    11     9     1     1   5.7   9.4   1.4    3.8

$35,000-39,999....    11     6     2     3   5.7   6.2   2.8   11.5

$40,000-49,999....    18     5    10     3   9.3   5.2  14.1   11.5

$50,000-59,999....    30    22     8     0  15.5  22.9  11.3    0.0

$60,000-79,999....    41    16    18     7  21.2  16.7  25.4   26.9

$80,000-99,999....    17     6    10     1   8.8   6.2  14.1    3.8

$100,000-149,999..    16     9     5     2   8.3   9.4   7.0    7.7

$150,000-199,999..     2     0     1     1   1.0   0.0   1.4    3.8

$200,000 or more..     3     1     2     0   1.6   1.0   2.8    0.0

Median............$55400 52700 61100 43500   ...   ...   ...    ...

___________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census HC80-1-A54 1980 Table 4.      

À[   [ÀÀ      [     

     The most frequent amounts asked for

rent for vacant for-rent units was between

$200 to $249 (Table 14.33).  By region,

this varied only slightly, with the

Central and Southern areas asking $170 to

$199 and $150 to $169, respectively.  The

median rent asked for the island's vacant

units was $205.  The Northern area median

was 18 percent higher at $242; the South

20 percent lower at $163.  The North,

however, had nearly 4 times as many vacant

for-rent units than did the South.

À     2     

À      [[ÀTable 14.33.  Rent Asked for Vacant for Rent Housing Units: 1980

------------------------------------------------------------------

                            Number                  Percent

                  ----------------------- -----------------------

Rent Asked        Total North Cntrl South Total North Cntrl South

------------------------------------------------------------------

Vacant for rent                                                  

Housing units.....  1347   676   525   146 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

 

Less than $50.....    34    16    10     8   2.5   2.4   1.9   5.5

$50 to $59........    23    12     7     4   1.7   1.8   1.3   2.7

$60 to $79........    27    12     9     6   2.0   1.8   1.7   4.1

$80 to $99........    35    27     6     2   2.6   4.0   1.1   1.4

$100 to $119......    74    33    24    17   5.5   4.9   4.6  11.6

$120 to $149......    81    25    41    15   6.0   3.7   7.8  10.3

$150 to $169......   174    65    77    32  12.9   9.6  14.7  21.9

$170 to $199......   193    80   108     5  14.3  11.8  20.6   3.4

$200 to $249......   226   121    82    23  16.8  17.9  15.6  15.8

$250 to $299......   171    92    61    18  12.7  13.6  11.6  12.3

$300 to $349......   140    78    51    11  10.4  11.5   9.7   7.5

$350 to $399......    74    48    22     4   5.5   7.1   4.2   2.7

$400 to $499......    44    28    15     1   3.3   4.1   2.9    .7

$500 or more......    51    39    12     0   3.8   5.8   2.3   0.0

Median............  $205   242   195   163   ...   ...   ...   ...

__________________________________________________________________

Source:  U.S. Bureau of the Census HC80-1-A54 1980 Table 4.      

À[      [ÀÜÜ
ÎÎÐBZÐÀ      [2[À

     Contract rent was the monthly rent

agreed to, or contracted for, regardless

of any furnishings, utilities or services

that may have been included (Table 14.34).

The majority of all renter-occupied units

paid no cash rent in 1980.  Of those that

did, the most frequent category of

contract rent paid was that of $200 to

$249, followed by $250 to $299.  This was

slightly higher in the Central region,

where the most common amount paid was

between $250 to $299, and lower in the

South, where amounts between $150 to $169

were most often paid.

À2[  

À      [[ÀTable 14.34.  Contract Rent of Housing Units by Region: 1980

------------------------------------------------------------------

                            Number                  Percent    

                  ----------------------- -----------------------

Contract Rent     Total North Cntrl South Total North Cntrl South

------------------------------------------------------------------

Renter-occupied                                                 

Housing units..... 13365  6651  4089  2625 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

 

No cash rent......  5704  2530  1464  1710  42.7  38.0  35.8  65.1

Less than $50.....   386   154   156    76   2.9   2.3   3.8   2.9

$50 to $59........   185    73    71    41   1.4   1.1   1.7   1.6

$60 to $79........   305    79   152    74   2.3   1.2   3.7   2.8

$80 to $99........   167    71    61    35   1.2   1.1   1.5   1.3

$100 to $119......   501   224   183    94   3.7   3.4   4.5   3.6

$120 to $149......   548   272   175   101   4.1   4.1   4.3   3.8

$150 to $169......   927   442   351   134   6.9   6.6   8.6   5.1

$170 to $199......   919   516   350    53   6.9   7.8   8.6   2.0

$200 to $249......  1132   687   344   101   8.5  10.3   8.4   3.8

$250 to $299......  1102   646   366    90   8.2   9.7   9.0   3.4

$300 to $349......   676   430   181    65   5.1   6.5   4.4   2.5

$350 to $399......   351   214   107    30   2.6   3.2   2.6   1.1

$400 to $499......   280   187    77    16   2.1   2.8   1.9    .6

$500 or more......   182   126    51     5   1.4   1.9   1.2    .2

Median............  $193   217   184   155   ...   ...   ...   ...

__________________________________________________________________

Source:  U.S. Bureau of the Census HC80-1-A54 1980 Table 4.      

À[   [ÀÀ      [     

     Gross rent differs from contract rent

by the addition of the estimated average

monthly cost of utilities and fuels, if

these were paid for by the renter in

addition to rent (Table 14.35).  Overall,

for those who paid cash rent, the gross

amount was most commonly in the range of

$200 to $249 per month, followed by $400

or more.  Only the Southern region varied

from this pattern: their most frequent

rent category was that of $400 or more,

followed by $200 to $249.  The South also

had the highest frequency of those paying

no cash rent, at 69 percent of

renter-occupied units.

À     2     

À      [[ÀTable 14.35.  Gross Rent by Region: 1980

------------------------------------------------------------------

                             Number                  Percent

                  -----------------------  -----------------------

Gross Rent        Total North Cntrl South Total North Cntrl South

------------------------------------------------------------------

Renter-occupied                                                  

Housing Units..... 13365  6651  4089  2625 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

 

Less than $50.....    58    41    13     4    .4    .6    .3    .2

$50 to $59........    52    33    12     7    .4    .5    .3    .3

$60 to $79........   108    54    39    15    .8    .8   1.0    .6

$80 to $99........   179    58    77    44   1.3    .9   1.9   1.7

$100 to $124......   345   134   145    66   2.6   2.0   3.5   2.5

$125 to $149......   406   172   161    73   3.0   2.6   3.9   2.8

$150 to $174......   525   206   205   114   3.9   3.1   5.0   4.3

$175 to $199......   651   305   244   102   4.9   4.6   6.0   3.9

$200 to $249......  1489   801   539   149  11.1  12.0  13.2   5.7

$250 to $299......  1039   614   316   109   7.8   9.2   7.7   4.2

$300 to $399......  1670  1037   515   118  12.5  15.6  12.6   4.5

$400 or more......  1139   666   359   114   8.5  10.0   8.8   4.3

No cash rent......  5704  2530  1464  1710  42.7  38.0  35.8  65.1

Median...........$   251   271   239   211   ...   ...   ...   ...

______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A, 1980 Table 124

À[   [ÀÀ      [2[À

     Units with mortgages made up the

majority of all owner-occupied housing

units, ranging from a high of 82 percent

in the Central region, to a low of 65

percent in the South (Table 14.36).  For

mortgaged units, the monthly owner costs

were usually $400 or more a month, for all

regions.  The second most common amount of

monthly owner costs varied by region, with

the South area having the highest ($350 to

$399) and the North the lowest ($250 to

$299).

À2[  

     For unmortgaged units, monthly costs were much lower: from $50 to $74

per month in the South to $75 to $99 in both the North and Central regions.

The inclusion of a mortgage significantly affected the amount of costs paid

by owners every month.

 

À     [
[ÀTable 14.36. Mortgage Status and Selected Monthly Owner Costs: 1980

------------------------------------------------------------------

                            Number                  Percent

Monthly           ----------------------- -----------------------

Owner Costs       Total North Cntrl South Total North Cntrl South

------------------------------------------------------------------

Owner-occupied                                                   

Housing units..... 10489  4412  3706  2371  ...   ...   ...   ...

 

  With mortgage...  6802  3104  2368  1330 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Less than $50.....     8     3     4     1    .1    .1    .2    .1

$50 to $59........     2     0     1     1    .0   0.0    .0    .1

$60 to $79........    16     7     5     4    .2    .2    .2    .3

$80 to $99........    33    11    15     7    .5    .4    .6    .5

$100 to $149......   102    39    43    20   1.5   1.3   1.8   1.5

$150 to $199......   329   182    96    51   4.8   5.9   4.1   3.8

$200 to $249......   755   484   172    99  11.1  15.6   7.3   7.4

$250 to $299......   928   530   255   143  13.6  17.1  10.8  10.8

$300 to $349......   953   497   261   195  14.0  16.0  11.0  14.7

$350 to $399......   846   384   267   195  12.4  12.4  11.3  14.7

$400 or more......  2830   967  1249   614  41.6  31.2  52.7  46.2

Median............  $366   329   415   387                      

 

  No mortgage.....  3687  1308  1338  1041 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Less than $30.....   157    48    47    62   4.3   3.7   3.5   6.0

$30 to $49........   419   131   132   156  11.4  10.0   9.9  15.0

$50 to $74........   797   278   274   245  21.6  21.3  20.5  23.5

$75 to $99........   799   306   276   217  21.7  23.4  20.6  20.8

$100 to $124......   587   232   212   143  15.9  17.7  15.8  13.7

$125 to $149......   357   130   140    87   9.7   9.9  10.5   8.4

$150 or more......   571   183   257   131  15.5  14.0  19.2  12.6

Median............   $90    91    94    82                      

__________________________________________________________________

Source:  U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A, Table 133.

À
[    

SUMMARYœ

 

     The final table (Table 14.37) in this chapter shows a summary of

pertinent housing data from 1960 to 1980.  The most appropriate term to use

for the changes occurring on Guam for the last 20 years is "growth", growth

in all aspects of housing, from the numbers of units available to the

addition of amenities in those units.  A significant shift to the Northern

region is also apparent.  With more units being located there, the impact on

the infrastructure of the region is becoming more obvious, as is the need for

its improvement.  Water, power, sewage and telephone services are probably

being strained to their limits, and may continue to be as more housing

complexes and hotels are added.

 

ÜÜ
À     [
[ÀÎÎÐBdÐTable 14.37. 
Summary of Housing Characteristics: 1960 to 1980

----------------------------------------------------------------------

Characteristic                             1980     1970     1960

----------------------------------------------------------------------

Total persons.........................   105979    84996    67044

Total housing units...................    28249    16680    12373

 

Year-round housing units:                                     

         Total........................    28091    16676    12373

Median rooms..........................      4.7      4.6      4.7

         Percent:                                                  

One unit in structure.................     74.0     74.3     91.6

5 or more units in structure..........     15.6      3.7      ...

Lacking complete plumbing in building.      4.2     18.9      ...

Structure 10 yrs old or less..........     58.7     52.0      ...

Structure built before 1940...........       .3      1.3      ...

Source of water public system.........     99.6     97.7      ...

Electric power........................     98.1     97.7      ...

 

         Occupied.....................    24834    15569    10830

Owner occupied........................    11469     7165     5028

Median rooms..........................      4.8      4.6      4.6

Median number of persons..............      3.7      ...      4.5

         Percent:                                              

1.01 or more persons per room.........     24.4     38.2     38.4

1 unit in structure...................     75.9     74.8     92.5

 

Specified owner:                                               

  Median value ($)....................    57600    13500     4200

Renter occupied:                                              

  Median contract rent ($)............      193      114       76

  Median gross rent ($)...............      251      ...       80

 

Vacancy rate:                                                  

  Homeowner...........................      2.3      1.4      ...

  Rental..............................      9.2      4.8      ...

______________________________________________________________________

SOURCE:  U.S. Bureau of the Census HC80-1-A54 1980 Table 1; Summary

         Tape File 3A 1980 Table 120; HC80-1-B54 1980 Tables 9, 10, 11;

         HC(1)-A54 1970 Tables 1,2,3,4,5; Census of Housing 1960 Tables

         1,4 and 5.                                                  

À
[    

     The cost of obtaining and maintaining housing has also risen in the last

2 decades.  As demand grows and space considerations limit the number of

units available, the costs will probably continue to rise.  Though the

vacancy rates shown in Table 14.38 are lower for 1980 than 1970, it should be

remembered that 1980 was a period of lower military activity than 1970, so

there were fewer military families looking for off-base housing.  This

situation is expected to change by 1990, since there were several military

ships homeported on Guam in the meantime.

 

     As data from the 1990 Census of Housing become available, it will be

crucial to compare them to data from previous censuses to chart the changes

in growth and distribution of housing on Guam, and assess the further impact

on Guam's utilities.

 

 


CHAPTER 15

    SUMMARY

 

     The past 14 chapters have presented a wealth of data about Guam's past; noticeable trends have been pointed out as being likely to continue to 1990.  A short summary of each chapter is presented below.

 

     In the first chapter, a short history of the island was presented and it was shown that a shift in geographic distribution of the population from the central to the northern region had occurred in the last 20 years.

 

     Chapter 2, on age and sex distribution of the island's population, demonstrated that the population distribution of the island was not "normal" due to the military presence and immigration here.  While Guam's median age was less than that of the U.S., the population was still aging.  The median age of the civilian females was higher than civilian males; the opposite was true of the military, and the military median age was higher than the civilian.  The proportion of Guam's population that was under 5 years old was about 12 percent; the proportion of elderly was 3 percent.

 

     From 1930 onwards, the sex ratio of the population was greater than 103; it was 109 in 1980.  The sex ratio was higher for the military than for the civilian population.  The dependency ratio was 60.5 in 1980.  The military dominated in the populations less than 5 years old and from 20 to 34, while civilians were predominant at all other ages.  Special retabulations done to separate the military and civilian populations did not have accurate methods to disaggregate dependent spouses whose husbands were not in the home, thus causing surpluses of civilian females in some age groups.

 

     The average household size decreased from over 5 persons per household to just over 4 in 1980, as shown in Chapter 3.  The distribution of households mirrored that of persons, moving from the central region to the north.  The south had the largest household sizes for many census periods, but the percentage of households located there has steadily decreased since 1960.  The proportion of households headed by females with children under 18 years of age has increased, married couple families with children less than 18 has decreased.  The elderly were living in family households in 1980, either their own or a relative's; few were institutionalized.  With the opening of the first senior day care center in 1987, this figure may increase by 1990.

 

     Both marriage and divorce were increasing (Chapter 4); between 1970 and 1980 the number of divorced males grew by 16 percent and divorced females by 78 percent.  The number of separated males increased by 41 percent and separated females by 50 percent.  The age at first marriage of females increased by 8 percent, showing that females were delaying first marriage, most likely in favor of finishing school and starting careers.  By geographic region, the north had the highest proportion of married persons and the central area the greatest number of those single, widowed, or divorced.  Between 1980 and 1984, the Japanese contributed the greatest number of grooms, with Chamorros second; this was true for brides for most of that period as well.  White males were most likely to get divorced during this period; for females, Chamorros were most likely.  For both sexes, Chinese were least likely to get a divorce.  Chamorros and those of "Other" races were most likely to be in same‑race marriages, while Whites were most likely to be in mixed‑race marriages.  For all five years, Caucasians had higher rates of both same‑race and mixed‑race divorces than any other ethnic group.

 

     Both census and vital statistics data show fertility is still high, compared to U.S. figures, though it is slowly decreasing, as was shown in Chapter 5.  The average number of children has dropped from 3.20 in 1980 to 3.15 in 1985.  The mean age of mother has also decreased slightly, from 26.54 to 26.50 in the same five  year period.  The mean length of a generation, the time it takes for a woman to have a female child to replace herself, fell from 27.22 years in 1980 to 26.44 years in 1985.

 

     Mortality is also decreasing, mostly due to improved living conditions.  Guam is experiencing an epidemiological transition, where the cause of death has changed from communicable diseases to chronic diseases.  Recent death data presented in Chapter 6 show that both males and females die most often between 45 to 64 years of age, but more males do so than females.  Chamorros, Filipinos, and Caucasians die proportionate to their presence in the overall population.  Life table analysis has shown that life expectancy at birth has increased for both sexes between 1971 and 1981, but more so for males than for females, though females have a higher life expectancy than males.

 

     In Chapter 7, Migration, it was shown that 51 percent of Guam's population in 1980 were migrants.  When the military was removed, only 40 percent were migrants.  The United States and Asia were the greatest source of migrants to Guam.  The most common period of migration to Guam was between 1979 and early 1980, except for those from the Philippines, who came most often between 1960 and 1969.  The majority of migrants were between 20 and 64 years of age, in the labor force here, and were born in the same location as their fathers had been.  Many persons who had lived away from Guam between 1970 and 1980 came back in the period 1979 and 1980.  Most had been away for over 6 years; the main reason for their absence was either service in the Armed Forces, or attendance at school.

 

     Chamorros continue to be the largest single ethnic group on Guam (Chapter 8), though at the lowest levels recorded in any census this century.  Whites were second in numbers here, Filipinos third.  The proportions of Whites and Filipinos here is increasing, that of Chamorros is decreasing.  Fully 78 percent of full Chamorros were born on Guam, as were 61 percent of part Chamorros.  The median age of Chamorros was the lowest of any ethnic group, Filipino's was highest.  Almost 60 percent of part Chamorros were less than 15 years of age, as were 40 percent of full Chamorros.  Whites were primarily 20 to 44 years of age, Filipinos were 35 to 44 years.  About 2 out of 3 of those 16 years and older were in the labor force; only 55 percent of Chamorros were in labor force, compared to 70 percent of Filipinos and 80 percent of Whites.  This was partly due to small numbers of Chamorros in the Armed Forces or working only part time.  Those in the "Other" ethnic groups represented only 9 percent of the population but 63 percent were in the labor force.  By industry, Chamorros were mostly in the fields of public administration or professional and related services, Filipinos in retail trade or construction and mining, Whites were in professional and related services or retail trade, and others were in retail trade or construction and mining.  Of the population 5 years and older, 36 percent spoke only English at home; except for Whites, no other group spoke only English in more than half of the homes.  Less than 1 percent spoke no English at all.  Older persons were less likely than younger ones to speak English at home.

 

     Chapter 9 dealt with education on Guam.  Both school enrollment and educational attainment have increased since 1940, but the magnitude of the increase was somewhat moderated by the presence of the military.  The proportion of the population who had completed 4 years of high school increased from 5 percent in 1940 to 66 percent in 1980, while the proportion completing 4 years of college increased from 10 percent in 1940 to 11 percent in 1980.  The proportion of college graduates increased for males (8 percent in 1940 to 11 percent in 1980) and decreased for females (12 percent in 1940 to 11 percent in 1980).  It was found that a child's home language affected his high school completion rate: those speaking only English at home had non‑completion rates of 6 percent, while those who spoke another language at home had rates that ranged from 13 percent overall to 18 percent for those who spoke their other home language more frequently than they did English.

 

     In the Labor Force chapter it was shown that female participation in the labor force doubled between 1970 and 1980, especially for those with children under 18 years of age.  Persons born in the United States (80.6 percent) and Asia (69.4 percent)  were more likely to be in the labor force than those born in other places, most notably the former Trust Territory (53.1 percent) or the Commonwealth of the Northern Marianas (49.7 percent). Persons from the latter locations most often come to Guam to pursue a higher education. Those with higher levels of educational attainment were more likely to be employed.

 

     Private sector employment has increased since 1970, with retail and wholesale trade showing growth (Chapter 11).  Though construction did not show growth, it is expected to do so after 1980.  Agriculture, small industry and selected services are expected to show large amounts of growth by 1990.  Female employment has steadily increased in the past 30 years.  In almost all industry categories, female employment figures show steady increases.  Although it is certain that the female labor force is holding a larger portion of the Guam job market, the data still suggest that the quality of jobs held by the increasing numbers of women workers is lower than jobs held by their male counterparts.

 

     The percentage of labor force employed in public administration has steadily decreased over the years, a trend which is expected to continue.  This trend is probably beneficial to Guam's economy as the additional percentage of the labor force will be available to fuel the private sector further, which tends to be more efficient compared to the government sector.  Retail and wholesale trade has shown a steady increase, and is expected to keep the same trend in the years to come.  Guam's transition to a commercial economy (compared to a public sector economy) is evident in the figures obtained in the 1980 census.  Also, Guam's economy is steadily increasing its service‑oriented industry base, and should tailor its education/training programs to prepare the labor force for such jobs.  Furthermore, females on Guam have good potential to share an equal footing in Guam's employment opportunities.  Although women still tend to lag in vertical mobility in certain industries, with careful encouragement this too should change in the future.

 

     The median household income for Guam in 1979 was $15,752, the median family income was $16,203, and the median income of unrelated individuals was $6,713 (Chapter 12).  The Central region of Guam had the highest median incomes; the Southern region had the lowest.  The mean incomes of households, families, and unrelated individuals were $21,595, $17,089, and $8,461, respectively.  The Central and Southern regions again had the highest and lowest incomes, respectively.  Wage and salary incomes were the highest of any type of income earned, and farm income was the lowest.  Per capita income increased by 96 percent between 1969 and 1979, from $3,936 in 1969 (in 1979 dollars) to $4,793 in 1979.  The per capita income of the U.S. for 1979 was $7,298, a figure that is 52 percent higher than Guam's per capita income for the same period.

 

     The number of housing units increased by 69 percent between 1970 and 1980, with most of this increase occurring in the North.  The median number of rooms per housing unit has remained at about 5 for the past 3 censuses.  There was an increase in the number of buildings that had 5 or more units, from 4 percent in 1970 to 16 percent in 1980, showing the increase in building of apartments.  Most (over 99 percent) housing units were connected to the public water, sewer, and power systems; nearly 70 percent of homes had telephones in 1980. The median value of owner occupied homes increased from $4,200 in 1960 to $58,000 in 1980. The median contract rent asked for renter occupied units increased from $76 in 1960 to $196 in 1980.

 

     While the Monograph encompasses a large body of material, there are two populations on Guam whose characteristics are not explored in detail, the elderly and the military.  The following sections present profiles of these two important subgroups.

 

PROFILE OF THE ELDERLY

 

     The elderly are of special concern to demographers these days because of an anticipated large increase in their numbers and proportion of the population.  Those who were elderly (65 years and over) in 1980 were born in 1915 or earlier, a time when sanitation and other public health measures had not yet taken a strong grip on Guam.  They made up only 2.8 percent of Guam's total population in the 1980 census.  By 1990, when the ranks of the elderly will include all those born in 1925 or earlier, their proportion of the population should not rise any higher than 3.3 percent, a very small gain.  It will not be until the year 2010 that the impact of the post‑World War II 'baby boom' and the changes in nutrition and sanitation promoted by the Naval (and later, civilian) government will be felt.  It is important, however, that baseline data on the elderly be collected and analyzed so that any changes in their characteristics can be documented.

 

     Because the elderly on Guam are primarily civilian (96 percent), this analysis will be restricted to civilians.  The civilian population in our retabulations of the 1980 census data is that population which was left after active‑duty military and their dependents were subtracted from the total population.  If an active‑duty military person was resident in a household, that household was deemed 'military' and subtracted.  If an elderly person was a dependent of an active‑duty person, he or she was considered military and removed.  The data presented here were derived from Tables 19‑22, 24, 29, 35, 36 and 47 of the U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54, Detailed Social and Economic Characteristics, Special Retabulations.

 

     There were 2870 civilian elderly in 1980, 3.4 percent of the civilian population of 83,226.  Slightly over 47 percent were males; the 53 percent if females in the elderly population supports the fact that women generally outlive men.  Nearly all (99.5 percent) were in households rather than any form of group quarters.  Those that were in some form of group quarters were more than likely confined in the Intermediate Care Facility of the Guam Memorial Hospital.  Over half (53 percent) were either the head or spouse of the head of a family household, 36 percent were in a family household with relatives, and only 11 percent were with nonrelatives or in nonfamily households.

 

     Nearly 56 percent were married, 35 percent were widowed, and 6 percent had never married.  Most (66 percent) of the never married were females.  Nearly 55 percent of those divorced or separated were males while 77 percent of those widowed were females.

 

     There were 8795 children ever born during the reproductive lifetime of civilian elderly women, and 7325 children still alive.  Per woman, this was 5.8 children ever born and 4.8 children still alive in 1980.  Some of these children would have died young, occasioning replacement childbearing, but, due to the age of these women, some would have been lost at later ages in life.

 

     Just over 57 percent of elderly were born on Guam, 29 percent in the Philippines, 5 percent in the United States, 2 percent in the Northern Marianas, and the remainder elsewhere. Fully 58 percent were Chamorro, 28 percent Filipino, 5 percent White, the remaining 8 percent were of other races.  Barely 8 percent spoke English at home; the majority spoke Chamorro (58 percent), with another 30 percent speaking a Philippine language at home.

 

     The elderly were not very mobile; 63 percent lived in the same house as they had in 1975.  An additional 13 percent lived in the same district, and 9 percent in another district on Guam.  Of those who had not lived on Guam in 1975, 65 percent had lived in the Philippines and 21 percent in the United States.  Of the 42 percent of civilians who were not born on Guam, 17 percent migrated here before 1950, the period with the highest proportion of migrants.  The second most popular period was from 1975 to 1978, when 16 percent of migrants came to Guam, then 1971 to 1974, with 14 percent.  Fully 58 percent of these migrants were permanent residency aliens in 1980, and 38 were naturalized citizens, with the remainder having some other form of citizenship status.

 

     More due to cultural demands than for any other reason, the elderly were not as formally educated as younger age groups.  Most (64 percent) had some elementary school (up to 8th grade), and some (14 percent) had some high school, but only 18 percent were high school graduates, and only 6 percent had a 4 year college degree or more.

 

     By age 65, most persons had retired, leaving only 491 persons (17 percent) in the labor force, over 98 percent of whom were employed in 1980.  Of those employed, 43 percent were private wage and salary workers, 29 percent worked for the local government, and 19 percent for the federal government.  Only 8 percent were self‑employed, and just over 1 percent were either unpaid family workers or subsistence workers.  Fully 30 percent of employed persons were in service occupations, 23 percent in managerial and professional specialties, 15 percent in precision production, craft and repair, and 13 percent were operators, fabricators, and laborers (mostly in transportation and material moving occupations).  The industry with the highest representation among the elderly was that of public administration (21 percent), followed by retail trade (17 percent) and professional and related services (also 17 percent).  Over 97 percent of those in the labor force in 1979 worked in 1979; 73 percent worked for 50 to 52 weeks; 76 percent worked 35 or more hours per week.

 

     Nearly 75 percent of the elderly had an income in 1980, but about 1 of 3 earned less than $2,000.  The median income was about $3,976  and the mean income about $5,124.  With poverty level incomes for the elderly set between $4,000 and $5,000, 58 percent of elderly with income would be at poverty level.

 

     In short, the elderly on Guam in 1980 were most likely to be civilian, female, living in a household as a head of household or spouse of head, married, born on Guam, and Chamorro.  If female, she would have had 5.8 children, with 4.8 of them still alive.  They would be most likely to speak Chamorro at home, not have much

formal education, and be living in the same house as they had in 1975. Most would not be in the labor force, but they would have an income; for most, however, that income would at about poverty level.

 

     With this baseline data from 1980, comparisons can be made with data from the 1990 census to document changes in the characteristics of the elderly on Guam.

 

PROFILE OF THE MILITARY

 

     The effect of the Armed Forces on the sex distribution is more clearly seen in Table 2.2 (and Figure 2.2).  In most populations there are more females than males.  In fact, on Guam in 1920, there were 295 more females than males, but that was the last census to show a surplus of females.  The sex distributions in 1930 and 1940 were not abnormal, but by 1950, a change had occurred.  In 1950 there were 21,500 more males than females, and the number of males per 100 females doubled, from 103 in 1940 to 213 in 1950.  In 1950, there were more than 2 males for every female on the island.  With decreased military activity, the number of males per 100 females decreased, until it reached 109 in 1980, more than any State except Alaska, which had a surplus of males for other reasons.

 

     The dependency ratios in 1960, 1970, and 1980, continued to show the influence of the military. After a jump in 1960 because of proportionally fewer military on island however, the ratio continued to decrease to 60 in 1980.  The decrease in the 20 years before the 1980 census was due both to increased immigration of aliens in the middle years (as well as Statesiders), and decreased fertility (which was far greater than the slight increase in the elderly population.)

 

MILITARY AND CIVILIAN POPULATIONS

 

     The special tabulations developed to disaggregate military households from civilian households provide data on age and sex of the civilian population, as well as those households having one or more military personnel.  Altogether, there were 83,226 persons (78 percent) living in households or group quarters which only contained civilians.  Of these, 42,056 (51 percent) were males, compared to 58 percent of males in military households or in group quarters.

 

     The median ages for the two populations did not differ significantly, but the distributions were significantly different.  Although the median for the whole population was 22.3 years, the median for civilians was slightly less (21.8 years) and the median for the military was slightly more (22.9 years).  The median for males in the military was about a year older than for females, while the median for female civilians was about a half year older than for males.

 

     Once the military are disaggregated from the rest of the population, the civilian age and sex distribution looks much more "normal."  Military personnel seem to have higher fertility than civilians, since 14 percent were children less than 5 years old in military households, compared to 12 percent in civilian households.  On the other hand, because they are in the military, more than 1 in 5 of all military persons were 20 to 24 compared to only 8 percent of the civilians.  The percentage of military in the 25 to 29 year age group was double that of the civilians.  More than 12 percent of the military population was 30 to 34 years old compared to only 8 percent of the civilian population.

 

     On the other hand, slightly larger proportions of persons in the 35 to 44 year old age group were civilian than were military, partially because of large numbers of immigrants in this age group (see Chapters 7 and 8).  And, larger proportions of persons older than 44 were civilian than were military.  More than 9 percent of the civilian population was 45 to 54 years old, compared to less than 2 percent of the military population.  And only about 1 percent of the military population was 55 years old and over, compared to more than 9 percent of the civilian population.

 

     The percentage distribution by age group also shows differences.  Altogether females were 48 percent of the population on Guam in 1980; while females constituted almost half of the civilian population, they were only about 4 in every 10 of the military population (and, of course, many of these were dependents).  Among the civilians, in the young ages females were just slightly less than half of all persons and were more than half of those 20 to 35 years old.  For ages 35 to 64, however, there were more males than females in the civilian population, probably because of the selective nature of international migration, with larger numbers of male immigrants than females.  For the elderly, females were a larger percentage of the civilian population than were males.

 

     The military population showed a very different pattern.  More than 2 of every 3 military persons between 15 and 24 were male, and while the proportions decreased to below 6 in 10 for persons 25 to 34, more than 6 in 10 of those 35 to 44 were males.  More than half of the persons 55 years and over in military households, however, were female.

 

     There is some evidence from these data that there is a discrepancy between the military and civilian data for persons 20 to 29 which show surpluses of civilian females.  MIlitary males who were on ships and left their families behind would have been recorded as civilian since no one in the household would have been identified as military; hence, this surplus of civilian females in the age group was probably at least partially explained by the fact that many of these women were married to military personnel who were on ships and left their families behind.  (Their children are less easily disaggregated from all children.)

 

     There were 10,125 persons (10 percent of Guam's total population) in the military in 1980, including 9,224 males and 901 females.  The median age of these persons was 26.5 years, more than 4 years more than for the rest of the military households (because so many of the other people in military households were children), and about 4 years more than for the general population of Guam.

 

     Military persons constituted more than half of all persons 20 to 24 years old (67 percent of the males and 33 percent of the females in that age group), and were 49 percent of the persons 25 to 29 years old.  Of course, for planning and other policy purposes, military households and families, and not only the military persons must be considered, so the analysis in this report for military‑civilian differences focuses on the whole household, and not merely the military person himself or herself.

 

     There were more than 10 military males for every military female in 1980.  None of the age groups showed anything like equal proportions.  Although there were fewer than 10 males per female for persons less than 29 and more than 55, there were 25 males for every female 30 to 34, and 51 for those 35 to 44 years old.

 

     For all military households, there were more females than males under 15 and over 55, but males predominated in the middle years, with more than 2 males per female 15 to 24 years old.  The problem with the ratio of males to females 20 to 29 in the civilian population is also seen here, since there is a great surplus of females here, once again indicating that some of these females should more properly have been placed in the military category.

 

The civilian community of Guam in 1980 had a larger average household size than did the military, 4.25 persons and 3.41 persons, respectively.

 

 


REFERENCES

 

Bowe, Frank

            1983                Disabled Adults in America. (Washington: President's Committee on Employment of the Handicapped).

 

Bureau of the Census

            1992                1990 Census of Population and Housing: Social, Economic, and Housing Characteristics, 1990 CPH-6-G. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Department of Commerce.

 

Department of Vocational Rehabilitation

            1992                Annual Report Fiscal Year 1990. Agana, GU: Government of Guam.

 

Fitzgerald, M. H. and J. Armstrong

            1992                Culture and Disability In the Pacific, a paper session organized for the annual ASAO meetings,  New Orleans, LA., February.

 

Gartner, A. and T. Joe (eds.)

            1987                Images of the disabled, disabling images. New York, NY: Praeger.

 

Murphey, R. F.

            1987                The Body Silent. New York, NY: W.W. Norton.

 

Rengiil, Y. K. and J. E. Jarrow

            1992                Culture and Disability In Palau, Paper presentation at Fitzgerald and Armstrong (organizers) session on Culture and Disability In The Pacific.

 

Shryock, H.S., J.S. Siegel, and Associates

            1976                The Methods and Materials of Demography. New York, NY: Academic Press.

 

World Health Organization (WHO)

            1980                International Classification of Impairments, Disabilities, and Handicaps. Geneva: WHO.

 

 

Brass, William

            1975    Methods for Estimating Fertility and Mortality from Limited and Defective Data. Chapel Hill: International Program of Laboratories for Population Statistics, University of North Carolina.

 

Coale, Ansley J. and Paul Demeny

            1966    Regional Model Life Tables and Stable Populations. Princeton: Princeton University Press.

 

Coale, Ansley J. and T. James Trussel

            1974    Model Fertility Schedules: Variations in the age structure of childbearing in human populations. Population Index 40:185‑258.

 

            1975    Erratum. Population Index 41:572.

 

            1978    Technical Note: Finding the two parameters that specify a model schedule of marital fertility.Population Index 44:203‑13.

 

Cho, Lee‑Jay

            1973    The own‑children approach to fertility estimation: An elaboration. In International Population Conference, Liege, 1973, Vol. 2:263‑78. Liege: International Union for the Scientific Study of Population.

 

Cho, Lee‑Jay, Robert Retherford, and Minja Kim Choe

            1986    The Own‑Children Method of Fertility Estimation. Honolulu: University of Hawaii Press.

 

Guam Health Planning and Development Agency

            1985    Guam Health Plan: 1985‑1990.

 

            1987    Long‑Term Care on Guam, Technical Report 87‑001.

 

Haddock, Robert L.

            1973    A History of Health on Guam. Cruz Publications, Agana, Guam.

 

Hajnal, John

            1953    "Age at Marriage and Proportions Marrying." Population Studies (London) 7(2):111‑136, November.

 

Henry, Louis

            1961    Some data on natural fertility. Eugenics Quarterly 8:81‑91.

 

Jongstra, Eduard

            1985    Demography on Guam: From Data to Information. Unpublished Master's Thesis, State University of Groningen, The Netherlands.

 

Levin, Michael J. and Robert D. Retherford

            1986    Recent Fertility Trends in the South Pacific.  Honolulu: East‑West Population Institute, East‑West Center. No. 101, (August).

 

Midkiff, Ann A. and Minja Kim Choe

            1978    OWCH3: A Program to Compute Estimates of Age‑Specific Birth Rates in the Recent Past from Own‑Children Tables. Honolulu: East‑West Population Institute, East‑West Center. Photocopy.


 

Palmore, James A. and Robert W. Gardner

            1983    Measuring Mortality,  Fertility, and Natural Increase.  Honolulu: East‑West Population Institute, East‑West Center.

 

Retherford, Robert D. and Lee‑Jay Cho

            1978    Age‑parity‑specific birth rates and birth probabilities from census or survey data on own children.  Population Studies 32:567‑81.

 

Shryock, Henry S. and Jacob S. Seigel

            1976    The Methods and Materials of Demography. New York: Academic Press.

 

Taylor, Richard

            1985    "Review of the Epidemiological and Health Information Services in Guam." South Pacific Commission Report, October 1985.

 

Underwood, Jane H.

            1973    "Population History of Guam: Context of Microevolution". Micronesica, 9(1): 11‑44, (July).

 

            1983    "Effects of the 1918 Influenza Pandemic Mortality Experience on Subsequent Fertility of the Native Population of Guam".  Micronesica, 19(1‑2): 1‑9. (December).

 

            1987    "Population, History, and the Ethnodemography of Guam during the period of U.S. Navy Administration, 1901‑1941".  Prepublication copy, 1987.